Course: Introduction to Spreadsheets (TEMPLATE)

Q: Microsoft Excel 2010 stores spreadsheets in files called workbooks.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A spreadsheet is a collection of numbers, not text.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The name of the active workbook appears in the status bar of the Excel window.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel workbooks can contain two kinds of sheets.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The formula bar displays the value or formula of the active cell.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can use the Go To dialog box to navigate to a specific worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Scrolling through sheet tabs does not change the active sheet in the workbook window.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The AutoComplete feature automatically completes an entry based on previous entries in a column.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the row headings are the letters along the top of the worksheet window that identify the different rows in the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The figure above shows part of a worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the cell that is shown with the thick border, is called the primary cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, column heading K is orange because the entire row is selected.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the intersection of each row and column is called a cell.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the Zoom control is set at 100%.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Charts can be embedded into worksheets.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you click the Print Active sheet(s) option button in the Print tab, the entire workbook will be printed.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Text is truncated when the cell that it resides in is not wide enough to display all of it.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Text is right-aligned in cells, like number data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To create a line break within a cell, press Alt + Enter.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A documentation sheet is a valuable element if you intend to share the workbook with others.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Column width is expressed in terms of the number of characters a column can contain or the size of the column in <u>points</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Autofitting</u> eliminates space by matching the column to the width of its longest cell entry.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you insert a new column, the existing columns are shifted to the <u>left</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A newly inserted row has the same height as the row <u>above</u> it.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <u>Clearing</u> data from a worksheet removes the data and the cells.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A group of cells is called a <u>group reference</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To move a cell, select it, then place the mouse over the <u>bottom</u> border of the cell before dragging it to a new location.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The range reference for nonadjacent ranges separates each adjacent range reference by a <u>colon</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Expressions</u> are used in a formula to combine different values, returning a single value that is then displayed in the cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In the formula, =2+6*2, addition would be calculated <u>after</u> multiplication.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <u>Page Layout view</u><b> </b>displays the location of the different page breaks within the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A newly inserted sheet is inserted to the <u>left</u> of the active sheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A(n) <u>nonadjacent</u> range is comprised of two or more distinct adjacent ranges.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In <u>landscape</u> orientation, the page is wider than it is tall.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you work in <u>Edit</u> mode, some keyboard shortcuts will only apply to the text in the selected cell.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Excel is an electronic version of a(n) ____.
- database
- spreadsheet
- expression
- formula
A: spreadsheet

Q: Excel stores its documents as files called ____.
- worksheets
- sheet tabs
- workbooks
- books
A: workbooks

Q: The contents of an active cell are displayed in the ____.
- toolbar
- menu bar
- name box
- formula bar
A: formula bar

Q: A chart can be displayed ____.
- in a worksheet
- in a chart sheet
- in a cell range
- both a and b are correct
A: both a and b are correct

Q: The name given to an Excel workbook before you rename it is ____.
- Document1
- Book1
- Workbook1
- Untitled1
A: Book1

Q: By default, an Excel workbook is made up of ____ worksheets.
- two
- three
- four
- five
A: three

Q: By default, Excel starts with a ____ maximized to fill the Excel window.
- sample workbook with calculations
- sample workbook with formulas
- sample workbook with text, formulas, can calculations
- blank workbook
A: blank workbook

Q: “AD” is an example of a ____.
- column heading
- row heading
- cell reference
- Name box
A: column heading

Q: Row headings identify each row using a different ____.
- operator
- number
- letter
- number and letter combination
A: number

Q: The intersection of a row and column is known as a ____.
- cell
- range
- reference
- border
A: cell

Q: To go to column A of the current row, click ____.
- Ctrl + Home
- Home
- Shift + Tab
- Tab + Enter
A: Home

Q: An Excel worksheet can have a maximum of ____ columns in a worksheet.
- 156
- 256
- 16,385
- 17 million
A: 16,385

Q: To make A1 the active cell, you should press which of the following keys?
- Page Up
- Page Down
- Home
- Ctrl+Home
A: Ctrl+Home

Q: The active cell has a ____ border.
- dotted
- red
- thick
- dashed
A: thick

Q: You can also move to the previous or next sheet by pressing the ____ keys.
- Alt+Page Up or Alt+Page Down
- Ctrl+Page Up or Ctrl+Page Down
- Tab+Page Up or Tab+Page Down
- F4+Page Up or F4+Page Down
A: Ctrl+Page Up or Ctrl+Page Down

Q: Text data is any combination of ____.
- letters and numbers
- letters, numbers, and dates
- only letters
- letters, numbers, and symbols
A: letters, numbers, and symbols

Q: To complete a cell entry, press the ____ key.
- Enter
- Home
- Backspace
- Delete
A: Enter

Q: Text is ____-aligned in cells.
- right
- left
- center
- justify
A: left

Q: The characters +, -, *, and / are examples of ____.
- formulas
- values
- arithmetic operators
- calculations
A: arithmetic operators

Q: The expression used to calculate values displayed in a worksheet is called a(n) ____.
- formula
- equation
- operator
- relation
A: formula

Q: An Excel formula always begins with a(n) ____.
- parentheses
- equals sign
- plus sign
- colon
A: equals sign

Q: The formula used to multiply cell A1 by cell C1 is ____.
- =A1*C1
- C1*A1
- =A1/C1
- A1*C1
A: =A1*C1

Q: To divide the value of a cell by some number, use the ____ operator.
- +
- =
- /
- *
A: /

Q: A(n) ____ is a group of cells.
- cluster
- adjunct
- selection
- range
A: range

Q: <img width="277" height="395" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the formula shown SUM(H6:H9) appears in the ____.
- address box
- address bar
- formula box
- formula bar
A: formula bar

Q: <img width="277" height="395" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the row headings are the ____ of the worksheet window that identify the different rows in the worksheet. You click a row heading to select the entire worksheet row.
- letters along the top
- numbers along the left side
- tabs at the bottom
- none of the above
A: numbers along the left side

Q: <img width="277" height="395" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, “Documentation” and “Customer Orders” are names of ____.
- worksheets
- files
- workbooks
- folders
A: worksheets

Q: <img width="277" height="395" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Which describes the nonadjacent range shown in the figure above?
- A6:A9;C6:C9
- A6:A9-C6:C9
- A6:C9
- A6;C9
A: A6:A9;C6:C9

Q: <img width="277" height="395" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> None of the data shown in the figure above is ____.
- aligned
- truncated
- formatted
- formulated
A: truncated

Q: Removing the contents of a cell is known as ____ a cell.
- clearing
- emptying
- editing
- deleting
A: clearing

Q: To view formulas, rather than the resulting values in a worksheet, switch to ____.
- formula view
- normal view
- editing mode
- AutoSum view
A: formula view

Q: To select a nonadjacent range, select an adjacent range, press and hold ____ and then select other adjacent ranges.
- Home
- Shift
- Ctrl
- ` (grave key)
A: Ctrl

Q: Excel provides the ability to create new worksheets and new ____ sheets
- documentation
- chart
- workbook
- reference
A: chart

Q: To select a large range of cells, click the first cell in the range, press and hold ____, and then click the last cell in the range.
- Esc
- Ctrl
- Shift
- F3
A: Shift

Q: Copying a range of cells is similar to moving a range, except that you must press the ____ key while you drag the selection to its new location.
- Shift
- F3
- Esc
- Ctrl
A: Ctrl

Q: ____ headings are identified by a number.
- Sheet
- Workbook
- Row
- Column
A: Row

Q: To insert a new column, select a column, then click the Insert button in the ____ group on the Home tab.
- Insert
- Cells
- Number
- Editing
A: Cells

Q: What is the result of the expression =50/(10*5)?
- 1/5
- 1
- 25
- 50
A: 1

Q: To change the order of operations, enclose part of the formula in ____.
- brackets
- italics
- parentheses
- quotation marks
A: parentheses

Q: Excel makes reading formulas simpler by ____ each cell reference in the formula and its corresponding cell in the worksheet.
- color coding
- bolding
- highlighting
- italicizing
A: color coding

Q: Press the ____ key to switch to editing mode.
- ` (grave key)
- Num Lock
- F2
- F9
A: F2

Q: The default column width is 8.43 standard-sized ____.
- letters
- pixels
- characters
- numbers
A: characters

Q: The Undo and Redo buttons are found on the ____.
- formula bar
- Quick Access Toolbar
- Clipboard group
- Office Button
A: Quick Access Toolbar

Q: To change a column width, you can click ____ on the Column submenu to make the column(s) as wide as the longest entry of the cells in the column.
- QuickFit
- AutoFit
- FullColumn
- Longest
A: AutoFit

Q: A ____ sheet is a worksheet that provides information about the content and purpose of the workbook.
- planning analysis
- documentation
- glossary
- precedence
A: documentation

Q: ____ makes it easier to enter repetitive text in cells.
- Editing mode
- AutoFit
- AutoComplete
- AutoFill
A: AutoComplete

Q: It is recommended to set your column widths based on the maximum number of characters you wish to display, rather than ____.
- pixels
- picas
- points
- decimal spaces
A: pixels

Q: Which of the following takes precedence over multiplication?
- division
- exponentiation
- addition
- subtraction
A: exponentiation

Q: A ____ is a single point on a computer monitor.
- pica
- point
- bitmap
- pixel
A: pixel

Q: The ____ command gives you precise control in setting column widths and row heights.
- Format
- AutoFit
- Insert
- Cells
A: Format

Q: <b>____ </b>a printout reduces the width and the height of the printout to fit the number of pages you specify by shrinking the text size as needed.
- Autofitting
- Scaling
- Shrinking
- Resizing
A: Scaling

Q: In ____ orientation, a page is taller than it is wide.
- natural
- landscape
- portrait
- basic
A: portrait

Q: From formula view, press ____ to switch the worksheet back to Normal view.
- Ctrl + >
- Ctrl + <
- Ctrl + ?
- Ctrl + `
A: Ctrl + `

Q: Put the following steps for entering multiple lines of text within a cell in the proper order:<br><br>1. Press and hold the Alt key, then press the Enter key to move the insertion point to a <br>new line within the cell, then enter the next line of text.<br>2. Press the Alt + Enter keys for each new line of text you need to enter within the cell.<br>3. Click the cell in which you want to enter the text.<br>4. Enter the line of text.<br>
- 2, 1, 3, 4
- 1, 2, 3, 4
- 3, 4, 1, 2
- 3, 4, 2, 1
A: 3, 4, 1, 2

Q: According to the order of precedence in Excel:<br>
- Excel performs exponentiation, then multiplication and division, then addition and subtraction.
- Excel performs multiplication, then exponentiation, then division, then addition, then subtraction.
- Excel performs exponentiation, then multiplication, then division, then subtraction, then addition.
- Excel performs multiplication, then division, then exponentiation, then addition, then subtraction.
A: Excel performs exponentiation, then multiplication and division, then addition and subtraction.

Q: Put the following steps for selecting a nonadjacent range of cells in the proper order:<br><br>1. Select an adjacent range of cells.<br>2. With the Ctrl key still pressed, continue to select other cell ranges until all of the ranges are selected.<br>3. Release the mouse button and the Ctrl key.<br>4. Press and hold the Ctrl key, and then select another adjacent cell range.<br>
- 1, 4, 2, 3
- 1, 4, 3, 2
- 2, 1, 3, 4
- 2, 1, 4, 3
A: 1, 4, 2, 3

Q: What type of operation does the formula “C9/B10” use?<br>
- division
- multiplication
- fraction
- exponentiation
A: division

Q: By default, a printout of your worksheet will include ____.
- the data in the worksheet
- gridlines around the worksheet cells
- row and column headings
- all of the above
A: the data in the worksheet

Q: To move the active cell up one row, press ____.
- Shift + Enter
- Ctrl + Tab
- Shift + Tab
- Ctrl + Enter
A: Shift + Enter

Q: Which of the following will not change the location of the active cell?
- drag and drop
- scrolling
- clicking another cell
- clicking a column heading
A: scrolling

Q: When you copy a selection of cells using drag and drop, which appears before you release the mouse button?
- an outline of the new location of the selected range
- a ScreenTip
- a cell reference of the new location
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: What is the syntax for a SUM formula adding the values of cell F6 to F9?<br>
- /SUM(F9:F6)
- =SUM(F6/F9)
- =END(F6:F9)
- =SUM(F6:F9)
A: =SUM(F6:F9)

Q: Ctrl + G is used to access the ____.
- Go to Next worksheet command
- G column
- Go To dialog box
- formula view
A: Go To dialog box

Q: mm/dd/yyyy is known as ____.
- a text string
- text data
- a date format
- number data
A: a date format

Q: Which of the following number formats are converted by Excel once they are entered?
- percentages and integers
- currency and integers
- decimals and percentages
- percentages and currency
A: percentages and currency

Q: Cutting a selection sends it to the ____ until you paste it.
- Sheet1
- Clipboard
- Formula bar
- active cell
A: Clipboard

Q: <img width="459" height="249" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the search string is ____.
- Ave.
- Avenue
- Sheet
- By Rows
A: Ave.

Q: <img width="459" height="249" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the replacement string is ____.
- Ave.
- Avenue
- Sheet
- By Rows
A: Avenue

Q: <img width="459" height="249" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the ____ replaces the current occurrence of the search string.
- Replace button
- Replace All button
- Find All button
- Find Next button
A: Replace button

Q: <img width="459" height="249" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the ____ highlights all occurrences of the search string.
- Replace button
- Replace All button
- Find All
- Find Next button
A: Find All

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-1<br></b>Roger has created a spreadsheet to keep track of his customers for his dog-walking business. In the spreadsheet, he includes the dog owners’ names, addresses, phone numbers, dog name, dog breed, dog age, and days of the week his services are needed.<br><br> Column B in Roger’s spreadsheet contains the addresses of his clients. Some of the addresses are truncated so Roger ____.
- uses the AutoComplete command to allow for complete entries
- uses the AutoFit command to remove unwanted space
- resizes the column width until all addresses are visible
- switches to Edit mode
A: resizes the column width until all addresses are visible

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-1<br></b>Roger has created a spreadsheet to keep track of his customers for his dog-walking business. In the spreadsheet, he includes the dog owners’ names, addresses, phone numbers, dog name, dog breed, dog age, and days of the week his services are needed.<br><br> One of the entries Roger enters into the spreadsheet automatically right-aligns in the cell. Which entry does this?<br>
- customer phone number
- dog breed
- dog age
- customer address
A: dog age

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-1<br></b>Roger has created a spreadsheet to keep track of his customers for his dog-walking business. In the spreadsheet, he includes the dog owners’ names, addresses, phone numbers, dog name, dog breed, dog age, and days of the week his services are needed.<br><br> Roger wants to include the year that each client has been with him. He wishes to insert a new column called “Year” between Column D (Dog Owner Name) and Column E (Address). ____
- Roger selects Column D, then clicks the Insert button in the Cells group
- Roger selects Columns D & E, then clicks the Insert button in the Cells group
- Roger selects Column E, then clicks the Insert button in the Cells group
- Roger selects Columns D & E, then clicks the Insert Column Between button in the Cells group
A: Roger selects Column E, then clicks the Insert button in the Cells group

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-1<br></b>Roger has created a spreadsheet to keep track of his customers for his dog-walking business. In the spreadsheet, he includes the dog owners’ names, addresses, phone numbers, dog name, dog breed, dog age, and days of the week his services are needed.<br><br> The newly inserted column has the same width as ____.
- the original column D
- the original column E
- the default width which is applied to all new columns
- the average width of all columns in the worksheet
A: the original column D

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-1<br></b>Roger has created a spreadsheet to keep track of his customers for his dog-walking business. In the spreadsheet, he includes the dog owners’ names, addresses, phone numbers, dog name, dog breed, dog age, and days of the week his services are needed.<br><br> Roger notices that the Dog Name column is too wide and he could use that extra space for other columns so he ____.
- autofits the column by double-clicking the cell with the longest entry
- autofits the column by double-clicking its border
- autofits the column by selecting it, then clicking the AutoFit button in the Cells group
- places the mouse pointer on the column border and drags to the right
A: autofits the column by double-clicking its border

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-2<br></b>Sam is a distributor of ceramics. He uses Excel 2010 to record his inventory and order forms. Sam’s worksheet for his company’s monthly orders needs to display summary information including total number of items ordered, and the amount of revenue generated from those orders.<br><br> First Sam will add the number of orders. He chooses to use the ____ function from the AutoSum feature.
- MAX
- ADD
- SUM
- TOTAL
A: SUM

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-2<br></b>Sam is a distributor of ceramics. He uses Excel 2010 to record his inventory and order forms. Sam’s worksheet for his company’s monthly orders needs to display summary information including total number of items ordered, and the amount of revenue generated from those orders.<br><br> To activate the AutoSum feature, Sam clicks ____.
- in the cell below the group of cells he wants to add
- in the cell to the right of the last cell in the group of cells he wants to add
- in the formula bar
- in the active cell
A: in the cell below the group of cells he wants to add

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-2<br></b>Sam is a distributor of ceramics. He uses Excel 2010 to record his inventory and order forms. Sam’s worksheet for his company’s monthly orders needs to display summary information including total number of items ordered, and the amount of revenue generated from those orders.<br><br> Sam decides to rename his worksheet “Sam’s Ceramic Business Worksheet” but he is unable to complete the word Worksheet because ____.
- Excel only allows for 3 words in a sheet name
- Excel only allows for 31 characters in a sheet name
- Excel only allows one word in a sheet name
- Excel does not allow for symbols such as the apostrophe in Sam’s in sheet names
A: Excel only allows for 31 characters in a sheet name

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-2<br></b>Sam is a distributor of ceramics. He uses Excel 2010 to record his inventory and order forms. Sam’s worksheet for his company’s monthly orders needs to display summary information including total number of items ordered, and the amount of revenue generated from those orders.<br><br> Sam now wants to find out how much money he will make on his largest order, which is currently in row E. Cell E4 contains the number of items ordered and cell E5 contains the price per item. An appropriate formula would be ____.
- =E4+E5
- =E5/E4
- =E4*E5
- =E4^E5
A: =E4*E5

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-2<br></b>Sam is a distributor of ceramics. He uses Excel 2010 to record his inventory and order forms. Sam’s worksheet for his company’s monthly orders needs to display summary information including total number of items ordered, and the amount of revenue generated from those orders.<br><br> Sam is happy with the results of the formula. All of a sudden he realizes that the cell that once displayed the result is now displaying the formula and all of the columns are wider. He must have ____.
- switched to editing mode by double-clicking the results cell
- switched to formula view by pressing Ctrl + Alt
- switched to editing mode by pressing Ctrl + Alt
- switched to formula view by pressing Ctrl + `
A: switched to formula view by pressing Ctrl + `

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a collection of text and numbers laid out in a rectangular grid.
A: spreadsheet

Q: A worksheet displays the contents of the spreadsheet laid out in a grid of rows and ____________________.
A: columns

Q: The cell reference for the active cell appears in the ____________________<b> </b>located in the upper-left corner of the worksheet.
A: Name Box

Q: The ____________________ bar displays the contents of an active cell.
A: Formula

Q: A text string contains a string of text ____________________.
A: characters

Q: The ____________________ is a set of predefined rules used to determine the sequence in which operators are applied in a calculation.
A: order of precedence

Q: Each worksheet has a(n) ____________________ that identifies the name of the worksheet.
A: sheet tab

Q: Each cell is identified by a cell ____________________, which is its column and row location.
A: reference

Q: The ____________________ sheet has a white sheet tab.
A: active

Q: A(n) ____________________ sheet reminds you why you created a workbook and what it contains.
A: documentation sheet

Q: A(n) ____________________ includes a series of questions that help you think about the purpose of the workbook and how to achieve your desired results.
A: planning analysis sheet

Q: A ____________________ provides a visual representation of spreadsheet data.
A: chart

Q: ____________________ data include any number of letters, symbols, numbers, and spaces in a cell.
A: Text

Q: ____________________<b> </b>eliminates any empty space by matching the column to the width of its longest cell entry or the row to the height of its tallest cell entry.
A: Autofitting

Q: $87.25 is a(n) ____________________ value.     
A: currency

Q: A group of cells is called a cell ____________________.
A: range

Q: In Excel, the arithmetic operator ^ indicates the arithmetic operation called ____________________.
A: exponentiation

Q: SUM, MAX, and MIN are ____________________.
A: functions

Q: The AutoSum button is in the ____________________ group on the Home tab.
A: Editing

Q: When you are in ____________________ mode, some keyboard shortcuts will work differently.
A: Edit

Q: Explain the following Excel 2010 terms: cell, worksheet, active cell, and column headings.
Feedback: Each intersection of a row and column is a cell. Worksheet data is placed within separate cells. The cell currently selected in the active worksheet is the active cell. The active cell is outlined with a thick border and the corresponding row and column headings are highlighted. A worksheet displays the contents of the spreadsheet laid out in a grid of rows and columns. The column headings are the letters along the top of the worksheet window that identify the different columns in the worksheet.

Q: The order of precedence for arithmetic operators is exponentiation, multiplication, division, addition, subtraction. In your opinion, what is the best order of precedence for the following Excel tasks and why: 1) work in editing mode, 2) switch to formula view, 3) rename sheet tabs, 4) resize columns and rows, 5) create a planning analysis sheet, and 6) enter data?
Feedback: Instructors: There is some flexibility in this answer - the main thing to look for is that students understand that the planning analysis sheet should be the first task performed. Entering data should be next. Renaming sheet tabs, resizing columns and rows, working in editing mode and switching to formula view can be ordered as the student wishes, as long as they can support their answer with good reasons. Here is an example answer: I think the best order of precedence for the following Excel tasks (1) work in editing mode, 2) switch to formula view, 3) rename sheet tabs, 4) resize columns and rows, 5) create a planning analysis sheet, and 6) enter data) should be: 1. Create a planning analysis sheet 2. Enter data 3. Resize columns and rows 4. Rename sheet tabs 5. Work in editing mode 6. Switch to formula view Planning should be the first step in any project. Creating a planning analysis sheet before creating an Excel workbook allows the user to figure out what the purpose of the workbook should be and how to achieve the desired results. Entering data should be next so that the workbook can be created and relationships between numbers can be established. Once the data is entered, it might be necessary to resize columns and rows in order to see all of the data. Also, once the data is entered, it makes sense to label sheet tabs if the data is placed on more than one sheet. This step is important for organization, especially considering the last two steps of working in editing mode and switching to formula view. The order of the last two steps depends on the nature of the worksheet. If there are many text entries or number entries that need to be edited, having the worksheet as organized as possible will make working in editing mode that much easier. If the worksheet is full of formulas, the same is true.

Q: You have three teenage children to whom you have given cellular phones. You wish to record the monthly statements for each child’s phone usage in Excel because the children have been given an incentive to keep their yearly bill under $1000.00. Do you decide to create three Excel workbooks or one Excel workbook with three worksheets and why?
Feedback: Instructors: There is no right or wrong answer to this question, however the answer should show some critical thinking to support the students’ decisions. Here is an example: I would create three separate workbooks for my three children because in addition to their cellular phone usage, I could use the workbooks for other purposes. For example, I might create a worksheet for tracking college applications, for summer job income, grades, and medical records, such as dates of all immunizations. As the children get older, I could pass on each child his/her workbook for his/her own records. If I had only created one workbook for all three children, I’d have to cut and paste information into two new workbooks to distribute their personal information to them. I think it would be much more efficient for each child to have his or her own customized workbook made up of as many individual worksheets as needed.

Q: Formatting changes only the appearance of data - it does not affect the data itself.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: By default, text is black and cells have no background fill color.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can use a picture or image as the background for all the cells in a worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Background images do not print in Excel.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: After you merge a range into a single cell, you cannot realign its content.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can rotate cell contents in Excel so that they appear at any angle or orientation.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When a worksheet is printed, the gridlines that surround the cells are printed by default.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Modifying the number format affects the value stored in the workbook.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you revise a style in Excel, the appearance of any cell formatted with that style must be updated manually.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Red-green color blindness is the most common, so avoid using red text on a green background or green text on a red background.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you use colors that are not part of a theme, changing the theme will not change those colors.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A table style treats the table as a single object rather than a collection of cells.     
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you insert a new row at the top of the table, the new row becomes the header row and is formatted with the table style.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you add a table style, be sure that all formatting is as you want it because table styles in Excel cannot be formatted once applied.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Conditional formats are dynamic, so a cell’s appearance will change to reflect its current value.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A conditional format can make negative numbers red and positive numbers black.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Excel has only two conditional formats—data bars and highlighting.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Top/Bottom Rules is a form of Conditional Formatting that allows you options to select the bottom 10% of data.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you use conditional formatting to highlight cells in a worksheet, you do not need to include a legend.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: It is not good practice to include descriptive information, such as the company name, logo, and worksheet title on each page of a printout in case a page gets into the wrong hands.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel uses <u>themes</u> to maintain a consistent look within a workbook.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The appearance of text is determined by its <u>type character</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A <u>frame</u> is a line you add along an edge of a cell to improve readability of the data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Font sizes are measured in <u>points</u>, where one is approximately 1/72 of an inch.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A <u>sans serif font</u>, such as Arial, does not include decorative strokes on each character.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In Microsoft Excel, you can open an extended color palette of <u>134 standard colors</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <u>Calculated</u> values too large to fit into the cell are displayed in scientific notation.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Although dates and times in Excel appear as <u>text</u>, they are actually numbers.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To filter data in an Excel table, use <u>filter blocks</u> in the header row.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Table styles have <u>six</u> elements that can be turned on or off.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A <u>conditional format</u> applies formatting only when a cell’s value meets a specified condition.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Applying a table <u>theme</u> also marks the range as an Excel table.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>Banded</u> Columns element formats alternating columns in different colors.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If contents do not fit across the Excel page, change the orientation to <u>Portrait</u> orientation.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A <u>print area</u> can cover an adjacent or nonadjacent range.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: One of the benefits of Live Preview is that ____.
- it lets you see and evaluate different formats as you develop your workbook
- it shows you what a document will look like when printed
- it applies thematic styles to your document
- it allows you to track changes in your document
A: it lets you see and evaluate different formats as you develop your workbook

Q: Typeface is the specific design used for characters and includes ____.
- lettering
- numbering
- punctuation marks and symbols
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: A ____ is not a type of font.
- serif
- sans serif
- theme
- true type
A: true type

Q: When you don’t want to associate a font with a particular design, you use a ____ font.
- theme
- serif
- sans serif
- non-theme
A: non-theme

Q: Italic, bold, bold italic, and underline are examples of ____.
- font themes
- font styles
- graphics
- character settings
A: font styles

Q: <img width="574" height="334" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, an example of a theme font is ____.
- Algerian
- Calibri
- Arial
- Batang
A: Calibri

Q: <img width="574" height="334" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, an example of a non-theme font is ____.
- Algerian
- Calibri
- Arial
- all of the above
A: Algerian

Q: <img width="574" height="334" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the ____ indicates the font is 11pt.
- Font arrow
- Font size arrow
- Font color
- Font graphic
A: Font size arrow

Q: <img width="574" height="334" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, it shows that ____ is the theme font used for headings.
- Algerian
- Batang
- Cambria
- Calibri
A: Cambria

Q: To change the font size one point at a time, in the Font group on the Home tab, click the ____ button.
- Increase Font Size
- Decrease Font Size
- Change Font Size
- either a or b
A: either a or b

Q: ____ theme colors are designated for text and background, ____ colors are used for accents and highlights, and ____ colors are used for hyperlinks.
- Four, two, six
- Two, four, six
- Four, six, two
- Six, four, two
A: Four, six, two

Q: You can create a ____ color by specifying a mixture of red, blue, and green color values.
- standard
- custom
- theme
- automatic
A: custom

Q: To add a ____ to a sheet tab, click the Format button, point to Tab color, and then click a color.
- fill color
- tab setting
- format color
- formatting style
A: fill color

Q: Selecting the Font Color button arrow will display ____.
- 10 theme colors
- a standard color bar
- a ScreenTip displaying the color name
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: The background image does not affect any cell’s ____.
- format
- content
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: When creating an Excel document, you should avoid using ____ text and background together, since this is the most common form of color blindness.
- red and green
- yellow and blue
- black and white
- red and yellow
A: red and green

Q: By default, numbers appear in the ____ and generally display values exactly as you type them.
- Home tab
- General number format
- General number toolbar
- currency format
A: General number format

Q: Which of the following can you format using the Number group in Excel’s home tab?
- currency formats
- numbers to percentages
- commas as a thousands separator
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Because Excel stores dates and times as ____, you can apply different formats without affecting the date and time value.
- numbers
- text
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: numbers

Q: Dates and times in Excel measure intervals between the specified date and time and ____.
- January 1, 2000 at 12:00pm
- January 1, 2000 at 12:00am
- January 1, 1900 at 12:00am
- January 1, 1900 at 12:00pm
A: January 1, 1900 at 12:00am

Q: In Excel, dates are ____-aligned in the cell by default, regardless of date format.
- right
- left
- center
- not
A: right

Q: As a general rule, you should ____.
- center column titles, left-align text, and right-align numbers
- center column titles, right-align text, and left-align numbers
- right-align column titles, left-align text, and right-align numbers
- left-align column titles, left-align text, and right-align numbers
A: center column titles, left-align text, and right-align numbers

Q: ____ merges each of the rows in the selected range across the columns in the range.
- Merge build
- Merge and Center
- Merge Across
- Merge Cells
A: Merge Across

Q: In Excel, to merge cells A1, B1, C1, D1, and E1, ____ is the correct reference for the merged cell.
- A1!E1!
- A1$E1$
- A1:E1
- A1-E1
A: A1:E1

Q: Options to rotate cells in Excel are available using the ____ button in the Alignment group on the Home tab.
- Format
- Orientation
- Sorter
- Alignment
A: Orientation

Q: You can add a border in Excel ____.
- to enhance readability
- to the top, right, or bottom of a cell
- and specify the thickness
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: All of the following options are available on the Format Cells dialog box except ____.
- number
- font
- border
- size
A: size

Q: In the Format Cells dialog box, the ____ tab allows you to format currency by choosing decimal places, comma separators, and regular number displays.
- Number
- Font
- Alignment
- Protection
A: Number

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the preset button labeled ____ adds lines within the range.
- None
- Outline
- Inside
- none of the above
A: Inside

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the preset button labeled ____ adds a border around the entire cell or range.
- None
- Outline
- Inside
- none of the above
A: Outline

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the preset button labeled ____ removes all borders.
- None
- Outline
- Inside
- none of the above
A: None

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The information shown in the box under the heading “Style:” are ____.
- cell line styles
- data line styles
- heading line styles
- border line styles
A: border line styles

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above the border line color is ____.
- green
- dashed
- outlined
- you cannot tell from the figure
A: green

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, you can view a preview of the border style by looking under the heading “____.”
- Line
- Presets
- Color
- Border
A: Border

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To access the dialog box shown above, you would navigate to the ____ group on the Home tab.
- Styles
- Font
- Edit
- Appearance
A: Font

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, to implement the changes you made, you would click ____.
- the Cancel button
- the OK button
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: the OK button

Q: The Format Cells dialog box has six tabs that does NOT include: ____.
- Fill
- Protection
- Alignment
- Color
A: Color

Q: When using the Format Painter, double-click the Format Painter button to paste the same format multiple times and click the Format Painter again to ____.
- turn it on
- turn it off
- copy formatting
- paste formatting
A: turn it off

Q: Put the following five steps in the order in which you would perform them to use the Paste Special function: ____.<br>1. Select and copy a range.<br>2. Click the Paste button arrow in the Clipboard group.<br>3. Specify exactly what you want to paste. <br>4. Click Paste Special to open the dialog box.<br>5. Select the range where you want to paste the Clipboard contents.
- 1, 2, 4, 3, 5
- 1, 2, 4, 5, 3
- 1, 5, 2, 4, 3
- 1, 5, 2, 3, 4
A: 1, 5, 2, 4, 3

Q: In the Paste Special dialog box, you can ____
- select to rotate selected range 90 degrees
- paste only formulas
- paste values and formats
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: You can open the Format Cells dialog box by right-clicking a cell or selected range, and then clicking ____ on the shortcut menu.
- Format
- Cells
- Format Cells
- Cells Style
A: Format Cells

Q: ____ use the same file format for their theme files.
- Microsoft Word, Access, and Excel
- Microsoft Word and Excel
- Microsoft Excel and PowerPoint
- Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
A: Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint

Q: You can treat a range of data as a distinct object in a worksheet known as a(n) ____.
- Excel table
- spreadsheet
- data range
- data set
A: Excel table

Q: A(n) ____ specifies formats for elements in an Excel table, such as font color, fill color, and so forth.
- sheet format
- Excel table
- table style
- style guide
A: table style

Q: The most efficient way to format an entire table is to ____.
- select all and format each element
- use a table style
- use the format painter
- format each cell individually
A: use a table style

Q: A table ____ applies alternating row colors to the entire Excel table and adjusts the banded rows effect as needed if you add or delete rows.
- theme
- style
- structure
- band
A: style

Q: Applying a table style marks the range as a table, making available tools designed for analyzing tabular data, including ____.
- the ability to sort data
- transferring data to and from an external file
- filtering data to show only rows that match specified criteria
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: In Excel, the table style ____ inserts a new row at the bottom of the table that adds the column values.
- Header Row
- Total Row
- First Row
- Banded Row
A: Total Row

Q: In Excel, the ____ table style formats alternating columns in different colors.
- Banded Rows
- Banded Columns
- Last Column
- First Column
A: Banded Columns

Q: <img width="555" height="344" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, a filter arrow is ____ of the column title “Month.”
- to the right of
- to the left of
- on top of
- underneath of
A: to the right of

Q: <img width="555" height="344" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The header row in the above figure contains ____.
- Month, RO1, RO2, RO3, etc.
- The Intelligent Path to Fitness
- X310 Monthly Sales Analysis
- ExerComp
A: Month, RO1, RO2, RO3, etc.

Q: <img width="555" height="344" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The data shown in the table above appears in ____.
- banded rows
- banded columns
- alternating rows
- special formatting
A: banded rows

Q: <img width="539" height="384" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, table styles are shown above the following group label: ____.
- Tools
- Table Styles
- Table Style Options
- External Table Data
A: Table Styles

Q: <img width="539" height="384" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, you can see that the following table elements were selected: Header Row and ____.
- Total Row
- Banded Columns
- First Column
- Last Column
A: Last Column

Q: To remove banded rows from an Excel table, first you need to select the ____ tab on the Ribbon.
- Insert
- Home
- Design
- Page
A: Design

Q: All of the following are conditional formats in Excel except ____.
- data bars
- highlighting
- font sets
- icon sets
A: font sets

Q: In Page Layout view, the worksheet is displayed as it will appear on the ____.
- printed page
- screen
- Web page
- all of the above
A: printed page

Q: A ____ is the space between the page content and the edges of the page
- margin
- border
- frame
- ruler
A: margin

Q: One way to ensure that you are using consistent formats is to copy and paste your formats using the Format ____.
- Master
- Gallery
- Palette
- Painter
A: Painter

Q: In conditional formatting, to highlight only cells that contain a specific date, select the rule____.
- A Date Occurring
- Duplicate Values
- Text That Contains
- Between
A: A Date Occurring

Q: Fonts, colors, and cell styles are organized in ____ categories.
- theme and non-theme
- numbers and text
- color and black & white
- form and function
A: theme and non-theme

Q: To view certain columns on a large database, a good option is to ____.
- hide columns without information you need
- delete columns you aren’t viewing
- highlight columns you want to view
- use data bars to find content
A: hide columns without information you need

Q: When preparing to print, you have the option to select ____.
- the position of the report on the page
- the orientation of the page
- to include headers or footers
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Setting the ____ to A1:L10 will print only data in those cells.
- Page Format
- Print Area
- Page Break
- Print Preview
A: Print Area

Q: To avoid splitting a worksheet in awkward places, you can insert a(n) ____ to specify a specific breaking point.
- page break
- manual page break
- print area
- selection
A: manual page break

Q: To set a page break in Excel, ____.
- select the first cell below the row where you want to insert a page break
- select the first cell above the row where you want to insert a page break
- select the row above where you want to insert a page break
- select the row below where you want to insert a page break
A: select the first cell below the row where you want to insert a page break

Q: A ____ indicates a manual page break.
- dashed blue line
- solid blue line
- dashed red line
- solid red line
A: solid blue line

Q: Information that prints on each page, like a company name or logo, may be set as a(n) ____.
- print setup
- copied text
- text header
- print title
A: print title

Q: The code ____ will display the filename of the current workbook.
- &name
- &[File]
- +name
- +[File]
A: &[File]

Q: The header and footer sections include ____.
- a left and right section
- a center section only
- a top and bottom section
- a left, right, and center section
A: a left, right, and center section

Q: <b>Case Based Critical-Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-1<br></b>Karl has been working on a field survey project where he has gathered data from across five cities in the last six months.  Karl has a lot of data to report and needs help organizing his data sheet for an effective presentation.<br><br> Karl has chosen green as the background color for his workbook.  Karl should not use ____ for any of the font or highlight colors.
- red
- white
- black
- any color is fine
A: red

Q: <b>Case Based Critical-Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-1<br></b>Karl has been working on a field survey project where he has gathered data from across five cities in the last six months.  Karl has a lot of data to report and needs help organizing his data sheet for an effective presentation.<br><br> In column C, there are too many numbers after the decimal place.  Karl does not need this level of detail as it is distracting from the data, and you really don’t need more than two numbers after the decimal.  How could Karl make the data appear cleaner?
- reenter all numbers
- decrease column width
- decrease font size
- use Number group to decrease number of digits displayed
A: use Number group to decrease number of digits displayed

Q: <b>Case Based Critical-Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-1<br></b>Karl has been working on a field survey project where he has gathered data from across five cities in the last six months.  Karl has a lot of data to report and needs help organizing his data sheet for an effective presentation.<br><br> Karl cannot increase the width of his worksheet or he will not be able to print it on one sheet.  However, his columns are truncating his content.  What solution could Karl use for making his text visible without losing data?
- abbreviate all text
- reduce the font size to 8 pt
- click Wrap text
- delete one column
A: click Wrap text

Q: <b>Case Based Critical-Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-1<br></b>Karl has been working on a field survey project where he has gathered data from across five cities in the last six months.  Karl has a lot of data to report and needs help organizing his data sheet for an effective presentation.<br><br> Karl would like to center a title across the top of his data.  His data runs across five columns, from column A to column E.  One way he could accomplish this is to ____.
- type the data in A1 and Merge cells A1:A5
- type the data in A1 and Merge cells A1:E1
- type the data in C1
- choose Center from the Format menu
A: type the data in A1 and Merge cells A1:E1

Q: <b>Case Based Critical-Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-1<br></b>Karl has been working on a field survey project where he has gathered data from across five cities in the last six months.  Karl has a lot of data to report and needs help organizing his data sheet for an effective presentation.<br><br> Karl needs to format several cells with 11pt Calibri font with 2 decimals, right-align the text, and format font color to blue.  The most efficient way to accomplish this would be to ____.
- use Format Painter
- format each element using the Toolbar
- select all and use the Formatting dialog box
- apply a table style
A: apply a table style

Q: <b>Case Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-2</b><br>Ajeesh is part of a team creating a number of files with Microsoft Office.  Ajeesh is working with four other team members to create individual files for a joint presentation.  Ajeesh is in charge of the Excel workbook for his team.<br><br> Ajeesh wants his team’s documents to have a common style and appear as a cohesive unit for a large end-of-year presentation.  The easiest way to make all documents appear as a cohesive unit is to ____.
- save the styles and themes as permanent files for other members of his workgroup
- copy and paste styles when each team member opens a new document
- store all the team’s files on a network drive
- use the Save As function when creating new files
A: save the styles and themes as permanent files for other members of his workgroup

Q: <b>Case Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-2</b><br>Ajeesh is part of a team creating a number of files with Microsoft Office.  Ajeesh is working with four other team members to create individual files for a joint presentation.  Ajeesh is in charge of the Excel workbook for his team.<br><br> One of Ajeesh’s colleagues thought it would be best to use a database program for this project. Ajeesh explained that Excel can ____.
- sort data
- transfer data to and from an external file
- filter the data
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: <b>Case Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-2</b><br>Ajeesh is part of a team creating a number of files with Microsoft Office.  Ajeesh is working with four other team members to create individual files for a joint presentation.  Ajeesh is in charge of the Excel workbook for his team.<br><br> Ajeesh wants to format his Excel table so that every other line is light yellow.  He’s seen this done on other reports and believes it will make his data easier to follow across rows.  Ajeesh begins to apply highlighting to every other line by using the Ctrl key to select the odd rows, but worries that adding and deleting rows will ruin the consistency of his format.  What is an alternate solution for Ajeesh?
- Ajeesh should continue with his current formatting
- use banded rows
- Ajeesh should not apply this formatting
- use Format Painter
A: use banded rows

Q: <b>Case Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-2</b><br>Ajeesh is part of a team creating a number of files with Microsoft Office.  Ajeesh is working with four other team members to create individual files for a joint presentation.  Ajeesh is in charge of the Excel workbook for his team.<br><br> Ajeesh wants to print two separate parts of his second spreadsheet - one for the cell range B6:F15 and the other for the full sheet.  Ajeesh’s best option is to ____.
- copy and paste B6:F15 to a separate worksheet
- cut B6:F15 and print in a separate document
- adjust the margins to print the selected range
- set Print Areas for the two selections
A: set Print Areas for the two selections

Q: <b>Case Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-2</b><br>Ajeesh is part of a team creating a number of files with Microsoft Office.  Ajeesh is working with four other team members to create individual files for a joint presentation.  Ajeesh is in charge of the Excel workbook for his team.<br><br> Ajeesh has copied his data set to a new spreadsheet where he wants to draw attention to data that received above a 75% approval rating.  To highlight these numbers, Ajeesh could apply ____.
- the Greater Than rule with Conditional Formatting
- the Format Painter
- a bold format to all text
- manual highlighting to each percentage
A: the Greater Than rule with Conditional Formatting

Q: ____________________ is the process of changing a workbook’s appearance by defining the fonts, styles, colors, and decorative features.
A: Formatting

Q: A ____________________ is a collection of formatting that specifies the fonts, colors, and graphical effects used throughout the workbook.     
A: theme

Q: Ten ___________________ colors—dark red, red, orange, yellow, light green, green, light blue, blue, dark blue, and purple—are always available regardless of the workbook’s theme.
A: standard

Q: Times New Roman, a ____________________ font, has extra decorative strokes at the end of each character.
A: serif

Q: ____________________ are the 12 colors that belong to the workbook’s theme.
A: Theme colors

Q: You increase the indentation by roughly one character each time you click the ____________________ button in the Alignment group on the Home tab.     
A: Increase Indent

Q: One way to align text over several columns or rows is to ____________________, or combine, several cells into one cell.
A: merge

Q: The ____________________ tab in the Format Cells dialog box in Excel provides options for locking or hiding cells to prevent other users from modifying their contents.
A: Protection

Q: The ____________________ tab in the Format Cells dialog box in Excel provides options for creating and applying background colors and patterns to cells.
A: Fill

Q: The ____ copies the formatting from one cell or range to another cell or range without duplicating any of the data.
A: Format Painter

Q: A ____________________ is a selection of formatting options using a specific font and color from the current theme.
A: style

Q: To display alternate rows with different fill colors in Excel, use the effect known as ____________________.
A: banded rows

Q: A ____________________ formats the entire table as a single unit.
A: table style

Q: One of the benefits of conditional ____________________ is that it helps you analyze data by highlighting significant trends in data.
A: formatting

Q: To remove conditional formatting in Excel, click ____________________ from the Conditional Formatting button.
A: Clear Rules

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a key that shows each color used in the worksheet and what it means.
A: legend

Q: If a worksheet says 60%, you have used the ____ feature.     
A: Zoom

Q: The region that is sent to the printer from the active sheet is known as the ___________________.
A: print area

Q: A ____________________ is text printed in the bottom margin of each page.
A: footer

Q: A ____________________ is text printed in the top margin of each page.
A: header

Q: Explain why it is important to use proper formatting, citing at least three benefits of a well-formatted workbook.
Feedback: Proper formatting is a balance between too little and too much formatting, both of which can make data hard to understand. A well-formatted workbook helps accentuate important trends and relationships in data. A well-formatted workbook can be (1) be easier to read, (2) establish a sense of professionalism, (3) help draw attention to the points you want to make, and (4) provide continuity between worksheets.

Q: Color allows you to effectively enhance a workbook, but could you ever use too much or “bad” color?  Explain how or when color might detract from a workbook. Give at least four tips for effective color use.
Feedback: Too much color can be just as bad as not enough color. Overuse of color can cause readers’ eyes to wander around the workbook without focusing on a central point. Students should note at least four of the following tips: * Use colors from the same theme. * Use colors to differentiate content types and direct users where to enter data. * Avoid garish color combinations that can annoy the reader or be difficult to read. * Print on color and black-and-white printers to ensure output is readable in both formats. * Understand printer limitations; colors may look good on the monitor but not print well. * Be sensitive to your audience, as 8% of men and .5% of women experience some type of color blindness.

Q: What is conditional formatting and why would you apply it?  Give two examples of conditional formats, and explain a method for applying conditional formatting.
Feedback: Conditional formatting applies formatting only when a cell’s value meets a specified condition. A conditional format could make negative numbers red and positive numbers black. Excel has four conditional formats - data bars, highlighting, color scales, and icon sets. Students should explain one of the following two methods for applying conditional formatting. * Select the range or ranges to which you want to add data bars. * In the Styles group on the Home tab, click the Conditional Formatting button, point to Data Bars, and then click a data bar color. or * Select the range in which you want to highlight cells that match a specified rule. * In the Styles group, click the Conditional Formatting button, point to Highlight Cells Rules or Top/Bottom Rules, and then click the appropriate rule. * Select the appropriate options in the dialog box, and then click the OK button.

Q: When you enter a formula into a cell, Excel interprets cell references in the formula in relation to the cell’s location.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The Rand( ) function falls under the Statistical category.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Optional arguments are always placed last in the argument list.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: One challenge of nesting functions is to make sure that you include all of the parentheses.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Functions are organized in the Function Library group in the Function tab on the Ribbon.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A mixed reference “locks” one part of the cell reference while the other part can change.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To enter a mixed reference, type $ after either the row or column reference.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Not all functions have arguments.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Functions can be incorporated as part of larger formulas.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: COUNT is a Statistical function.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In the Function Arguments dialog box, required arguments are in bold type.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can open the Insert Function dialog box by clicking the Insert Function button on the Ribbon.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Format Painter button is on the Clipboard group.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Using the AutoFill feature is more efficient than copying and pasting.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In the list of AutoFill Options, the Fill Formatting Only option is the default setting.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: AutoFill can recognize some patterns if you plug in a minimum of at least two values, such as “Monday, Tuesday.”
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can build decision-making capability into a formula through the use of a logical function.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If a formula contains several functions, Excel starts with the outermost function and then moves inward.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Function Library is a group on the Ribbon.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: As you begin to type a function name within a formula into a cell, a list of functions that begin with the letters you typed appears.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: AutoFill, which copies content and formats from a cell or range into an <u>adjacent</u> cell or range.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To copy only the formats or only the formulas, click the <u>Copy</u> Options button and select the appropriate option.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: For more <u>complex</u> patterns, you can use the Fill Series dialog box.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The following mixed reference in the formula, $A5, has a <u>fixed</u> column reference and a relative row reference.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The <u>OR</u> function is a logical function that returns one value if the statement is true and returns a different value if the statement is false.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The statement “A1 >= B1” tests whether the value in cell A1 is <u>lesser</u> than or equal to<i> </i>the value in cell B1.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Logical button is part of the <u>Comparison</u> Library group.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You use an <u>absolute</u> reference when you don’t want a cell reference to change.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: $B$8 is a(n) <u>relative</u> reference to cell B8.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Use <u>relative</u> references when you want to repeat the same formula with different cells.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A mixed <u>formula</u> contains both relative and absolute references.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel allows you to cycle through the different reference types using the <u>F2</u> key.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When the data includes a few extremely large or extremely small values, it might be best to use the <u>median</u> value from the sample.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The <u>mode</u> is most often used with data that has only a few possible values, such as the number of bedrooms in a house.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you copy and paste a formula with <u>mixed</u> reference to a new location, the absolute portion of the cell reference remains fixed and the relative portion shifts.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The ____ category of Excel functions retrieves data from multidimensional databases involving online analytical processing.
- OLAP
- CUBE
- Logical
- Text
A: CUBE

Q: The ____ category of Excel functions retrieves and analyzes data.
- Text
- Database
- Information
- Logical
A: Database

Q: The ____ category of Excel functions returns (true-false) values
- Information
- Statistical
- Logical
- Math & Trig
A: Logical

Q: Which of the following is a Statistical function?
- INT
- RAND
- ROUND
- AVERAGE
A: AVERAGE

Q: Which of the following is a Math & Trig function? ____
- INT
- COUNT
- MIN
- AVERAGE
A: INT

Q: =INT(AVERAGE(A1:A100)) is an example of a(n) ____ function.
- complex
- logical
- absolute
- nested
A: nested

Q: Which of the following is not a function? ____
- AVERAGE
- SUM
- CUBE
- MEDIAN
A: CUBE

Q: After you describe a function in the Insert Function dialog box, click ____.
- Go
- Select
- Insert
- Next
A: Go

Q: Every function has to follow ____.
- a formula
- directions
- syntax
- a format
A: syntax

Q: The numbers, text, or cell references used by the function to return a value are called ____.
- expressions
- arguments
- data
- values
A: arguments

Q: <img width="328" height="466" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the last entry shown in Column N is 7,200.  There is a black “plus sign” on the lower right edge of the cell that is the ____.
- fill handle
- Auto Fill Options button
- formula finder
- function finder
A: fill handle

Q: <img width="328" height="466" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the last entry shown in Column N is 7,200.  There is an icon in the cell underneath the 7,200 which is the ____.
- fill handle
- Auto Fill Options button
- formula finder
- function finder
A: Auto Fill Options button

Q: <img width="340" height="485" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, in order to open the Function Arguments dialog box select a function from the ____.
- Name Manager
- Function Library
- Defined Names
- Home tab
A: Function Library

Q: <img width="340" height="485" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above,  the Insert Function button opens the ____ dialog box from which you can select a function.
- Function Gallery
- Insert Function
- Create Function
- Find Function
A: Insert Function

Q: Which of the following is not a comparison operator? ____
- =
- <=
- <<
- <>
A: <<

Q: In the following formula: =IF(A1="YES", "DONE", "RESTART"), what happens if A1= “NO”?
- The formula returns the text “RESTART”.
- The formula returns the text “DONE”.
- The formula returns the text “NO”.
- The formula returns the text “NO, RESTART”.
A: The formula returns the text “RESTART”.

Q: Which of the following is not a date function? ____
- Year
- Now
- And
- Today
A: And

Q: The PMT function is a(n) ____ function.
- date
- IF
- financial
- Statistical
A: financial

Q: With ____ interest, the borrower always pays more money to the lender the following year.
- principal
- simple
- compound
- maximum
A: compound

Q: The FV function stands for ____.
- function value
- future value
- financial value
- formulated value
A: future value

Q: The amount of money being loaned is known as the ____.
- mortgage
- principal
- loan amount
- proposed principal
A: principal

Q: <img width="395" height="46" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, nper stands for the ____.
- total number of payment periods required to pay off the loan
- total number of payment periods required to pay off the interest
- number of payments per year
- number of interest payments per year
A: total number of payment periods required to pay off the loan

Q: <img width="395" height="46" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, pv stands for the ____.
- payments verified
- principal value of the loan
- present value of the loan
- primary interest rate of the loan
A: present value of the loan

Q: <img width="395" height="46" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, fv and type are ____.
- financial functions
- required arguments
- comparison operators
- optional arguments
A: optional arguments

Q: <img width="395" height="46" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The function being shown in the figure above is the ____ function.
- Interest Payment
- Payment
- Loan
- Principal
A: Payment

Q: <img width="529" height="245" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the Home Loan Calculator uses the ____ function.
- SUM
- MAX
- LOAN
- PMT
A: PMT

Q: <img width="529" height="245" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the monthly payment is expressed as a negative value (because Excel treats it as ____).
- income
- an expense
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: an expense

Q: <img width="529" height="245" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> If you wanted to find the correct function for this worksheet, you would look in the ____ category of functions.
- Financial
- Logical
- Math & Trig
- AutoSum
A: Financial

Q: <img width="529" height="245" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> If you were to see ##### in cell B10, the ____ is too small to view the entire value.
- column width
- row height
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: column width

Q: <img width="529" height="245" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the total number of payments can be found as follows: ____
- =B4*B6
- =B4/B6
- =B6*B4
- =B6/B4
A: =B4*B6

Q: The ____ function returns the maximum value in the range.
- TOP
- FIRST
- MAX
- MOST
A: MAX

Q: One of the great advantages of ____ references is that you can quickly generate row and column totals without having to worry about revising the formulas as you copy them to new locations.
- cell
- relative
- absolute
- formula
A: relative

Q: Absolute references are marked with a ____.
- <
- :
- $
- !
A: $

Q: When you copy a formula that contains an absolute reference to a new location, the reference ____.
- is updated automatically
- does not change
- becomes bold
- has a dotted outline in its cell
A: does not change

Q: Use ____ references when you want different formulas to refer to the same cell.
- mixed
- relative
- absolute
- fixed
A: absolute

Q: One of the most common statistical approaches is to ____ the sample data.
- record
- average
- count
- organize
A: average

Q: Another name for the middle value is the ____ value.
- mode
- center
- median
- relative
A: median

Q: The ____ is most often used with data that has only a few possible values.
- mode
- median
- middle
- sum
A: mode

Q: ____ arguments may provide more control over the returned value.
- Relative
- Required
- Optional
- Absolute
A: Optional

Q: <i>FUNCTION</i>(<i>argument1</i>, <i>argument2</i>, ...) is ____.
- the syntax of writing optional arguments
- an example of a formula
- the general syntax of all functions
- the general syntax of all formulas
A: the general syntax of all functions

Q: Arguments can be ____.
- cell references
- numbers
- text
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: If an optional argument is not included, Excel assumes a(n) ____ value for it.
- default
- generic
- static
- absolute
A: default

Q: Excel functions are organized into ____ categories.
- 8
- 10
- 11
- 13
A: 11

Q: Which of the following is not an Excel function category? ____
- Math & Trig
- Algebra
- Statistical
- Text
A: Algebra

Q: Lookup & Reference is ____.
- Excel 2007’s online Help system
- a group on the Ribbon used to access Excel 2007’s Help system
- an Excel function category
- a reference panel found on the Office Button
A: an Excel function category

Q: The ____ function category retrieves data from multidimensional databases involving online analytical processing or OLAP.
- Database
- Cube
- Text
- Financial
A: Cube

Q: Which function counts how many cells in a range contain numbers, where <i>value1</i>, <i>value2</i>, and so forth are text, numbers, or cell references?
- SUM
- COUNT
- COUNTA
- AUTOSUM
A: COUNT

Q: In “SUM(<i>number1 </i>[, <i>number2</i>, <i>number3</i>, ...])”, number 1, number 2, and number 3 may be numbers or ____.
- letters
- cell references
- symbols
- operators
A: cell references

Q: Which category of Excel functions returns information about the format, location, or contents of worksheet cells? ____
- Location
- Information
- Reference
- Description
A: Information

Q: Functions can be ____.
- incorporated as part of larger formulas
- placed inside another function
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: In the formula =INT(AVERAGE(A1:A100)), which would occur first? ____
- The average of the values in the range A1:A100 is added to the integer.
- The average of the integer value is calculated.
- The average of the values in the range A1:A100 is calculated.
- The integer portion of the value is extracted.
A: The average of the values in the range A1:A100 is calculated.

Q: When you nest functions, you should have ____.
- the equal sign
- the same number of left and right parentheses
- at least two functions
- the correct number of brackets
A: the same number of left and right parentheses

Q: The Insert Function button is in the ____ group.
- Calculation
- Function Library
- Sort & Filter
- Home
A: Function Library

Q: Optional arguments are in ____ type.
- Bold
- Italic
- Normal
- Red
A: Normal

Q: The Insert Function dialog box has a(n) ____ option.
- search
- formatting
- find and replace
- expand/collapse
A: search

Q: Which function is used to change 3,162.50 to 3,163? ____
- RAND
- ROUND
- DROP
- ROUNDUP
A: ROUND

Q: Most Recently Used is a ____.
- group on the Formula tab on the Ribbon
- category in the Insert Function dialog box
- category in the Function Arguments dialog box
- command on the Office Button menu
A: category in the Insert Function dialog box

Q: The fill handle copies ____.
- content only
- formats only
- content and formats
- formats and cell references
A: content and formats

Q: Using AutoFill is ____ than copying and pasting.
- slower
- faster
- safer
- riskier
A: faster

Q: Blue, Accent1, Light 60% is an example of cell ____.
- size
- formatting
- border color
- height
A: formatting

Q: Another way to copy a formula is to use the Fill button on the ____ group.
- AutoFill
- Editing
- Cells
- Styles
A: Editing

Q: Using the AutoFill Options button, the Fill Without Formatting option copies the ____ but not the formatting.
- functions
- content
- cell references
- left-aligns
A: content

Q: Using AutoFill, what would be the extended series of the initial entry Jan? ___
- uary
- Feb, Mar, Apr
- Kan, Lan, Man, Nan
- Jan1, Jan2, Jan3,
A: Feb, Mar, Apr

Q: For most loan and investment calculations, you need to enter the annual interest rate ____ the number of times the interest is compounded during the year.
- added to
- subtracted from
- multiplied by
- divided by
A: divided by

Q: As you drag the fill handle, you will see ____.
- the AutoFill Options button flashing
- ScreenTips
- the AutoFill Wizard
- accents
A: ScreenTips

Q: A logical function is a function that works with values that are either ____.
- right or wrong
- absolute or relative
- positive or negative
- true or false
A: true or false

Q: >= is a(n) ____ operator.
- absolute
- comparison
- mathematical
- statistical
A: comparison

Q: In the formula =IF(A1=B1, C1, C2), the result will be C2 if ____.
- A is equal to B
- A does not equal B
- A1+B1 is equal to C1
- none of the above
A: A does not equal B

Q: Part of effective formula writing is knowing when to use relative, absolute, and ____ references.
- complex
- simple
- mixed
- matched
A: mixed

Q: ____ references are seldom used other than when creating tables of calculated values such as a multiplication table in which the values of the formula or function can be found in the initial rows and columns of the table.
- Absolute
- Relative
- Mixed
- Matched
A: Mixed

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-1<br></b>Charles is a recent college graduate. He is paying rent for the first time, as well as utility bills, such as cable, electric, and telephone. He also has some hefty school loan payments. Charles has a good paying job and knows that even though he has lots of expenses, it is critical for him to save money each month, too. He decides to create a budget for himself in Excel 2010.<br><br> Charles opens Excel 2010 and enters his monthly income for one year beginning with January. To create a series of months, he types: ____.
- Jan - Dec
- January
- January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December, then presses Enter
- =DATE (Jan-Dec)
A: January

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-1<br></b>Charles is a recent college graduate. He is paying rent for the first time, as well as utility bills, such as cable, electric, and telephone. He also has some hefty school loan payments. Charles has a good paying job and knows that even though he has lots of expenses, it is critical for him to save money each month, too. He decides to create a budget for himself in Excel 2010.<br><br> Charles has entered all of his monthly expenses. He needs to create a formula that will deduct his monthly expenses from his monthly income. Since his monthly income is the same amount each month, he uses a(n)____ to identify the cell containing the income value.
- relative reference
- absolute reference
- mixed reference
- fixed reference
A: absolute reference

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-1<br></b>Charles is a recent college graduate. He is paying rent for the first time, as well as utility bills, such as cable, electric, and telephone. He also has some hefty school loan payments. Charles has a good paying job and knows that even though he has lots of expenses, it is critical for him to save money each month, too. He decides to create a budget for himself in Excel 2010.<br><br> Charles’s cable bill varies from month to month due to special sporting events he purchases. He wants to calculate the total cable expenses for one year. He wants to see all of the arguments associated with the SUM function so he clicks the ____.
- Math & Trig button in the Formula  group, then clicks SUM to open the Function Arguments dialog box
- Math & Trig button in the Function Library group, then clicks SUM to open the Function Arguments dialog box
- AutoSum button in the Function Library group, then clicks SUM to open the Function Arguments dialog box
- Financial button in the Function Library group, then clicks SUM to open the Function Arguments dialog box
A: Math & Trig button in the Function Library group, then clicks SUM to open the Function Arguments dialog box

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-1<br></b>Charles is a recent college graduate. He is paying rent for the first time, as well as utility bills, such as cable, electric, and telephone. He also has some hefty school loan payments. Charles has a good paying job and knows that even though he has lots of expenses, it is critical for him to save money each month, too. He decides to create a budget for himself in Excel 2010.<br><br> Charles wants to find out what his average cable bill is. As he types the letter “A” in order to type the function AVERAGE ____.
- the Insert Function dialog box appears
- a list of functions that begin with the letter A appear
- the Format Painter appears
- a list of operators that begin with the letter A appear
A: a list of functions that begin with the letter A appear

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-1<br></b>Charles is a recent college graduate. He is paying rent for the first time, as well as utility bills, such as cable, electric, and telephone. He also has some hefty school loan payments. Charles has a good paying job and knows that even though he has lots of expenses, it is critical for him to save money each month, too. He decides to create a budget for himself in Excel 2010.<br><br> Charles wants to add color only to those cells with a negative balance. He would accomplish this by using ___ formatting.
- compact
- conditional
- simple
- complex
A: conditional

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-2<br></b>Pamela is getting ready to purchase her first condominium. To get ready for the mortgage process, she gathers her Excel spreadsheets that contain all of her financial information.<br><br> Pamela needs to borrow $30,000 as a down payment for her condominium. This amount will be the ____.
- Maximum
- Principal
- PMT
- Compound principal
A: Principal

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-2<br></b>Pamela is getting ready to purchase her first condominium. To get ready for the mortgage process, she gathers her Excel spreadsheets that contain all of her financial information.<br><br> Pamela has been told by one bank that if approved, she will have to pay a compound interest. This means that ____.
- interest paid is equal to a percentage of principal for each period that the money has been lent
- interest paid is calculated on the principal and any previous interest payments that have been added to that principal
- interest paid is equal to a .05 percent of principal for each period that the money has been lent
- interest paid is calculated on the principal and any late fees that have been added to that principal
A: interest paid is calculated on the principal and any previous interest payments that have been added to that principal

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-2<br></b>Pamela is getting ready to purchase her first condominium. To get ready for the mortgage process, she gathers her Excel spreadsheets that contain all of her financial information.<br><br> Pamela is ready to figure out what her monthly loan payment will be. She uses the PMT function in the ____ category.
- Banking
- Financial
- Math & Trig
- Interest
A: Financial

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-2<br></b>Pamela is getting ready to purchase her first condominium. To get ready for the mortgage process, she gathers her Excel spreadsheets that contain all of her financial information.<br><br> In the Function Arguments dialog box, Pamela enters the number of payments for the ____ argument.
- pv
- nper
- nv
- np
A: nper

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-2<br></b>Pamela is getting ready to purchase her first condominium. To get ready for the mortgage process, she gathers her Excel spreadsheets that contain all of her financial information.<br><br> Assuming Pamela is faithful to her monthly payments and her interest rate does not change, she should be able to calculate the ____ of the loan.
- nv
- nper
- fv
- principal
A: fv

Q: Some cell references are called ____________________ references because they are always interpreted in relation to the location of the cell containing the formula.
A: relative

Q: ____________________ is a set of rules which specifies how a function should be written.
A: Syntax

Q: In ___________________ interest, the interest is equal to a percentage of principal for each period that the money has been lent.
A: simple

Q: The ____________________<b> </b>organizes all of the functions by category and allows you to search for functions that perform particular calculations.
A: Insert Function dialog box

Q: A(n) ____________________<b> </b>function<b> </b>is a function that works with values that are either true or false.
A: logical

Q: The ____________________ is the middle value from a sample.
A: median

Q: TODAY is an example of a(n) ____________________ function.
A: date

Q: Another approach is to calculate the most common value in the data, otherwise known as the ____________________.
A: mode

Q: A(n) ____________________ reference contains both relative and absolute references.
A: mixed

Q: Not all functions have arguments, and some functions have ____________________ arguments, which are not required for the function to return a value, but can be included to provide more control over the returned value.
A: optional

Q: ____________________ is an Excel function category that returns information about the format, location, or contents of worksheet cells.
A: Information

Q: Functions can also be ____________________ or placed inside another function.
A: nested

Q: The small black plus sign in the lower-right corner of a selected cell or range is called the ____________________.
A: fill handle

Q: A(n) ____________________ operator<b> </b>is a symbol that indicates the relationship between two values.
A: comparison

Q: ____________________ can also be used to create a series of numbers, dates, or text based on a pattern.
A: AutoFill

Q: The ____________________ function is a logical function that returns one value if the statement is true and returns a different value if the statement is false.
A: IF

Q: For more complex patterns, you can use the ____________________ dialog box instead of the AutoFill feature.
A: Series

Q: ____________________<b> </b>copies content and formats from a cell or range into an adjacent cell or range.
A: AutoFill

Q: The ____________________ dialog box organizes all of the functions by category and allows you to search for functions that perform particular calculations.
A: Insert Function

Q: To insert a function, click the ____________________ tab on the Ribbon.
A: Formulas

Q: Explain what a logical function is and give an example of when you would use one in Excel 2007.
Feedback: A logical function is a function that works with values that are either true or false. In Excel you can use logical functions to compare the contents of two cells or comparison operators to determine if the value in a cell is greater, equal to, or lesser than another value. The IF function is a logical function. The IF function returns one value if the statement is true and returns a different value if the statement is false. One use of a logical function in Excel would be if you wanted to figure out if your employees should receive a yearly bonus. In an Excel spreadsheet you would have columns for each employees monthly sales figures and a cell containing their total sales figure for the year. You could create an IF function that determined if their annual sales exceeded a specific value or not. If “yes”, the employee receives a bonus, if “no”, the employee does not receive a bonus.

Q: Why is it that the TODAY and NOW date functions do not have any arguments?
Feedback: The TODAY and NOW date functions do not have arguments because they both represent the current date and current time. There can be no other values to replace them. The values returned by the TODAY and NOW functions are updated automatically whenever you reopen the workbook or enter a new calculation. If you don’t want the date and time to change, you must enter the date and time value directly in the cell.

Q: What is the relationship between the Function Arguments dialog box and the Insert Function dialog box?
Feedback: The relationship between the Function Arguments dialog box and the Insert Function dialog box is in how and why the two dialog boxes are used. The Insert Function dialog box is used when you wish to look through categories of functions to choose one for your formula and when you are unsure of which one to use at all. Select the cell in which you wish to enter a formula, then click the Insert Function button in the Function Library group. In this dialog box, you can search for a particular function by typing in some related keywords, then clicking Go, or choose from a category list. Once you select a function, you are then brought to the Function Arguments dialog box. This dialog box lists all of the arguments associated with a specific function. You can also access the Function Arguments dialog box by selecting a specific function from any category in the Function Library group on the Formulas tab. Typically, you will bypass the Insert Function dialog box when you already know which function you want to use in your formula.

Q: Every chart must have a data source.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When selecting a data source for a pie chart, select all rows and columns, including total rows and columns.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: By default, embedded charts display the chart and any text or figures on separate pages.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Charts include individual elements that can be formatted, including the chart area, the chart title, the plot area, data markers, and a legend.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A chart style is similar to a cell style or a table style in that it formats several chart elements at one time.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To change a border color on a chart, click the Color button to open the color palette.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In pie charts with legends, it’s best to make the slice colors as similar as possible.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Although 3-D charts are visually attractive, they can obscure the relationship between the values in the chart by making it difficult to see which slice is larger.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can rotate a 3-D chart along the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In Excel, charts do not remain linked or connected to their data sources if they appear in different worksheets.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: One of Edward Tufte’s most important works is <i>The Visual Display of Quantitative Information </i>in which he laid out several principles for the design of charts and graphics.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When data bars are used with negative values, the date bars originate from the center of the cell with negative bars extending to the left and positive bars extending to the right.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Excel has a built-in format to display four-digit year values, so you do not need to create one.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel allows you to overlay a legend on a chart as a space-saving option.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Sparklines differ from data bars in that the sparklines are always placed in the cells containing the value they represent and each cell represents only a single bar from the bar chart.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Line charts are best suited for representing data that follows some sequential order.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you cannot find the right chart to meet your needs, Excel allows you to create a custom chart based on the built-in chart types.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Embedded charts can be moved and resized.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The lengths of data bars are based on the value of each cell in the selected range.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Chart sheets show both charts and worksheet data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: After you select the <u>data source</u>, Excel determines the series name, series values, and category values based on the data source.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The <u>series name</u> has only one data series.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A <u>color</u> bar is a conditional format that adds a horizontal bar to the background of a cell containing a numeric value.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Pie charts are most effective with <u>ten</u> or fewer slices.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: By default, Excel inserts a chart as an <u>embedded</u> chart.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can quickly change the appearance of the entire chart by selecting a different chart style in the Chart <u>Design</u> gallery.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To <u>explode</u> a pie chart slice, select that slice and then drag it away from the pie.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you create sparklines, clicking any cell in the <u>data</u> range selects all of the sparklines in the group.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To resize the chart, drag a <u>sizing</u> handle, which is a square or dot on the selection box that is used to change the object’s width and height.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The sparkline axis is simply a <u>horizontal</u> line that separates positive values from negative values.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Because of the compactness of sparklines, you can specify only the line color and the <u>line leader</u> color.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To create a set of sparklines, you first select a data <u>range</u> containing the data you want to graph.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In a pie chart, the largest piece of pie represents the data series with the <u>smallest</u> value.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Extreme viewing angles in a 3-D chart may elongate the chart and <u>misrepresent</u> the data.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you want to represent the following data: 20%, 25%, 15%, 17%, and 23%, a <u>pie</u> chart will best highlight the differences among the close in value data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: For which of the following reasons would you choose to use a chart or graph?
- To organize information in columns and rows
- To show trends or relationships across data
- To present data using text only
- To add color to a report
A: To show trends or relationships across data

Q: The ____ is not a component of a data series.
- series name
- series value
- category name
- category value
A: category name

Q: <img width="338" height="481" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, if you were to create a  Fund Assets pie chart using the information in A1:B7, the data source for that chart would be ____.
- A2:A6
- B2:B6
- A1:B5
- A2:B6
A: A2:B6

Q: <img width="338" height="481" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, an example of a ____ name is row 9.
- data series
- series name
- data label
- series label
A: series name

Q: <img width="338" height="481" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The words Information, Services, an Manufacturing shown in Column A are the ____.
- data series
- data source
- series value
- series source
A: data series

Q: The ____ is the only one of the following charts to compare relative values from different categories to the whole.
- pie
- column
- line
- area
A: pie

Q: To work with a title or other individual element of a chart, select the ____ tab.
- Design
- Layout
- Format
- Print
A: Layout

Q: The ____ Chart Tools contextual tabs appear on the Ribbon when you select a chart.
- Insert, Layout, and Design
- Design, Layout, and Format
- Insert, Design, and Format
- Format, Print, and Layout
A: Design, Layout, and Format

Q: The ____ dialog box provides options for moving charts between worksheets and chart sheets.
- Insert New
- Tab
- Move Chart
- Change Chart
A: Move Chart

Q: Placing a chart in a ____ displays only the chart and no worksheet cells.
- new worksheet
- tabbed view
- graph display
- chart sheet
A: chart sheet

Q: Excel supports the following three types of sparklines that does NOT include ____.
- A win/loss sparkline for highlighting positive and negative values
- A column sparkline used for column charts
- A line sparkline for highlighting trends
- a true/false sparkline for helping make decisions
A: a true/false sparkline for helping make decisions

Q: To move or resize an embedded chart, ____.
- select the chart and drag the selection box
- drag the sizing handle on the selection box
- select the chart and press Tab
- both a and b
A: both a and b

Q: <img width="368" height="522" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The columns and pie slices in the charts above are ____.
- data markers
- chart areas
- major tick marks
- minor tick marks
A: data markers

Q: <img width="368" height="522" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the rectangular area to the right of the pie chart (listing Cash, U.S. Stocks, Non-U.S. Stocks, and Bonds) is the ____.
- perspective
- plot area
- legend
- data marker
A: legend

Q: <img width="368" height="522" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, in the column chart, the values along the left side (0.00%, 5.00%, etc.) are ____.
- plot markers
- plot marks
- data markers
- tick marks
A: tick marks

Q: <img width="368" height="522" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the entry 54.94%, shown next to the largest pie slice, is a ____.
- data label
- chart key
- legend
- series value
A: data label

Q: <img width="368" height="522" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the chart title for the pie chart is ____.
- Fund Assets
- Sector Percentages
- 54.94%
- Cash
A: Fund Assets

Q: Depending on the pie chart layout you choose, you can ____.
- hide or display the chart title
- display a chart legend
- add percentages to pie slices
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: To reposition the legend to the left-hand side of a chart, click the Legend button, and then click ____.
- Reposition Legend
- Show Legend at Left
- Move Legend
- Adjust Legend
A: Show Legend at Left

Q: ____ is not an available formatting category for legends.
- Border Color
- Border Styles
- Shadow
- Shading
A: Shading

Q: ____provide descriptive text for the individual data markers, such as pie slices
- Asset labels
- Legend values
- Data labels
- Leader lines
A: Data labels

Q: The Label Position option in the Format Data Labels dialog box includes ____.
- Center
- Inside End
- Outside End
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Since each slice of a pie represents a different value in the series, you ____.
- must format each slice separately
- can format the entire data series
- can format multiple slices at once
- cannot format any single slice
A: must format each slice separately

Q: To move one slice of a pie chart away from the pie creates a(n) ____.
- spontaneous pie chart
- perfect pie chart
- exploded pie chart
- exponential pie chart
A: exploded pie chart

Q: You already created a line chart, but now decide that you want to change this chart to a pie chart. To do this, you click ____ from the Type group in the Chart Tools Design tab.
- Change Chart Type
- New Chart
- Alter Existing Chart
- Modify Chart
A: Change Chart Type

Q: A 90° ____ value exaggerates the 3-D effect, making distant objects appear very small.
- angle
- perspective
- photo
- rotation
A: perspective

Q: You can use the 3-D Format options to add drop shadows, raised or beveled corners, and textured surfaces that give the illusion of ____ reflecting off the chart elements.
- light
- color
- water
- shadows
A: light

Q: If you do not want a chart to reflect new values in the data source, you should ____.
- not create a chart
- change the default settings
- paste the chart as a Picture
- create the chart in Microsoft Word
A: paste the chart as a Picture

Q: To display a large number of categories whose values are close to one another, you should create a ____ chart.
- column
- bar
- pie
- either a. or b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: <img width="517" height="367" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the data markers shown in the cells in the column labeled “Performance,” are ____.
- data lines
- sparklines
- data bars
- spark bars
A: sparklines

Q: <img width="517" height="367" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the data markers shown in the cells in the column labeled “Percentages,” are ____.
- data lines
- sparklines
- data bars
- spark bars
A: data bars

Q: <img width="517" height="367" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The ____, shown in the figure above, include data markers to indicate the high and low points.
- data bars
- sparklines
- lines
- bars
A: sparklines

Q: <img width="517" height="367" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the value axis entries on the  “Fund History” chart, are displayed with the ____ unit.
- tens
- hundreds
- thousands
- millions
A: thousands

Q: A ____ acts like a line on a ruler, making it easier to read a chart’s scale.
- major tick mark
- data marker
- category value
- legend marker
A: major tick mark

Q: One advantage of breaking up a sparkline group is that Excel can display each sparkline based on the ____ values associated with the individual sparkline’s data series.
- minimum
- maximum
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: <img width="328" height="357" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the date formats shown in the “Type:” window are ____.
- built-in formats
- custom formats
- default formats
- archived formats
A: built-in formats

Q: <img width="328" height="357" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the entry “yyyy” shown in the “Format Code:” box is setting up a(n) ____ format to display the four-digit year.
- built-in
- custom
- default
- archived
A: custom

Q: <img width="328" height="357" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The placement of tick marks and axis labels is controlled by the area indicated by Item ____ in the above figure.
- 3
- 4
- 5
- 6
A: 5

Q: In a column chart, you can ____.
- add a gradient fill to columns
- reduce gap width between columns
- modify the appearance of data markers
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Which of the following is not an option for setting units in the Axis Options portion of the Format Axis dialog box?
- Major unit
- Minor unit
- Sub unit
- Base unit
A: Sub unit

Q: In Excel, typing ____ in the Format Code: box would result in that month’s full name being displayed on a chart.
- m
- mm
- mmm
- mmmm
A: mmmm

Q: To display Mar 17, 2008 as a custom format, you would type ____ in the Format Code: box in Excel.
- mm dd, yy
- mmm dd, yy
- mmm dd, yyyy
- mm dd, yyyy
A: mmm dd, yyyy

Q: Which of the following would result in adding the value ‘k’ to the end of each number on a chart’s vertical axis?
- #,##0“k”
- k#,##
- #,##0k
- #,##0-k-
A: #,##0“k”

Q: Which of the following shows the correct order of steps for adding a data series to a chart?
- Select the chart, Click the Add button, Click the Select Data button, Select the range
- Select the chart, Click the Select Data button, Click the Add button, Select the range
- Select the range, Click the Select Data button, Click the Add button, Select the chart
- Select the range, Select the chart, Click the Select Data button, Click the Add button
A: Select the chart, Click the Select Data button, Click the Add button, Select the range

Q: To specify the name of a new data series and its range of data values, use the ____ dialog box.
- Edit Series
- Select Data
- Select Series
- Add Data
A: Edit Series

Q: =‘Trolley Schedule’!$A$2:$C$12 identifies a ____.
- Series data range
- Column chart type
- Chart series source
- Chart data range
A: Chart data range

Q: From the Format Data Series dialog box, you can ____ as a Marker Option.
- select a built-in marker type
- choose a data marker type
- select the size of the data marker
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: On a 3-D chart, the ____ represents the object’s depth.
- x-axis
- y-axis
- z-axis
- none of the above
A: z-axis

Q: If you select a chart’s series and look at the formula bar, the formula being displayed uses the ____ function.
- CHART
- DATA
- RANGE
- SERIES
A: SERIES

Q: Edward Tufte was concerned with what he termed as “chart ____,” in which a proliferation of chart elements—chosen because they look “nice”—confuse and distract the reader.
- espionage
- clutter
- confusion
- junk
A: junk

Q: Edward Tufte said that ____ ink is any part of the chart that does not convey information about the data.
- data
- non-data
- information
- non-information
A: non-data

Q: A column sparkline can be ____.
- inserted anywhere within the workbook
- can represent data from several rows
- can represent data from several columns
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: A chart sheet can contain ____, enabling you to display several charts at once within a single sheet.
- multiple graphics
- only one data set
- only a single chart
- embedded charts
A: embedded charts

Q: Rotation options for a chart allow you to rotate the ____.
- x-axis
- y-axis
- perspective
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Which of the following represents a range of data in Excel?
- A2-B2
- B7, C4
- A1.M4
- C2:F12
A: C2:F12

Q: A(n) ____ chart is similar to a line chart, but uses a fill color to shade areas under the lines.
- bar
- area
- stock
- column
A: area

Q: Which of the following represents the pointer when it is over the resizing handle?
- <img width="24" height="23" align="bottom" alt="mc057-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc057-1.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="30" height="25" align="bottom" alt="mc057-2.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc057-2.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="16" height="19" align="bottom" alt="mc057-3.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc057-3.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="30" height="22" align="bottom" alt="mc057-4.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc057-4.jpg" border="0">
A: <img width="24" height="23" align="bottom" alt="mc057-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc057-1.jpg" border="0">

Q: In Excel charts, the Legend Options dialog box allows you to change all the following except ____.
- Fill
- Border Color
- Shadow
- Font Size
A: Font Size

Q: If you have chosen Outside End, Percentage, and Show Leader Lines, you are setting options in the ____ box.
- Label Options
- Format Legend
- Format Chart Area
- Format Axis
A: Label Options

Q: Because of the visual distortion that can result with 3-D charts, you should ____.
- never use a 3-D chart
- include data labels with all 3-D charts
- use a 3-D chart only for charts with many data series
- format all sections in similar colors
A: include data labels with all 3-D charts

Q: With 3-D rotation, you can change a chart’s ____.
- rotation
- perspective
- depth
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: In the Format Axis dialog box, selecting Fixed 0.10 for the Minor Unit will result in ____.
- minor tick marks appearing at 10% intervals
- major tick marks appearing at 10% intervals
- minor tick marks automatically appearing per the data
- values appearing in reverse order
A: minor tick marks appearing at 10% intervals

Q: To fill a column with a blend of colors in a column chart, you would choose ____ from the Fill options.
- picture fill
- solid fill
- no fill
- gradient fill
A: gradient fill

Q: Which of the following is not an option in the Fill options in the Format Data Series dialog box?
- Preset colors
- Direction
- Angle
- all of the above are options
A: all of the above are options

Q: In Excel, Axis Options allow you to specify ____.
- the axis type
- where the vertical axis crosses
- the axis position
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Which of the following represents the pointer when it is over a blank spot in the chart legend?
- <img width="24" height="23" align="bottom" alt="mc066-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc066-1.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="30" height="25" align="bottom" alt="mc066-2.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc066-2.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="16" height="19" align="bottom" alt="mc066-3.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc066-3.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="30" height="22" align="bottom" alt="mc066-4.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc066-4.jpg" border="0">
A: <img width="16" height="19" align="bottom" alt="mc066-3.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc066-3.jpg" border="0">

Q: To format an individual sparkline, select the sparkline you want to format, and then click the Ungroup button in the Group group on the Sparkline Tools ____ tab.
- Create
- View
- Layout
- Design
A: Design

Q: The first step in creating a combination chart is to ____.
- select a data series in an existing chart that you want to appear as another chart type
- click Change Chart Type in the Chart Tools Design tab
- select the chart type you want
- open a new bland spreadsheet
A: select a data series in an existing chart that you want to appear as another chart type

Q: The ____ is a rectangular area that labels the markers or symbols used in a chart.
- x-axis
- y-axis
- chart area
- legend
A: legend

Q: To add an axis to a sparkline, click the Axis button in the ____ group on the Sparkline Tools Design tab, and then click Show Axis.
- Group
- Tools
- Design
- Chart
A: Group

Q: <b>Critical-Thinking Case Based Questions<br><br>Case 4-1<br></b>Andy has just started a job with the school district. His director has given him the last six months of test results from four local schools. Andy has organized the results as four data series and needs to display the trends in a graphic format.<br><br> Andy’s boss wants him to compare the values in this chart with several different data sets.  Andy should prepare a(n) ____ for his boss.
- Radar chart
- Line graph
- Pie chart
- XY scatter chart
A: Radar chart

Q: <b>Critical-Thinking Case Based Questions<br><br>Case 4-1<br></b>Andy has just started a job with the school district. His director has given him the last six months of test results from four local schools. Andy has organized the results as four data series and needs to display the trends in a graphic format.<br><br> It’s difficult to read the exact scale on some of Andy’s data. Adding ____ would make it easier to read.
- a legend
- major tick marks
- colors
- more numbers
A: major tick marks

Q: <b>Critical-Thinking Case Based Questions<br><br>Case 4-1<br></b>Andy has just started a job with the school district. His director has given him the last six months of test results from four local schools. Andy has organized the results as four data series and needs to display the trends in a graphic format.<br><br> Andy has finished his chart but needs to save some space. What’s the most effective way for Andy to reduce space without losing important data?
- Delete parts of the data
- Delete the legend
- Delete the title
- Overlay the legend in areas without data
A: Overlay the legend in areas without data

Q: <b>Critical-Thinking Case Based Questions<br><br>Case 4-1<br></b>Andy has just started a job with the school district. His director has given him the last six months of test results from four local schools. Andy has organized the results as four data series and needs to display the trends in a graphic format.<br><br> Andy has experimented with a few different types of charts to give his boss options for reporting the test results. In his bar chart, Andy wants to change the chart’s border. To do this, he should select the ____ tab in the Chart Tools.
- Format
- Edit
- Design
- Layout
A: Format

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Since it’s important for Anya to keep percentages of her whole reviewer base in mind, she wants to represent data as parts of a whole. What chart type would you suggest to Anya?
- bar
- column
- scatter
- pie
A: pie

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Since Anya is still reviewing her data, she wants to make sure that her chart reflects any changes she makes in her data source. She should ____.
- paste her chart in as a picture
- do nothing since charts in Excel remain linked to data sources
- manually adjust data in a chart
- create a new chart each time she modifies her data
A: do nothing since charts in Excel remain linked to data sources

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Anya has decided to make her chart a 3-D chart, but her supervisor complained that he cannot see enough of the data. Anya should try to ____.
- raise the viewpoint of the chart by rotating along the y-axis
- raise the viewpoint of the chart by rotating along the x-axis
- spin the chart clockwise
- replace the chart with a bar chart
A: raise the viewpoint of the chart by rotating along the y-axis

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Anya tells you that she is using a 3-D chart for the first time and asks if you have any advice for this chart type. You should tell Anya that it’s especially important to ____ in 3-D charts.
- include data labels
- use bright colors
- use a small font
- detail the legend and title
A: include data labels

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Anya has asked for your advice. A colleague told her to remove the legend from her pie chart, but she doesn’t understand why. What would be a good reason to remove the title?
- Her legend isn’t labeled properly.
- Her legend takes up too much space.
- When using one data series, it can be redundant to use a chart title and legend.
- There is no good reason. You should always have a title and legend.
A: When using one data series, it can be redundant to use a chart title and legend.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Anya needs to call attention to one category above all others. For this purpose, she should use a(n) ____.
- line chart
- exploded pie chart
- scatter chart
- banded chart
A: exploded pie chart

Q: A chart or ____________________ is a visual representation of a set of data.
A: graph

Q: Excel supports ____________________ built-in charts.
A: 73 / seventy three / seventy-three

Q: If you add percentages to a pie chart, the percentages would appear directly on the pie slices ____________________ enough to fit the number, otherwise, percentages will appear next to the slices in the chart area.
A: large

Q: In cases where a label placed outside a pie might appear farther from its slice than is easily readable, a(n) ____________________ might be added to connect the data to its corresponding slices.
A: leader line

Q: The range of values, or ___________________, of an axis is based on the values in the data source.
A: scale

Q: You can add ___________________ to identify smaller intervals between the major tick marks.
A: minor tick marks

Q: To compare values from several categories with a sequential order, such as dates and times occurring at evenly spaced intervals, you would use a(n) ____________________ chart.
A: line

Q: A chart that combines two or more chart types into a single graph is called a(n) ____________________ chart.
A: combination

Q: In general, ____________________ charts should be used only when the number of categories is small and the relative sizes of different data can be easily determined.
A: pie

Q: To plot the results of two data categories collected every month for a year, you should use a(n) ____________________ chart.
A: line

Q: Since scientific data is often plotting two numeric values against one another, it is oftentimes best to represent this data type with a(n) ____________________ chart.
A: XY scatter / X-Y scatter / X Y scatter

Q: To create a combination chart, you select a data series in an existing chart, and then apply a new ___________________ to that series.
A: chart type

Q: You can add visual interest to charts by using 3-D (three ___________________) effects.
A: dimensional

Q: Perspective values range from 0 degrees to ___________________ degrees.
A: 90 / ninety

Q: Each data source is a collection of ____________________, which is a range of values plotted as a single unit on a chart.
A: data series

Q: A(n) ____________________ chart shows patterns or relationships between two or more sets of values, much like an XY chart, except the size of the data marker is determined by a third value.
A: Bubble

Q: To revise the title of a chart rather than replacing it, you can ____________________ the chart title to place the insertion point in the text, and then edit the text as needed.
A: double-click / double click

Q: Increasing the rotation horizontally in a 3-D chart spins the chart ___________________.
A: clockwise

Q: ___________________ identify the main units on the chart axis.
A: Major tick marks

Q: ___________________ extend the tick marks across the plot area.
A: Gridlines / Grid lines

Q: Consider the impact of a poorly designed chart. Explain why it is important to have a well-designed chart, and name at least four tips for creating a good chart.     
Feedback: Answers will vary. Students should cover some of the following major points. A well-designed chart can illuminate facts that might be hidden by viewing only numbers. However, a poorly designed chart can mislead readers, misrepresent data, and make it more difficult to interpret data. To create effective and useful charts: * Keep it simple. Do not clutter a chart with too many graphic elements. * Focus on the message. Design the chart to highlight the points you want to convey to readers. * Limit the number of data series used in the chart. Line charts and column charts should display no more than three or four data series. Pie charts should have no more than six slices. * Use gridlines in moderation. Gridlines should be used to provide only approximate values for the data markers. * Choose colors carefully. Display different data series in contrasting colors to make it easier to distinguish one series from another. * Limit your chart to a few text styles. Use a maximum of two or three different text styles in the same chart.

Q: When selecting a chart, it’s important to choose the right type of chart to represent your data.  If choosing between a pie chart and a line chart, what factors would you evaluate in choosing which chart to use? How would each chart differ in representing your data?
Feedback: Answers will vary. Students should evidence critical thinking by including some of the following points. Pie charts should generally be used only when the number of categories is small and the relative sizes of the different slices can be easily determined. Pie charts compare relative value from different categories to the whole. Values are indicated by the size of the pie slice. Line charts are best for categories that follow a sequential order. However, line charts will distort data that occurs at irregular time intervals, making data appear to have occurred regularly. Line charts also show trends over time. Values are indicated by the height of the line. Pie charts and line charts assume that numbers are plotted against categories.

Q: Explain when it would be appropriate to use a chart sheet and how you would go about creating one in Microsoft Excel.
Feedback: A chart sheet can contain embedded charts, allowing you to display several charts at once within a single sheet. To create a chart sheet, click the sheet tab containing your data and select the range of data you wish to use in the chart. Click the Insert tab on the Ribbon. In the Charts group, select a chart type. In the Location group on the Chart Tools Design tab, click Move Chart. In the Move Chart dialog box, click the New sheet open button, then type the sheet name. The chart sheet with this name that contains the specified chart is inserted in the workbook. Drag the sheet tab to the right of the Documentation sheet tab.

Q: The header row must be row 1.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you freeze the top row in a worksheet and press Ctrl+Home, you will return to the cell directly above the frozen row.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can create at most one Excel table in a worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you create a table, if your data does not contain column headers, Excel adds headers with default names.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The simplest and most convenient way to add a record to a table is to enter the data in the first blank row below the last record.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can use a table’s sizing handle to add columns or rows to a table.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To rearrange records in a list, you sort based on the data in one or more of the fields.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Before you complete a sort, you need to decide whether you want to put the list in ascending or descending order.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you delete a record from a table, a dialog box displays to confirm the delete operation.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: An easy way to sort data when there is only one sort field is to use the Sort A to Z or Sort Z to A buttons.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If a column consists of day or month labels, you can sort them in their correct chronological order using one of the predefined custom lists.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you filter your data, all records that do not meet your criteria are temporarily hidden from view.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You click a filter arrow to open the AutoFilter menu for a field.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="492" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Records have been filtered in the list shown in the accompanying figure.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you clear a filter, all filters in the worksheet are cleared.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel can summarize data in a range of data by inserting subtotals.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can format cells in a PivotTable the same way as you do cells in the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The PivotTable Field List enables you to change, or pivot, the view of the data in the PivotTable by dragging the field buttons to different areas in the layout section.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can change the alignment of the column headings for better placement and readability.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To show items hidden in a PivotTable, you click the Show tab and check the check box for the item you want to show.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Each column represents a <u>record</u> that describes some attribute or characteristic of a person, place, or thing.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The row of field names across the top of an Excel list is referred to as the <u>header</u> row.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Table names cannot include <u>underscores</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="536" height="177" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The <u>QuickFix</u> button shown in the accompanying figure enables you to undo table formatting if, for example, you had not intended new data to be part of an existing table.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Ascending</u> order arranges labels alphabetically from A to Z.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The fields you use to order the data in a list are <u>sort</u> fields.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The first sort field in a sort is called the <u>major</u> sort field.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To create a custom list, in the Sort & Filter group on the <u>Home</u> tab, click the Sort button. Click the Order arrow, and then click Custom List.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If a column consists of day or month labels, you can sort them in their correct <u>chronological</u> order using one of the predefined custom lists.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can display or hide filter arrows for an Excel table or a range of data by using the Filter button in the Sort & Filter group on the <u>View</u> tab.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Custom</u> filters enable you to specify various conditions in addition to those that are based on an “equals” criterion.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="374" height="233" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the phrase “is greater than” is the <u>criteria</u> for the first condition. <u> </u>
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="374" height="233" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You can calculate <u>sort</u> statistics (including sum, average, count, maximum, and minimum) on all the columns in an Excel table. 
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>Summary</u> command automatically inserts a subtotal line into the list for each group of data in the list.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When the Subtotals feature "outlines" your worksheet, by default, the <u>highest</u> level is active.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Using Excel, you can ____.
- store data
- retrieve subsets of data
- create reports
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: In Excel, a collection of similar data can be structured in a(n) ____ of rows and columns.
- index
- glossary
- list
- range
A: range

Q: A data ____ table describes the fields you plan to maintain in a table.
- structure
- definition
- map
- linked
A: definition

Q: You should ____ the field names to make it easier to Excel to distinguish between the data in the list and the field names.
- boldface
- change the font of
- use a different color for
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: Press ____ to return to cell A1 in a worksheet.
- Ctrl+Home
- Ctrl+Esc
- F1
- Alt+Esc
A: Ctrl+Home

Q: ____ rows and columns lets you keep headings on the screen as you work with the data in a large worksheet.
- Hiding
- Freezing
- Showing
- Sealing
A: Freezing

Q: A dark, horizontal line appears ____ the column headers to indicate which row is frozen.
- above
- below
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: below

Q: In Excel, a table is a range of related data that is managed independently from the data in other ____ in the worksheet.
- rows and headers
- grids and columns
- rows and columns
- footers and grids
A: rows and columns

Q: When you designate a range as a(n) ____, Excel provides the same operations as are available for a structured range of data.
- table
- catalogue
- index
- roster
A: table

Q: To create a table, click the ____ tab on the Ribbon and then, in the Tables group, click the Table button.
- Design
- Home
- Insert
- View
A: Insert

Q: Excel assigns the name ____ to the first Excel table created in a workbook.
- 1
- 1Table
- NewTable
- Table1
A: Table1

Q: Which of the following is NOT a valid table name?
- New_table
- Table2
- _Newtable
- 2Table
A: 2Table

Q: A table name can include all of the following EXCEPT ____
- numbers
- spaces
- underscores
- letters
A: spaces

Q: <img width="536" height="177" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the icon shown in cell B118 is the ____ button.
- QuickCorrect
- AutoSort
- Quick Filter
- AutoCorrect Options
A: AutoCorrect Options

Q: <img width="536" height="177" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, in row 117, in the last full column shown, there is a small triangle shown in the bottom-right corner of the cell. This triangle indicates ____.
- a frozen cell
- a sizing handle
- an AutoCorrect field
- a sort field
A: a sizing handle

Q: As you type in a cell, ____ displays any existing entry in the column that matches the characters you typed.
- QuickFix
- AutoComplete
- Column Checker
- AutoFill
A: AutoComplete

Q: After Excel displays an existing entry in the column that matches the characters you typed, press the ____ key to accept the entry.
- Shift
- Tab
- Esc
- Alt
A: Tab

Q: You can find fields whose contents match a value exactly by clicking the Options button in the Find & Replace dialog box, and checking the ____ check box.
- Exact match
- Match entire cell contents
- Complete cell
- Precise match to entire cell
A: Match entire cell contents

Q: ____ order arranges labels in reverse alphabetical order, from Z to A.
- Reverse
- Major
- Ascending
- Descending
A: Descending

Q: The fields you use to order your data are called sort ____.
- values
- fields
- tags
- tools
A: fields

Q: You can use up to ____ sort fields in a single sort.
- 12
- 24
- 32
- 64
A: 64

Q: You can access the Sort buttons in the ____ group on the Home tab by clicking the Sort & Filter button and clicking a sort option.
- Filtering
- Formatting
- Editing
- Text
A: Editing

Q: When you have more than one sort field, you should use the Sort ____ to specify the sort criteria.
- menu
- status bar
- wizard
- dialog box
A: dialog box

Q: You can sort by ____.
- cell color
- font color
- cell icon
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: To add a sort field in the Sort dialog box, click the ____ button.
- Add Level
- Add Field
- New Sort Field
- New Level
A: Add Level

Q: To delete a sort field in the Sort dialog box, click the ____ button.
- Remove Level
- Delete Level
- Descend Level
- Delete Field
A: Delete Level

Q: Excel provides ____ predefined custom sort lists.
- three
- four
- six
- seven
A: four

Q: After data is filtered, you can ____ it.
- sort
- chart
- copy
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: After you filter a column, the ____ Filter command becomes available so you can remove the filter and redisplay all the records.
- Remove
- Clear
- Delete
- Archive
A: Clear

Q: You can display or hide filter arrows for an Excel table by using the Filter button in the Sort & Filter group on the ____ tab.
- Category
- View
- Data
- Home
A: Data

Q: <i><img width="179" height="257" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"></i><br><br> In the accompanying figure, "Installation," "Sculpture," and "Textile" are all part of the list of ____ options.
- selection
- filtering
- custom
- query
A: filtering

Q: The ____ condition requires that all of the selected criteria be true for the record to be displayed.
- OR
- NAND
- AND
- IF
A: AND

Q: The ____ condition requires that only one of the selected criteria be true for a record to be displayed.
- NAND
- OR
- AND
- IF
A: OR

Q: Criteria filters allow you to specify relationships other than those that are based on a(n)  "____" the criterion.
- in
- like
- greater than
- equals
A: equals

Q: You use ____ filters to find all objects with a value greater than X or acquired after a certain date.
- custom
- criteria
- index
- pivot
A: criteria

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed to start with the specified text string.
- Origin
- Begins With
- Initial
- Start
A: Begins With

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed to have the specified text string anywhere.
- Has
- Is
- Contains
- Matches
A: Contains

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed not to have the specified text string anywhere.
- Does Not Have
- Is Not
- Does Not Match
- Does Not Contain
A: Does Not Contain

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed to be greater than or equal to and less than or equal to the specified numbers.
- Top 10
- Between
- Aggregate
- Range
A: Between

Q: The ____ filtering option displays the top or bottom 10 (or specified number) items in a list.
- Bottom 10
- Top 10
- Custom
- All
A: Top 10

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed to have the current date.
- Current Date
- This Date
- This
- Today
A: Today

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed to be since January 1 of the current year to the current date.
- Year to Date
- Today
- Current
- none of the above
A: Year to Date

Q: With the Last Quarter criteria filter, quarters are defined as, for example, ____.
- April, May, June
- March, April, May
- May, June, July
- March, April, May, June
A: April, May, June

Q: When you click in each cell in the Total row, a(n) ____ appears that you can click to open a list of the most commonly used functions.
- menu
- arrow
- button
- status bar
A: arrow

Q: You can split the worksheet window into ____ separate panes.
- two or four
- four or six
- six or eight
- all of the above
A: two or four

Q: You select the ____ option button in the Custom AutoFilter dialog box if you want to display rows that meet both of two criteria.
- Or
- Both
- And
- Either
A: And

Q: You select the ____ option button in the Custom AutoFilter dialog box if you want to display rows that meet either of two criteria.
- Or
- Both
- And
- Either
A: Or

Q: <img width="374" height="233" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, if you only want to set one criterion for this filter, you’ll ____.
- leave the lower boxes empty
- enter “0” into the lower boxes
- enter “none” into the lower boxes
- access a pull-down menu of options
A: leave the lower boxes empty

Q: <img width="374" height="233" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the 20,000 indicates the price of a piece of artwork. Records with artwork with the following values meet the criteria: ____.
- $19,999
- $20,000
- $20,001
- all of the above
A: $20,001

Q: When you click in each cell in the ____ row, an arrow appears that you can click to open a list of the most commonly used functions.
- Total
- Group
- Function
- Header
A: Total

Q: You can click the More Functions command on the Total arrow button list to open the ____ dialog box and select any available function.
- Display Function
- Insert Function
- Add Function
- New Function
A: Insert Function

Q: The Subtotals command offers summary information such as ____.
- counts
- sums
- averages
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: To calculate subtotal for a table, the first step is to use the ____ button on the Table Tools Design tab.
- Expand for Calculation
- Convert to Range
- Summary
- Function
A: Convert to Range

Q: The three ____ buttons at the top of the outline area allow you to show or hide different levels of detail in the worksheet.
- Expansion
- Outline
- Summary
- Function
A: Outline

Q: In addition to displaying subtotals, the Subtotal feature "____" your worksheet so you can control the level of detail that is displayed.
- headers
- outlines
- shadows
- defines
A: outlines

Q: A PivotTable summarizes data in different categories using functions such as ____.
- SUM
- AVERAGE
- MIN
- Any of the above
A: MIN

Q: One advantage of PivotTables is that you can easily ____ different categories in the PivotTable to provide alternative views of the data.
- rearrange
- hide
- display
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: The PivotTable button is available in the Tables group on the ____ tab.
- Format
- Design
- Home
- Insert
A: Insert

Q: PivotTable data can be a(n) ____.
- an Access database file
- an Excel table in the current workbook
- an Excel range in the current workbook
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: You can create a PivotTable by clicking the Summarize with PivotTable button in the Tools group on the ____ tab.
- Home
- View
- Table Tools Design
- PivotTable
A: Table Tools Design

Q: <img width="494" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar008-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar008-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> On the far right, in the figure above, there is the PivotTable field list.  The items listed there, such as “Artist” and “Title” are ____ in the ArtObjects table.
- columns
- rows
- chart data labels
- field values
A: columns

Q: <img width="494" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar008-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar008-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> On the bottom-right corner of the figure above, there are four squares labeled Report Filter, Column Labels, Row Labels, and Values. These four areas represent the ____ of the PivotTable.
- files
- categories
- segments
- layout
A: layout

Q: <img width="494" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar008-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar008-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To get to the screen shown in the figure above, you would click the Insert tab on the Ribbon, and then, in the ____ group, click the PivotTable button.
- Tables
- PivotTables
- Tools
- Data
A: Tables

Q: <img width="494" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar008-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar008-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The worksheet you are viewing is “Sheet1.” To set the PivotTable in its own sheet all of the following are true EXCEPT:
- In the Create PivotTable dialog box, make sure the Select a table or range option button is selected.
- In the Create PivotTable dialog box, make sure the correct name for the range appears in the Table/Range box.
- Click the New Worksheet option button.
- In the Create PivotTable dialog box, a new worksheet, Sheet1, is inserted to the right of the current worksheet.
A: In the Create PivotTable dialog box, a new worksheet, Sheet1, is inserted to the right of the current worksheet.

Q: In laying out the PivotTable on the worksheet, you can drag the Condition field button from the Row Labels box to the Column Labels box. The PivotTable is rearranged so that the Condition field is a ____ label.
- column
- row
- range
- filter
A: column

Q: By default, the PivotTable report uses the ____ function for numbers in the Values area.
- COUNT
- AVERAGE
- MIN
- SUM
A: SUM

Q: You can point to any style in a gallery to see a ____ of the PivotTable with that style applied.
- Demo
- AutoView
- Live Preview
- Snapshot
A: Live Preview

Q: You can use the ____ tab to change the SUM function to a different summary function, in a PivotTable.
- New Function
- Change Function
- Summarize Values by
- Summary function
A: Summarize Values by

Q: The ____ report layout displays one column for each field and leaves space for column headers.
- Outline
- Design
- Tabular
- Headers
A: Tabular

Q: You cannot change data directly in the PivotTable. Instead, you must edit the Excel table, and then ____, or update, the PivotTable to reflect the updated data.
- reset
- refresh
- renew
- change
A: refresh

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 5-1<br></b>You are tutoring a fellow student who is new to the more advanced features of Excel..<br><br> Your tutee has a lot of familiarity with ranges from an earlier Excel class, but he knows that there is an alternative that will give him access to additional features that he does not have with a cell range. What is that option?
- Convert the range to a table.
- Convert the range to an index.
- Convert the range to a PivotChart.
- The tutee is wrong; the range has any many features as any Excel alternative.
A: Convert the range to a table.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 5-1<br></b>You are tutoring a fellow student who is new to the more advanced features of Excel..<br><br> Which of the following is NOT a feature that is unique to Excel tables (as opposed to structured ranges of data)?
- You can format quickly using a table style.
- You can enter a formula in one table cell that is automatically copied to all other cells in that table column.
- You can add new rows and columns that automatically expand the range.
- You can freeze the top row of the worksheet.
A: You can freeze the top row of the worksheet.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 5-2<br></b>Simon has just discovered the power of using text filters to control which records display in his worksheet, and he has begun to use them often to find precisely the records he needs. The following questions are based on a staff directory table that includes First Name, Last Name, Office Number, Department Name, and Phone Number.<br><br> If Simon wants to find all of his colleagues named Joseph, Joanne, and Josephine, what should he do?
- Create a text filter using the Begins With operator to display all records that have <i>Jo</i> at the beginning of the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that have <i>Jo</i> at the beginning of the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Begins With operator to display all records that have <i>Jos</i> at the beginning of the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that include <i>Jo</i> in the text value.
A: Create a text filter using the Begins With operator to display all records that have <i>Jo</i> at the beginning of the text value.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 5-2<br></b>Simon has just discovered the power of using text filters to control which records display in his worksheet, and he has begun to use them often to find precisely the records he needs. The following questions are based on a staff directory table that includes First Name, Last Name, Office Number, Department Name, and Phone Number.<br><br> If Simon wants to find all of his colleagues whose last names end in “berg” (such as Goldberg and Steenberg), what should he do?
- Create a text filter using the Ends With operator to display all records that have <i>dberg</i> as the last characters in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that include <i>berg</i> in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Ends With operator to display all records that have <i>berg</i> as the last characters in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that have <i>berg</i> as the last characters in the text value.
A: Create a text filter using the Ends With operator to display all records that have <i>berg</i> as the last characters in the text value.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 5-2<br></b>Simon has just discovered the power of using text filters to control which records display in his worksheet, and he has begun to use them often to find precisely the records he needs. The following questions are based on a staff directory table that includes First Name, Last Name, Office Number, Department Name, and Phone Number.<br><br> To find anyone whose department name is either Transaction Processing, Processing Operations, or Records Processing, what should he do?
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that have <i>Operations </i>anywhere in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Ends With operator to display all records that have <i>Processing</i> as the last characters in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Begins With operator to display all records that have <i>Processing </i>as the first characters in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that have <i>Processing</i> anywhere in the text value.
A: Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that have <i>Processing</i> anywhere in the text value.

Q: <b>Critical Thinking Case-Based Questions<br><br>Case 5-3<br></b>As she prepares her assignment for her Business Management class, Jamie goes to her friend Charlie for help with PivotTables because he has had a lot of experience with them in his job.<br><br> Which of the following is NOT a true statement Charlie can make to Jamie about PivotTables?
- To remove a field from a PivotTable, you click the field’s check box in the PivotTable Field list.
- You can rename a value label by typing the new text directly in any cell where the value label appears in the PivotTable.
- Removing a field from the PivotTable changes the underlying Excel table.
- All of the above statements are true.
A: Removing a field from the PivotTable changes the underlying Excel table.

Q: <b>Critical Thinking Case-Based Questions<br><br>Case 5-3<br></b>As she prepares her assignment for her Business Management class, Jamie goes to her friend Charlie for help with PivotTables because he has had a lot of experience with them in his job.<br><br> Jamie wants to be able to analyze date data in her PivotTable by month. What must she do with the date field in her PivotTable?
- She must aggregate the data by the date field.
- She must cluster the data by the date field.
- She must sort the data by the date field.
- She must group the data by the date field.
A: She must group the data by the date field.

Q: <b>Critical Thinking Case-Based Questions<br><br>Case 5-3<br></b>As she prepares her assignment for her Business Management class, Jamie goes to her friend Charlie for help with PivotTables because he has had a lot of experience with them in his job.<br><br> If Jamie decides that she wants to work with nonnumeric data in her PivotTable, what function must she use to produce summaries?
- SUM
- AGGREGATE
- TOTAL
- COUNT
A: COUNT

Q: <b>Critical Thinking Case-Based Questions<br><br>Case 5-3<br></b>As she prepares her assignment for her Business Management class, Jamie goes to her friend Charlie for help with PivotTables because he has had a lot of experience with them in his job.<br><br> Jamie wants to be able to use her PivotTable to combine items into groups. Which of the following is NOT true?
- Items that appear as row labels cannot be grouped.
- Items that appear as column labels can be grouped.
- If items are dates, they can be grouped automatically using the Grouping dialog box.
- If items are numbers, they can be grouped manually using the Ctrl key to select items in a group and then choosing Group from the shortcut menu.
A: Items that appear as row labels cannot be grouped.

Q: <b>Critical Thinking Case-Based Questions<br><br>Case 5-3<br></b>As she prepares her assignment for her Business Management class, Jamie goes to her friend Charlie for help with PivotTables because he has had a lot of experience with them in his job.<br><br> Jamie wants to use her PivotTable to show the total value of the cars for a series of car dealerships but she wants to filter the display to show only those dealers whose total stock of cars is greater than $1 million. How would she accomplish this?
- She would develop a PivotTable using the aggregate filter.
- She would develop a PivotTable using the report filter.
- She would develop a PivotTable using the category filter.
- She would develop a PivotTable using the value filter.
A: She would develop a PivotTable using the value filter.

Q: When related fields are grouped together in a row, they form a(n) ____________________, a collection of fields that describes a person, place, or thing.
A: record

Q: Each column in a range represents a(n) ____________________ that describes some attribute or characteristic of a person, place, or thing.
A: field

Q: The top row of a range should contain a(n) ____________________ name.
A: field

Q: Separate the data (including the header row) from other information in the worksheet by at least ________________ blank row and one blank column.
A: one

Q: To freeze a row, select the cell below the row(s) you want to freeze, click the ____________________ button in the Window group and then click Freeze Top Row.
A: Freeze Panes

Q: The second sort field in a sort is called the ____________________ field.
A: secondary sort

Q: Typically, you want to sort by the numbers, text, or dates stored in the cells, which are all ____________________.
A: values

Q: A(n) ____________________ list indicates the sequence in which you want data ordered.
A: custom

Q: The process of hiding certain records and viewing the ones you want is called ____________________ your data.
A: filtering

Q: When you want to see all the data in a filtered table, you can ____________________, or remove, the filters.
A: clear

Q: The ____________________ criteria filter requires that the records displaying begin with the specified text string.
A: Begins With

Q: <img width="374" height="233" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The entry 20000 is the ________________ for the first condition.
A: criterion

Q: The ____________________ command automatically inserts a subtotal line into the range for each group of data.
A: Subtotals

Q: A(n) ____________________ is an interactive table that enables you to group and summarize an Excel list into a concise, tabular format for easier reporting and analysis.
A: PivotTable

Q: In PivotTable terminology, the fields that you summarize are known as ____________________ fields.
A: value

Q: In addition to data fields, a PivotTable uses ____________________ fields to groups values such as department, model, year, and vehicle type in an automobile-related sheet, for example.
A: category

Q: <img width="494" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar008-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar008-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The box that is covering columns A, B, and C in the figure above is the PivotTable ________________ area.
A: report

Q: The benefit of a(n) ____________________ is that it summarizes large amounts of data into a readable format.
A: PivotTable

Q: A(n) ____________________ filter allows you to filter the PivotTable to display summarized data for one or more field items or all field items in the Report Filter area.
A: report

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a graphical representation of the data in a PivotTable.
A: PivotChart

Q: What are the guidelines for creating an effective structured range of data?
Feedback: * Enter field names in the top row of the range. A field name (column header) is a unique label that describes the contents of the data in that column. The row of field names is called the header row. Although the header row often is row 1, it can be any row. * Use short, descriptive field names. Shorter field names are easier to remember and enable more fields to appear in the workbook window at once. * Format field names to distinguish the header row from the data. For example, apply bold, color, and a different font size. * Enter the same kind of data for a field in each record. * Separate the data from other information in the worksheet by at least one blank row and one blank column. The blank row and column enable Excel to accurately determine the range of the data.

Q: What are the steps for sorting data using multiple fields?
Feedback: Click any cell in a table or range. In the Sort & Filters group on the Data tab, click the Sort button to open the Sort dialog box. If the Sort by row exists, modify the primary sort by selections; otherwise, click the Add Level button to insert the Sort by row. Click the Sort by arrow, select the column heading that you want to specify as the primary sort field, click the Sort On arrow to select the type of data, and then click the Order arrow to select the sort order. To sort by a second column, click the Add Level button to add the first Then by row. Click the Sort by arrow, select the column heading that you want to specify as the secondary sort field, click the Sort On arrow to select the type of data, and then click the Order arrow to select the sort order. To sort by additional columns, click the Add Level button and select appropriate Then by, Sort On, and Order values. Click the OK button.

Q: What is a PivotTable? Describe its use in Excel, including the definition of value fields and category fields.
Feedback: A PivotTable is an interactive table that enables you to group and summarize an Excel list into a concise, tabular format for easier reporting and analysis. A PivotTable summarizes data in different categories, using functions such as COUNT, SUM, AVERAGE, MAX, and MIN. To generate a PivotTable report, you need to specify which fields you want to summarize; in PivotTable terminology, these fields are known as data fields. In addition to value fields, a PivotTable uses category fields to group values. Category fields appear in PivotTables as row labels, column labels, and report filters, which allows you to focus on a subset of the PivotTable by displaying one, several, or all items.

Q: Using multiple worksheets makes it more difficult for you to group your data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A worksheet cluster is a collection of two or more selected worksheets.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Once you group a collection of worksheets, any changes you make to one worksheet are applied to all sheets in the group.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If a worksheet group includes all the worksheets in a workbook, you can edit only the active worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you delete a value from one cell, the content is also deleted from the same cell in all the worksheets in the group.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Using multiple worksheets with identical layouts enables you to use 3-D references to quickly summarize the data in another worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When the source and destination workbooks are stored in the same folder, you still need to include the location information in the workbook reference that links the two files.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If the destination file is closed when you make a change in the source file, you choose whether to update the link to display the current values when you open the destination file or continue to display the older values from the destination file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The workspace file contains the location and name of the file as well as the actual workbooks and worksheets.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel has some templates that are automatically installed on your hard disk.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you use a template, you can make any changes you want to the workbook without affecting the template file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you create a new workbook from a template, an unnamed copy of the template opens.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A workbook based on a specific template always displays the name of the template followed by the date.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A template can use most Excel features except macros.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To delete the data values, you can also click the Clear button in the Editing group on the Home tab, and then click Clear Contents.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: All template files have the .xlts file extension.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In Backstage view, the New from existing button opens a copy of the selected file, not the selected file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can save your files directly from Microsoft Office 2010 onto SkyDrive from Worksheet view.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can view, but cannot edit, workbooks in the Excel Web App.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: After you have a Windows Live ID, you can access your SkyDrive and the Office Web Apps.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To select nonadjacent worksheets, you click a sheet tab of one of the worksheets, and then press and hold down the <u>Shift</u> key as you click the sheet tabs of other worksheets you want included in the group.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In order to reference data located in one workbook in another workbook, you have to create a(n) <u>dialog</u> between the two workbooks.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you use the point-and-click method to build formulas with external references, Excel enters all of the required punctuation, <u>except</u> quotation marks.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When the destination file is <u>closed</u>, and the source files are closed, the complete file path is included as part of the external reference formula that appears in the formula bar.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="655" height="260" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The Security Warning shown in the accompanying figure appears in the <u>Security Bar</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, cell A8 contains a <u>hyperlink</u>. 
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> If Excel has not attempted to update the links in a given session, the Edit Links dialog box will show the status of the links as <u>not checked</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>spreadsheet</u> is a workbook with labels, formats, and formulas already built into it with data removed.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Hyperlinks are usually represented by colored words with <u>underlines</u> or images.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To delete a hyperlink, right-click the hyperlink cell and then click Clear <u>Value</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The default template contains the default formatting you start out with in every new workbook, including labels aligned to the <u>right</u> side of a cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Some of the task-specific <u>tasks</u> available from the Office.com site include: Monthly Family Budget, Inventory List, and Time sheets.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel, by default, looks for template files in the <u>Templates</u> folder, which is where custom template files are often stored.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <u>Web</u> apps allow you to create, view, and edit Office files directly from a Web browser as well as share files and collaborate with other users online.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: SkyDrive and Office Web Apps are <u>static</u> Web pages, and might change over time,.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A worksheet ____ is a collection of two or more selected worksheets.
- index
- roster
- group
- cluster
A: group

Q: Like cell ____, a worksheet group can contain adjacent or nonadjacent sheets.
- controls
- groups
- tabs
- ranges
A: ranges

Q: To select adjacent worksheets, you use the ____ key.
- Shift
- Alt
- Ctrl
- F1
A: Shift

Q: To select nonadjacent worksheets, you use the ____ key.
- Alt
- Ctrl
- Esc
- Shift
A: Ctrl

Q: Rather than retyping the same formulas across a series of worksheets, you can enter them all at once by creating a worksheet ____.
- index
- roster
- group
- cluster
A: group

Q: If you cannot see the sheet tab of a worksheet you want to include in a group, use the sheet ____ controls to display it.
- index
- roster
- navigation
- cluster
A: navigation

Q: The ____ caption indicates a worksheet group.
- [Worksheets]
- [Selected Sheets]
- [Group]
- [Workgroup]
A: [Group]

Q: To ungroup worksheets, you can click a sheet ____ of a sheet not in the group.
- index
- panel
- tab
- pane
A: tab

Q: When a worksheet group is selected, the ____ includes text to indicate this.
- title bar
- worksheet bar
- status bar
- formula bar
A: title bar

Q: The active worksheet in a group is indicated by ____ text.
- bold
- italicized
- underlined
- red
A: bold

Q: To remove a worksheet group, you can right-click the sheet tab of a sheet in the group and then click ____ on the shortcut menu.
- Remove Group
- No Group
- Exit Group
- Ungroup Sheets
A: Ungroup Sheets

Q: To move a worksheet or worksheet group to another location in the same workbook, select the worksheets and then drag and drop them by the selected sheet ____.
- tabs
- indices
- keys
- icons
A: tabs

Q: When you reference a cell or range in a different worksheet, the ____ separates the sheet reference from the cell reference.
- ?
- !
- "
- ;
A: !

Q: When you reference cells and ranges in other worksheets, if the worksheet name contains spaces, you must enclose the sheet name in ____.
- braces
- brackets
- parentheses
- single quotation marks
A: single quotation marks

Q: Which of the following formulas is correct, given a sheet named Sales Data?
- (Sales Data)!D10
- [Sales Data]!D10
- 'Sales Data'!D10
- {Sales Data}!D10
A: 'Sales Data'!D10

Q: The general format of a 3-D cell reference is ____.
- CellRange!WorksheetRange
- WorksheetRange!CellRange
- WorkbookRange!CellRange
- CellRange!WorkbookRange
A: WorksheetRange!CellRange

Q: The worksheet range ____ references the worksheets, "Sheet1," "Sheet2," "Sheet3," and "Sheet4."
- Sheet1_Sheet4
- Sheet1-Sheet4
- Sheet1:Sheet4
- Sheet1/Sheet4
A: Sheet1:Sheet4

Q: A(n) ____ cell reference specifies not only the rows and columns of a cell range, but also the names of the worksheets on which the cells appear.
- indexed
- relational
- absolute
- 3-D
A: 3-D

Q: If a sheet range includes more than one sheet, you specify the first and last sheet in the range separated by a ____.
- colon
- semicolon
- comma
- plus sign
A: colon

Q: A link is a connection between two ____ allowing information to be transferred from one to the other.
- cells
- ranges
- columns
- files
A: files

Q: If you need to use data located in one workbook in the other workbook, you have to create a(n) ____ between the two workbooks.
- anchor
- source
- link
- index
A: link

Q: The general form of an external reference is ____, where Path is the path of the workbook file on the computer or network, Workbook Name is the filename of the workbook, and Sheet Range and Cell Range are worksheets and cells in the workbook, respectively.
- (WorkbookName)WorksheetName!CellRange
- [WorkbookName]WorksheetName!CellRange
- [WorkbookName]WorksheetName!CellRange
- /WorkbookName/WorksheetName/CellRange
A: [WorkbookName]WorksheetName!CellRange

Q: If you want to create a cell reference to the B6 on the Summary Info worksheet of the Sales.xls workbook, you would use the following external reference: ____.
- '[Sales.xlsx]Summary Info'/B6
- '(Sales.xlsx)Summary Info'!B6
- '[Sales.xlsx:Summary Info]'!B6
- '[Sales.xlsx]Summary Info'!B6
A: '[Sales.xlsx]Summary Info'!B6

Q: Which of the following is NOT an option for arranging your workbooks?
- tiled
- cascade
- horizontal
- lateral
A: lateral

Q: The ____ arrangement option layers the open workbooks on the screen.
- Cascade
- Horizontal
- Tiled
- Lateral
A: Cascade

Q: A formula can include a reference to another workbook (called an ____ reference), which creates a set of linked workbooks.
- internal
- external
- import
- export
A: external

Q: You can create a(n) ____ reference by deleting the $ from the row reference in the cell reference $B$6.
- mixed
- absolute
- relative
- indexed
A: mixed

Q: Formulas created using the point-and-click method contain ____ references.
- absolute
- mixed
- relative
- relational
A: absolute

Q: If you receive a destination workbook but the source files are not included, click the ____ Link button in the Edit Links dialog box to replace the external references with the existing values.
- Fix
- Break
- Update
- Check
A: Break

Q: If you trust the provider of source files, you can choose to ____ the content, which allows the external reference formulas to function and updates the links in the destination workbook.
- enable
- embed
- concatenate
- consolidate
A: enable

Q: When you save a workbook that contains external reference formulas Excel stores the most recent results of those formulas in the ____ file.
- source
- destination
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: destination

Q: As part of the Excel security system that attempts to protect against ____, links to other workbooks are not updated without your permission.
- user errors
- malicious software
- contaminated hardware
- import glitches
A: malicious software

Q: When two workbooks are ____, it is important that the data in the destination file accurately reflects the contents of the source file.
- linked
- embedded
- concatenated
- consolidated
A: linked

Q: If the destination file is closed when you make a change in the ____ file, you can choose whether to update the link to display the current values when you open the destination file.
- target
- origin
- source
- key
A: source

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Click the button marked ____ in the accompanying figure to fix broken links.
- Break Link
- Update Values
- Check Status
- Change Source
A: Change Source

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Click the button marked ____ in the accompanying figure to replace the link to a source file with the current values for the linked cells.
- Break Link
- Update Values
- Check Status
- Change Source
A: Break Link

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the Edit Links dialog box in the accompanying figure, ____ indicates that links are updated automatically.
- Update Values
- Automatic
- A
- UPD
A: A

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the Edit Links dialog box in the accompanying figure, ____ indicates that a link has to be updated manually by the user.
- M
- A
- U
- UPD
A: M

Q: The ____ dialog box lists all of the links in the current workbook.
- Show Links
- Edit Links
- Link and Embed
- Paste Special
A: Edit Links

Q: If you break a link, how do you undo the action?
- Press Ctrl+Z
- Use the Undo command on the Edit menu
- Retype the external reference formulas
- Either a. or b.
A: Retype the external reference formulas

Q: In regard to open workbooks, a workspace saves all of the following EXCEPT ____.
- the workbooks themselves
- window sizes
- zoom magnifications
- formats used
A: the workbooks themselves

Q: In the Edit Links dialog box, the ____ option shows whether Excel successfully accessed the link and updated the values from the source document.
- Check
- Links
- Status
- View
A: Status

Q: If Excel successfully accessed the link and updated the values from the source document, the status in the Edit Links dialog box will be ____.
- Done
- Completed
- OK
- Good
A: OK

Q: To manually update the link and see the new data values, click the Update Values button in the Edit Links dialog box.
- Change Source
- Update Values
- Check Status
- Open Source
A: Update Values

Q: In the Edit Links dialog box, Type identifies the type of each ____ file.
- destination
- source
- import
- all of the above
A: source

Q: In the Edit Links dialog box, ____ indicates the file to which the link points.
- Destination
- Source
- Import
- Link
A: Source

Q: Choosing to ____ update values is useful when you want to see the older data values before updating to the new data.
- Automatically
- Manually
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: Manually

Q: The ____ button on the Ribbon is used to create a hyperlink.
- Link
- Hyperlink
- Template
- Create
A: Hyperlink

Q: You can insert a ____ directly in a workbook file.
- Word document
- hyperlink
- PowerPoint presentation
- all of the above
A: hyperlink

Q: ____ are usually represented by colored words with underlines or images.
- Indices
- Hyperlinks
- Templates
- Icons
A: Hyperlinks

Q: When you click a(n) ____, the computer switches to the file or portion of the file that it references.
- index
- hyperlink
- template
- icon
A: hyperlink

Q: <img width="488" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Hyperlinks like the ones created with the dialog box in the accompanying figure can be used to jump to a specific cell or range within ____.
- the active worksheet
- another worksheet
- another workbook
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: <img width="488" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Hyperlinks like the ones created with the dialog box in the accompanying figure can be used to jump to ____.
- sites on the Web
- a Word document
- a PowerPoint presentation
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: <img width="488" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> By default, hyperlinks like those created by the dialog box in the accompanying figure are in ____ font.
- italicized red
- underlined blue
- boldfaced green
- italicized blue
A: underlined blue

Q: <img width="488" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The default ____ for a hyperlink is the folder location and the name of the file to which you will link.
- title
- alt text
- description
- ScreenTip
A: ScreenTip

Q: To delete the hyperlink but keep the text, right-click the hyperlink cell, and then click ____ Hyperlink.
- Delete
- Erase
- Archive
- Remove
A: Remove

Q: The default template has column widths is set to ____ characters.
- 15.23
- 12.44
- 10.85
- 8.43
A: 8.43

Q: The default template has ____ worksheets inserted in the workbook.
- three
- four
- five
- six
A: three

Q: The default template contains the default formatting you start out with in every new workbook, including ____ 11-point font.
- Calibri
- Helvetica
- Geneva
- Times New Roman
A: Calibri

Q: Each time you start Excel, a blank ____ workbook opens.
- Book
- NewBook
- Book1
- Sheet1
A: Book1

Q: A ____ is a blank workbook that you can open with the text, formats, and formulas already built into it.
- boiler
- summary sheet
- template
- range master
A: template

Q: When you start Excel and use the blank workbook that displays, you are actually using a workbook based on a template known as the ___ template.
- default
- master
- index
- standard
A: default

Q: Which of the following is NOT a task-specific template available from the Microsoft Office Online Web site?
- Family Budget
- Inventory List
- Team Roster
- Fax Cover Sheet
A: Fax Cover Sheet

Q: The ____ template in Excel creates an online time card to track employees’ work hours.
- Payroll
- Personnel Statement
- Time Sheet
- Employment Calculator
A: Time Sheet

Q: The default template contains the default formatting you start out with in every new workbook, including the ____ number format.
- Number
- Currency
- Integer
- General
A: General

Q: The default template places the formula results aligned to the ____ of a cell.
- right side
- left side
- top
- bottom
A: right side

Q: To create a template, you simply save an Excel workbook in template format using the ____ dialog command.
- Template
- Save
- Save As
- Convert
A: Save As

Q: All template files have a(n) ____ extension.
- .xlsx
- .xltx
- .xldx
- any of the above
A: .xltx

Q: To delete the data values, you can click the Clear button in the Editing group on the ____ tab, and then click Clear Contents.
- File
- Home
- Review
- View
A: Home

Q: Office Web Apps are a part of Windows ____, which is a collection of services and Web applications that you can use to be more productive.
- Now
- Live
- Essentials
- Web
A: Live

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-1<br></b>Perry is having trouble using linked workbooks, so he consults his colleague Malia for help.<br><br> Perry tells Malia that when he attempts to open a workbook, the Edit Links dialog box appears with the message "This workbook contains one or more links that cannot be updated." Malia suggests several possible causes of this error message. Which of the following is NOT one of the possible causes?
- one of the workbook's source files was renamed
- one of the workbook's source files was moved to a different folder
- one of the workbook's source files was replaced with an updated file of the same name
- the workbook was sent to him without links
A: one of the workbook's source files was replaced with an updated file of the same name

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-1<br></b>Perry is having trouble using linked workbooks, so he consults his colleague Malia for help.<br><br> After Malia has helped Perry to resolve his original problem, Perry asks her about another linked workbook he has received. The source files for this workbook have not been included, but Perry would like to use the workbook with the most recent values from the source files. What should Malia tell him?
- He can open the workbook and click the Continue button in the Edit Links dialog box.
- He can open the workbook and click the Break button in the Edit Links dialog box.
- He can open the workbook and click the Change Source button in the Edit Links dialog box.
- He will not be able to use the workbook until he obtains copies of the source files.
A: He can open the workbook and click the Continue button in the Edit Links dialog box.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-1<br></b>Perry is having trouble using linked workbooks, so he consults his colleague Malia for help.<br><br> Finally, Perry asks Malia what steps (if any) need to be taken to keep a destination file up-to-date if he updates a value in one of the source files. Which of the following statements by Malia would NOT be correct?
- If a destination file is open when a source file is changed, the destination file will be updated automatically.
- Source files cannot be updated unless the corresponding destination file is open.
- In some circumstances, it is possible to choose whether a destination file should reflect changes made to the source files.
- All of the above statements are correct.
A: Source files cannot be updated unless the corresponding destination file is open.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-2<br></b>Telden has discovered the power of creating a workspace that allows her to access a collection of workbooks at the same time.<br><br> In creating the workspace, Telden wants to use a layout in which the workbooks overlap each other with all the title bars visible. Telden opens all of the workbooks, and then she clicks the View tab on the Ribbon and clicks the Arrange All button. What should she do next to obtain the desired layout?
- Click the Tile Horizontally option button
- Click the Tile Vertically option button
- Click the Overlap option button
- Click the Cascade option button
A: Click the Cascade option button

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-2<br></b>Telden has discovered the power of creating a workspace that allows her to access a collection of workbooks at the same time.<br><br> Telden wants to use the workspace she has created on another computer. What steps does she need to take?
- She needs to copy just the workspace file to the other computer.
- She needs to copy just the individual worksheets to the other computer.
- She needs to copy both the workspace file and the individual worksheets to the other computer.
- She cannot copy the workspace; instead, she needs to copy the individual worksheets and recreate the workspace on the other computer.
A: She needs to copy both the workspace file and the individual worksheets to the other computer.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-2<br></b>Telden has discovered the power of creating a workspace that allows her to access a collection of workbooks at the same time.<br><br> Which of the following statements about workspaces is NOT correct?
- A workspace saves the contents of the currently opened workbooks.
- A workspace saves the window sizes of the currently opened workbooks.
- A workspace saves the locations of the currently opened workbooks.
- A workspace saves the magnifications of the currently opened workbooks.
A: A workspace saves the contents of the currently opened workbooks.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-2<br></b>Telden has discovered the power of creating a workspace that allows her to access a collection of workbooks at the same time.<br><br> When Telden goes to save the workspace, what is the required file extension?
- .wxls
- .xlww
- .xlsw
- .xlw
A: .xlw

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-3<br></b>Your friend Connor asks you to help him learn more about using hyperlinks in an Excel workbook file.<br><br> Which of the following statements about hyperlinks in Excel workbooks is NOT correct?
- They are usually represented by colored words with underlines or images.
- They can be used to jump to a specific cell or range within the active worksheet, another worksheet, or another workbook.
- They can be used to jump to other types of files or sites on the Web.
- To use a hyperlink, you can click anywhere in the cell that contains the link, including white space in the cell or any text that flows into an adjacent cell.
A: To use a hyperlink, you can click anywhere in the cell that contains the link, including white space in the cell or any text that flows into an adjacent cell.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-3<br></b>Your friend Connor asks you to help him learn more about using hyperlinks in an Excel workbook file.<br><br> Connor wants to create a hyperlink to a location in his current workbook. He clicks the Hyperlink button in the Links group on the Insert tab. What option should he select from the Link to list?
- Existing File
- Place in This Document
- Create New Document
- E-mail Address
A: Place in This Document

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-3<br></b>Your friend Connor asks you to help him learn more about using hyperlinks in an Excel workbook file.<br><br> Connor has heard that ScreenTips can be used in conjunction with hyperlinks. Which of the following statements about ScreenTips is NOT correct?
- They appear whenever you place the pointer over a hyperlink.
- You can specify the contents of a ScreenTip when you create a hyperlink.
- The default ScreenTip for a hyperlink is the message "Active Hyperlink."
- You can change the contents of an existing ScreenTip by editing the hyperlink.
A: The default ScreenTip for a hyperlink is the message "Active Hyperlink."

Q: A(n) ____________________ group is a collection of two or more selected worksheets.
A: worksheet

Q: A 3-D cell ____________________ specifies not only the rows and columns of a cell range, but also the range of worksheet names that the cells appear on.
A: reference

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a connection between two files allowing information to be transferred from one file to the other.
A: link

Q: When two files are linked together, the workbook that contains the information is the ____________________ file.
A: source

Q: When two files are linked together, the ____________________ file receives the information.
A: destination

Q: If both the ____________________ and source files are open, Excel will update the link between them automatically whenever a value in the source file is changed.
A: destination

Q: When the destination file is ____________________, and the source files are closed, the complete file path is included as part of the external reference formula that appears in the formula bar.
A: open

Q: You can use the ____________________ dialog box to break links between workbooks.
A: Edit Links

Q: A(n) ____________________ is an Excel file that saves information about all of the currently opened workbooks.
A: workspace

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a link in a file, such as a workbook, to information within that file or another file.
A: hyperlink

Q: <img width="488" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To open the dialog box in the accompanying figure, click the ____________________ tab on the Ribbon, and then, in the Links group, click the Hyperlink button.
A: Insert

Q: ____________________ appear whenever you place the pointer over a hyperlink.
A: ScreenTips

Q: ____________________ provide additional information about the target of a link.
A: ScreenTips

Q: When you start Excel and see the blank workbook called Book1, you are actually using the ____________________ template.
A: default

Q: When creating and saving a custom template, you may find it helpful to replace variable data values with ____________________, which will help you recognize the cells in which to enter new data.
A: spaces

Q: To use a template that you create, the template file is typically placed in the ____________________ folder.
A: Templates

Q: After you have saved a template, you can access the template from the New tab in ________________ view.
A: Backstage

Q: ________________ refers to data, applications, and even resources that are stored on servers that you access over the Internet rather than on your own computer.
A: Cloud computing

Q: To save files to SkyDrive or use the Office Web Apps, you need a Windows ________________.
A: Live ID

Q: The interface for the Excel Web App is similar to the interface of the full-featured program on your computer; however, only a limited number of ________________ are available.
A: Templates

Q: Provide at least two different examples of when to use a linked workbook.
Feedback: Separate workbooks have the same purpose and structure. For example, you can use related workbooks for different stores, branch offices, or departments with the same products or expenditure types and reporting periods (weekly, monthly, quarterly). A large worksheet has become unwieldy to use. You can break the large worksheet into smaller workbooks for each quarter, division, or product. A summary worksheet consolidates information from different workbook files. The linked workbooks enable you to more quickly and accurately summarize the information, and you know the summary worksheet contains the most current information if the information is later updated. Source workbooks you receive from another person or group are continually updated. With linked workbooks, you can replace an outdated source workbook and the destination workbook with then reflect the latest information without your having to modify the formulas.

Q: What are the steps to inserting a hyperlink and linking to: a file or Web page, a location in the current workbook, a new document, and an e-mail address.
Feedback: Select the text, graphic, or cell in which you want to insert the hyperlink. In the Links group on the Insert tab, click the Hyperlink button. To link to a file or Web page, click Existing File or Web Page in the Link to list, and then select the file or Web page from the Look in box. To link to a location in the current workbook, click Place in This Document in the Link to list, and then select the worksheet, cell, or range in the current workbook. To link to a new document, click Create New Document in the Link to list, and then specify the filename and path of the new document. To link to an e-mail address, click E-mail Address in the Link to list, and then enter the e-mail address of the recipient and a subject line for the e-mail message. Click the OK button.

Q: What is an example of when you would use a template? Name at least 3 benefits of using a workbook template.
Feedback: Example of when you would use a template (answers will vary): A large organization may need to collect the same information from several regions. By creating and distributing a workbook template, each region knows what data to track and where to enter it. The template already includes the formulas, so the results are calculated consistently. Advantages of using templates (answers will vary): - Templates save time and ensure consistency in the design and content of workbooks because all labels, formatting, and formulas are entered once. - Templates ensure accuracy because formulas can be entered and verified once, and then be used with confidence in all workbooks. - Templates standardize the appearance and content of workbooks. - Templates prevent data from being overwritten when an existing workbook is inadvertently saved with new data rather than saved as a new workbook.

Q: All the logical conditions listed in an AND function must be true for the AND function to return a TRUE value.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If a formula is in a calculated table column, you need to make a change in only one cell and the change will automatically be copied to all the cells in the column.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Whenever you enter a formula into an empty table row, Excel automatically fills the rest of that table row with the formula.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Calculated columns work only in ranges of data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you need to modify the formula in a calculated column, you edit the formula in one cell of the column and then you modify the formulas in that table column.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you need to track information such as the specific age, a best practice is to use calculations to determine this value based on values in the Birth Date field.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A formula that includes a structured reference can be fully qualified or unqualified.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The compare values, the categories for a lookup table, are located in the table’s last column or row.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When the lookup value matches a compare value, the corresponding value from the lookup table is returned to the cell with the lookup formula.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The ORERROR function can determine if a cell contains an error value and then display the message you choose.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Nesting IF functions will allow for three or more outcomes.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Two common categories of formula errors in Excel are syntax errors and logic errors.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="494" height="286" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> According to the dialog box in the accompanying figure, the lookup_value is found in row 2 of the table.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="494" height="286" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> According to the dialog box in the accompanying figure, the HealthPlanRates table contains the data you want to look up.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="494" height="286" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> According to the dialog box in the accompanying figure, the user is not looking for an exact match.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="494" height="286" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Given the dialog box in the accompanying figure, if a value in column L does not match a value in the first column of the HealthPlanRates table, #NULL appears in the cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="494" height="286" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> According to the dialog box in the accompanying figure, the column in the HealthPlanRates lookup table that stores the value to be returned is the first column.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When a lookup table is used with a range of values, the compare values must be sorted in alphabetical order if they are text.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Even if the compare values are not arranged in order, Excel can still retrieve the correct results from a lookup table used with a range of values.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The COUNTAS function counts the number of cells within a range that meet multiple criteria.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The IF function results in <u>two values</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In a fully qualified structured reference, the table name <u>follows</u> the column qualifier.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In an <u>unqualified</u> structured reference, only the column qualifier appears in the reference.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you use a structured reference outside a table or in another worksheet to reference an Excel table or portion of the table, you need to use a fully <u>unqualified</u> reference.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In the DATEDIF function, the first date argument is the <u>latest</u> date.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You <u>cannot</u> nest more than one IF function.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If any logical condition listed in the function is true, the <u>AND</u> function returns a TRUE value.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Duplicate</u> value highlighting helps to verify that columns of data have unique entries.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In most cases, when manually creating a conditional formatting formula, the formula should use <u>absolute</u> references and point to the first row of data in a table.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When manually creating a conditional formatting formula, if the formula references a cell or range outside the table, <u>relative</u> references should be used.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>#VALUE!</u> error value can occur when a cell used by the function was deleted from the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>#REF!</u> error value can occur when you supply a range of values to a function that requires a single value.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: An error value begins with a <u>number sign</u> followed by an error name, which indicates the type of error.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can calculate the number of cells in a range that match criteria you specify using the <u>SUMIF</u> function.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You use the <u>MEANIF</u> function to calculate the average of values in a range that meet criteria you specify.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When Excel automatically fills the rest of a table column with a formula entered into an empty table column, this is referred to as a(n) ____ column.
- concatenated
- calculated
- autofilled
- custom
A: calculated

Q: The ____ function is a logical function that returns a TRUE value if any of the logical conditions are true and a FALSE value if all the logical conditions are FALSE.
- IF
- AND
- OR
- THIS
A: OR

Q: To get the effect of a calculated column in a range of data, you must copy and paste the formula or use the ____ feature.
- Concatenation
- Merged
- AutoFill
- Indexed
A: AutoFill

Q: If you edit a cell in a calculated column so it is no longer consistent with the other formulas in the column, a ____ appears in the upper-left corner of the cell.
- red circle
- blue square
- red square
- green triangle
A: green triangle

Q: After a calculated column contains an inconsistency, any other edits you make to that column are no longer automatically applied to the rest of the cells in that column because Excel does not overwrite ____ values.
- indexed
- marginal
- custom
- filled
A: custom

Q: In many situations, the value you store in a cell depends on certain ____.
- conditions
- indices
- functions
- formulas
A: conditions

Q: To evaluate a condition in Excel, you use the ____ function.
- HAVE
- THIS
- IF
- BUT
A: IF

Q: The ____ function is a logical function that evaluates a condition and then returns one value if the condition is true and another value if the condition is false.
- THIS
- IF
- WHEN
- NOT
A: IF

Q: ____ just above a cell in the header row of an Excel table to select the column data but not the header.
- Click
- Double-click
- Triple-click
- Right-click
A: Click

Q: ____ just above a cell in the header row of an Excel table to select the entire column including the column header.
- Click
- Double-click
- Triple-click
- Right-click
A: Double-click

Q: You could test two or more conditions and determine whether all conditions are true using the ____ function.
- OR
- IF
- AND
- THIS
A: AND

Q: If all of the logical conditions are true, the AND function returns the logical value ____.
- FALSE
- ON
- TRUE
- OFF
A: TRUE

Q: You can include up to ____ logical conditions in the AND function.
- 25
- 50
- 225
- 255
A: 255

Q: The ____ function calculates the difference between two dates and shows the result in months, days, or years.
- nested IF
- CALIF
- DATEDIF
- DATE
A: DATEDIF

Q: With the DATEDIF function, the ____ interval code means months.
- m
- mo
- mon
- mth
A: m

Q: Column ____ provide a description of the data entered in each column.
- keys
- headers
- indices
- seals
A: headers

Q: ____ references make it easier to create formulas that use portions or all of an Excel table because the names or headers are usually simpler to identify than cell addresses.
- Indexed
- Structured
- Key
- Logical
A: Structured

Q: When you want to reference an entire column of data in a table, you create a column ____.
- label
- name
- variable
- qualifier
A: qualifier

Q: If you are not sure of a table’s name, click in the table, click the ____ tab on the Ribbon, and then click the Table Name box in the Properties group.
- Layout
- Format
- Table Tools Design
- Structured References
A: Table Tools Design

Q: When you create a calculated column, you can use ____ references to create the formula.
- indexed
- structured
- key
- logical
A: structured

Q: If you are creating a calculated column or formula within an Excel table, you can use the ____ structured reference in the formula.
- basic
- advanced
- unqualified
- restricted
A: unqualified

Q: Using the VLOOKUP function, when the lookup value matches a(n) ____ value, the corresponding value from the lookup table is returned to the cell with the lookup formula.
- key
- index
- compare
- rating
A: compare

Q: You can ____ IF functions to allow for three or more outcomes.
- loop
- cycle
- nest
- link
A: nest

Q: <img width="437" height="258" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Given the flowchart in the accompanying figure, the Pay Grade of ____ yields a Bonus value of 2500.
- 1
- 2
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: 1

Q: <img width="437" height="258" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Given the flowchart in the accompanying figure, the Pay Grade of ____ yields a Bonus value of 5000.
- 1
- 2
- 3
- 4
A: 2

Q: <img width="437" height="258" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Given the flowchart in the accompanying figure, the Pay Grade of ____ yields a Bonus value of 7500.
- 1
- 2
- 3
- none of the above
A: 3

Q: <img width="437" height="258" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The complete formula that corresponds to the flowchart in the accompanying figure is ____.
- =IF([Pay Grade]=2,2500,IF([Pay Grade]=1,5000,7500))
- =AND([Pay Grade]=2,2500,AND([Pay Grade]=1,5000,7500))
- =IF([Pay Grade]=1,2500,IF([Pay Grade]=2,5000,7500))
- =AND([Pay Grade]=1,2500,AND([Pay Grade]=2,5000,7500))
A: =IF([Pay Grade]=1,2500,IF([Pay Grade]=2,5000,7500))

Q: An alternative to using several nested IF functions is to use a ____ table.
- lookup
- value
- comparison
- rating
A: lookup

Q: When you retrieve a particular value from a lookup table, the ____ value is the value you are trying to find.
- lookup
- compare
- rating
- absolute
A: lookup

Q: Lookup ____ allow you to use tables of data to “look up” values and insert them in another worksheet location.
- functions
- formulas
- equations
- calculations
A: functions

Q: The table that stores the data you want to retrieve is called a lookup table, and it organizes the data you want to retrieve into different ____, such as by product ID.
- tabs
- categories
- cells
- properties
A: categories

Q: Placing cell references to input values rather than constants in formulas makes a worksheet ____.
- more flexible
- easier to update
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: The ____ function searches vertically down the first column of the lookup table.
- VLOOK
- VLOOKUP
- HLOOK
- HLOOKUP
A: VLOOKUP

Q: When using VLOOKUP, the ____argument is optional.
- lookup_value
- table_array
- range_lookup
- col_index
A: range_lookup

Q: Using the VLOOKUP function, an exact match lookup occurs when the value entered must match one of the values in ____ of the lookup table.
- the first column
- any column
- the first row
- any row
A: the first column

Q: Using the VLOOKUP function, an approximate match lookup occurs when the value entered falls within a range of values in ____ of the lookup table.
- the first column
- any column
- the first row
- any row
A: the first column

Q: For the col_index_num value, be sure to enter the number that corresponds to the column’s position rather than its column letter; otherwise, the VLOOKUP formula may return ____.
- #NAME?
- #VALUE!
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: If you see ____ as the result of a VLOOKUP formula, you might have entered a letter for the col_index_num instead of a number.
- #NULL
- #REF?
- #NAME?
- #DIV/0
A: #NAME?

Q: You can use a ____ function to return a value from a table that is based on an approximate match lookup.
- VLOOKUP
- VAVERAGE
- VMATCH
- VAPPROXIMATE
A: VLOOKUP

Q: When a lookup table is used with a range of values, the compare values must be sorted in ____ order if they are text and in low-to-high order if they are numbers.
- alphabetical
- date
- size
- calculated
A: alphabetical

Q: To set up an approximate match lookup table so it works in Excel, the leftmost column in the lookup table must represent the lower end of the range for each category, and the lookup table must be sorted in ____.
- ascending order based on the value in the first column
- descending order based on the value in the first column
- ascending order based on the value in the last column
- descending order based on the value in the last column
A: ascending order based on the value in the first column

Q: ____ lookup tables are commonly used to find a taxpayer’s tax rate in a tax table, find a shipping charge based on the weight of a package in a shipping charges table, or determine a student’s letter grade from a table of grading criteria.
- Range
- Approximate
- Calculated
- Exact match
A: Approximate

Q: Omitting the range_lookup entry makes VLOOKUP a(n) ____ lookup.
- range
- approximate match
- exact match
- calculated
A: range

Q: Error values indicate that some element in a ____ is preventing Excel from returning a calculated value.
- formula
- cell referenced in a formula
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: An error value begins with a(n) ____ followed by an error name that indicates the type of error.
- number sign
- asterisk
- exclamation point
- plus sign
A: number sign

Q: The major difference between HLOOKUP and VLOOKUP functions is the way the lookup tables are ____.
- named
- organized
- saved
- opened
A: organized

Q: The ____ error value means that Excel does not recognize text in the formula or function.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #NAME?

Q: The ____ error value means that, for example, a function name is misspelled.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #NAME?

Q: The ____ error value means that a value is not available to a function or formula.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #N/A

Q: The ____ error value occurs when an invalid value is specified in the LOOKUP function.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #N/A

Q: The ____ error value means that a formula or function requires two cell ranges to intersect but they do not.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #NULL!

Q: The ____ error value means that invalid numbers are used in a formula or function.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #NUM!

Q: The Conditional Formatting button provides access to the ____.
- Duplicate Values conditional format
- Manage Rules option
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: You can edit existing conditional formatting rules from the Conditional Formatting ____ dialog box. Click the Edit Rule button and make the appropriate changes.
- Rules Editor
- Rules Manager
- Editor
- Manager
A: Rules Manager

Q: The ____ function calculates the number of cells in a range that match criteria you specify, such as counting the number of company employees located in Austin.
- NUMBERIF
- COUNTIF
- NUMBERAS
- COUNTAS
A: COUNTIF

Q: The ____ function adds the values in a range that match criteria you specify, such as adding the total salary paid to Austin employees.
- ADDIF
- ADDAS
- SUMIF
- SUMAS
A: SUMIF

Q: The ____ function calculates the average of values in a range that match criteria you specify, such as calculating the average salary paid to employees in each city.
- AVERAGEAS
- AVERAGEOR
- AVERAGEAND
- AVERAGEIF
A: AVERAGEIF

Q: ____ formatting changes a cell’s formatting when its contents match a specified condition.
- Theme
- Object
- Conditional
- Optional
A: Optional

Q: To highlight duplicate values, in the Styles group on the ____ tab, click the Conditional Formatting button, point to Highlight Cells Rules, and then click Duplicate Values.
- Home
- Page Layout
- Formulas
- Data
A: Home

Q: Press the ____ keys to move to the top of the table.
- Alt+Home
- Shift+Home
- Ctrl+Home
- Esc+Home
A: Ctrl+Home

Q: To change the duplicate values background fill color, in the ____ group on the Home tab, click the Conditional Formatting button, and then click Manage Rules.
- Format
- Options
- Styles
- Tools
A: Styles

Q: Each time you create a conditional format, you are defining a conditional formatting ____.
- theme
- object
- condition
- rule
A: rule

Q: You can edit existing conditional formatting ____ from the Conditional Formatting Rules Manager dialog box.
- themes
- objects
- tables
- rules
A: rules

Q: In the Styles group on the Home tab, click the Conditional Formatting button, and then click ____ to open the Conditional Formatting Rules Manager dialog box.
- Conditional Formatting Rules Management
- Conditions
- Manage Rules
- Formatting Rules
A: Manage Rules

Q: You can filter a table by color. Display the filter arrows, click a filter arrow, point to Filter by Color, and then click a color to display only cells with that fill or click ____ to display only cells without a fill.
- Without Fill
- No Fill
- Plain
- Solid
A: No Fill

Q: For conditional formatting, a formula must be in the form of a(n) ____ test that results in a true or false value.
- conditional
- hypothetical
- logical
- approximate
A: logical

Q: A formula must start with a(n) ____.
- plus sign
- minus sign
- equal sign
- ampersand
A: equal sign

Q: In the Edit Formatting Rule dialog box, click the ____ button to open the Format Cells dialog box.
- Format Cells
- Options
- Format
- Cell Tools
A: Format

Q: The COUNTIF function is sometimes referred to as a(n) ____ count.
- network
- criterion
- conditional
- basic
A: conditional

Q: You can use ____ to reference cells within an Excel table.
- structured references
- cell and range addresses
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-1<br></b>Evaluate the following formulas and functions.<br><br> Assuming that G2 contains the value PT and M2 contains the value 2, evaluate the formula and tell what value is returned: =AND(G2=“FT”,M2>=1).
- TRUE
- FALSE
- PT
- PT, 2
A: FALSE

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-1<br></b>Evaluate the following formulas and functions.<br><br> Assuming that G2 contains the value FT and M2 contains the value 2, evaluate the formula and tell what value is returned: =AND(G2=“FT”,M2>=1).
- TRUE
- FALSE
- PT
- PT, 2
A: TRUE

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-1<br></b>Evaluate the following formulas and functions.<br><br> The following formula is used to determine Dean’s List status.  Assuming that B1 contains 12 and B2 contains 3.25, then =AND(B1>=12,B2>3.25), then ____.
- the formula indicates that the student is on the Dean’s List
- the formula indicates that the student is NOT on the Dean’s List
- the formula returns a value of 0
- the formula returns an error message
A: the formula indicates that the student is NOT on the Dean’s List

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-1<br></b>Evaluate the following formulas and functions.<br><br> The following formula is used to determine Dean’s List status.  Assuming that B1 contains 15 and B2 contains 3.5, then =AND(B1>=12,B2>3.25), then ____.
- the formula indicates that the student is on the Dean’s List
- the formula indicates that the student is NOT on the Dean’s List
- the formula returns a value of 0
- the formula returns an error message
A: the formula indicates that the student is on the Dean’s List

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-2<br></b>Your boss in the human resources department asks you to write a function that calculates the length of time that employees have been with the firm, using the DATEDIF function. Assume that C2 contains the hire date for a given employee and that cell $AE$2 contains the cut-off date against which to compare the hire date to determine length of service.<br><br> For one service recognition program, you need to calculate the length of service in complete months. What is the correct formula?
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “m”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “month”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “mth”)
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “mon”)
A: =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “m”)

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-2<br></b>Your boss in the human resources department asks you to write a function that calculates the length of time that employees have been with the firm, using the DATEDIF function. Assume that C2 contains the hire date for a given employee and that cell $AE$2 contains the cut-off date against which to compare the hire date to determine length of service.<br><br> For a separate service recognition program, you need to calculate the length of service in complete years. What is the correct formula?
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “yr”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “year”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “yr”)
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “y”)
A: =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “y”)

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-2<br></b>Your boss in the human resources department asks you to write a function that calculates the length of time that employees have been with the firm, using the DATEDIF function. Assume that C2 contains the hire date for a given employee and that cell $AE$2 contains the cut-off date against which to compare the hire date to determine length of service.<br><br> Just on a lark, for a year-end trivia contest, your boss wants you to calculate the length of service in complete days. What is the correct formula?
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “today”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “dy”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “day”)
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “d”)
A: =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “d”)

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-3<br></b>You have been using a variety of nested IF functions to calculate costs in your spreadsheet when a colleague stops by and comments on what you have been working on, suggesting that there is an easier approach to use.<br><br> Which of the following is an effective alternative for the use of extensive nested IF functions?
- compare table
- function table
- lookup table
- case table
A: lookup table

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-3<br></b>You have been using a variety of nested IF functions to calculate costs in your spreadsheet when a colleague stops by and comments on what you have been working on, suggesting that there is an easier approach to use.<br><br> You implement the VLOOKUP formula at your colleague’s suggestion, but you get the #VALUE! error as the result of the formula. Which of the following is likely true?
- You might have entered a table name for the table_array value instead of the cell reference of the lookup table.
- You might have indicated that the compare values are a range of values instead of an exact match.
- You might have entered a number for the col_index_num instead of a letter.
- You might have entered a letter for the col_index_num instead of a number.
A: You might have entered a letter for the col_index_num instead of a number.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-3<br></b>You have been using a variety of nested IF functions to calculate costs in your spreadsheet when a colleague stops by and comments on what you have been working on, suggesting that there is an easier approach to use.<br><br> If you omit the range_lookup value from a LOOKUP function, which of the following is true?
- The function returns the #NAME? error value.
- Your function can only search the first column of the lookup table.
- It is considered an approximate match.
- It is considered an exact match.
A: It is considered an approximate match.

Q: The ____________________ function is a logical function that returns a TRUE value if all the logical conditions are true and a FALSE value if any or all of the logical conditions are false.
A: AND

Q: When you create a formula that references all or parts of an Excel table, you can replace the specific cell or range address with a(n) ____________________ reference, the actual table name or column header.
A: structured

Q: The ____________________ function calculates the difference between two dates and shows the result in months, days, or years.
A: DATEDIF

Q: A(n) ____________________ function is when one IF function is placed inside another IF function to test an additional condition.
A: nested IF

Q: The ____________________ function is a logical function that returns a TRUE value if any of the logical conditions are true and a FALSE value if the logical conditions are false.
A: OR

Q: A(n) ____________________ table is a table that organizes data you want to retrieve into different categories.
A: lookup

Q: The categories for a lookup table, called ____________________ values, are located in the table’s first column or row.
A: compare

Q: To retrieve a particular value from a lookup table, a(n) ____________________ needs to match the compare values.
A: lookup value

Q: The ____________________ function searches vertically down a lookup table and is used when the compare values are stored in the first column of the lookup table.
A: VLOOKUP

Q: The ____________________ function searches horizontally across a lookup table and is used when the compare values are stored in the first row of the lookup table.
A: HLOOKUP

Q: ____________________ formatting changes a cell’s formatting when its contents match a specified condition.
A: Conditional

Q: A(n) ____________________ specifies the type of condition, the type of formatting when that condition occurs, and the cell or range the formatting is applied to.
A: rule / conditional formatting rule

Q: To filter records by color, click the filter arrow to open the Filter menu, and then click ____________________.
A: Filter by Color

Q: ____________________ values indicate that some element in a formula or a cell referenced in a formula is preventing Excel from returning a calculated value.
A: Error

Q: The ____________________ error value means that the formula or function contains a number divided by 0.
A: #DIV/0

Q: The ____________________ error value means that a cell reference used in a formula or function is no longer valid.
A: #REF!

Q: The ____________________ error value means that the wrong type of argument is used in a function or formula.
A: #VALUE!

Q: The ____________________ error value appears when text is entered in a function that requires a number.
A: #NUM!

Q: The ____________________ function enables you to display a more descriptive message that helps users fix a problem rather than adding confusion, as error values often do.
A: IFERROR

Q: The ____________________ function can determine if a cell contains an error value and displays the message you choose rather than the default error value.
A: IFERROR

Q: What are the guidelines to keep in mind when creating fields in an Excel table?
Feedback: - Create fields that require the least maintenance: For example, fields such as Hire Date and Birth Date require no maintenance because their values do not change, unlike fields such as Age and Years of Service, whose values change each year. If you need to track information such as the specific age or years of service, a best practice is to use calculations to determine these values based on values in the Hire Date and Birth Date fields. - Store the smallest unit of data possible in a field: For example, use three separate fields for City, State, and Zip Code rather than one field. Using separate fields for each unit of data enables you to sort or filter each field. If you want to display data from two or more fields in one column, you can use a formula to reference the City, State, and Zip Code fields. For example, you can use the concatenation operator to combine the city, state, and zip code in one cell. - Apply a text format to fields with numerical text data. For example, formatting fields such as Zip Code and Social Security Number as text ensures that leading zeroes are stored as part of the data. Otherwise, the zip code 02148 is stored as a number and displayed as 2148, which is not the intended result.

Q: Discuss strategies for checking formulas for matching parentheses.
Feedback: A common problem when creating formulas is mismatched parentheses. As you write a formula, you should verify that you enclosed the correct argument, function, or term within the parentheses of the formula you are creating. This is especially important when you develop a complex formula that includes many parentheses, such as a nested IF function. Excel color-codes the parentheses as you build a formula so you can quickly determine whether you have complete pairs of them. You can also verify that the formula includes matching pairs of parentheses by selecting the cell with the formula and then clicking in the formula bar. Press the right arrow key to move the insertion point through the formula one character at a time. When the insertion point moves across one parenthesis, its matching parenthesis is also highlighted briefly. This color coding helps you ensure that all parentheses in a formula are paired (opening and closing parentheses).

Q: Sometimes the built-in conditional formatting rules do not apply the formatting you need.  In these instances, you may be able to create a conditional formatting rule based on a formula that uses a logical expression to describe the condition you want.  Please give an example of when you would use this type of formula, and list two guidelines you must follow when creating this type of formula.
Feedback: Example (Answers may vary): You can create a formula that uses conditional formatting to compare cells in different columns or to highlight an entire row. When you create the formula, keep in mind the following guidelines(Students should include two of these in their answer): - The formula must start with an equal sign. - The formula must be in the form of a logical test that results in a True or False value. - In most cases, the formula should use relative references and point to the first row of data in the table. If the formula references a cell or range outside the table, use an absolute reference. -After you create the formula, enter test values to ensure the conditional formatting works in all situations that you intended.

Q: For cell and range names, names of 25 to 50 characters are considered practical, although names can be up to 255 characters.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Clicking the Edit button in the accompanying figure opens the New Name dialog box in which you can modify the selected defined name.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You can use the Name Manager dialog box, shown above, to create a defined name.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Defined names are automatically substituted for the cell addresses in a formula.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Each cell can have at most three validation rules.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The frequency of error alert determines what choices the user is presented with when an invalid entry is attempted.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You cannot prevent users from changing all of the formulas in a worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can keep users from deleting worksheets or inserting new ones.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Even when the worksheet is unprotected, the locked property determines whether or not changes can be made to a given cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Once you protect a worksheet, the locked property is enabled and controls whether or not a cell can be edited.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Data validation can verify data that was entered into a worksheet before the validation criteria were applied.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can allow users to insert new rows or columns into a sheet, even if the sheet is protected.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Even if a sheet is protected, you can limit the user to selecting only unlocked cells, or allow the user to select any cell in the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="317" height="270" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The red triangle  (that has an arrow pointing to it) in the accompanying figure indicates that a given cell does not have a comment.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="317" height="270" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You drag the comment’s border to resize a comment box like the one shown in the accompanying figure.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="317" height="270" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To move the box, you would drag the selection handle of the comment in the accompanying figure.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Each macro must have a unique name.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: By default, a macro will select the same cells regardless of which cell is first selected because the macro records a selection using relative cell references.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you open a file with macros, the response you see is based on the security level set on the computer.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When the Ribbon is minimized, only the Quick Access Toolbar and the tab names are displayed.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A range name is more descriptive than a(n) <u>cell reference</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Any <u>blanks</u> or parentheses in row or column labels are changed to underscore characters in defined names.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The <u>Name </u>dialog box lists all of the names currently defined in the workbook, including Excel table names.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you select the Custom option in the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the validation rule will be based on an Excel <u>logistical</u> formula.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To open the Data Validation dialog box, click the Data tab on the Ribbon, and then click <u>Authentication</u> in the Data Tools group.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You use the <u>Rules</u> tab in the Data Validation dialog box to enter the validation rules for an active cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you <u>lock</u> a workbook, you control the ability users have to make changes to the file.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Every cell in a workbook has a(n) <u>sealed</u> property that determines whether or not changes can be made to that cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: By default, the locked property is turned <u>off</u> for each cell when you protect a workbook.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The default is to protect only the <u>appearance</u> of a workbook.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A digital <u>certificate</u> confirms that the macro created by the signer has not been altered since the digital certificate was created.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>Visual Basic Editor</u> is a separate application that works with Excel and all of the Office products to edit and manage VBA code.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can delete or edit a macro by opening the <u>Edit</u> dialog box, selecting the macro from the list, and then clicking the appropriate button.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: One way to run a macro is to assign it to a(n) <u>button</u> that is placed directly on the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When Excel creates a macro button, the <u>Assign Macro</u> dialog box opens with the button’s default name showing.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Applications typically include an interface to assist the user in using the system, ranging from special buttons that assist in existing specific tasks to changing the entire Excel interface with customized ____.
- commands
- menus
- toolbars
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: The following is a valid function name: ____.
- FY2010
- Print_Area
- Net-Income
- none of the above
A: none of the above

Q: Range names must begin with ____.
- a letter
- the underscore character
- a number
- either a. or b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: After the first character in a range name, the following is acceptable: ____.
- hyphen
- space
- periods
- either a. or b.
A: periods

Q: Range names can be up to ____ characters.
- 15
- 27
- 56
- 255
A: 255

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The most direct way to create defined names like the kind shown in the accompanying figure is to use the ____ box on the formula bar.
- Definition
- Name
- Term
- Label
A: Name

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, clicking the New button, opens the New Name dialog box.
- Name
- Macro
- Label
- Range
A: Name

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the column labeled “Refers to” is the name’s ____.
- link location
- location in the worksheet
- target location in the worksheet
- none of the above
A: location in the worksheet

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Using defined names like the kind shown in the accompanying figure makes creating and understanding a(n) ____ easier.
- index
- log
- formula
- all of the above
A: formula

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the City_State_Zip field name shown in the accompanying figure, the underscores replace ____ in the label name.
- spaces
- periods
- commas
- numbers
A: spaces

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The current data in the ParkingFee cell, according to the accompanying figure, is ____.
- 25
- 8
- 2
- 15
A: 15

Q: The ____ box displays all of the names in the workbook.
- Name
- Ranges
- Definition
- Terms
A: Name

Q: If your data is organized in a tabular format, you can quickly create range names for each column or row in the list by using the ____ dialog box.
- Make from Table
- Name
- Create from Selection
- Assign
A: Create from Selection

Q: Any blanks or parentheses in a row or column label will be changed to ____ in defined names.
- ampersands
- underscore characters
- hyphens
- dashes
A: underscore characters

Q: The Excel data ____ feature restricts data entry to follow a defined set of rules.
- error-checking
- rule-based
- validation
- contingent
A: validation

Q: An input message appears when the cell becomes active, and can be used to specify the ____ of data the user should enter in that cell.
- aspect
- type
- format
- cast
A: type

Q: Using the Excel data validation feature, you can specify a(n) ____ of acceptable values.
- roster
- series
- array
- range
A: range

Q: One way to ensure that correct data is entered into a cell or range is to use the Excel data ____ feature.
- validation
- concatenation
- security
- index
A: validation

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept only integers.
- Integer
- Decimal
- Numerical
- Whole Number
A: Whole Number

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept any type of numeric value.
- Whole Number
- Any Number
- Decimal
- Integer
A: Decimal

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept only values from a list.
- List
- Index
- Roster
- Catalog
A: List

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept only text of a specified number of characters.
- Custom
- Text Length
- Any Value
- Specified Text
A: Text Length

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the validation rule will be based on an Excel logical formula.
- Rule
- Logical
- Custom
- Validation
A: Custom

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept only times.
- Chronology
- Clock
- Time
- Calendar
A: Time

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept only dates.
- Calendar
- Schedule
- Date
- Timeline
A: Date

Q: Sometimes when you build a worksheet for other users, you may decide to add a(n) ____ message to a cell even if you don't validate the data in that cell.
- value
- input
- key
- user
A: input

Q: To open the ____ dialog box, click the Data tab on the Ribbon, and then click Data Validation in the Data Tools group.
- Data Validation
- Data Entry
- Data
- Validation
A: Data Validation

Q: Which of the following is a tab in the Data Validation dialog box?
- Settings
- Input Message
- Error Alert
- All of the above
A: All of the above

Q: You use the ____ tab in the Data Validation dialog box to enter the validation rules for the active cell.
- Active Cell
- Rules
- Settings
- Input Message
A: Settings

Q: One way of reducing the chance of data-entry error is to display a(n) ____ message when a user clicks on the cell.
- value
- input
- key
- user
A: input

Q: A(n) ____ message provides additional information about the type of data allowed for the cell.
- user
- key
- input
- value
A: input

Q: ____ messages appear as ScreenTips next to the active cell.
- Value
- Input
- Key
- User
A: Input

Q: The following are Excel-supported error alert types: ____.
- Stop, Warning, and Alert
- Alert, Warning, and Information
- Security, Warning, and Alert
- Stop, Warning, and Information
A: Stop, Warning, and Information

Q: Excel supports ____ types of error alerts.
- two
- three
- six
- eleven
A: three

Q: The most serious error alert is the ____ alert.
- Warning
- Information
- Security
- Stop
A: Stop

Q: After the Stop alert, the next alert in severity is the ____ alert.
- Information
- Security
- Validation
- Warning
A: Warning

Q: The least severe error alert is the ____ alert.
- Stop
- Security
- Information
- Warning
A: Information

Q: The ____ alert accepts the invalid data but still allows you to cancel the data entry.
- Information
- Stop
- Security
- Warning
A: Information

Q: When you ____ a workbook, you control the ability users have to make changes to the file.
- ensure
- protect
- secure
- seal
A: protect

Q: Every cell in a workbook has a(n) ____ property that determines whether or not changes can be made to that cell.
- ensured
- locked
- security
- changeable
A: locked

Q: Usually, you will want to protect a worksheet but leave some cells ____.
- open
- empty
- clear
- unlocked
A: unlocked

Q: When you protect a sheet, unless you are concerned the users will turn off protection and make changes to formulas, it is probably best not to specify a ____.
- lock
- password
- username
- any of the above
A: password

Q: When you set up worksheet protection, you can allow users to ____.
- insert new rows or columns
- delete rows and columns
- select any cell in the worksheet.
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: Protecting the ____ prohibits users from renaming, deleting, hiding, or inserting worksheets.
- skeleton
- structure
- format
- location
A: structure

Q: Protecting the ____ prohibits users from moving, resizing, closing, or hiding parts of the Excel window.
- structure
- windows
- content
- all of the above
A: windows

Q: When a workbook is protected such that options to modify the worksheet are no longer available, what do the corresponding commands on the shortcut menu look like?
- They are hidden.
- They are in red.
- They are in italics.
- They are grayed out.
A: They are grayed out.

Q: To remove workbook protection, click the Unprotect Workbook button in the ____ group on the Review tab.
- Format
- Changes
- Sheet
- Options
A: Changes

Q: <img width="317" height="270" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Comments like those in the accompanying figure are often used to ____.
- explain the contents of a particular cell
- provide instructions to users
- share ideas and notes from several users collaborating on a project
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: <img width="317" height="270" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To keep a comment like the one in the accompanying figure on the screen, in the Comments group on the ____ tab, click the Show/Hide Comment button.
- Review
- Format
- Options
- Home
A: Review

Q: Most ____ are not harmful and do not affect data in any way.
- viruses
- macro viruses
- Trojan horses
- all of the above
A: macro viruses

Q: The ____ Center is a central location for all the security settings in Office 2007.
- Secure
- Security
- Trust
- Protection
A: Trust

Q: If content is blocked, the ____ located under the Ribbon appears, notifying you that some content was disabled.
- Mini toolbar
- Quick Launch toolbar
- Message Bar
- status bar
A: Message Bar

Q: In Office 2010, you can define a set of locations (file paths) where you can place files you consider trustworthy. This feature is known as ____ Locations.
- Safe
- Secure
- Trusted
- Quarantined
A: Trusted

Q: A(n) ____ certificate is another name for a digital ID.
- analog
- signature
- digital
- secure
A: digital

Q: A digital ____ is like a seal of approval.
- affidavit
- clause
- signature
- salutation
A: signature

Q: For simple macros, it is easier to create a macro using the macro ____.
- recorder
- manager
- explorer
- programmer
A: recorder

Q: To create a macro, you can write one by entering a series of commands in the ____ programming language.
- HTML
- Java
- VBA
- Perl
A: VBA

Q: A macro can be stored in ____.
- the current workbook
- the Personal Macro workbook
- a new workbook
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: The ____ Macro workbook is a hidden workbook opened whenever you start Excel, making its macros available anytime you use Excel.
- Universal
- Personal
- Microsoft
- XP
A: Personal

Q: You can turn off the macro recorder by clicking the Stop Recording button in the Code group on the ____ tab.
- Insert
- Developer
- Layout
- Macro
A: Developer

Q: If a ____ error appears when you run a macro that has worked in the past, some part of the macro code no longer makes sense to Excel.
- syntax
- run-time
- logic
- baseline
A: run-time

Q: The ____ Reference button controls how Excel records the act of selecting a range in the worksheet.
- Absolute
- Relative
- Relational
- Macro
A: Relative

Q: To view the code of a macro, you need to open the Visual Basic ____.
- Manager
- Code Window
- Reader
- Editor
A: Editor

Q: When you find an error in a macro, all of the following are options EXCEPT ____.
- rerecord the macro using the same macro name
- delete the recorded macro, and then record the macro again
- recopy the macro from the macro library
- run the macro one step at a time to locate the problem and then correct it
A: recopy the macro from the macro library

Q: In VBA, macros are called ____ procedures.
- body
- sub
- commented
- modular
A: sub

Q: Each sub procedure in VBA begins with the keyword "Sub" followed by the name of the sub procedure and a set of ____.
- brackets
- braces
- parentheses
- asterisks
A: parentheses

Q: In VBA procedures, the ____ are used if you want to include any arguments in the procedure.
- underscores
- brackets
- braces
- parentheses
A: parentheses

Q: After the comments in VBA code is the ____ of the macro.
- module
- body
- procedure
- command
A: body

Q: Sub procedures are organized into ____.
- modules
- comments
- macros
- logs
A: modules

Q: Excel 2010 enables you to change the Ribbon to fit your work style. Among many other customization features, you can do all of the following EXCEPT ____.
- eliminate the Ribbon
- minimize the Ribbon
- hide tabs or commands
- rename tabs or commands
A: eliminate the Ribbon

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-1<br></b>Joe knows that macros can be helpful to him in his work with Excel spreadsheets, but he also knows they have their hazards, so he comes to you for guidance about what kind of security settings he should put in place, and at what times.<br><br> While he just getting his feet wet with Excel, you suggest to Joe that he might want to begin without having his installation of Excel have any macros run at all. Which of the following options would he select in the Trust Center?
- Disable all macros without notification
- Cancel all macros
- Disable a macro with notification
- Disable all macros except digitally signed macros
A: Disable all macros without notification

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-1<br></b>Joe knows that macros can be helpful to him in his work with Excel spreadsheets, but he also knows they have their hazards, so he comes to you for guidance about what kind of security settings he should put in place, and at what times.<br><br> As Joe gets more comfortable with Excel, he thinks that he might be able to decide whether or not to run a macro on a case-by-case basis. What should his option be in the Trust Center?
- Disable all macros without notification
- Cancel all macros
- Disable a macro with notification
- Disable all macros except digitally signed macros
A: Disable a macro with notification

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-1<br></b>Joe knows that macros can be helpful to him in his work with Excel spreadsheets, but he also knows they have their hazards, so he comes to you for guidance about what kind of security settings he should put in place, and at what times.<br><br> As Joe does more even work in Excel, Joe has begun to develop a collection of publishers whom he trusts to deliver macros that are problem-free. What should his option be in the Trust Center?
- Enable all trusted macros
- Enable all macros
- Disable all macros except digitally signed macros
- Disable a macro with notification
A: Disable all macros except digitally signed macros

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-1<br></b>Joe knows that macros can be helpful to him in his work with Excel spreadsheets, but he also knows they have their hazards, so he comes to you for guidance about what kind of security settings he should put in place, and at what times.<br><br> Now it’s a year later and Joe is taking coursework to become a VBA programmer. He is working on developing an application that contains macros. Which should his option be in the Trust Center?
- Enable all trusted macros
- Enable all macros
- Disable all macros except digitally signed macros
- Disable a macro with notification
A: Enable all macros

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-2<br></b>Renee has just completed some coursework in Excel application writing and wants to begin developing her own macros to share more widely. She knows that she has to learn more about digital signatures in order to make her plan a reality.<br><br> What is the best phrase to describe a digital signature?
- a merit badge
- an indication of value
- an invitation to collaborate
- a seal of approval
A: a seal of approval

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-2<br></b>Renee has just completed some coursework in Excel application writing and wants to begin developing her own macros to share more widely. She knows that she has to learn more about digital signatures in order to make her plan a reality.<br><br> Which of the following is a true statement about digital signatures?
- Adding a digital signature is the first step before you distribute a file.
- A digital signature is often used to identify the author of a workbook that contains macros.
- Before you can add a digital ID to a workbook, you need to obtain a digital signature.
- Digital certificates are usually issued by Microsoft.
A: A digital signature is often used to identify the author of a workbook that contains macros.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-2<br></b>Renee has just completed some coursework in Excel application writing and wants to begin developing her own macros to share more widely. She knows that she has to learn more about digital signatures in order to make her plan a reality.<br><br> By digitally signing a workbook that contains a macro that she intends to publicly distribute, Renee assures her audience ____.
- of the identity of the creator of the macro
- that the macro has not been altered since the digital signature was created
- that the macro will perform as expected
- both a. and b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-2<br></b>Renee has just completed some coursework in Excel application writing and wants to begin developing her own macros to share more widely. She knows that she has to learn more about digital signatures in order to make her plan a reality.<br><br> Which of the following can Renee NOT tell when she opens a digitally signed file?
- who the author is
- whether the information in the file is authentic
- whether the macros in the workbook are safe to run
- whether the macro will perform as expected
A: whether the macro will perform as expected

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-3<br></b>Javier tells you that your work in Excel will go a lot faster if you start using defined names instead of cell and range addresses. You believe him but you have been frustrated by defined names in the past because you did not know the rules for naming them and you have run into errors as a result. Javier offers to help you.<br><br> Which of the following is true statement Javier can make about defined names as he is explaining the rules to you?
- The name can include letters, numbers, periods, and underscores
- To distinguish multiword names, use a hyphen between the words
- Defined names are case sensitive
- All of the above
A: The name can include letters, numbers, periods, and underscores

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-3<br></b>Javier tells you that your work in Excel will go a lot faster if you start using defined names instead of cell and range addresses. You believe him but you have been frustrated by defined names in the past because you did not know the rules for naming them and you have run into errors as a result. Javier offers to help you.<br><br> Which of the following is a valid defined name Javier can provide to you?
- .FY2010
- F-Y2010
- FY2010
- FiscalYear2010
A: FiscalYear2010

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a spreadsheet written or tailored to meet the user’s specific needs.
A: Excel application

Q: In addition to referring to cells by their cell references, it is easier to remember where different data is stored by assigning a descriptive ____________________, to each cell or range.
A: name

Q: One way to ensure that correct data is entered into a cell or range is to use the Excel data ____________________ feature.
A: validation

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____________________ option means that the cell will accept any value entered into the cell.
A: Any value

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____________________ option means that the cell will accept only dates.
A: Date

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____________________ option means that the cell will accept only times.
A: Time

Q: Input messages appear as ____________________ next to the active cell.
A: ScreenTips

Q: The ____________________ alert by default rejects the invalid data, but allows you to override the rejection.
A: Warning

Q: The ____________________ alert prevents you from storing the data in the cell.
A: Stop

Q: When you ____________________ a workbook, you control the ability users have to make changes to the file.
A: protect

Q: A protected sheet can always be unprotected, but you can also require users to enter a(n) ____________________ before the protection is removed.
A: password

Q: To open the Protect Sheet dialog box, click the Review tab on the Ribbon, and then click the Protect Sheet button in the ____________________ group.
A: Changes

Q: Protecting the ____________________ of a workbook prohibits users from moving, resizing, closing, or hiding parts of the Excel window.
A: windows

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a text box that is attached to a specific cell in a worksheet.
A: comment

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a series of stored commands that can be run whenever you need to perform a task.
A: macro

Q: A macro ____________________ uses a program’s own macro programming language for distribution.
A: virus

Q: You control how Excel handles suspect macros by setting Excel's ____________________.
A: security level

Q: A digital ____________________ is often used to identify the author of a workbook that contains macros.
A: signature

Q: A digital ____________________ is typically issued by a certificate authority.
A: certificate

Q: You can create a(n) ____________________ key that will run a macro directly from the keyboard.
A: shortcut

Q: List three advantages to using defined names instead of cell references.
Feedback: A name is more descriptive than a cell reference, making it easier for you to remember a cell or range’s content. Names can be used in formulas, making it easier for users to understand the calculations being performed. Also, if you move a named cell or range within a worksheet, its name moves with it. Any formulas that contain the name automatically refer to the new location. In a formula, a named cell or range is the same as using the cell or range’s absolute reference, so if you move a formula that includes a defined name, the reference remains pointed to the correct cell or range.

Q: What are the steps for creating a validation rule?
Feedback: In the Data Tools group on the Data tab, click the Data Validation button. Click the Settings tab. Click the Allow arrow, click the type of data allowed in the cell, and then enter the validation criteria for that data. Click the Input Message tab, and then enter a title and text for the input message. Click the Error Alert tab, and then, if necessary, click the Show error alert after invalid data is entered check box to insert a check mark. Select an alert style, and then enter the title and text for the error alert message. Click the OK button.

Q: Describe the four macro security settings.
Feedback: Disable all macros without notification: All macros in all workbooks are disabled and no security alerts about macros are displayed. Use this setting if you do not want macros to run. Disable all macro with notification: All macros in all workbooks are disabled, but security alerts appear when the workbook contains a macro. Use this default setting to choose on a case-by-case basis whether to run a macro. Disable all macros except digitally signed macros: The same as the Disable a macro with notification setting, except any macro signed by a trusted publisher runs if you have already trusted the publisher. Otherwise, security alerts appear when a workbook contains a macro. Enable all macros: All macros in all workbooks run. Use this setting temporarily in such cases as when developing an application that contains macros. This setting is not recommended for regular use

Q: The <i>fv</i> argument is required in the PMT function.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Cash flow has nothing to do with who owns the money.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You should reference worksheet cells in which the values are entered so the values are easily visible.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Cash flow is not concerned with the direction of the money as it moves in and out of the company.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The NPER function returns the number of payment periods, not necessarily the number of years.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If the NPER function returns #NUM!, the loan cannot be repaid in any length of time.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you are making periodic monthly payments, and the interest is compounded monthly, then the number of periods is in years.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The functions used to work with loans are the same ones you used to work with investments; the only difference is the direction of the cash flow.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="404" height="293" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, earlier payment periods apply more of the payment toward the principal.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In an amortization schedule, use relative references to refer to the original loan conditions and use absolute references to refer to information about specific payment periods.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can calculate cumulative payments on interest and principal using the CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC functions.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To properly use financial functions, always place argument values directly into a financial formula.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Assets such as raw materials a company uses to manufacture cars are considered tangible assets.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To calculate a declining balance depreciation, use the DVB function.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The major advantage of the payback period is that it takes into account the time value of money.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The financial definition of net present value is the difference between the present value of future cash flows and the current cost of the initial investment.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Both the NPV and the IRR functions assume the cash flows occur at evenly spaced intervals.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The list of values in the IRR function must include at least one positive cash flow and one negative cash flow.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Error values will propagate throughout a workbook.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: An error indicator (a red triangle in the upper-left corner of a cell) flags cells with an error or a potential error.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The FV function calculates the <u>full</u> value of an investment or loan.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you don’t include an <i>fv</i> value, Excel assumes a future value of <u>1</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A <u>regular</u> cash flow occurs when cash is going away from the investor.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you plan to invest money for 18 months, the value of the <i>nper</i> argument in the PMT function is <u>1.5</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The financial functions automatically format calculated values as currency with negative cash flow appearing in a <u>green</u> font.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: With the FV function, if the amount invested each month is -30,000, this represents a <u>positive</u> cash flow.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If the NPER function returns the error value <u>#REF</u> a loan cannot be paid back in any length of time.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To calculate an annual rate, multiply the value returned by the <u>RATE</u> function by the number of payments per year.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: As you repay a loan, each payment represents a <u>positive</u> cash flow as you are sending money to the lending institution.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Amortization schedules often format all entries as positive values, and then label the <u>columns</u> to indicate the values represent negative values.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When using the PMT function to calculate monthly loan payments, the interest rate and the number of payments should be based on the interest rate per <u>year</u> and the total months to pay off the loan.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can extrapolate a series of values from the <u>Series</u> dialog box.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The function DDB is used to calculate a <u>declining</u> balance depreciation.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The possibility that the entire transaction will fail, resulting in a loss of the initial investment is called the <u>chance</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: At higher rates of return, the net present value of the investment goes <u>up</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The ____ function calculates the amount paid into an investment or loan during each payment period.
- NPER
- RATE
- PMT
- INT
A: PMT

Q: The ____ function calculates the future value of an investment or loan.
- RATE
- PV
- NPER
- FV
A: FV

Q: The ____ function calculates the present value of an investment or loan.
- PRES
- PV
- NPER
- FV
A: PV

Q: The ____ function calculates the interest rate charged or received during each payment period.
- RATE
- PV
- NPER
- FV
A: RATE

Q: The ____ function calculates the number of payment periods in an investment or loan.
- RATE
- PV
- NPER
- FV
A: NPER

Q: To calculate the number of quarterly payments required to pay off a loan, use the ____ function.
- PMT
- PV
- FV
- NPER
A: NPER

Q: Financial functions format calculated values as currency, with ____.
- positive cash flow appearing in red font
- positive cash flow enclosed in parentheses
- negative cash flow appearing in green font
- negative cash flow appearing in red font
A: negative cash flow appearing in red font

Q: Cash flow is the movement of cash assets ____ an account.
- into
- out of
- into or out of
- none of the above
A: into or out of

Q: To calculate the number of ____ payments required to pay off a loan or meet an investment goal, use the NPER function.
- monthly
- daily
- quarterly
- either a. or c.
A: either a. or c.

Q: The PMT value is also known as the ____ payment.
- periodic
- placement
- inflow
- indexed
A: periodic

Q: With the PMT function, the <i>type</i> argument is ____ when the payments are made at the end of each period.
- 0
- 1
- a
- -1
A: 0

Q: With the PMT function, the <i>type</i> argument is ____ when the payments are made at the beginning of each period.
- 0
- 1
- a
- -1
A: 1

Q: FV is used to calculate the ____ of a fund.
- future value
- fixed value
- forecast value
- first value
A: future value

Q: Which of the following shows the syntax of the NPER function?
- =NPER(<i>pmt, pv, [fv=0], [type=0]</i>)
- =NPER(<i>rate, pmt, [fv=0], [type=0]</i>)
- =NPER(<i>rate, pmt, pv [, fv=0] [, type=0]</i>)
- =NPER(<i>pmt, rate, pv, [fv=0], [type=0]</i>)
A: =NPER(<i>rate, pmt, pv [, fv=0] [, type=0]</i>)

Q: If the NPER function returns the error value ____, the loan cannot be paid back in any length of time.
- #REF!
- #NUM!
- #TIME!
- #PER!
A: #NUM!

Q: To calculate the annual rate, you must ____ the value returned by the RATE function by the number of payments per year.
- add
- subtract
- multiply
- divide
A: multiply

Q: When you borrow money, the money you receive represents a ____ cash flow.
- positive
- negative
- fixed
- neutral
A: positive

Q: <img width="404" height="293" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, later payment periods apply more of the payment toward the ____.
- index
- interest rate
- interest
- principal
A: principal

Q: The ____ function returns the amount of a particular payment that is used to pay the interest on the loan.
- PMT
- IPMT
- INPMT
- NPMT
A: IPMT

Q: In the function =CUMIPMT(<i>rate, nper, pv, start, end, type</i>), it is <i>____ </i>that defines whether the payments are made at the beginning or end of each period.
- rate
- nper
- end
- type
A: type

Q: Most Excel financial functions require a particular ____ to the cash flow to return the correct value.
- index
- valence
- orientation
- direction
A: direction

Q: When using the PMT function to calculate monthly loan payments, the interest rate and the number of payments should be based on the interest rate per month and the total ____ to pay off the loan.
- weeks
- months
- years
- any of the above
A: months

Q: Income statements are often created ____.
- monthly
- semiannually
- annually
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: A(n) ____ shows how much money a business makes or loses over a specified period of time.
- income projection
- expense report
- profit analysis
- income statement
A: income statement

Q: <img width="325" height="246" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure represents the ____ trend.
- periodic
- growth
- orthogonal
- linear
A: linear

Q: <img width="325" height="246" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure represents the ____ trend.
- periodic
- growth
- orthogonal
- linear
A: growth

Q: <img width="325" height="246" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, a(n) ____ trend appears as a straight line.
- periodic
- growth
- orthogonal
- linear
A: linear

Q: <img width="325" height="246" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, in a(n) ____ trend, the values do not change by a constant amount.
- periodic
- growth
- orthogonal
- linear
A: growth

Q: <img width="325" height="246" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, when plotted, a(n) ____ trend displays the greatest increases near the end of the series.
- periodic
- growth
- orthogonal
- linear
A: growth

Q: In a(n) ____ trend, the values change by a constant amount.
- linear
- growth
- periodic
- orthogonal
A: linear

Q: In a(n) ____ trend, values change by a constant percentage and usually appear as a curve.
- linear
- growth
- periodic
- orthogonal
A: growth

Q: To ____ a series, the cells between the first and last cells in the series must be blank.
- extrapolate
- concatenate
- integrate
- interpolate
A: interpolate

Q: The difference between a company’s sales revenue and the cost of goods sold is the company’s ____.
- cost of operation
- gross profit
- growth trend
- total revenue
A: gross profit

Q: To calculate a series of values from a starting point without a defined ending point, you have to ____ the values.
- interpolate
- extrapolate
- asses
- plot
A: extrapolate

Q: All of the following are examples of tangible assets except ____.
- equipment
- land
- delivery trucks
- production parts
A: production parts

Q: When you extrapolate a series, the ____ value represents the amount that each value is increased or multiplied as the series is extended.
- Increase
- Step
- Extension
- Advance
A: Step

Q: To project a trend that decreases rather than increases, use a step value of less than ____ for a linear trend.
- -1
- 0
- 1
- 2
A: 0

Q: To project a trend that decreases rather than increases, use a step value between ____ for a growth trend.
- -1 and 0
- -1 and 1
- 0 and 1
- 1 and 2
A: 0 and 1

Q: The process of allocating the original cost of an investment over the years of use is known as ____.
- interest
- balance
- depreciation
- amortization
A: depreciation

Q: To calculate the depreciation of an asset, you need to know all of the following EXCEPT the ____.
- asset’s original cost
- asset’s useful life
- asset’s type
- rate of depreciation
A: asset’s type

Q: To calculate a variable deprecation, use the ____ function.
- VBD
- DDB
- VDD
- DB
A: VBD

Q: With ____ depreciation, the asset depreciates by equal amounts each year of its lifetime until it reaches the salvage value.
- straight-line
- double-declining
- declining
- sum of years’ digit
A: straight-line

Q: The ____ function takes these arguments: cost, salvage, and life.
- SLN
- SYD
- DB
- VDB
A: SLN

Q: <img width="325" height="241" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure is the ____ value.
- sum
- declining balance
- initial asset
- salvage
A: initial asset

Q: <img width="325" height="241" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is the ____ value.
- sum
- declining balance
- initial asset
- salvage
A: salvage

Q: The DB function used to calculate the declining balance depreciation has the following syntax: ____.
- =DB(<i>salvage, life, period [month]</i>)
- =DB(<i>cost, salvage, period [month]</i>)
- =DB(<i>salvage, cost, life, period [month]</i>)
- =DB(<i>cost, salvage, life, period [month]</i>)
A: =DB(<i>cost, salvage, life, period [month]</i>)

Q: ____ depreciation depreciates an asset by a constant percentage each year rather than a constant amount.
- Declining balance
- Double declining
- Interest reduced
- Straight-line
A: Declining balance

Q: Excel supports ____ function(s) to calculate depreciation under different assumptions.
- one
- two
- five
- seven
A: five

Q: The ____ function returns the sum-of-years’ digit depreciation that results in a more accelerated depreciation than straight-line depreciation but less than declining balance depreciation.
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- VDB
A: SYD

Q: The ____ function returns a variable declining depreciation for any specified period using any specified depreciation method.
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- VDB
A: VDB

Q: The company’s income after all expenses and taxes have been paid is called the ____.
- total income
- net income
- gross revenue
- bottom line
A: net income

Q: The ____ period is a quick method of projecting the value of an investment.
- investment
- payback
- cumulative
- time-value
A: payback

Q: You can use the ____ function to estimate how much a dollar amount today is worth in future dollars.
- PV
- IRR
- FV
- DCT
A: FV

Q: A higher discount rate means that future dollars are ____ in comparison to current dollars.
- discounted less
- discounted more
- amortized more
- amortized less
A: discounted more

Q: The future values of an investment can be ____.
- positive
- negative
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: positive

Q: To calculate the internal rate of return, use the ____ function with the cost of the initial investment as the first cash flow value in a series.
- IRR
- XNPV
- NPV
- XIRR
A: IRR

Q: The NPV function is used in calculating the net present value of a transaction, which is the ____ value of all the cash inflows and outflows in the investment adjusted by the time value of money.
- current
- projected
- future
- total
A: current

Q: The point at which the net present value of an investment equals ____ is the internal rate of return.
- -1
- 0
- 0.1
- 1
A: 0

Q: At rates beyond the internal rate of return, the net present value is ____, meaning that the expansion is no longer a good investment compared with the desired rate of return.
- positive
- integrated
- negative
- exponential
A: negative

Q: When an investment requires the investor to make multiple future payments, rather than a single initial payment, ____.
- it will show no change in rate of return
- in will have a constant internal rate of return
- it may have several different possible internal rates of return
- none of the above
A: it may have several different possible internal rates of return

Q: In comparing two investments, a commonly used guideline is to accept the investment with the ____.
- higher NPV
- higher IRR
- lower NPV
- either a. or b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: To choose between two or more investments, it’s a good idea to graph the ____ for each investment against different possible rates of return.
- NPV
- IRR
- XNPV
- XIRR
A: NPV

Q: Use the XNPV and XIRR functions for cash flows that appear ____.
- with a regular pattern
- at unevenly spaced intervals
- at evenly spaced intervals
- none of the above
A: at unevenly spaced intervals

Q: A(n) ____ worksheet projects the company’s expected assets, liabilities, and equity.
- Asset Report
- Income Statement
- Balance Sheet
- Transactions
A: Balance Sheet

Q: Excel uses ____ to denote error indicators.
- req squares
- yellow circles
- green triangles
- blue shading
A: green triangles

Q: If active cell D12 contains the formula =D10+D11, cells D10 and D11 are ____ cells for D12.
- feeder
- dependent
- precedent
- formula
A: precedent

Q: After you select a cell with an error indicator, you can click the Error Alert ____ to display additional information about the possible error and determine if further action is needed.
- button
- icon
- ScreenTip
- menu
A: button

Q: A(n) ____ arrow provides a visual clue to the relationship between two cells by pointing from the precedent cell to the dependent cell.
- tracer
- outline
- index
- key
A: tracer

Q: Tracer arrows disappear when you ____.
- correct the error source
- insert or delete columns and rows
- delete or move cells
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: To evaluate a formula, you select the cell and then click the ____ button from the Formula Auditing group on the Formulas tab.
- Define Formula
- Select Formula
- Check Function
- Evaluate Formula
A: Evaluate Formula

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-1<br></b>Christian is having a lot of problems with errors in a very complicated spreadsheet that he inherited from a colleague, and he turns to another co-worker, Sebastian, for tips in how to trace errors in the sheet.<br><br> Sebastian tells Christian that all error values begin with the same symbol, so they can be easily identified as errors. What is the symbol?
- #
- &
- ^
- %
A: #

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-1<br></b>Christian is having a lot of problems with errors in a very complicated spreadsheet that he inherited from a colleague, and he turns to another co-worker, Sebastian, for tips in how to trace errors in the sheet.<br><br> If Christian sees which of the following, Sebastian explains, there is a mistyped function name in the sheet.
- #FNCT?
- #FORM?
- #NAME?
- Any of the above
A: #NAME?

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-1<br></b>Christian is having a lot of problems with errors in a very complicated spreadsheet that he inherited from a colleague, and he turns to another co-worker, Sebastian, for tips in how to trace errors in the sheet.<br><br> If Christian sees red tracer arrows that means there is an error in the value being received from the precedent cell or passed to the ____ cell.
- child
- precedent
- dependent
- contingent
A: dependent

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-1<br></b>Christian is having a lot of problems with errors in a very complicated spreadsheet that he inherited from a colleague, and he turns to another co-worker, Sebastian, for tips in how to trace errors in the sheet.<br><br> If in Christian’s sheet, cell A4 is a precedent cell for cell B7, what kind of a cell is B7?
- contingent cell
- dependent cell
- antecedent cell
- indicated cell
A: dependent cell

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-1<br></b>Christian is having a lot of problems with errors in a very complicated spreadsheet that he inherited from a colleague, and he turns to another co-worker, Sebastian, for tips in how to trace errors in the sheet.<br><br> Sebastian tells Christian to search all of the error values until he reaches one that lacks something, and that is the source of the error values in the dependent cells. What does that error value lack?
- contingencies
- dependencies
- antecedents
- precedents
A: precedents

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-2<br></b>Mackenzie is studying for her midterm exam in her accounting class. Her study partner Libby is her go-to person for help with calculating depreciation.<br><br> Which of the following functions does Libby say is used to calculate a straight-line depreciation?
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- DDB
A: SLN

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-2<br></b>Mackenzie is studying for her midterm exam in her accounting class. Her study partner Libby is her go-to person for help with calculating depreciation.<br><br> Which of the following functions does Libby say is used to calculate a declining balance depreciation?
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- DDB
A: DB

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-2<br></b>Mackenzie is studying for her midterm exam in her accounting class. Her study partner Libby is her go-to person for help with calculating depreciation.<br><br> Which of the following functions does Libby say is used to calculate a sum-of-years’ digit depreciation?
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- DDB
A: SYD

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-2<br></b>Mackenzie is studying for her midterm exam in her accounting class. Her study partner Libby is her go-to person for help with calculating depreciation.<br><br> Which of the following functions does Libby say is used to calculate a double-declining balance depreciation?
- DDB
- SLN
- SYD
- VBD
A: DDB

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-2<br></b>Mackenzie is studying for her midterm exam in her accounting class. Her study partner Libby is her go-to person for help with calculating depreciation.<br><br> Which of the following functions does Libby say is used to calculate a depreciation if it is variable?
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- VDB
A: VDB

Q: The ____________________ function calculates the number of payment periods in an investment or loan.
A: NPER

Q: The ____________________ argument specifies whether payments are made at the end of each period or at the beginning.
A: type

Q: A positive cash flow, or ____________________, occurs whenever money is flowing into the account.
A: cash inflow

Q: A(n) ____________________ cash flow occurs whenever money is flowing out of the account.
A: negative

Q: The PMT value is also known as the ____________________ payment.
A: periodic

Q: The difference between a loan and an investment is based on the direction of the ____________________.
A: cash flow

Q: The ____________________ is the amount of the loan that is still unpaid.
A: principal

Q: To determine the interest rate needed to reach your savings goal, you can use the ____________________ function.
A: RATE

Q: <img width="540" height="185" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying figure is the annual interest rate.
A: 2

Q: <img width="540" height="185" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying figure is the quarterly cash outflow.
A: 5

Q: <img width="540" height="185" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying figure is the interest rate per quarter.
A: 3

Q: <img width="540" height="185" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying figure is the number of quarterly payments.
A: 4

Q: <img width="540" height="185" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying figure is the initial cash inflow.
A: 1

Q: The ____________________ function calculates the amount of a loan payment used to pay off the principal of the loan.
A: PPMT

Q: A(n) ____________________ provides details about each loan payment, specifying how much of the payment is devoted toward interest and how much toward repaying the principal.
A: amortization schedule

Q: A(n) ____________________ is also known as a profit and loss statement.
A: income statement

Q: If you know the beginning and ending values in a series and the series trend, you can fill in the missing values through ____________________.
A: interpolation

Q: When you extrapolate a series, you do not have to specify a(n) ____________________ value.
A: stopping / ending / final

Q: The financial definition of ____________________ is the difference between the present value of future cash flows and the current cost of the initial investment.
A: net present value

Q: You can use the ____________________ Window to view the impact of a changing value in one worksheet on the cell values in the other cells.
A: Watch

Q: Describe the steps to interpolate a series of values between starting and ending values.
Feedback: Select the range with the first cell containing the starting value, blank cells for middle values, and the last cell containing the ending value. In the Editing group on the Home tab, click the Fill button, and then click Series. Specify whether the series is organized in rows or columns and the type of series to interpolate. Check the Trend check box. Click the OK button to insert the interpolated series into the middle cells.

Q: How do you determine which method of depreciation is most appropriate?
Feedback: The answer depends on the type of asset being depreciated. Tax laws allow different depreciation methods for different kinds of assets and different situations. In general, you want to choose the depreciation method that most accurately describes the financial status of the company. In tax statements, depreciation appears as an expense that is subtracted from the company’s earnings. So, if you accelerate the depreciation of an asset in the early years of use, you might be underestimating the company’s profits, making it appear that the company is less profitable than it actually is. On the other hand, depreciating an asset slowly could make it appears that the company is more profitable than it really is. For this reason, the choice of a depreciation method is best left to a tax accountant, fully aware of the financial issues and the tax laws involved in depreciating an asset.

Q: Does the NPV function in Excel correspond to the financial definition of net present value? Explain your answer.
Feedback: The financial definition of net present value is the difference between the present value of future cash flows and the current cost of the initial investment. One source of confusion for Excel users is that despite its name, the NPV function does not return the net present value of an investment. Instead it returns the investment’s present value. To calculate the net present value in Excel, the cost of the initial investment must be subtracted from the value returned by the NPV function using the formula NPV value – initial investment where NPV value is the value returned by the NPV function, and initial investment is the initial cost of the investment. This formula assumes that the initial investment is made immediately, and not in the future using discounted dollars.

Q: At the break-even point, revenue equals expenses.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="450" height="326" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure indicates the profit.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: With what-if analysis, you specify the result values you want, and Excel changes the input values to produce them.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: As in traditional what-if analysis, Goal Seek starts with the end result and determines what value you should use to reach a desired answer.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To open the Goal Seek dialog box, first click the What-If Analysis button in the Data Tools group.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You should always clearly label the row or column containing the input and result values.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If your input values are in a column, you will use the Row input cell option when you use the Data Table command.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you create a one-variable data table, you select the range that contains the data table, making sure to include the column headings.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In a two-variable data table, the values of two result cells are displayed.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Two-variable data tables are often used to explore the impact of changing two values on a single result.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Changing cells can be located anywhere in the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="504" height="417" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> If the dialog box in the accompanying figure is used to unlock the changing cells in the scenario, and the worksheet is protected, users can show the scenario but not edit it.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You cannot merge scenarios in situations involving multiple workbooks.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Solver is an add-in, a program that adds customized commands and features to Microsoft Office programs such as Excel.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: It is possible for Solver to be installed but not activated on your computer.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Using Solver, you specify the target cell, variable cells, and constraints on a problem.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: That an order must meet store demand, or that it cannot exceed the available parts, are examples of constraints.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: References, or limits, in Solver are important because they ensure a realistic solution to your problem.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The sensitivity report is most often used in science and engineering environments.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A limits report is best utilized when your problem contains integer constraints.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Fixed</u> expenses change in proportion to the company’s sales volume.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: CVP analysis is sometimes called <u>breakthrough</u> analysis.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In traditional what-if analysis, you change <u>result</u> values in worksheet cells.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>output</u> cell is the cell containing the values you want to examine.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: An array <u>argument</u> performs multiple calculations on one or more sets of values and then returns either a single value or multiple values.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="504" height="417" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The items marked 1 in the accompanying figure are the <u>result</u> cells.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can view a scenario by <u>clicking</u> its name in the Scenarios box in the Scenario Manager dialog box.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When measuring elasticity, when e<1, the price elasticity of demand is <u>perfectly</u> inelastic.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When measuring elasticity, if e=1, then the elasticity is referred to as <u>unit</u> elastic because any change in price is met by an equal and opposite change in demand.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <u>Goal Seek</u> is a program that searches for the optimal solution of a problem involving several variables.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>optimal</u> cell is a cell that Excel changes to produce the desired result in the target cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The default convergence value is 0.001, which means that if the change in the target cell between one solution and the next is less than or equal to <u>0.001</u>, Solver will consider that it has converged to the solution.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If Solver is taking too long to find a solution, you can halt the program at any time by pressing the <u>Ctrl</u> key.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Not binding</u> constraints always show a slack of 0.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>mixed</u> expense is an expense that is part variable and part fixed.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: ____ analysis is an important business decision-making tool because it predicts the effect of cutting overhead or raising prices on net income.
- CVP
- MVP
- EVP
- AVP
A: CVP

Q: ____ analysis expresses the relationship between a company’s expenses, its volume of business, and the resulting profit.
- MVP
- ABC
- CVP
- CBP
A: CVP

Q: Which of the following expense types can be used in a CVP analysis? ____
- mixed
- variable
- fixed
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: A business must pay insurance and rent; these are examples of ____ expenses.
- fixed
- variable
- mixed
- transitional
A: fixed

Q: All three expense types can be classified as ____.
- mixed, fixed, and CVP
- variable, fixed, and mixed
- asset-based, fixed, and mixed
- variable, fixed, and cost-based
A: variable, fixed, and mixed

Q: <img width="450" height="326" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item in the accompanying figure is a(n) ____ chart.
- AVP
- CVP
- EVP
- MVP
A: CVP

Q: <img width="450" height="326" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is the ____ point.
- variable
- fixed
- break-even
- absolute
A: break-even

Q: <img width="450" height="326" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 3 in the accompanying figure indicates the ____ expenses.
- fixed
- mixed
- variable
- absolute
A: variable

Q: <img width="450" height="326" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 4 in the accompanying figure indicates the ____ expenses.
- fixed
- mixed
- variable
- absolute
A: fixed

Q: Goal Seek uses a different approach from traditional ____ analysis.
- trial-and-error
- what-if
- worksheet
- hypothetical
A: what-if

Q: With Goal Seek, you specify the ____ values you want.
- result
- constraint
- exchange
- index
A: result

Q: With Goal Seek, Excel changes the ____ values to produce the result values you are looking for.
- input
- output
- index
- link
A: input

Q: <img width="218" height="145" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the dialog box in the accompanying figure, you specify the ____ in the To value box.
- changing
- variable
- input
- goal
A: goal

Q: <img width="218" height="145" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the dialog box in the accompanying figure, you select the ____ cell in the By changing cell box.
- changing
- result
- input
- advance
A: input

Q: <img width="218" height="145" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To open the dialog box in the accompanying figure, click the What-If Analysis button in the ____ group.
- Sorter
- Analysis
- Goal Seek
- Data Tools
A: Data Tools

Q: <img width="218" height="145" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Press the ____ key to move the insertion point from one box to the next in the accompanying figure.
- Tab
- Ctrl
- Alt
- Shift
A: Tab

Q: If you orient a one-variable table so that the input values are in the first row, you would use the ____ input cell option.
- Column
- Row
- Values
- Table
A: Row

Q: In two-variable tables, you must always place a reference to the result cell in the ____ corner of the table at the intersection of the row values and the column values.
- upper-right
- upper-left
- lower-right
- lower-left
A: upper-left

Q: {=SUM(B1:B10*C1:C10)} is an example of a(n) ____.
- array formula
- TABLE function
- scenario
- input value
A: array formula

Q: Once you enter an array formula, Excel will enclose the formula in a set of ____.
- parentheses
- curly braces
- brackets
- none of the above
A: curly braces

Q: All of the following are array functions that can return multiple values to multiple cells EXCEPT ____.
- ARRAY
- TREND
- MINVERSE
- MMULT
A: ARRAY

Q: To calculate multiple cells values, select the range and type the array formula, then press the ____ keys to enter the formula.
- Alt+Enter
- Ctrl+Shift+Enter
- Alt+Shift+Enter
- Ctrl+Enter
A: Ctrl+Shift+Enter

Q: ____ are a powerful feature of Excel. If used properly, they help you perform complex calculations within a single formula and extend a single formula over a range of cells.
- Functions
- Formatting
- Array formulas
- Property sheets
A: Array formulas

Q: Before using Scenario Manager, you should assign ____ to all the input and result cells you intend to use in your scenarios.
- cells
- names
- ranges
- ranks
A: names

Q: To perform a what-if analysis with more than two input cells, you ____.
- hide all references
- use only exchange values
- apply additional constraints
- create scenarios
A: create scenarios

Q: <img width="504" height="417" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The items marked 1 in the accompanying figure are ____ cells.
- result
- changing
- input
- goal
A: input

Q: To select nonadjacent changing cells, press and hold the ____ key as you click each cell.
- Alt
- Shift
- Esc
- Ctrl
A: Ctrl

Q: You can switch from one scenario to another by clicking the ____ button in the Scenario Manager dialog box.
- Display
- View
- Show
- Effect
A: Show

Q: A scenario ____ lists the value for changing cells and results cells under each scenario.
- revenue report
- summary report
- index sample
- profit report
A: summary report

Q: A scenario summary report’s ____ layout makes it simpler to compare the results of each scenario, and the automatic formatting makes it useful for reports and meetings.
- portrait
- tabular
- row-based
- columnar
A: tabular

Q: Elasticity measures how changing prices can affect the ____ a good or service.
- production of
- demand for
- longevity of
- value of
A: demand for

Q: When change in price has <i>no</i> impact on demand, the situation is referred to as ____.
- price elastic
- perfectly inelastic
- perfectly elastic
- relatively inelastic
A: perfectly inelastic

Q: You can use the Load/Save button in the Solver ____ dialog box to save the Solver model to the current worksheet.
- Properties
- Output
- Parameters
- Input
A: Parameters

Q: In measuring elasticity, if e=0.1, then increasing the price of an item by 10% decreases demand by ____.
- 1%
- 10%
- 50%
- 100%
A: 1%

Q: In measuring elasticity, if e=0, then changes in price have no impact on demand, which is referred to as a ____ situation and occurs when the item being sold is rare or essential.
- relatively elastic
- perfectly inelastic
- relatively inelastic
- perfectly elastic
A: perfectly inelastic

Q: In measuring elasticity, if e=2.0, then increasing the price of an object by ____ decreases demand by 20%.
- 1%
- 10%
- 50%
- 100%
A: 10%

Q: In measuring elasticity, as the value of e increases, the result is that any change in price causes a huge change in demand, resulting in a ____ relationship between price and demand.
- relatively elastic
- perfectly inelastic
- relatively inelastic
- perfectly elastic
A: perfectly elastic

Q: ____ is a program that searches for the optimal solution of a problem involving several variables.
- Trial and error
- Solver
- Goal Seek
- Scenario Manager
A: Solver

Q: ____ can be used to find the curve or line that best fits a set of data or to minimize production costs for a product or service.
- Goal Seek
- Trial and error
- Scenario Manager
- Solver
A: Solver

Q: The three items that you must specify when using Solver are ____.
- target cell, input value, and results
- target cell, variable cell, and parameters
- variable cell, parameters, and constraints
- variable cell, objective cell, and constraints
A: variable cell, objective cell, and constraints

Q: In Solver, changing cells are sometimes referred to as ____ cells.
- self-adjusting
- variable
- key
- constraint
A: variable

Q: When you use Solver, you must specify the ____ that apply to your problem.
- adjustments
- constraints
- keys
- indices
A: constraints

Q: Aside from Solver, other Excel ____ provide the ability to perform statistical analyses, generate business reports, and retrieve financial data from the Internet.
- parameters
- add-ins
- helper applications
- constraint applications
A: add-ins

Q: To activate Solver, click Solver Add-In in the ____.
- Add-Ins dialog box
- Solver dialog box
- Analysis group
- Data Tools group
A: Add-Ins dialog box

Q: To open the Solver Parameters dialog box, click the Solver button in the ____ group on the Data tab.
- Connections
- Analysis
- Data Tools
- External Data
A: Analysis

Q: A(n) ____ is a limit that is placed on a Solver problem's solution.
- max
- target
- constraint
- adjustment
A: constraint

Q: ____ are important because they ensure a realistic solution to your problem.
- Constraints
- Parameters
- Targets
- Optimals
A: Constraints

Q: When you click the Solve button in the Solver Parameters dialog box, in the ____, you can see Solver rapidly "trying out" solutions.
- menu bar
- status bar
- dialog box
- toolbar
A: status bar

Q: After trying out solutions for a short time, Solver displays the ____ dialog box, which displays the message that indicates Solver has found a solution that satisfies the constraints.
- Solver Answer
- Solver Solution
- Solver Results
- Solution
A: Solver Results

Q: Solver arrives at optimal solutions through a(n) ____ procedure.
- reciprocal
- iterative
- secondary
- convergent
A: iterative

Q: A(n) ____ procedure means that Solver starts with an initial solution and uses that as a basis to calculate a series of solutions.
- reciprocal
- iterative
- secondary
- convergent
A: iterative

Q: If Solver is taking too long to find a solution, you can halt the program at any time by pressing the ____ key.
- Alt
- Enter
- Esc
- Ctrl
A: Esc

Q: If you want to see the iterative process in action, click the ____ check box, and Excel will pause after each iteration and show the intermediate solutions that it finds.
- Document Iterations
- Iteration Reports
- Iteration Progress
- Show Iteration Results
A: Show Iteration Results

Q: The default length of time that Solver will spend on the iterative process is ____ seconds.
- 50
- 100
- 500
- 1000
A: 100

Q: The default convergence value in Solver is ____.
- 0.001
- 0.01
- 0.1
- 1.0
A: 0.001

Q: The default number of iterations Solver will try is ____.
- 50
- 100
- 500
- 1000
A: 100

Q: You can include an analysis of the constraints and conditions by which Solver arrived at its solution by creating a(n) ____ report.
- analysis
- answer
- condition
- constraint
A: answer

Q: Solver can create the following three different reports: ____.
- sensitivity, answer, analysis
- constraint, sensitivity, analysis
- analysis, answer, limits
- answer, limits, sensitivity
A: answer, limits, sensitivity

Q: The ____ report summarizes the results of a successful solution by displaying information about the target cell, changing cells, and constraints.
- answer
- constraint
- sensitivity
- limits
A: answer

Q: Which of the following reports is used to quantify the reliability of a solution?
- Limits
- Sensitivity
- Constraint
- both a. and b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: Which of the following reports is used when your problem contains integer constraints?
- Answer
- Sensitivity
- Limits
- both a. and b.
A: Answer

Q: The ____ report is used primarily when the user wants to investigate the mathematical aspects of the Solver solution.
- answer
- solution
- arithmetic
- limits
A: limits

Q: The answer report is divided into ____ sections.
- two
- three
- four
- five
A: four

Q: The last column on the right in an answer report shows the ____ for each constraint.
- reciprocity
- frequency
- slack
- both a. and b.
A: slack

Q: The slack is the difference between the value in the cell and the value at the limit of the ____.
- variable cell
- result cell
- constraint
- risk factor
A: constraint

Q: Binding constraints always show a slack of ____.
- -0.01
- 0
- 0.01
- 1
A: 0

Q: Cells that display the value ____ indicate that all of the values in the worksheet satisfy the Solver constraints.
- TRUE
- YES
- 1
- 0
A: TRUE

Q: If a value in the worksheet violates one of the constraints, the Solver parameter cells will display the value ____.
- FALSE
- NO
- 1
- 0
A: FALSE

Q: Scenario summary tables and scenario ____ can be used to obtain a quick snapshot of several possible outcomes.
- PivotTables
- Linear Tables
- Non Linear Tables
- Data Tables
A: PivotTables

Q: When using Goal Seek, select the ____ cell in the Set cell box, and then specify its value (goal) in the To value box.
- changing
- result
- input
- value
A: result

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions</b><br><b><br>Case 10-1<br></b>You have been having some difficulty in your economics class this semester, so you have requested support from a tutor. One topic that is giving you trouble at the moment is the price elasticity of demand.<br><br> Changes in price are having no impact on demand. This is an example of what kind of elasticity, according to your tutor?
- Relatively inelastic
- Perfectly inelastic
- Relatively elastic
- Perfectly elastic
A: Perfectly inelastic

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions</b><br><b><br>Case 10-1<br></b>You have been having some difficulty in your economics class this semester, so you have requested support from a tutor. One topic that is giving you trouble at the moment is the price elasticity of demand.<br><br> Increasing the price of an object by 10% decreases demand by 20%. This is an example of what kind of elasticity, according to your tutor?
- Relatively inelastic
- Perfectly inelastic
- Relatively elastic
- Perfectly elastic
A: Relatively elastic

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions</b><br><b><br>Case 10-1<br></b>You have been having some difficulty in your economics class this semester, so you have requested support from a tutor. One topic that is giving you trouble at the moment is the price elasticity of demand.<br><br> Consumers have to choose between two products that are exactly equal in all respects, and raising the price of one causes a huge decrease in demand. This is an example of what kind of elasticity, according to your tutor?
- Relatively inelastic
- Perfectly inelastic
- Relatively elastic
- Perfectly elastic
A: Perfectly elastic

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions</b><br><b><br>Case 10-1<br></b>You have been having some difficulty in your economics class this semester, so you have requested support from a tutor. One topic that is giving you trouble at the moment is the price elasticity of demand.<br><br> A change in price is met by an equal and opposite change in demand. This is an example of what kind of elasticity, according to your tutor?
- Unit elastic
- Perfect elastic
- Relative elastic
- Absolute elastic
A: Unit elastic

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions</b><br><b><br>Case 10-1<br></b>You have been having some difficulty in your economics class this semester, so you have requested support from a tutor. One topic that is giving you trouble at the moment is the price elasticity of demand.<br><br> Increasing the price of an item by 10% decreases demand by only 1%. This is an example of what kind of elasticity, according to your tutor?
- relatively inelastic
- perfectly inelastic
- relatively elastic
- perfectly elastic
A: relatively inelastic

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 10-2<br></b>As you begin to work with Solver, you have questions so you turn to your roommate, Barat, who you know is an expert in its usage.<br><br> Barat explains to you that if you want to use Solver to maximize a company’s net income, this cell is what kind of cell?
- goal cell
- objective cell
- changing cell
- constraint
A: objective cell

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 10-2<br></b>As you begin to work with Solver, you have questions so you turn to your roommate, Barat, who you know is an expert in its usage.<br><br> Barat explains that if you have a cell that is the sales price of a given product, the value of which will change to produce the desired Solver result in the target cell, this cell is what kind of cell?
- goal cell
- constraint
- changing cell
- absolute cell
A: changing cell

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 10-2<br></b>As you begin to work with Solver, you have questions so you turn to your roommate, Barat, who you know is an expert in its usage.<br><br> In your scenario, there is a physical limit on the number of products that the factories can produce in a given year. What does Barat tell you this limit is called, in Solver’s terms?
- changing cell
- objective cell
- goal cell
- constraint
A: constraint

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 10-2<br></b>As you begin to work with Solver, you have questions so you turn to your roommate, Barat, who you know is an expert in its usage.<br><br> Barat explains that there are six possible constraints supported by Solver. Which of the following is NOT one of those constraints?
- !=
- >=
- <=
- =
A: !=

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 10-2<br></b>As you begin to work with Solver, you have questions so you turn to your roommate, Barat, who you know is an expert in its usage.<br><br> The default convergence value is 0.001, which means that if the change in the value of the objective cell between the new solution and the previous solution is ____0.001.
- equal to
- less than or equal to
- greater than or equal to
- greater than
A: less than or equal to

Q: ____________________ expenses change in proportion to the amount of business a company does.
A: Variable

Q: A(n) ____________________ expense is an expense that must be paid regardless of sales volume.
A: fixed

Q: With ____________________, you specify the result values you want, and Excel changes the input values to produce them.
A: Goal Seek

Q: In Goal Seek, the ____________________ cell is the cell containing the values you want to examine.
A: result

Q: ____________________ cells are cells containing values you want to modify in what-if analysis cells.
A: Input

Q: To set up a(n) ____________________ table, you first insert references to the input and result cells.
A: data

Q: When creating a(n) ____________________ data table, you must identify the row input cell and the column input cell.
A: two-variable

Q: The ____________________ input cell is the cell on which you base values placed in the first row of the data table.
A: row

Q: The ____________________ input cell is the cell on which values placed in the first column of the data table are based.
A: column

Q: <img width="504" height="417" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is the scenario ____________________.
A: description

Q: <img width="504" height="417" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Check the item marked 3 in the accompanying figure to hide the scenario in a(n) ____________________ worksheet.
A: protected

Q: If you want to concentrate on only a few key cells, the scenario summary report has ____________________ tools so you can hide and expand different parts of the report.
A: outline

Q: Click the Scenario PivotTable ____________________ option button to create a PivotTable describing the scenarios.
A: report

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a customized program that adds commands and features to Microsoft Office programs.
A: add-in

Q: In Solver, a(n) ____________________ cell is a cell that you want to maximize, minimize, or change to a specific value.
A: objective

Q: The Scenario Manager refers to ____________________ cells as changing cells because these worksheet cells contain values that are changed under the scenario.
A: input

Q: The ____________________ is the difference between the value in a cell and the value at the limit of the constraint.
A: slack

Q: ____________________ constraints always show a slack of 0.
A: Binding

Q: The effect that price has on demand is called ____________________ of demand.
A: price elasticity

Q: When elasticity is <i>e</i>>1, the price elasticity is ____________________ elastic.
A: relatively

Q: How does Goal Seek differ from traditional what-if analysis?
Feedback: Goal Seek uses a different approach from traditional what-if analysis, when you change input values in worksheet cells, and Excel uses these values to calculate result values. With Goal Seek, you specify the result values you want, and Excel changes the input values to produce them.

Q: What are the steps to create a one-variable data table?
Feedback: Insert a formula that references the input cell in the upper-left cell of the table. Insert input values in either the first row or first column of the table. For input values in the first row, insert formulas referencing result cells in the table’s first column; for input values in the first column, insert formulas referencing result cells in the table’s first row. Select the table (excluding any row or column headings). In the Data Tools group on the Data tab, click the What-If Analysis button, and then click Data Table. If the input values are in the first row, enter the cell reference to the input cell in the Row input cell box; if the input values are in the first column, enter the cell reference to the input cell in the Column input cell box. Click the OK button.

Q: How many different types of reports can Solver create? What are the characteristics of these report types, and which is the most useful?
Feedback: Solver can create three different reports—an answer report, a sensitivity report, and a limits report. The answer report may be the most useful of the three because it summarizes the results of a successful solution by displaying information about the target cell, changing cells, and constraints. This report includes the original and final values for the target and changing cells, as well as the constraint formulas. The sensitivity and limits reports are often used in science and engineering environments when the user wants to investigate the mathematical aspects of the Solver solution. These reports allow you to quantify the reliability of the solution; however, you cannot use these reports when your problem contains integer constraints.

Q: Only a few types of computers can read text files.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Text files are rarely used for storing data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Most software programs can both save and retrieve data in a text file format.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Excel can open a text file into a worksheet, where you can then format it as you would any data.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Excel can save a workbook as a text file, preserving only the data values, without any of the formats applied to it.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Columns in delimited text files are always vertically aligned as they would be in a spreadsheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In addition to delimited text, you can also organize data with a fixed-width file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: By default, the Text Import Wizard will start importing text with the first row of the file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: For a fixed-width text file to import correctly into Excel, there must be some way for the Text Import Wizard to know where each column begins and ends.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The Text Import Wizard's attempt to define the number and location of columns is always correct.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If a break is in the wrong location in the Data preview window, you double-click it to move it to a new location in the window.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When using the Text Import Wizard, you can specify a column's format before the column is imported.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In addition to specifying the format of data using the Text Import Wizard, you can also indicate which columns you do not want to import.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Eliminating columns using the Text Import Wizard is useful when there are only a few items you want to import from a large text file containing many columns.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You cannot specify how you want the data to appear in a query.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you save a query, you are actually placing the query choices you have made into a file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In the last part of writing a query, you specify how to sort the data.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: By modifying a query's properties, you can add new columns to your worksheet, change the sort order options, or specify a filter.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Databases such as those created in Access are examples of relational databases.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Microsoft supports a library of built-in Web queries.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Although <u>text</u> files contain only raw, unformatted data, they are very useful in situations when you want to share data across software programs and computer systems.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A delimiter separates one <u>row</u> of data from another.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>space</u> delimiter is often the best way of separating text columns because it permits spaces and commas within each column.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="200" height="73" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The accompanying figure illustrates an example of <u>space-delimited</u> text.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In the Text Import Wizard, the Preview window shows the initial <u>rows</u> of the text file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The point at which one column ends and another begins in the Text Import Wizard is called a column <u>cease</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In a delimited file, the delimiter automatically determines the <u>row</u> break.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When using the Text Import Wizard, skip importing a column by clicking the column in the <u>Row</u> preview box and then clicking the Do not import (skip) option button.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Databases contain information stored in the form of <u>lists</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="348" height="167" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure is the row or <u>field</u> in a database table.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="348" height="167" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is the column or <u>record</u> in a database table.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Rich text</u> formatting will result in imported data that most closely resembles the appearance of a Web page.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Because a text file does not contain formatting <u>codes</u> to give it structure, a program needs another way to understand the file contents.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When filtering data using the Query Wizard – Filter Data dialog box, the left column specifies the type of <u>sort</u> you want to make in the filter, such as “equals,” “greater than,” or “less than.”
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Web query files are simple <u>XML</u> files, so you can view and edit their contents in Notepad.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A text file can contain ____.
- formulas
- special fonts
- graphics
- none of the above
A: none of the above

Q: Most software programs can both save and retrieve data in a(n) ____ file format.
- HTML
- text
- spreadsheet
- both a. and b.
A: text

Q: The following is an example of a delimiter: ____.
- space
- comma
- tab
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: One way to structure text files is to use a(n) ____.
- index
- matrix
- delimiter
- register
A: delimiter

Q: A ____ delimiter is often the best way of separating text columns because text delimited this way can include spaces or commas within each column.
- space
- comma
- tab
- dash
A: tab

Q: When you use Excel to connect to a text file, the ____ Wizard determines whether the data is in a fixed-width format or a delimited format.
- File
- Open File
- Open Text
- Text Import
A: Text Import

Q: The ____ filename extension identifies a file as a text file.
- .tex
- .text
- .txt
- .tt
A: .txt

Q: The following is a NOT a common text filename extension: ____.
- .dat
- .prn
- .csv
- .doc
A: .doc

Q: The row at which you begin the import process is called the ____ row.
- starting
- origin
- opening
- key
A: starting

Q: You insert a new column break in the Text Import Wizard by ____ the position in the Data preview window where you want the break to appear.
- double-clicking
- clicking
- triple-clicking
- right-clicking
A: clicking

Q: You can delete an extra column break in the Data preview window of the Text Import Wizard by ____ it.
- right-clicking
- clicking
- double-clicking
- triple-clicking
A: double-clicking

Q: In a ____ file, the wizard guesses the locations of the column breaks.
- fixed-width
- tab-delimited
- column-delimited
- space-delimited
A: fixed-width

Q: Unless you specify a format, Excel will apply a ____ format to all columns.
- Text
- General
- Numerical
- Logical
A: General

Q: A(n) ____ is a file that stores a collection of related data.
- index
- register
- database
- table
A: database

Q: ____ is a database program.
- Word
- Access
- PowerPoint
- Outlook
A: Access

Q: When the location of a data source is defined as a(n) ____ location, Excel will access the connection to the data source without prompting you to confirm that the connection is secure.
- related
- trusted
- encrypted
- safe
A: trusted

Q: <img width="348" height="167" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure is a ____ in a database table.
- field
- register
- record
- key
A: record

Q: <img width="348" height="167" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is a ____ in a database table.
- field
- register
- record
- key
A: field

Q: You relate tables to one another by using ____ fields.
- key
- common
- indexed
- date
A: common

Q: When you want to look only at specific information from a database, you create a(n) ____.
- index
- matrix
- register
- query
A: query

Q: In response to a(n) ____, a database displays the records and fields that meet the question's requirements.
- index
- matrix
- register
- query
A: query

Q: A(n) ____ might ask something like, "What are the names of all the stocks in the portfolio, and what are their corresponding ticker symbols?"
- index
- matrix
- register
- query
A: query

Q: If you want to extract only specific records when you query a database, your query would contain ____.
- samples
- criteria
- records
- limiters
A: criteria

Q: The following is a possible data source for Excel: ____.
- dBASE file
- MS Access Database
- Excel file
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: A data ____ is any file that contains the data you want to retrieve.
- roster
- link
- dialog
- source
A: source

Q: The following is a possible data source: ____.
- databases
- text files
- other Excel workbooks
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: You can define your own data source by clicking ____ from the list of databases in the Choose Data Source dialog box.
- <Select Data Source>
- <New Data Source>
- <Create Source>
- <Initialize Source>
A: <New Data Source>

Q: The ____ Wizard lets you preview the structure of the database and its contents.
- Data
- Query
- Source
- Database
A: Query

Q: In the Query Wizard, click the ____ in front of a table name to expand the display of fields in that table.
- key
- exclamation point
- question mark
- plus sign
A: plus sign

Q: To select fields within the Query Wizard, you can ____ the field name and Excel will automatically move it to the list of selected columns in your query.
- click
- double-click
- triple-click
- right-click
A: double-click

Q: When you ____ data, you specify which records you want to retrieve using specific criteria.
- order
- filter
- strike
- rekey
A: filter

Q: The default folder for queries is the ____ folder on the hard disk.
- Templates
- Queries
- Database
- Data
A: Queries

Q: Queries saved in the Queries folder will display on the Queries tab of the ____ dialog box, giving you quick and easy access to your saved queries.
- Find Queries
- Choose Data Source
- Use Queries
- Storing Data
A: Choose Data Source

Q: Microsoft Query is a(n) ____ that includes several tools that allow you to create even more complex queries.
- template
- Office program
- cube
- PivotTable
A: Office program

Q: If you refresh external data in the ____, you can work on other portions of the workbook as you wait for the data to be retrieved.
- view
- background
- window
- marquee
A: background

Q: ____ has been widely used in database programs, Web programming, and word processing.
- XML
- JavaScript
- Perl
- HTML
A: XML

Q: To create a Web query, you need to know the ____ of the resource (usually a Web page) you are accessing.
- FTP
- URL
- HTTP
- HTML
A: URL

Q: The ____ is the address of a Web page.
- FTP
- HTTP
- HTML
- URL
A: URL

Q: The general form of a URL for a file located on your computer will be ____.
- file:///drive:/path/filename
- file://drive://path/filename
- file://drive:/path//filename
- file:///drive:///path///filename
A: file:///drive:/path/filename

Q: You can retrieve the Web page format using ____, which is the default option.
- HTML formatting
- Rich text formatting
- Excel formatting
- None
A: None

Q: The ____ formatting only option retrieves the text from a Web query along with simple formatting, but not advanced formatting such as hyperlinks or complicated table structures.
- Rich text
- Text
- Default
- Normal
A: Rich text

Q: The ____ formatting option retrieves all simple as well as advanced HTML formatting features, including hyperlinks.
- Full
- Full HTML
- Rich text
- Default
A: Full HTML

Q: An XML document is structured like a tree in which elements are placed within one another, descending from a common ____ element.
- base
- root
- tag
- common
A: root

Q: The name of each element in an XML document is contained in a(n) ____.
- link
- tag
- file
- anchor
A: tag

Q: Clicking a ____ in a worksheet will activate the computer's Web browser to display the Web page associated with that entry.
- hyperlink
- tag
- file
- schema
A: hyperlink

Q: Real-time ____ values from measuring devices and scientific equipment are a possible data source in Excel.
- link
- data
- file
- map
A: data

Q: Once you insert the ____ function into a cell, the value of the cell will display the latest value retrieved from a measuring device.
- schema
- XML
- RTD
- real
A: RTD

Q: By using the ____ function along with an add-in program, a scientist or researcher can save hours of data entry time and focus on analysis.
- RTD
- schema
- real
- XML
A: RTD

Q: In an XML element, a(n)____ tag marks the end of the data value.
- opening
- index
- closing
- map
A: closing

Q: In XML, the rules about which elements are required and which are not are stored in a document called the ____.
- schema
- dictionary
- index
- glossary
A: schema

Q: <img width="518" height="90" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item 1 points to the ____.
- URL element specifying the file is stored locally on the computer
- path name of the folder containing the file
- filename of the Web page
- name of the computer or Web server storing the page
A: URL element specifying the file is stored locally on the computer

Q: <img width="518" height="90" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item 2 points to the ____.
- URL element specifying the file is stored locally on the computer
- path name of the folder containing the file
- filename of the Web page
- name of the computer or Web server storing the page
A: path name of the folder containing the file

Q: <img width="518" height="90" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item 3 points to the ____.
- URL element specifying the file is stored locally on the computer
- path name of the folder containing the file
- filename of the Web page
- name of the computer or Web server storing the page
A: filename of the Web page

Q: <img width="518" height="262" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item ____ points to the column headings.
- 1
- 2
- 3
- 4
A: 2

Q: <img width="518" height="262" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item ____ points to the formatted title.
- 1
- 2
- 3
- 4
A: 1

Q: <img width="518" height="262" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item ____ is the name of the worksheet.
- 1
- 2
- 4
- 5
A: 5

Q: <img width="518" height="262" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, what range of cells includes a number format?
- A1:D20
- A2:D20
- A5:D20
- B5:D20
A: B5:D20

Q: <img width="518" height="262" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, what range of cells has the date format applied?
- A1:D20
- A2:D20
- A5:D20
- A5:A20
A: A5:A20

Q: <img width="504" height="283" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the Horizons Fund Portfolio shown in the accompanying figure, Column A displays ticker symbols.  In Excel, the MSN MoneyCentral Investor Stock Quotes Query allows you to enter up to ___ ticker symbols to retrieve current market values of the stocks.
- 15
- 20
- 25
- 30
A: 20

Q: <img width="504" height="283" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the Horizons Fund Portfolio shown in the accompanying figure, data is sorted by ____.
- Category only
- Category, then by Portfolio Percent.
- Portfolio Percent, then Category
- Portfolio Percent only
A: Category, then by Portfolio Percent.

Q: One of the advantages of using XML as a data source is that it allows you to attach, or ____, elements to specific cells in the workbook.
- map
- bind
- insert
- pin
A: bind

Q: One of the advantages of XML is that the XML author defines what constitutes a valid document.  Documents that fail to meet the rules can be rejected by an XML program as invalid, thus ensuring ____.
- coding
- data values
- data integrity
- external data
A: data integrity

Q: To detach an Excel table from its data source, select a cell in the table, click the Table Tools Design tab, and then, in the External Table Data group, click the ____ button.
- Unlink
- Detach
- Remove Source
- Embed
A: Unlink

Q: Databases such as those created in Access are examples of ____ databases which reduce data redundancy and increase data integrity.
- pivot
- relational
- linked
- embedded
A: relational

Q: One way to interact with a database is with a query language. The most popular query language is ____.
- ODC
- UDC
- OLE
- SQL
A: SQL

Q: When Excel imports external data into a PivotTable or PivotChart, the initial table and chart are ____.
- complete with data, but may be edited
- partially complete with data which needs to be edited
- empty
- all of the above are possible
A: empty

Q: To manually save a connection to an ODC file, use the Export ____ File button on the Definition tab of the Connection Properties dialog box to specify the name and location of your Office Data Connection file.
- Connection
- Data
- Office
- ODC
A: Connection

Q: In order to override Excel so that it always enables data sources and refreshes the connection to the source without prompting, you should define the location of the data sources as ____.
- new locations
- trusted sites
- trusted locations
- enabled locations
A: trusted locations

Q: If you are importing international data from a text file, click the ____ button in Step 3 of the Text Import Wizard to specify a different character for the decimal point and thousands separator.
- Next
- Number
- Advanced
- General
A: Advanced

Q: A ____ is a defined method of retrieving data from an external file.
- connection
- data range
- data source
- importing scheme
A: connection

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-1</b><br>Tayler is a manager in the Sales Department for BusyBody Toymakers. She needs access to up-to-date financial data and sales reports. Some of this information comes from Excel workbooks, but other information is stored in other software programs. In addition, BusyBody Toymakers maintains a database with detailed financial information and sales figures. Tayler uses Excel to analyze data from external data sources.<br><br> Tayler creates a chart displaying the company’s recent sales history. When she resizes the chart, the image is distorted. What key should she hold down while resizing the chart so that it is resized proportionately?
- Ctrl
- Alt
- Shift
- Esc
A: Shift

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-1</b><br>Tayler is a manager in the Sales Department for BusyBody Toymakers. She needs access to up-to-date financial data and sales reports. Some of this information comes from Excel workbooks, but other information is stored in other software programs. In addition, BusyBody Toymakers maintains a database with detailed financial information and sales figures. Tayler uses Excel to analyze data from external data sources.<br><br> Tayler needs to delete a connection to a data source.  She should select the connection in the list in the Workbook Connections dialog box, and then click the ____ button.
- Delete
- Remove
- Omit
- Detach
A: Remove

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-1</b><br>Tayler is a manager in the Sales Department for BusyBody Toymakers. She needs access to up-to-date financial data and sales reports. Some of this information comes from Excel workbooks, but other information is stored in other software programs. In addition, BusyBody Toymakers maintains a database with detailed financial information and sales figures. Tayler uses Excel to analyze data from external data sources.<br><br> To prevent other users from updating a data source without permission, what should Tayler do?
- Define the data source
- Remove the connection
- Require a password
- Nothing--Excel cannot prevent data from being refreshed
A: Require a password

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-1</b><br>Tayler is a manager in the Sales Department for BusyBody Toymakers. She needs access to up-to-date financial data and sales reports. Some of this information comes from Excel workbooks, but other information is stored in other software programs. In addition, BusyBody Toymakers maintains a database with detailed financial information and sales figures. Tayler uses Excel to analyze data from external data sources.<br><br> Tayler wants the workbook to always display the most current values from a text file used when importing external sales data. What is the advantage of editing the properties of the connection versus editing the properties of the external data range?
- The choices are applied to all of the external data ranges that use that connection.
- The choices are applied only to the current workbook.
- The choices are only applied the first time the workbook is opened after the properties have been changed.
- There is no advantage--it would be better to edit the properties of the external data range.
A: The choices are applied to all of the external data ranges that use that connection.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-1</b><br>Tayler is a manager in the Sales Department for BusyBody Toymakers. She needs access to up-to-date financial data and sales reports. Some of this information comes from Excel workbooks, but other information is stored in other software programs. In addition, BusyBody Toymakers maintains a database with detailed financial information and sales figures. Tayler uses Excel to analyze data from external data sources.<br><br> After opening a workbook, Tayler wants to update all of the external data ranges in the workbook.  What button should she click in the Connections group on the Data tab?
- Refresh
- Refresh All
- Update
- Update All
A: Refresh All

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-2</b><br>Sadra works for a local travel agency. She uses the agency’s Web site to promote the latest tours. She uses Access to store information concerning the tours and Excel to analyze the data. Fall tours include trips to Honolulu, Seattle, Chicago, and Denver. Spring tours include trips to Washington, D.C., New Mexico, Alaska, and Montana. Summer tours include Paris, Rome, Denmark, and Australia.<br><br> Sadra wants Excel to automatically refresh the connection between her Excel workbook and her Access database whenever the workbook is opened.  She should click the <i>Refresh data when opening the file</i> check box in the Connection Properties dialog box.  What steps should she take to open the Connection Properties dialog box?
- Click the Data tab on the Ribbon, click the Connections button in the Connections group, then click the Connection button.
- Click the Data tab on the Ribbon, click the Connections button in the Connections group, select the database, then click the Properties button.
- Click the Edit tab on the Ribbon, then click the Connections button in the Connections group.
- Click the Edit tab on the Ribbon, click the Connections button in the Connections group, select the database, then click the Properties button.
A: Click the Data tab on the Ribbon, click the Connections button in the Connections group, select the database, then click the Properties button.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-2</b><br>Sadra works for a local travel agency. She uses the agency’s Web site to promote the latest tours. She uses Access to store information concerning the tours and Excel to analyze the data. Fall tours include trips to Honolulu, Seattle, Chicago, and Denver. Spring tours include trips to Washington, D.C., New Mexico, Alaska, and Montana. Summer tours include Paris, Rome, Denmark, and Australia.<br><br> Sadra is told by her database administrator to always document her connections to external data. Why is this important?
- Storing data is not immediately required; therefore, documentation is necessary.
- Connection properties can be changed more easily if connections are documented.
- Users can quickly see what the data is used for and where it came from.
- Text files must be documented for connection purposes.
A: Users can quickly see what the data is used for and where it came from.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-2</b><br>Sadra works for a local travel agency. She uses the agency’s Web site to promote the latest tours. She uses Access to store information concerning the tours and Excel to analyze the data. Fall tours include trips to Honolulu, Seattle, Chicago, and Denver. Spring tours include trips to Washington, D.C., New Mexico, Alaska, and Montana. Summer tours include Paris, Rome, Denmark, and Australia.<br><br> Sadra wants her connection files listed in the Existing Connections dialog box. She should save the connections in the ____ folder.
- My Connections
- My Data Sources
- My Documents
- My Sources
A: My Data Sources

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-2</b><br>Sadra works for a local travel agency. She uses the agency’s Web site to promote the latest tours. She uses Access to store information concerning the tours and Excel to analyze the data. Fall tours include trips to Honolulu, Seattle, Chicago, and Denver. Spring tours include trips to Washington, D.C., New Mexico, Alaska, and Montana. Summer tours include Paris, Rome, Denmark, and Australia.<br><br> Sadra learns that an advantage of using XML elements in a worksheet is that it allows the user to attach elements to specific cells. To map an XML document directly into an Excel table, Sadra should click the From Other Sources button in the Getting External Data group on the Data tab, and then click ____.
- From XML Document
- From XML Source
- From XML Documentation
- From XML Data Import
A: From XML Data Import

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-2</b><br>Sadra works for a local travel agency. She uses the agency’s Web site to promote the latest tours. She uses Access to store information concerning the tours and Excel to analyze the data. Fall tours include trips to Honolulu, Seattle, Chicago, and Denver. Spring tours include trips to Washington, D.C., New Mexico, Alaska, and Montana. Summer tours include Paris, Rome, Denmark, and Australia.<br><br> The office manager at the travel agency informs Sadra that starting with Office 2007, Microsoft moved to using the Office Open XML format which stores the XML code in a(n) ____ file.
- compressed
- batch
- text
- unzipped
A: compressed

Q: A(n) ____________________ file contains only text and numbers without any formulas, special fonts, graphics, or formatted text.
A: text

Q: A(n) ____________________ separates one column of data from another.
A: delimiter

Q: To better understand the structure of an XML document, an XML ____________________ can be created that displays the layout of the elements in a schematic diagram.
A: data map

Q: In a(n) ____________________ text file, each column will start at the same location in the file.
A: fixed-width

Q: In a delimited text file, the ____________________—usually a space, a comma, or a tab—automatically determines the column break.
A: delimiter

Q: The point at which one column ends and another begins in the Text Import Wizard is called a(n) ____________________ break.
A: column

Q: Data in an XML document is contained within ____________________.
A: elements

Q: XML stands for ____________________.
A: Extensible Markup Language

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a collection of data arranged in rows and columns.
A: table

Q: Each column of a database table, called a(n) ____________________, stores information about a specific characteristic of a person, place, or thing.
A: field

Q: Each row of a database table, called a(n) ____________________, displays a collection of characteristics of a particular person, place, or thing.
A: record

Q: ____________________ fields are the fields that appear in more than one table.
A: Common

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a question you ask about the data in the database.
A: query

Q: ____________________ are the conditions that limit the number of records displayed in the results of a query.
A: Criteria

Q: A(n) ____________________ source is any file that contains the data you want to retrieve.
A: data

Q: Data ____________________ can be databases, text files, or other Excel workbooks.
A: sources

Q: In the Query Wizard, you can preview the contents of each field in the table by selecting it and then clicking the ____________________ button.
A: Preview Now

Q: URL stands for ____________________.
A: Uniform Resource Locator

Q: Database tables can be inserted directly into PivotCharts and ____________________.
A: PivotTables

Q: When using a Web site as a data source, a(n) ____________________ specifies how data should be retrieved from the Web page and indicates exactly which parts of the Web page should be included and which parts should not be included.
A: Web query

Q: Assume you have a blank workbook open in Excel. You have clicked on the Sheet1 tab and you are currently in cell A1. Describe the steps you would take to connect to a text file using the Text Import Wizard.
Feedback: In the Get External Data group on the Data tab, click the From Text button, and then select the text file containing the data. In the first step of the Text Import Wizard, choose how the data is organized, and then specify the row in which to start the import. In the second step, set the column breaks by clicking a location in the Data preview box to insert a column break, double-clicking a column break to delete it, and dragging a column break to move it to a new location. In the third step, specify the data format for each column by clicking the column and then selecting the appropriate data format option button, or skip importing a column by clicking the column in the Data preview box and then clicking the Do not import (skip) option button. Click the Finish button. Specify where to insert the imported text, and then click the OK button to import the text file into the worksheet.

Q: What are the steps to filter data in a query?
Feedback: In the first step of the Query Wizard, select the columns from the different tables to include in your query, and then click the Next button. In the second step of the wizard, filter the data by selecting the columns to filter, specifying the nature of the filter in the Only include rows where list boxes, and then click the Next button. In the third step of the wizard, specify the sort order for the data values in the query, and then click the Next button. In the last step of the wizard, specify whether to return the query data to Excel, view or edit the data in Microsoft Query, or save the written query to a permanent file for use later.

Q: Define XML and discuss its applications. Define each of the following terms: elements, root element, tag, data map, and schema.
Feedback: Extensible Markup Language (XML) is a language that structures data in text files that can be read by a wide variety of programs. In recent years, XML has been widely used in database programs, Web programming, and word processing. Data in an XML document is contained within elements. The document is structured like a tree in which elements are placed within one another, descending from a common root element. The name of each element is contained in a tag. To better understand the structure of an XML document, a data map can be created that displays the layout of the elements in a schematic diagram. A schema is a separate document that stores information about whether or not an element is required—it contains the rules required for correctly inserting data into an XML document. When you connect to an XML document, Excel creates a data map of the document’s structure and contents. If a schema is present, Excel uses it to create the data map; otherwise, it creates the map based on the contents of the XML document. After the data map is created, you can use it to place XML elements anywhere within the workbook.

Q: The Excel macro recorder is the fastest way to create macros.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To open the Visual Basic Editor you must first click the Macros button in the Code group on the Developer tab.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Since Visual Basic for Applications is an application-specific language, Excel and Access use different variations of VBA.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: One important use of the Visual Basic Editor is to manage your projects.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In VBA, a project consists of a single macro in one worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Unlike Windows Explorer, Project Explorer does not allow you to view your project components hierarchically.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: All objects have properties.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="364" height="264" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The window in the accompanying figure displays each property’s name in the right column and its value in the left column.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="364" height="264" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the window in the accompanying figure, to view the list of properties in alphabetical order and by category, you can click the tabs at the top of the window.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A project cannot contain more than one module.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The macro recorder writes the most efficient code and records only those commands and actions you want in the finished project.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The VBA code "SUM(A1:A4)".Formula = Range("A5") changes the formula of cell A5 to sum up the values in the range A1:A4.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The VBA method ActiveWorkbook.SaveAs saves the current workbook.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The VBA code Set WBook = Workbooks("Smith") stores the WBook variable in the Smith workbook.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The And operator requires only one of two combined logical expressions to be true.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The MsgBox function is similar to the InputBox function except that the MsgBox function does not contain a text box for the user to enter values.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can quickly switch to the Visual Basic Editor by pressing the Shift+Alt keys.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: VBA allows you to create custom dialog boxes.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Macro buttons on the Quick Access Toolbar can be customized to display unique icons.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you hide screen elements that are part of the worksheet, they will be hidden in that worksheet only.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Hold down the Ctrl Key and press the Home key to go to cell <u>A1</u> in the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When the Visual Basic Editor opens, it usually displays three windows: the Project Explorer window, the <u>Project</u> window, and the Code window.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Project Explorer window is <u>dockable</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Attributes such as name, size, or color are known as <u>properties</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A project might contain several different <u>modules</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: All procedures are considered public unless specified as <u>Private</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="518" height="299" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As you enter a command in the <u>Project</u> window shown in the accompanying figure, its effects are immediately applied to that workbook.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In Excel, <u>ChartObject</u> refers to a chart embedded within a worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: VBA is a(n) <u>object-linked</u> programming language.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>Display</u> property of the Worksheet object determines if a worksheet is hidden.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Property values containing <u>text strings</u> and numeric values do not need to be placed within quotation marks.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The VBA code Worksheets("Raw Data").<u>Change</u> = "Sample Data" changes the name of the "Raw Data" worksheet to "Sample Data".
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In the function user = InputBox(“Enter your username” , “Log In”), “user” is the <u>prompt</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To determine whether an expression used in a condition is true or false, the expression needs to contain a(n) <u>condition</u> operator.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Logical operators are used to combine expressions within a(n) <u>condition</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To go to cell A1 in a worksheet, hold down the ____ key and press the Home key.
- Alt
- Enter
- Ctrl
- Esc
A: Ctrl

Q: Excel macros are written in the programming language ____.
- Perl
- JavaScript
- HTML
- VBA
A: VBA

Q: To edit a VBA macro, you need to use the Visual Basic ____.
- Manager
- Explorer
- Writer
- Editor
A: Editor

Q: To quickly switch to the Visual Basic Editor, press ____ on your keyboard.
- Esc + F1
- Ctrl + F7
- Alt + F11
- Enter + F12
A: Alt + F11

Q: <img width="518" height="237" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The application shown in the accompanying figure is the Visual Basic ____.
- Manager
- Explorer
- Writer
- Editor
A: Editor

Q: <img width="518" height="237" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure is the ____.
- Project Explorer
- Code window
- Properties window
- VBA Manager
A: Project Explorer

Q: <img width="518" height="237" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 3 in the accompanying figure is the ____ code.
- Perl
- VBA
- Java
- JavaScript
A: VBA

Q: <img width="518" height="237" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 4 in the accompanying figure is the ____.
- Project Explorer
- Code window
- Properties window
- VBA Manager
A: Code window

Q: When the Visual Basic Editor opens it usually displays ____ windows.
- three
- six
- seven
- eight
A: three

Q: The ____ is a Visual Basic Editor window.
- Code Explorer
- Properties window
- Project window
- Code Preview
A: Properties window

Q: A(n) ____ is a collection of macros, worksheets, data entry forms, and other items that make up a customized application.
- window
- project
- object
- applet
A: project

Q: The Project ____ is a window in the Visual Basic Editor that displays a hierarchical list of all currently opened projects and their contents.
- Manager
- Browser
- Explorer
- Editor
A: Explorer

Q: The default project name given to new projects is ____.
- VBObject
- NewProject
- Project
- VBAProject
A: VBAProject

Q: Within each project are various items called ____.
- keys
- variants
- sources
- objects
A: objects

Q: A(n) ____ is any element within the Excel working environment, such as a worksheet, macro, or workbook.
- source
- component
- object
- window
A: object

Q: When you enter the name and description of a project, you are actually modifying two of its ____.
- keys
- properties
- links
- objects
A: properties

Q: All of the following are attributes of an object except ____.
- name
- size
- location on the screen
- name of creator
A: name of creator

Q: <img width="364" height="264" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To open the window in the accompanying figure, first click ____ on the menu bar.
- Display
- VBA
- View
- Code
A: View

Q: A(n) ____ is a collection of VBA macros.
- aggregate
- module
- object
- component
A: module

Q: When you want to view the VBA macro code associated with any item in Project Explorer, you use the ____ window.
- Macro
- Module
- Code
- Project
A: Code

Q: Visual Basic supports ____ kinds of procedures.
- two
- three
- six
- eleven
A: three

Q: The following is a type of procedure supported by Visual Basic: ____.
- function procedure
- attribute procedure
- formula procedure
- settings procedure
A: function procedure

Q: Formatting a cell or displaying a chart are examples of ____ procedures in Visual Basic.
- sub
- function
- property
- attribute
A: sub

Q: A ____ procedure returns a value.
- sub
- function
- property
- calculation
A: function

Q: To create sub procedures without using the macro recorder, you need to know some rules of VBA ____.
- formulas
- statistics
- metrics
- syntax
A: syntax

Q: To open the Code window to the contents of a specific module, select the module in the Project Explorer window and then press the ____ key.
- Esc
- F7
- F8
- Shift
A: F7

Q: The ____ command is always the last line in a sub procedure and tells Excel to stop running the macro.
- End
- Quit Sub
- End Sub
- Stop Sub
A: End Sub

Q: Comments must begin with a(n) ____.
- apostrophe
- comma
- period
- double quotation mark
A: apostrophe

Q: Comments are usually displayed by the editor in ____ font.
- italicized
- green
- red
- bold
A: green

Q: Procedure names can be up to ____ characters in length.
- 125
- 126
- 255
- 256
A: 255

Q: Procedure names cannot contain ____.
- spaces
- numbers
- letters
- any of the above
A: spaces

Q: To step through a sub procedure one line at a time, click in the sub procedure code and then repeatedly press the ____ key.
- F7
- F8
- Alt
- Shift
A: F8

Q: To run an entire sub procedure, press the ____ key.
- Alt
- F5
- F6
- Shift
A: F5

Q: The Excel object you will use to create VBA programs and refer to a range in a worksheet is ____.
- Cell
- Range
- Chart
- Name
A: Range

Q: The Excel object you will use to create VBA programs and refer to a defined name in a workbook is ____.
- Name
- Range
- Chart
- Workname
A: Name

Q: The Excel object you will use to create VBA programs and refer to a chart embedded within a worksheet is ____.
- EmbedChart
- ChartEmbed
- ChartObject
- Application
A: ChartObject

Q: The VBA code ____ refers to the collection of cells in the cell range, A1:B10.
- Objects(A1:B10)
- Names(A1:B10)
- (A1:B10)
- Range("A1:B10")
A: Range("A1:B10")

Q: The object name ____ refers to the worksheet currently being displayed in the workbook.
- "DisplaySheet"
- "ActiveSheet"
- "ThisSheet"
- "SheetDisplayed"
A: "ActiveSheet"

Q: The object name ____ refers to the cell from which a custom function is being run.
- ThisWorkbook
- ThisCell
- ActiveCell
- FunctionCell
A: ThisCell

Q: The object name ____ refers to the workbook containing the macro code that is currently running.
- ThisCell
- ThisWorkbook
- ActiveWindow
- ActiveWorkbook
A: ThisWorkbook

Q: <img width="518" height="299" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Click ____ on the menu bar and then click Immediate Window to open the window in the accompanying figure.
- View
- Code
- Display
- Options
A: View

Q: <img width="518" height="299" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You can open the Immediate window in the accompanying figure by pressing the ____ keys in the Visual Basic Editor.
- Ctrl+A
- Ctrl+G
- Shift+A
- Alt+I
A: Ctrl+G

Q: <img width="518" height="299" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To dock and undock the window in the accompanying figure, right-click the window and then click the ____ on the shortcut menu.
- Location
- Stationary
- Dockable
- Movement
A: Dockable

Q: The cell reference of a range is located in the ____ property of the Range object.
- Where
- CellRef
- Reference
- Address
A: Address

Q: All of the following are properties of the Range object EXCEPT ____.
- Address
- Formula
- Comment
- Name
A: Name

Q: The ____ property of the Workbook object contains the folder and drive in which the workbook is stored.
- Folder
- Path
- Drive
- Location
A: Path

Q: Closing a workbook or printing a worksheet's contents are examples of ____.
- modules
- properties
- selections
- methods
A: methods

Q: To save time when running similar commands in the Immediate Window, press the Up Arrow key to go to the previous command, edit it, and then press the ____ key to run the revised command.
- Shift
- Run
- Enter
- F12
A: Enter

Q: The VBA code Range("A1").____ Text:=“Total Assets” adds the comment "Total Assets" to cell A1.
- Select
- AddComment
- Text
- Properties
A: AddComment

Q: The VBA code ActiveWorkbook.____:="broadband" protects the current workbook, using the password "broadband".
- Protect Username
- Lock Workbook
- Protect Password
- Secure Workbook
A: Protect Password

Q: A(n) ____ is a named element in a program that can be used to store and retrieve information.
- object
- component
- key
- variable
A: variable

Q: Every variable is identified by a unique variable ____.
- referent
- key
- name
- index
A: name

Q: You can define exactly what type of data can be stored in a variable with the ____ command.
- Stor
- Type
- Dim
- Name
A: Dim

Q: You can display the value of a variable by typing the variable name preceded by a(n) ____ in the Immediate window and pressing the Enter key.
- caret
- apostrophe
- question mark
- ampersand
A: question mark

Q: The ____ symbol is used to combine two text strings into a single text string.
- &
- ^
- %
- $
A: &

Q: ____ errors occur when the program is executing.
- Syntax
- Run-time
- Logical
- Type-based
A: Run-time

Q: ____ errors can be the most difficult to resolve.
- Syntax
- Run-time
- Logical
- Type-based
A: Logical

Q: To break a line to make your code easier to read, type a space followed by the ____ character at the end of the line.
- underscore
- ampersand
- apostrophe
- asterisk
A: underscore

Q: In the function user = InputBox(“Enter your username” , “Log In”), the words “Enter your username” comprise the ____.
- title
- prompt
- box name
- variable
A: prompt

Q: In the function user = InputBox(“Enter your username” , “Log In”), the words “Log in” comprise the ____.
- title
- prompt
- box name
- variable
A: title

Q: A(n) ____ structure is a series of commands that evaluates conditions in your program and then directs the program to perform certain actions based on the status of those conditions.
- evaluation
- control
- append
- conditional
A: control

Q: To test several conditions in a macro, using the VBA ____ statement is recommended.
- For-Next
- Do-While
- If-Then-ElseIf
- Select Case
A: Select Case

Q: If a control structure has more than two possible outcomes, you will have to use a(n) ____ control structure.
- If-Then
- If-Then-Else
- If-Then-ElseIf
- If-Then-If
A: If-Then-ElseIf

Q: The ____ comparison operator compares whether one object is the same as another.
- =
- +
- <>
- is
A: is

Q: The ____ control structure allows you to repeat a series of commands a set number of times.
- If-Then-ElseIf
- For-Next
- Case Select
- Do-For
A: For-Next

Q: The ____ control structure repeats a series of commands as long as a particular condition is true.
- If-Then-ElseIf
- For-Next
- Case Select
- Do-While
A: Do-While

Q: ____ operators are used to combine expressions within a condition.
- Conditional
- Logical
- Key
- Concatenation
A: Logical

Q: The most commonly used ____ operators are the And and Or operators.
- conditional
- logical
- key
- concatenation
A: logical

Q: The ____ operator requires that only one of two (or more) expressions be true.
- And
- Not
- One
- Or
A: Or

Q: The ____ function returns the value FALSE if the logical expression is true.
- OPP
- CON
- NOT
- THIS
A: NOT

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-1<br></b>Chantal is building a kiosk-based Excel application. She wants to make some modifications to the screen elements in order to keep users from being distracted by parts of the application that are irrelevant to her application. She turns to Jason for guidance as she knows he built a similar solution earlier this year.<br><br> Jason explains to Chantal that Excel screen elements fall into general categories. Which of the following is NOT one of the categories into which the screen elements fall?
- taskbar
- window
- workbook
- worksheet
A: taskbar

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-1<br></b>Chantal is building a kiosk-based Excel application. She wants to make some modifications to the screen elements in order to keep users from being distracted by parts of the application that are irrelevant to her application. She turns to Jason for guidance as she knows he built a similar solution earlier this year.<br><br> If Chantal hides a screen element that is part of the worksheet, where is that screen element hidden?
- In that worksheet
- In any worksheets
- In any workbooks
- all of the above
A: In that worksheet

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-1<br></b>Chantal is building a kiosk-based Excel application. She wants to make some modifications to the screen elements in order to keep users from being distracted by parts of the application that are irrelevant to her application. She turns to Jason for guidance as she knows he built a similar solution earlier this year.<br><br> Chantal has decided to hide the worksheet gridlines and the vertical scroll bar. What does Jason tell her to use to do this?
- Customization dialog box
- Screen Elements dialog box
- Excel Options dialog box
- Display Options dialog box
A: Excel Options dialog box

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-1<br></b>Chantal is building a kiosk-based Excel application. She wants to make some modifications to the screen elements in order to keep users from being distracted by parts of the application that are irrelevant to her application. She turns to Jason for guidance as she knows he built a similar solution earlier this year.<br><br> Where in the Excel Options dialog box would Chantal find the setting to change the default location for Excel workbook files?
- Advanced options, Display section
- Advanced options, Editing options section
- Save options
- Formulas options
A: Save options

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-1<br></b>Chantal is building a kiosk-based Excel application. She wants to make some modifications to the screen elements in order to keep users from being distracted by parts of the application that are irrelevant to her application. She turns to Jason for guidance as she knows he built a similar solution earlier this year.<br><br> Where in the Excel Options dialog box would Chantal find the setting to turn off AutoComplete for cell values?
- Advanced options, Display section
- Advanced options, Editing options section
- Save options
- Formulas options
A: Advanced options, Editing options section

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-2<br></b>Your cousin Rebecca knows that you are an experienced VBA programmer so she turns to you for some general guidance when she wants to get started as a programmer herself.<br><br> What do you tell Rebecca is the best way to learn VBA?
- By using the VBA Editor online help
- By using it
- By examining what other programmers are doing
- By reading programming manuals
A: By using it

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-2<br></b>Your cousin Rebecca knows that you are an experienced VBA programmer so she turns to you for some general guidance when she wants to get started as a programmer herself.<br><br> Which of the following is NOT a true statement you would make to Rebecca?
- Using the macro recorder is guaranteed to create code free of syntax errors.
- The macro recorder is guaranteed to record only commands and actions you need in a finished project.
- Experienced programmers use the macro recorder as a starting point.
- Experienced programmers edit code generated by the macro recorder to remove extraneous material.
A: The macro recorder is guaranteed to record only commands and actions you need in a finished project.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-2<br></b>Your cousin Rebecca knows that you are an experienced VBA programmer so she turns to you for some general guidance when she wants to get started as a programmer herself.<br><br> After Rebecca has done some research into VBA, she discovers that one of the following statements is NOT true. Which statement is false?
- The interactive tools in the VBA Editor online Help guides you to use the correct syntax by identifying syntax errors as you type them.
- In many cases, program code is password-protected.
- You can use code from another programmer without permission, if you have downloaded it from the Web.
- The Web is a great source of VBA code samples.
A: You can use code from another programmer without permission, if you have downloaded it from the Web.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-2<br></b>Your cousin Rebecca knows that you are an experienced VBA programmer so she turns to you for some general guidance when she wants to get started as a programmer herself.<br><br> Rebecca would like to make a reference to the second open Excel workbook window. What do you tell her is the syntax for this?
- Workbook(2)
- Open(2)
- Range(2)
- Windows(2)
A: Windows(2)

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-2<br></b>Your cousin Rebecca knows that you are an experienced VBA programmer so she turns to you for some general guidance when she wants to get started as a programmer herself.<br><br> What would you tell Rebecca to use if she wants to refer to a workbook that is named “Hilton Hotels”?
- Workbooks(“Hilton Hotels”)
- Excel(“Hilton Hotels”)
- Book(“Hilton Hotels”)
- Worksheets(“Hilton Hotels”)
A: Workbooks(“Hilton Hotels”)

Q: The ____________________ Explorer is a window in the Visual Basic Editor that displays a hierarchical list of all currently opened projects and their contents.
A: Project

Q: If a window is ____________________, you can drag it to the edge of the screen, and the window will always remain on top, above other windows.
A: dockable

Q: <img width="364" height="264" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure is the property ____________________.
A: name

Q: <img width="364" height="264" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is the property ____________________.
A: value

Q: A module is a collection of VBA ____________________.
A: macros

Q: The ____________________ window displays the VBA macro code associated with any item in the Project Explorer.
A: Code

Q: A(n) ____________________ procedure is used when you want to create customized properties for the objects in your project.
A: property

Q: Use ____________________ lines to explain the purpose of the macro and how it works without affecting the code.
A: comment

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a statement that describes the behavior or purpose of a procedure.
A: comment

Q: <img width="518" height="299" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, you can run single command lines in the Visual Basic Editor ____________________ window.
A: Immediate

Q: To refer to a specific object in a(n) ____________________, use this syntax: object_collection(id).
A: collection

Q: In the Excel ____________________, VBA organizes objects and object collections in a hierarchy with the Excel application at the top and the individual cells of a workbook at the bottom.
A: Object Model

Q: It is a good coding practice to write code in ____________________ text.
A: lowercase

Q: A control ____________________ is a series of commands that evaluates conditions in your program and then directs the program to perform certain actions based on the status of those conditions.
A: structure

Q: In a(n) ____________________ control structure, one set of commands is run if the condition is true and a different set of commands is run if the condition is false.
A: If-Then-Else / If-Then-ElseIf

Q: A(n) ____________________ operator is a symbol used to compare one value with another.
A: comparison

Q: If a control structure has several conditions, you need to use a(n) ____________________ control structure to run commands in response to each condition.
A: If-Then-ElseIf / Select Case

Q: To hide a macro’s actions as it runs, insert the command Application.ScreenUpdating = ____________________ at the beginning of the sub procedure.
A: false

Q: ____________________ is a file format developed by Adobe Systems that supports all of the elements of a printed document but in an electronic format that is easily shared.
A: Portable Document Format (PDF) / PDF (Portable Document Format) / Portable Document Format / PDF

Q: <img width="518" height="237" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying window is the Properties window.
A: 2 / two

Q: What are the seven comparison operators in VBA?
Feedback: The seven comparison operators in VBA are: > (greater than), < (less than), >= (greater than or equal to), <= (less than or equal to), = (equal to), <> (not equal to), and is (compares whether one object is the same as another).

Q: Explain which of the following screen elements are part of the Excel window, the workbook window, and the worksheet: formula bar, ScreenTips, chart element names on hover, horizontal and vertical scroll bars, row and column headers, sheet tabs, and gridlines.
Feedback: Formula bar (Excel window), ScreenTips (Excel window), chart element names on hover (Excel window), horizontal and vertical scroll bars (workbook), row and column headers (worksheet), sheet tabs (workbook), and gridlines (worksheet).

Q: Is it necessary to specify a data type or declare a variable in Visual Basic? If you do not, what happens? What is good programming practice in regard to specifying a data type and declaring a variable?
Feedback: It is not strictly required to specify a data type or declare a variable in Visual Basic. If you don’t specify a data type, Excel determines the data type by what is stored in the variable. Likewise, if you don’t declare a variable, Excel creates the variable when you first attempt to store data in it. However, good programming practice is to declare variables and their data types as a way of catching errors that might creep into the code.

Q: A refrigerator is a common metaphor for computer file organization.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You need to insert a hard disk each time you use a computer.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Folders cannot contain other folders.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The best place to store your documents is in the root directory of the hard disk.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Storing your work in the top level of the hard disk could interfere with Windows or a program.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You should not reorganize or change any folder that contains installed software, because Windows expects to find the files for specific programs within certain folders.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You should not make changes to the folders that contain the Windows operating system.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The type of disk you use to store files determines how you organize those files.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The larger the medium, the fewer levels of folders you should use.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="566" height="346" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You would click the item marked C in the accompanying figure to close the folder.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="566" height="346" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You would click the item marked D in the accompanying figure to collapse the folder.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To display or hide the Folders list in a folder window, click the Display button in the Navigation pane.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You cannot use spaces in your filenames.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The files named Sales.xlsx and Sales.docx are identical files.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: All computers are set to display file extensions automatically.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Be sure to give your files and folders meaningful names that will help you remember their purpose and contents.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you delete a folder, you delete all the files it contains.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Once you empty the Recycle Bin, you can recover the files that were in it using Windows Help and Support.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you delete a file from a removable media, it goes into the Recycle Bin.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you compress the folders in a folder, the original folders are stored in the new compressed folder.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>CD</u> is a collection of data that has a name and is stored in a computer.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To make it easy to retrieve files, you arrange them logically into <u>folders</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="413" height="292" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The accompanying figure displays the Windows file <u>catalog</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you click the expand icon next to a folder in Windows Explorer, a(n) <u>conceal</u> icon appears next to the folder icon.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Windows Explorer window is divided into two sections, called <u>groups</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: By default, when you first open <u>Windows Explorer</u>, it shows all the drives available on your computer.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: By default, when you first open <u>the Computer window</u>, it shows all the files, folders, and drives on your computer.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To retrieve a deleted file from the hard disk, you use the <u>Recycle Bin</u> to recover it and return it to its original location.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The main part of a filename can have up to <u>255</u> characters.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The default folder view is <u>Large Icons</u> view.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The file path F:\FM\Tutorial\Holiday.bmp has <u>five</u> parts.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you right-click and drag a file you want to move to the destination folder, you then click <u>Transfer Here</u> on the resulting shortcut menu to move the file.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>caret</u> is used to separate the main part of a filename from the file extension.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: As you work with files, pay attention to <u>extensions</u>; they provide important information about the file, including its contents and purpose.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you create a(n) <u>extracted</u> folder, Windows displays a zipper on the folder icon.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: ____ is formalized education that typically takes place using a computer and the Internet.
- Distance learning
- Telecommuting
- Multitasking
- Network education
A: Distance learning

Q: A(n) ____ is a collection of data that has a name and is stored on a computer.
- file
- archive
- drive
- object
A: file

Q: A file is often referred to as a(n) ____.
- wizard
- document
- pane
- device
A: document

Q: You organize files by storing them in ____.
- archives
- folders
- indexes
- lists
A: folders

Q: ____ disks are permanently stored on a computer.
- Compact
- Zip
- Floppy
- Hard
A: Hard

Q: Each ____ in a computer contains folders that hold documents.
- pane
- group
- disk
- cluster
A: disk

Q: Which of the following is NOT a removable medium?
- CD
- USB drive
- DVD
- hard disk
A: hard disk

Q: The term “folder window” refers to any window that displays the contents of a folder, including the ____ windows.
- Computer
- Windows Explorer
- Recycle Bin
- All of the above
A: All of the above

Q: ____ disks are the most popular type of computer storage.
- Hard
- Compact
- Floppy
- Zip
A: Hard

Q: The top level of the file system is known as the ____.
- directory
- operating system
- root directory
- hierarchy
A: root directory

Q: ____ are considered removable media.
- USB flash drives
- CDs
- DVDs
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Your computer has a hard drive, a CD drive, and a USB drive. If you install a second USB drive, it will most likely be assigned the letter ____.
- A
- C
- D
- F
A: F

Q: Which of the following is likely to be the drive letter for a USB drive?
- A
- B
- C
- D
A: D

Q: A computer distinguishes one drive from another by assigning each a drive ____.
- score
- number
- rank
- letter
A: letter

Q: The hard disk is usually assigned to drive ____.
- A
- B
- C
- D
A: C

Q: Windows organizes files and folders in a ____ system.
- management
- folder
- document
- file
A: file

Q: One popular metaphor for visualizing a file system is an upside-down ____.
- tree
- cabinet
- desk
- index
A: tree

Q: The root directory is usually drive ____.
- A
- B
- C
- F
A: C

Q: An effectively organized computer contains a few folders in the ____ directory, and those folders contain other folders.
- base
- root
- home
- origin
A: root

Q: The ____ directory of the hard disk is for system files and folders only.
- document
- system
- top-level
- base
A: top-level

Q: If you are working on your own computer, you should store your files within the ____ folder.
- Computer
- Storage
- Files
- Documents
A: Documents

Q: ____ makes it easy to navigate from one location to another within the file hierarchy.
- Microsoft Internet Explorer
- Windows Explorer
- The Computer window
- Folders Manager
A: Windows Explorer

Q: ____ shows the drives on your computer, making it easy to perform system tasks, such as viewing system information.
- Microsoft Internet Explorer
- Windows Explorer
- The Computer window
- Folders Manager
A: The Computer window

Q: Windows Explorer and the Computer window, by default, each present a different ____ of your computer.
- backup
- exploration
- hierarchy
- view
A: view

Q: The Windows Explorer window is divided into two sections, called ____.
- panes
- groups
- sorts
- indexes
A: panes

Q: The left pane in the Windows Explorer window is sometimes called the ____.
- Computer index
- Navigation pane
- Folders group
- View index
A: Navigation pane

Q: A notation that indicates a file’s location on your computer is called a(n) ____.
- address
- drive
- file path
- root
A: file path

Q: The ____ pane in the Windows Explorer window lists the contents of the folders and other locations selected in the opposite section.
- right
- left
- top
- bottom
A: right

Q: The left pane in the Computer window is called the ____ pane.
- Computer
- Details
- View
- Navigation
A: Navigation

Q: If a folder contains subfolders, a(n) ____ icon appears to the left of the folder icon.
- collapse
- expand
- view
- display
A: expand

Q: Use the ____ button to return to the original folder, after you change folders.
- Return
- Restore
- Back
- Up
A: Back

Q: The ____ bar displays your current folder as a series of locations separated by arrows.
- Location
- View
- Display
- Address
A: Address

Q: The ____ box helps you find a file or folder stored in the current folder or its subfolders.
- Search
- Quick Launch
- Quick Links
- Locate
A: Search

Q: A(n) ____ displays similar types of files together, no matter where they are stored.
- folder
- library
- menu
- hierarchy
A: library

Q: When you start Windows Explorer, it displays the contents of the default ____.
- search expression
- drive
- libraries
- favorites
A: libraries

Q: The file ____ leads you through the Windows file system to your file.
- navigation
- path
- trail
- link
A: path

Q: Each part of a file path is separated by a ____.
- /
- |
- \
- _
A: \

Q: <img width="389" height="74" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the file path shown in the accompanying figure, ____ is the drive name.
- FM
- G:
- Tutorial
- png
A: G:

Q: <img width="389" height="74" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the file path shown in the accompanying figure, the top-level folder is ____.
- A:
- Tutorial
- FM
- Map
A: FM

Q: <img width="389" height="74" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the file path shown in the accompanying figure, png is the ____.
- extension
- filename
- root
- subfolder
A: extension

Q: <img width="389" height="74" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the file path shown in the accompanying figure, Tutorial is a(n) ____.
- root folder
- extension
- filename
- subfolder
A: subfolder

Q: <img width="425" height="290" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The accompanying figure shows files in the Tutorial folder in ____ view.
- Small Icons
- Large Icons
- Thumbnails
- Preview
A: Large Icons

Q: A folder name can have up to ____ characters.
- 56
- 124
- 255
- 256
A: 255

Q: Which of the following can be used in a folder name?
- :
- |
- ?
- %
A: %

Q: Which of the following cannot be used in a folder name?
- *
- &
- ^
- $
A: *

Q: To use keyboard shortcuts to move files, click the file you want to move, press ____ to cut the file, navigate to a new location, and then press Ctrl+V to paste the file.
- Ctrl+T
- Ctrl+X
- Ctrl+C
- Ctrl+P
A: Ctrl+X

Q: One way to copy a file is to use the file’s ____ menu.
- view
- navigation
- shortcut
- copy
A: shortcut

Q: To select files that are listed together in a window, click the first file in the list, hold down the ____ key, and then click the last file in the list.
- Ctrl
- Esc
- Alt
- Shift
A: Shift

Q: To select files that are not listed together, click one file, hold down the ____ key, and then click the other files.
- Ctrl
- Shift
- Esc
- Alt
A: Ctrl

Q: File extensions are usually ____ characters.
- 1 or 2
- 3 or more
- 5
- at least 6
A: 3 or more

Q: Which character separates the main part of a filename from the extension?
- comma
- ampersand
- period
- underscore
A: period

Q: The main part of a filename can have up to ____ characters.
- 56
- 124
- 255
- 256
A: 255

Q: Which of the following can be used in a filename?
- &
- <
- “
- *
A: &

Q: The extension ____ identifies a file as one created by Microsoft Office Word.
- docx
- wrd
- word
- wdx
A: docx

Q: The extension ____ identifies a file that could have been created in a program such as Paint.
- xlsx
- jpg
- docx
- none of the above
A: jpg

Q: You usually do not need to add ____ to your filenames because the program you used to create the file adds them automatically.
- parameters
- type codes
- extensions
- objects
A: extensions

Q: Although Windows 7 keeps track of ____, not all computers are set to display them.
- parameters
- type codes
- objects
- extensions
A: extensions

Q: You can change the name of a file using the ____ command on the file’s shortcut menu.
- Rename
- Change Name
- New Name
- Assign Name
A: Rename

Q: Hard disks can contain many ____ of data and are economical.
- terabytes
- gigabytes
- microbytes
- exabytes
A: gigabytes

Q: If you copy the most recent version of a file to a folder on a removable storage medium, you effectively have a(n) ____ of a file that you need.
- backup
- link
- pane
- index
A: backup

Q: <img width="413" height="292" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item circled in the accompanying figure is the ____ directory.
- bottom-level
- base
- root
- origin
A: root

Q: If you store your files on ____, you can use a simpler organization than when you store your files on a hard disk.
- removable media
- a USB drive
- a rewritable CD
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: If you are working on your own computer, store your files within the ____ folder.
- root
- My Documents
- Private
- Personal
A: My Documents

Q: How many tools does Windows 7 provide for exploring the files and folders on your computer?
- 1
- 2
- 3
- 4
A: 2

Q: Using the ____ pane in Windows Explorer gives you access to a list of the folders you use often.
- Folders
- Location
- Orientation
- Navigation
A: Navigation

Q: Using the ____ button allows you to navigate to a location you have visited recently.
- Navigation
- Frequently Visited
- Recent Pages
- Location
A: Recent Pages

Q: To preview a file’s contents, you can select the file in a folder window, and then click the Show the preview pane button on the toolbar to open the _____ pane.
- Demo
- Document View
- Organize
- Preview
A: Preview

Q: When you ____ a file in a folder window, Windows starts the appropriate program and opens the file.
- hover over
- right-click
- click
- double-click
A: double-click

Q: When you ____ a file, you create an uncompressed copy of the file in a folder you specify
- batch
- extract
- expand
- zip
A: extract

Q: Another term for compressed folder is ____ folder.
- zipped
- zapped
- knotted
- extracted
A: zipped

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br></b><br><b>Case MYF 1</b><br>John has just been hired as a personal assistant to the owner of a national baseball team, Max Miller. Currently Max has one computer in which he keeps both his work and personal files. He’d like John to purchase a new computer and allocate one computer for work and the other for home and personal use.<br><br> Since John will be transferring personal files from the existing computer to a new one, he should make sure the new computer includes a ____.
- root directory
- drive for a removable media device
- hard disk
- file system
A: drive for a removable media device

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br></b><br><b>Case MYF 1</b><br>John has just been hired as a personal assistant to the owner of a national baseball team, Max Miller. Currently Max has one computer in which he keeps both his work and personal files. He’d like John to purchase a new computer and allocate one computer for work and the other for home and personal use.<br><br> John will be updating some of Max’s personal documents, such as his address labels, on his own laptop. John prefers to use his flash drive for transferring files. Therefore it would be helpful if Max’s home computer included a(n) ____.
- hard drive
- USB port
- CD-ROM
- DVD player
A: USB port

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br></b><br><b>Case MYF 1</b><br>John has just been hired as a personal assistant to the owner of a national baseball team, Max Miller. Currently Max has one computer in which he keeps both his work and personal files. He’d like John to purchase a new computer and allocate one computer for work and the other for home and personal use.<br><br> Max wants the following information on his “home and personal” computer: medical records, vacations, and tax information. Max wants to keep the tax information for his five family members separate. John creates ____.
- three folders, with five subfolders in just the tax information folder
- three folders, with five subfolders in each
- one folder with eight subfolders
- three folders for each family member
A: three folders, with five subfolders in just the tax information folder

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br></b><br><b>Case MYF 1</b><br>John has just been hired as a personal assistant to the owner of a national baseball team, Max Miller. Currently Max has one computer in which he keeps both his work and personal files. He’d like John to purchase a new computer and allocate one computer for work and the other for home and personal use.<br><br> John has finished transferring the personal files off of the original computer. He will now remove the personal files from the “work computer.” To efficiently remove the Vacations folder and all of its contents, John ____.
- opens the Vacations folder and deletes each file one at a time by right-clicking it, then clicking Delete
- opens the Vacations folder and deletes each file one at a time by right-clicking it, clicking Delete, and then clicking Yes
- right-clicks the Vacations folder, and then clicks Delete
- right-clicks the Vacations folder, clicks Delete, and then clicks Yes
A: right-clicks the Vacations folder, clicks Delete, and then clicks Yes

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br></b><br><b>Case MYF 1</b><br>John has just been hired as a personal assistant to the owner of a national baseball team, Max Miller. Currently Max has one computer in which he keeps both his work and personal files. He’d like John to purchase a new computer and allocate one computer for work and the other for home and personal use.<br><br> The Vacations folder is in the Recycle Bin. How can John retrieve a file that was originally in the Vacations folder from the work computer?
- He cannot retrieve files that have been moved to the Recycle Bin.
- Open the Recycle Bin and restore the Vacations folder.
- Right-click the Recycle Bin, then click Restore recently deleted files.
- Copy it back onto the hard drive from his flash drive.
A: Open the Recycle Bin and restore the Vacations folder.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case MYF 2<br></b>Polly is volunteering for a local theater company. She has signed up for help with marketing materials, including ticket design, posters, and letterhead. Her first assignment is to create a poster for the group’s performance of <i>The Nutcracker</i>. One requirement is that the poster must include a photograph of the New York City skyline, since the performance will take place in New York City.<br><br> Polly wants to work on the poster at home using her laptop but the skyline photo is very big--12 megabytes. In order to transfer the skyline photo to her home computer, she must first ____.
- extract it
- copy it to a flash drive, then compress it
- compress it
- partition it into two sections
A: compress it

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case MYF 2<br></b>Polly is volunteering for a local theater company. She has signed up for help with marketing materials, including ticket design, posters, and letterhead. Her first assignment is to create a poster for the group’s performance of <i>The Nutcracker</i>. One requirement is that the poster must include a photograph of the New York City skyline, since the performance will take place in New York City.<br><br> Polly forgets what she named the skyline photo now that she is at home on her laptop. She looks through her folders for one containing a(n) ____.
- .comp extension
- zipper icon
- vice icon
- padlock icon
A: zipper icon

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case MYF 2<br></b>Polly is volunteering for a local theater company. She has signed up for help with marketing materials, including ticket design, posters, and letterhead. Her first assignment is to create a poster for the group’s performance of <i>The Nutcracker</i>. One requirement is that the poster must include a photograph of the New York City skyline, since the performance will take place in New York City.<br><br> Polly transferred the theater company’s logo, named T-Group.eps, to her flash drive but deleted it by mistake. How can she retrieve this file from her flash drive?
- She can insert her flash drive back into the computer from which she copied the file, then restore it from the Recycle Bin.
- She can open the trash can icon on the flash drive and drag it back to her folder.
- She cannot retrieve the file once it has been deleted from the flash drive.
- She can optimize the flash drive, then click Restore from the File menu.
A: She cannot retrieve the file once it has been deleted from the flash drive.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case MYF 2<br></b>Polly is volunteering for a local theater company. She has signed up for help with marketing materials, including ticket design, posters, and letterhead. Her first assignment is to create a poster for the group’s performance of <i>The Nutcracker</i>. One requirement is that the poster must include a photograph of the New York City skyline, since the performance will take place in New York City.<br><br> Polly has located the compressed folder on her home computer. After she extracts the folder, she must select a(n) ____ for the folder contents.
- destination
- new name
- password
- extension
A: destination

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case MYF 2<br></b>Polly is volunteering for a local theater company. She has signed up for help with marketing materials, including ticket design, posters, and letterhead. Her first assignment is to create a poster for the group’s performance of <i>The Nutcracker</i>. One requirement is that the poster must include a photograph of the New York City skyline, since the performance will take place in New York City.<br><br> Polly is ready to get to work on the poster. But first she wants to create a folder hierarchy for her project; she expects she will have to do a lot of moving from one location to another within the file hierarchy. The best place to do this is in ____.
- Internet Explorer
- the Documents folder
- Windows Explorer
- the Address Bar
A: Windows Explorer

Q: A file is often referred to as a(n) ____________________.
A: document

Q: Folders contained within other folders are called ____________________.
A: subfolders

Q: A duplicate copy of important files you need is called a(n) ____________________.
A: backup

Q: Like Windows Explorer, the ____________________ window lets you view, organize, and access the drives, folders, and files on your computer.
A: Computer

Q: The ____________________ is a temporary storage area for files and information that you have copied or moved from one place and plan to use somewhere else.
A: Clipboard

Q: The file ____________________ is a notation that indicates a file’s location on your computer.
A: path

Q: The Computer window can display the full file ____________________ in its Address bar so you can keep track of your current location as you navigate.
A: path

Q: To create a folder in Windows Explorer, right-click a blank area in the folder window, point to ____________________ on the shortcut menu, and then click Folder.
A: New

Q: ____________________ a file removes it from its current location and places it in a new location you specify.
A: Moving

Q: ____________________ a file places it in two locations.
A: Copying

Q: Although it requires more steps, some users find moving files using the ____________________ and the Cut and Paste commands easier than dragging with the right mouse button.
A: Clipboard

Q: ____________________ provide important information about files, including their contents and purposes.
A: Filenames

Q: In a folder window, you delete a file by deleting its ____________________.
A: icon

Q: The ____________________ is an area on your hard disk that holds deleted files until you remove them permanently.
A: Recycle Bin

Q: A filename might display a(n) ____________________ that identifies the file’s type and indicates the program in which the file was created.
A: extension

Q: Storing files in a(n) ____________________ folder makes them take up less disk space.
A: compressed / zipped

Q: When you ____________________ a file from a compressed folder, you create an uncompressed copy of the file in a folder you specify.
A: extract

Q: If the ____________________ folder command does not appear on the Send to submenu of the shortcut menu, this means that a different compression program is probably installed on your computer.
A: Compressed (zipped)

Q: USB drives, DVDs, and CDs are examples of ____________________ media.
A: removable

Q: To extract files, right-click a compressed folder, then click ____________________ on the shortcut menu.
A: Extract All

Q: Discuss the sections into which folder windows are divided.
Feedback: Folder windows are divided into two sections, called panes. The left pane is the Navigation pane, which contains icons and links to locations you use often. The right pane lists the contents of your folders and other locations. If you select a folder in the Navigation pane, the contents of that folder appear in the right pane. To display the hierarchy of the folders and other locations on your computer, you select the Computer icon in the Navigation pane, and then select the icon for a drive, such as Local Disk (C:) or Removable Disk (G:). You can then open and explore folders on that drive.

Q: List and explain three guidelines for creating folders.
Feedback: * Keep folder names short and familiar: Long filenames can be cut off in a folder window, so use names that are short but clear. Choose names that will be meaningful later, such as project names or course numbers. * Develop standards for naming folders: Use a consistent naming scheme that is clear to you, such as one that uses a project name as the name of the main folder, and includes step numbers in each subfolder name, such as 01Plan, 02Approvals, 03Prelim, and so on. * Create subfolders to organize files: If a file listing in a window is so long that you must scroll the window, consider organizing those files into subfolders.

Q: List and explain three guidelines for naming files.
Feedback: * Use common names: Avoid cryptic names that might make sense now but could cause confusion later, such as nonstandard abbreviations or imprecise names. * Don’t change the file extension: When renaming a file, don’t change the file extension. If you do, Windows might not be able to find a program that can open it. * Find a comfortable balance between too short and too long: Use filenames that are long enough to be meaningful, but short enough to read easily on the screen.

Q: Microsoft Word is a computer program you use to create files known as documents.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Microsoft OneNote is a computer program you use to send, receive, and organize email.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Migration is the ability to share information between programs.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you start PowerPoint, a new, blank workbook opens.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you have two or more programs running, you can click the program buttons on the taskbar to switch from one program to another.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: There are three different sizing buttons that appear on the right side of a program window’s title bar.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In Word, you can zoom in up to 500 percent.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The Ribbon in each Office program has two tabs in common: Office and Home.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If a button is a toggle, then one click will turn the button’s feature on and a second click will turn it back off.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To access options on the Ribbon using the keyboard, press the Ctrl or Tab key.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A task pane is a window that helps you navigate through a complex task or feature.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A branching tab is a Ribbon tab that contains commands related to the selected object so you can manipulate, edit, and format that object.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Right-clicking the mouse opens the Mini toolbar.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To prevent losing work, you should save your file(s) at least every 10 minutes.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The default file extension for a PowerPoint 2010 file is .ppt.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Opening a file transfers a copy of the file from the storage location to the computer’s memory and displays it on your screen.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In Private View, you can see file contents, but you cannot edit, save, or print them until you enable editing.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To use SkyDrive, you need a Windows Live ID.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can get Help in ScreenTips and from the Help window.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You use the Shutdown command to exit a program and close an open file in one step.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Access is often referred to as a(n) <u>relational database</u> program.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The <u>Return to Default sizing</u> button returns a program window to a predefined size.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Each program has a variety of views, which you can easily change by using the view buttons on the <u>status bar</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To change which area of a workspace is visible in a program window, you can use the <u>zoom bars</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>Home tab</u> on the Ribbon contains the commands for the most frequently performed activities.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To learn what a button on the Ribbon does, <u>right-click</u> it to read a ScreenTip.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>gallery</u> is a menu or grid that shows a visual representation of the options available for a button.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A(n) <u>task pane</u> is a window from which you enter or choose settings for how you want to perform a task.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>object</u> is anything that appears on your screen that can be selected and manipulated.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can right-click text to open up a(n) <u>shortcut menu</u> with a Mini toolbar.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Filenames can include a maximum of <u>128</u> characters.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can close a file by clicking Close in <u>Backstage view</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Your SkyDrive workspace comes with a Public and a(n) <u>Protected</u> folder.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Help.com</u> is a Web site maintained by Microsoft that provides access to the latest Office 2010 information and additional Help resources.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Help system has a(n) <u>Table of Contents</u> pane organized by subjects and topics.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The files you create in Word are called ____.
- documents
- workbooks
- databases
- presentations
A: documents

Q: The files you create in Access are called ____.
- documents
- workbooks
- databases
- presentations
A: databases

Q: The files you create in ____ are called presentations.
- OneNote
- SkyDrive
- PowerPoint
- Publisher
A: PowerPoint

Q: Outlook is a computer program you use to ____.
- compose brochures
- generate a pie chart or bar chart
- create a collection of slides
- plan your schedule
A: plan your schedule

Q: One of the main advantages of Office is integration, the ability to ____.
- share information between programs
- upgrade and downgrade software for other users
- view Office files on SkyDrive or another Web site
- all of the above
A: share information between programs

Q: You can start any Office program from the Start menu on ____.
- any other Office program’s toolbar
- the taskbar
- the Web
- the Computer window
A: the taskbar

Q: When you point to a program button on the taskbar, a ____ is displayed.
- thumbnail of open files
- so-called “postage stamp” view
- disk usage monitor
- Start menu
A: thumbnail of open files

Q: When you have two or more programs running, you can click ____ on the taskbar to switch from one program to another.
- the Swap button
- the notification area
- the program buttons
- the Start menu
A: the program buttons

Q: ____ buttons appear on the right side of a program window’s title bar.
- Ribbon
- Zooming
- Sizing
- Orientation
A: Sizing

Q: The ____ button hides a window so that only its program button is visible on the taskbar.
- Restore down
- Minimize
- Close
- Exit
A: Minimize

Q: When clicked, the Maximize button ____.
- becomes the Restore down button
- hides the window
- returns the window to a predefined size
- increases the screen resolution to its maximum
A: becomes the Restore down button

Q: Excel has ____ set(s) of sizing buttons.
- one
- two
- three
- a variable number
A: two

Q: The content of a file ____ when you switch between different views.
- is compressed or expanded
- is also switched
- is unchanged
- is altered according to defined specifications
A: is unchanged

Q: Word has all of the following views EXCEPT ____.
- Standard
- Full Screen Reading
- Print Layout
- Draft
A: Standard

Q: In PowerPoint, the zoom percentage can range from ____ to ____.
- 10, 400
- 10, 500
- 2, 200
- 4, 400
A: 10, 400

Q: Depending on the program and zoom level, you might see ____.
- a vertical scroll bar
- a horizontal scroll bar
- a Web scroll bar
- both a and b
A: both a and b

Q: <img width="514" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, you would zoom in by clicking the button marked ____
- B
- C
- E
- none of the above
A: E

Q: <img width="514" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, box A represents ____.
- the zoom options
- the programs currently open
- the view buttons
- the location and formatting of the file’s contents
A: the view buttons

Q: <img width="514" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the item that can be dragged is marked by box ____.
- A
- B
- D
- all of the above
A: D

Q: <img width="514" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the number marked by box B represents ____.
- the zoom increment currently available
- the current disk space usage
- the amount of the file that is currently active or highlighted
- none of the above
A: none of the above

Q: The ____ tab on the Ribbon opens Backstage view.
- File
- Office
- Home
- Options
A: File

Q: The Insert, Review, and View tabs appears on the Ribbon in all Office programs EXCEPT ____.
- Outlook
- Access
- PowerPoint
- Excel
A: Access

Q: The Ribbon features the Datasheet Tools tab in ____.
- OneNote
- Outlook
- Access
- Excel
A: Access

Q: You find the Clipboard group on the ____ tab of the Ribbon.
- File
- Home
- Review
- Edit
A: Home

Q: If clicking a button once turns a feature on, and clicking a second time turns it back off, the button is said to be a(n) ____.
- switch
- list or list box
- toggle
- “if-else” button
A: toggle

Q: The buttons and groups on the Ribbon change based on ____.
- your monitor size
- your screen resolution
- the size of the program window
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Pointing to a button on the Ribbon ____.
- is the same as clicking it
- is the same as right-clicking it
- displays a ScreenTip
- none of the above
A: displays a ScreenTip

Q: When the Show/Hide button is activated, the screen shows ____.
- nonprinting characters
- HTML code
- margins
- tables and grids
A: nonprinting characters

Q: A(n) ____ is a key or combination of keys you press to access a feature or perform a command.
- keyboard pairing
- alt key
- keyboard shortcut
- HotKey
A: keyboard shortcut

Q: A(n) ____ is a label that appears over each tab on the Ribbon when you press the ____ key.
- hotkey, Alt
- Key Tip, Alt
- ScreenTip, Ctrl
- shortcut, Ctrl
A: Key Tip, Alt

Q: You can use shortcuts to access options residing at all of the following locations EXCEPT ____.
- the Ribbon
- the Quick Access toolbar
- other Office programs
- Backstage view
A: other Office programs

Q: A ____ is a menu or grid that shows a visual representation of the options available for a button.
- gallery
- Live Preview
- ScreenTip
- matrix
A: gallery

Q: Live Preview shows you ____.
- a visual representation of the options available for a button
- the results that would occur in your file if you clicked a gallery option
- how your file will look when printed or published to the Web
- the Windows Live features currently available for download to your open program(s)
A: the results that would occur in your file if you clicked a gallery option

Q: You press the ____ key to close a gallery without making a selection.
- Alt
- F1
- Esc
- Spacebar
A: Esc

Q: A(n) ____ is a window that helps you navigate through a complex task or feature.
- wizard
- dialog box
- Ribbon tab
- task pane
A: task pane

Q: The Page Setup ____ in Word contains options to change how a document looks.
- Wizard
- dialog box
- Ribbon tab
- task pane
A: dialog box

Q: You can find the Dialog Box Launcher ____.
- on the right side of the title bar
- on the left or right side of the Ribbon
- if you right-click the Ribbon
- to the right of some group names
A: to the right of some group names

Q: <img width="381" height="272" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, Box ____ shows an example of an option button.
- B
- C
- F
- G
A: B

Q: <img width="381" height="272" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, you clicking the item marked by Box ____ would reveal a list of options that can be selected.
- F
- C
- E
- H
A: F

Q: <img width="381" height="272" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Clicking the item marked by Box ____ in the figure above will open a new dialog box or window.
- A
- H
- G
- none of the above
A: G

Q: A(n) ____ is anything that appears on your screen that can be selected and manipulated.
- context
- object
- tool
- button
A: object

Q: All of the following are objects EXCEPT ____.
- a table
- an equation
- a shape
- all of the above are objects
A: all of the above are objects

Q: Contextual tabs ____ when you deselect an object.
- stay on the Ribbon
- remain attached to the object
- disappear
- move to the Clipboard
A: disappear

Q: All of the following are true of the Mini toolbar EXCEPT ____.
- It contains commands not found on the Ribbon
- It can be turned off in Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
- A transparent version appears immediately after you select text
- Its buttons differ in each program
A: It contains commands not found on the Ribbon

Q: A shortcut menu appears when you ____.
- triple-click the mouse
- click the right mouse button
- hover the mouse over an object
- raise the mouse off of its work surface
A: click the right mouse button

Q: When you perform the necessary action to open a shortcut menu, ____ also appears.
- the Start menu
- the Mini toolbar
- the desktop
- Backstage view
A: the Mini toolbar

Q: All of the four most common tasks you perform in any Office program can be done from ____.
- the Home tab
- the Mini toolbar
- Backstage view
- a shortcut menu
A: Backstage view

Q: When you start ____, the New tab in Backstage view opens.
- PowerPoint
- Word
- Excel
- Access
A: Access

Q: The text recommends you save your work at least ____.
- hourly
- every minute
- every 10 minutes
- none of the above; manual saving is not necessary
A: every 10 minutes

Q: To name the file you are saving and specify a location to save it, use the ____ command.
- Save As
- Revert
- Save
- Manual Save
A: Save As

Q: All of the following are illegal to use in filenames EXCEPT _______.
- :
- -
- ?
- >
A: -

Q: A ____ is added by Office to identify the program in which a file was created.
- filename
- title
- file extension
- filestamp
A: file extension

Q: The default storage location for Office files is the ____.
- Documents folder
- root drive
- Flash bin
- RAM or SDRAM
A: Documents folder

Q: A filename ending in “.docx” signifies a(n) ____ file.
- Access
- Word
- PowerPoint
- Excel
A: Word

Q: When you have saved a file, its name appears in the ____ as long as that file remains open.
- Ribbon
- title bar
- workspace
- none of the above
A: title bar

Q: In Backstage view, you will find the ____ along the left side of the screen.
- Ribbon
- Properties
- navigation bar
- file’s author and other related people
A: navigation bar

Q: All of the following are true about saving EXCEPT ____.
- After a file has been named and saved, you don’t need to keep using the Save As dialog box to save it
- You should save files before closing them
- If you close Office while a file is unsaved, a dialog box will open asking whether you want to save the file
- When using the Save As dialog box, you must always choose a file format in the Save as type box below the file name
A: When using the Save As dialog box, you must always choose a file format in the Save as type box below the file name

Q: You can keep ____ file(s) open at one time.
- only one
- one or two
- up to three
- more than three
A: more than three

Q: If you only have one file open, clicking the Close button in the upper-right corner of the title bar will ____.
- close the file and the program
- close the file but leave the program open
- have no effect
- close the program but leave the file in memory so it can be opened again quickly
A: close the file and the program

Q: To open a blank document or presentation, you ____.
- use the Launch command
- first open a template
- create a new file
- first copy another file, then delete its contents
A: create a new file

Q: Protected View prevents you from ____ a file’s contents.
- printing
- editing
- saving
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: If you have opened a file in Protected View, you can find the Enable Editing button on the ____.
- Information Bar
- Navigation Bar
- Ribbon
- title bar
A: Information Bar

Q: Windows Live ____ is an online workspace provided by Microsoft.
- Bing Docs
- SkyDrive
- Hotmail
- Outlook Online
A: SkyDrive

Q: ____ is an online workspace set up by an organization, such as a school, business, or nonprofit group.
- SkyDrive
- Open Access
- SharePoint
- Outlook Online
A: SharePoint

Q: Files saved to an online workspace are accessed and edited using ____.
- Office 2010 software on the user’s computer
- a Web browser
- OpenOffice software
- SMS text messaging
A: a Web browser

Q: A(n) ____ is a box with descriptive text about an object or button.
- Help file
- cheatsheet
- Infobubble
- ScreenTip
A: ScreenTip

Q: You can find Help topics by using ____.
- the search function
- a topic list
- Ask.com
- both a and b
A: both a and b

Q: ____ is a Web site maintained by Microsoft that provides access to the latest information and Help resources for Office 2010.
- Bing.com
- Ask.com
- Office.com
- Help.com
A: Office.com

Q: The Print tab in Backstage view lets you ____.
- adjust the number of copies to print
- preview how the page will appear
- verify the print and page layout settings before printing
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: You use the ____ command to exit a program and close an open file in one step.
- Exit
- Close
- Close All
- Minimize
A: Exit

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 1</b><br>Paul has taken over his father’s business of running a gas station. Paul’s father used spiral notebooks to record all customer-related information. Paul decides he cannot work using this method and purchases a new computer system for the gas station. He also purchases a copy of Microsoft Office Professional 2010 for all of his software needs.<br><br> Paul’s first goal is to record the names, addresses, phone numbers, and e-mail addresses of each customer. He wants this information in a program where he can take all of a customer’s information and create an invoice form. Paul chooses ____ for this job.
- Outlook
- Access
- Excel
- Word
A: Access

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 1</b><br>Paul has taken over his father’s business of running a gas station. Paul’s father used spiral notebooks to record all customer-related information. Paul decides he cannot work using this method and purchases a new computer system for the gas station. He also purchases a copy of Microsoft Office Professional 2010 for all of his software needs.<br><br> Another task that Paul wants to accomplish is to download images from the Registry of Vehicles Web site and incorporate them into posters about yearly automobile inspections. He uses ____ to create the posters because of its ability to insert images.
- Word
- PowerPoint
- Outlook
- either a or b would be correct
A: either a or b would be correct

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 1</b><br>Paul has taken over his father’s business of running a gas station. Paul’s father used spiral notebooks to record all customer-related information. Paul decides he cannot work using this method and purchases a new computer system for the gas station. He also purchases a copy of Microsoft Office Professional 2010 for all of his software needs.<br><br> After his posters are complete, Paul saves a copy for his cousin who also has a gas station in a neighboring state. Since his cousin is using an older version of Office, Paul ____.
- prints out the posters and mails them
- saves the posters as Word 97-2003 document
- posts them to a Web site so that his cousin can view them
- recreates them on another computer system using an older version of Office
A: saves the posters as Word 97-2003 document

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 1</b><br>Paul has taken over his father’s business of running a gas station. Paul’s father used spiral notebooks to record all customer-related information. Paul decides he cannot work using this method and purchases a new computer system for the gas station. He also purchases a copy of Microsoft Office Professional 2010 for all of his software needs.<br><br> Paul is drafting a letter to his customers offering new car-washing services. Each time he highlights “car wash” to change the font color, he is distracted by the ____.
- shortcut menu that appears and disappears
- Key Tips
- Mini toolbar that appears and disappears
- Font gallery
A: Mini toolbar that appears and disappears

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 1</b><br>Paul has taken over his father’s business of running a gas station. Paul’s father used spiral notebooks to record all customer-related information. Paul decides he cannot work using this method and purchases a new computer system for the gas station. He also purchases a copy of Microsoft Office Professional 2010 for all of his software needs.<br><br> Paul would like to keep exchanging files with his cousin from time to time. He wants to do this using SkyDrive, but when he tries, his cousin says that he can’t get to Paul’s files. What is the most likely reason?
- His cousin still doesn’t have Office 2010 on his computer.
- His cousin hasn’t signed up for a Windows Live ID.
- Paul has locked his Public folder by mistake.
- His cousin is using a wireless network connection.
A: His cousin hasn’t signed up for a Windows Live ID.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 2<br></b>Mary works for a fast-food chain in the Human Resources department. Each month she creates an employee-of-the-month poster in Word and distributes it to each management team in her region. The manager of human resources recently decided that all posters, including the employee-of-the-month posters, must be created in PowerPoint because more offices in the region use PowerPoint than Word.<br><br> Mary is nervous about creating her next poster in PowerPoint. When she starts PowerPoint for the first time, she recognizes the ____ from Word.
- Design tab on the Ribbon
- Animations tab on the Ribbon
- Home tab on the Ribbon
- Datasheet tab on the Ribbon
A: Home tab on the Ribbon

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 2<br></b>Mary works for a fast-food chain in the Human Resources department. Each month she creates an employee-of-the-month poster in Word and distributes it to each management team in her region. The manager of human resources recently decided that all posters, including the employee-of-the-month posters, must be created in PowerPoint because more offices in the region use PowerPoint than Word.<br><br> Mary inserts a photograph of Bob Weber. Her boss, Charlie, tells her that he’s typed a short description of Bob’s accomplishments. He tells her he’ll print it out, and that she can tape it to her poster underneath Bob’s picture. Mary explains to Charlie that she can just transfer his text from Word into PowerPoint thanks to ____ technology.
- Internet
- integration
- USB flash drive
- e-mail
A: integration

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 2<br></b>Mary works for a fast-food chain in the Human Resources department. Each month she creates an employee-of-the-month poster in Word and distributes it to each management team in her region. The manager of human resources recently decided that all posters, including the employee-of-the-month posters, must be created in PowerPoint because more offices in the region use PowerPoint than Word.<br><br> Mary is becoming more comfortable in PowerPoint. She is experimenting with adding bullets to a list she is creating in PowerPoint, but she is wondering why bullets appear and disappear in her workspace before she selects one in the Bullet Library. Her friend Polly explains to her that the feature she is experiencing is ____.
- Live Preview
- Live Gallery
- Print Preview
- Bullet Preview
A: Live Preview

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 2<br></b>Mary works for a fast-food chain in the Human Resources department. Each month she creates an employee-of-the-month poster in Word and distributes it to each management team in her region. The manager of human resources recently decided that all posters, including the employee-of-the-month posters, must be created in PowerPoint because more offices in the region use PowerPoint than Word.<br><br> Mary frequently saves her work so that she doesn’t lose it. She wishes she had faster access to the Save command. Polly shows her how to use ____.
- Command Tips
- keyboard shortcuts
- Mini toolbar addon
- the Frequent Action shortcut
A: keyboard shortcuts

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 2<br></b>Mary works for a fast-food chain in the Human Resources department. Each month she creates an employee-of-the-month poster in Word and distributes it to each management team in her region. The manager of human resources recently decided that all posters, including the employee-of-the-month posters, must be created in PowerPoint because more offices in the region use PowerPoint than Word.<br><br> Mary saves a poster and names it Bob Weber. She takes it home to show her husband. On her home computer, her filename changes to Bob Weber.pptx. This completely confuses Mary, so at work the next day she changes the filename to Bob Weber.pptx using the Save As dialog box and deletes the original Bob Weber document. Out of curiosity, she takes the Bob Weber.pptx file home again and now the filename on her home computer is displayed as ____.
- Bob Weber.pptx
- Bob Weber.pptx-2
- Bob Weber.pptx.pptx
- Bob Weber
A: Bob Weber.pptx.pptx

Q: Microsoft Excel is often called a(n) ____________________ program.
A: spreadsheet

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a small picture of an open file, viewable when you point to a program button.
A: thumbnail

Q: Most often, you’ll want to ____________________ the program window and workspace to take advantage of the full screen size you have available.
A: maximize

Q: You can quickly switch between views using the ____________________ tab on the Ribbon.
A: View

Q: ____________________ view, opened from the Ribbon, provides access to file-level features, such as creating new files, opening existing files, saving files, printing files, and closing files.
A: Backstage

Q: Some buttons have two parts: a button that accesses a command, and a(n) ____________________ that opens a menu of all the commands or options available for that task.
A: arrow

Q: To access options on the Ribbon using the keyboard, press the ____________________ key.
A: Alt

Q: The ____________________, a button to the right of some group names on the Ribbon, opens a task pane or dialog box related to that group of tasks.
A: Dialog Box Launcher

Q: You select settings in a dialog box using option buttons, check boxes, ____________________, and lists to specify how you want to perform a task.
A: text boxes / textboxes

Q: ____________________ tabs appear to the right of the standard Ribbon tabs just below a title label.
A: Contextual

Q: All commands on the ____________________ toolbar are also available on the Ribbon.
A: Mini

Q: ____________________ enable you to quickly access commands that you’re most likely to need in the context of the task you’re performing without using the tabs on the Ribbon.
A: Shortcut menus

Q: When you start Word, Excel, or PowerPoint, the program opens along with ____________________ -- ready for you to begin working on a new document, workbook, or presentation.
A: a blank file

Q: A(n) ____________________ includes a title you specify and a file extension assigned by Office to indicate the file type.
A: filename

Q: You can find the Save button on the ____________________ toolbar.
A: Quick Access

Q: You find the Save As command in the ____________________ bar of Backstage view.
A: navigation

Q: Opening a file places the file in your computer’s ____________________ as well as on the drive where it is stored.
A: memory

Q: The ____________________ option on the Save & Send tab in Backstage view gives you access to Windows Live SkyDrive.
A: Save to Web

Q: In some cases, pressing the ____________________ key while a ScreenTip is displayed opens the Help window with the relevant topic displayed.
A: F1

Q: The ____________________ pane in the Help window displays the Help system organized by subjects and topics.
A: Table of Contents

Q: Describe in detail the concepts of zooming and scrolling.
Feedback: You can zoom in to get a closer look at the content of an open document, worksheet, slide, or database report. Likewise, you can zoom out to see more of the content at a smaller size. You can select a specific percentage or size based on your file. The zoom percentage can range from 10 percent to 400 percent (Excel and PowerPoint) or 500 percent (Word). Zooming can shift part of the workspace out of view. To change which area of the workspace is visible in the program window, you can use the scroll bars. A scroll bar has arrow buttons that you can click to shift the workspace a small amount in the specified direction and a scroll box that you can drag to shift the workspace a larger amount in the direction you drag. Depending on the program and zoom level, you might see a vertical scroll bar, a horizontal scroll bar, or both.

Q: In your career you will likely work on many different computers with different configurations. Describe how the screenshots for this chapter were set up, how buttons and groups appear on the Ribbon, and how and why they may change.
Feedback: The buttons and groups on the Ribbon change based on your monitor size, your screen resolution, and the size of the program window. With smaller monitors, lower screen resolutions, and reduced program windows, buttons can appear as icons without labels and a group can be condensed into a button that you click to display the group options. The figures in these tutorials were created using a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 and, unless otherwise specified, the program and workspace windows are maximized. If you are using a different screen resolution or window size, the buttons on the Ribbon might show more or fewer button names, and some groups might be reduced to a button.

Q: If you attempt to close a file before saving it, Office has an added safeguard. Please describe it here, including the three options it gives you.
Feedback: If you attempt to close a file without saving your changes, a dialog box opens, asking whether you want to save the file. Click the Save button to save the changes to the file before closing the file and program. Click the Don’t Save button to close the file and program without saving changes. Click the Cancel button to return to the program window without saving changes or closing the file and program. This feature helps to ensure that you always save the most current version of any file.

Q: Only a few types of computers can read text files.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Text files are rarely used for storing data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Most software programs can both save and retrieve data in a text file format.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Excel can open a text file into a worksheet, where you can then format it as you would any data.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Excel can save a workbook as a text file, preserving only the data values, without any of the formats applied to it.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Columns in delimited text files are always vertically aligned as they would be in a spreadsheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In addition to delimited text, you can also organize data with a fixed-width file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: By default, the Text Import Wizard will start importing text with the first row of the file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: For a fixed-width text file to import correctly into Excel, there must be some way for the Text Import Wizard to know where each column begins and ends.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The Text Import Wizard's attempt to define the number and location of columns is always correct.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If a break is in the wrong location in the Data preview window, you double-click it to move it to a new location in the window.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When using the Text Import Wizard, you can specify a column's format before the column is imported.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In addition to specifying the format of data using the Text Import Wizard, you can also indicate which columns you do not want to import.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Eliminating columns using the Text Import Wizard is useful when there are only a few items you want to import from a large text file containing many columns.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You cannot specify how you want the data to appear in a query.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you save a query, you are actually placing the query choices you have made into a file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In the last part of writing a query, you specify how to sort the data.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: By modifying a query's properties, you can add new columns to your worksheet, change the sort order options, or specify a filter.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Databases such as those created in Access are examples of relational databases.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Microsoft supports a library of built-in Web queries.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Although <u>text</u> files contain only raw, unformatted data, they are very useful in situations when you want to share data across software programs and computer systems.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A delimiter separates one <u>row</u> of data from another.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>space</u> delimiter is often the best way of separating text columns because it permits spaces and commas within each column.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="200" height="73" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The accompanying figure illustrates an example of <u>space-delimited</u> text.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In the Text Import Wizard, the Preview window shows the initial <u>rows</u> of the text file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The point at which one column ends and another begins in the Text Import Wizard is called a column <u>cease</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In a delimited file, the delimiter automatically determines the <u>row</u> break.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When using the Text Import Wizard, skip importing a column by clicking the column in the <u>Row</u> preview box and then clicking the Do not import (skip) option button.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Databases contain information stored in the form of <u>lists</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="348" height="167" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure is the row or <u>field</u> in a database table.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="348" height="167" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is the column or <u>record</u> in a database table.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Rich text</u> formatting will result in imported data that most closely resembles the appearance of a Web page.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Because a text file does not contain formatting <u>codes</u> to give it structure, a program needs another way to understand the file contents.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When filtering data using the Query Wizard – Filter Data dialog box, the left column specifies the type of <u>sort</u> you want to make in the filter, such as “equals,” “greater than,” or “less than.”
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Web query files are simple <u>XML</u> files, so you can view and edit their contents in Notepad.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A text file can contain ____.
- formulas
- special fonts
- graphics
- none of the above
A: none of the above

Q: Most software programs can both save and retrieve data in a(n) ____ file format.
- HTML
- text
- spreadsheet
- both a. and b.
A: text

Q: The following is an example of a delimiter: ____.
- space
- comma
- tab
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: One way to structure text files is to use a(n) ____.
- index
- matrix
- delimiter
- register
A: delimiter

Q: A ____ delimiter is often the best way of separating text columns because text delimited this way can include spaces or commas within each column.
- space
- comma
- tab
- dash
A: tab

Q: When you use Excel to connect to a text file, the ____ Wizard determines whether the data is in a fixed-width format or a delimited format.
- File
- Open File
- Open Text
- Text Import
A: Text Import

Q: The ____ filename extension identifies a file as a text file.
- .tex
- .text
- .txt
- .tt
A: .txt

Q: The following is a NOT a common text filename extension: ____.
- .dat
- .prn
- .csv
- .doc
A: .doc

Q: The row at which you begin the import process is called the ____ row.
- starting
- origin
- opening
- key
A: starting

Q: You insert a new column break in the Text Import Wizard by ____ the position in the Data preview window where you want the break to appear.
- double-clicking
- clicking
- triple-clicking
- right-clicking
A: clicking

Q: You can delete an extra column break in the Data preview window of the Text Import Wizard by ____ it.
- right-clicking
- clicking
- double-clicking
- triple-clicking
A: double-clicking

Q: In a ____ file, the wizard guesses the locations of the column breaks.
- fixed-width
- tab-delimited
- column-delimited
- space-delimited
A: fixed-width

Q: Unless you specify a format, Excel will apply a ____ format to all columns.
- Text
- General
- Numerical
- Logical
A: General

Q: A(n) ____ is a file that stores a collection of related data.
- index
- register
- database
- table
A: database

Q: ____ is a database program.
- Word
- Access
- PowerPoint
- Outlook
A: Access

Q: When the location of a data source is defined as a(n) ____ location, Excel will access the connection to the data source without prompting you to confirm that the connection is secure.
- related
- trusted
- encrypted
- safe
A: trusted

Q: <img width="348" height="167" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure is a ____ in a database table.
- field
- register
- record
- key
A: record

Q: <img width="348" height="167" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is a ____ in a database table.
- field
- register
- record
- key
A: field

Q: You relate tables to one another by using ____ fields.
- key
- common
- indexed
- date
A: common

Q: When you want to look only at specific information from a database, you create a(n) ____.
- index
- matrix
- register
- query
A: query

Q: In response to a(n) ____, a database displays the records and fields that meet the question's requirements.
- index
- matrix
- register
- query
A: query

Q: A(n) ____ might ask something like, "What are the names of all the stocks in the portfolio, and what are their corresponding ticker symbols?"
- index
- matrix
- register
- query
A: query

Q: If you want to extract only specific records when you query a database, your query would contain ____.
- samples
- criteria
- records
- limiters
A: criteria

Q: The following is a possible data source for Excel: ____.
- dBASE file
- MS Access Database
- Excel file
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: A data ____ is any file that contains the data you want to retrieve.
- roster
- link
- dialog
- source
A: source

Q: The following is a possible data source: ____.
- databases
- text files
- other Excel workbooks
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: You can define your own data source by clicking ____ from the list of databases in the Choose Data Source dialog box.
- <Select Data Source>
- <New Data Source>
- <Create Source>
- <Initialize Source>
A: <New Data Source>

Q: The ____ Wizard lets you preview the structure of the database and its contents.
- Data
- Query
- Source
- Database
A: Query

Q: In the Query Wizard, click the ____ in front of a table name to expand the display of fields in that table.
- key
- exclamation point
- question mark
- plus sign
A: plus sign

Q: To select fields within the Query Wizard, you can ____ the field name and Excel will automatically move it to the list of selected columns in your query.
- click
- double-click
- triple-click
- right-click
A: double-click

Q: When you ____ data, you specify which records you want to retrieve using specific criteria.
- order
- filter
- strike
- rekey
A: filter

Q: The default folder for queries is the ____ folder on the hard disk.
- Templates
- Queries
- Database
- Data
A: Queries

Q: Queries saved in the Queries folder will display on the Queries tab of the ____ dialog box, giving you quick and easy access to your saved queries.
- Find Queries
- Choose Data Source
- Use Queries
- Storing Data
A: Choose Data Source

Q: Microsoft Query is a(n) ____ that includes several tools that allow you to create even more complex queries.
- template
- Office program
- cube
- PivotTable
A: Office program

Q: If you refresh external data in the ____, you can work on other portions of the workbook as you wait for the data to be retrieved.
- view
- background
- window
- marquee
A: background

Q: ____ has been widely used in database programs, Web programming, and word processing.
- XML
- JavaScript
- Perl
- HTML
A: XML

Q: To create a Web query, you need to know the ____ of the resource (usually a Web page) you are accessing.
- FTP
- URL
- HTTP
- HTML
A: URL

Q: The ____ is the address of a Web page.
- FTP
- HTTP
- HTML
- URL
A: URL

Q: The general form of a URL for a file located on your computer will be ____.
- file:///drive:/path/filename
- file://drive://path/filename
- file://drive:/path//filename
- file:///drive:///path///filename
A: file:///drive:/path/filename

Q: You can retrieve the Web page format using ____, which is the default option.
- HTML formatting
- Rich text formatting
- Excel formatting
- None
A: None

Q: The ____ formatting only option retrieves the text from a Web query along with simple formatting, but not advanced formatting such as hyperlinks or complicated table structures.
- Rich text
- Text
- Default
- Normal
A: Rich text

Q: The ____ formatting option retrieves all simple as well as advanced HTML formatting features, including hyperlinks.
- Full
- Full HTML
- Rich text
- Default
A: Full HTML

Q: An XML document is structured like a tree in which elements are placed within one another, descending from a common ____ element.
- base
- root
- tag
- common
A: root

Q: The name of each element in an XML document is contained in a(n) ____.
- link
- tag
- file
- anchor
A: tag

Q: Clicking a ____ in a worksheet will activate the computer's Web browser to display the Web page associated with that entry.
- hyperlink
- tag
- file
- schema
A: hyperlink

Q: Real-time ____ values from measuring devices and scientific equipment are a possible data source in Excel.
- link
- data
- file
- map
A: data

Q: Once you insert the ____ function into a cell, the value of the cell will display the latest value retrieved from a measuring device.
- schema
- XML
- RTD
- real
A: RTD

Q: By using the ____ function along with an add-in program, a scientist or researcher can save hours of data entry time and focus on analysis.
- RTD
- schema
- real
- XML
A: RTD

Q: In an XML element, a(n)____ tag marks the end of the data value.
- opening
- index
- closing
- map
A: closing

Q: In XML, the rules about which elements are required and which are not are stored in a document called the ____.
- schema
- dictionary
- index
- glossary
A: schema

Q: <img width="518" height="90" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item 1 points to the ____.
- URL element specifying the file is stored locally on the computer
- path name of the folder containing the file
- filename of the Web page
- name of the computer or Web server storing the page
A: URL element specifying the file is stored locally on the computer

Q: <img width="518" height="90" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item 2 points to the ____.
- URL element specifying the file is stored locally on the computer
- path name of the folder containing the file
- filename of the Web page
- name of the computer or Web server storing the page
A: path name of the folder containing the file

Q: <img width="518" height="90" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item 3 points to the ____.
- URL element specifying the file is stored locally on the computer
- path name of the folder containing the file
- filename of the Web page
- name of the computer or Web server storing the page
A: filename of the Web page

Q: <img width="518" height="262" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item ____ points to the column headings.
- 1
- 2
- 3
- 4
A: 2

Q: <img width="518" height="262" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item ____ points to the formatted title.
- 1
- 2
- 3
- 4
A: 1

Q: <img width="518" height="262" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, Item ____ is the name of the worksheet.
- 1
- 2
- 4
- 5
A: 5

Q: <img width="518" height="262" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, what range of cells includes a number format?
- A1:D20
- A2:D20
- A5:D20
- B5:D20
A: B5:D20

Q: <img width="518" height="262" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the accompanying figure, what range of cells has the date format applied?
- A1:D20
- A2:D20
- A5:D20
- A5:A20
A: A5:A20

Q: <img width="504" height="283" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the Horizons Fund Portfolio shown in the accompanying figure, Column A displays ticker symbols.  In Excel, the MSN MoneyCentral Investor Stock Quotes Query allows you to enter up to ___ ticker symbols to retrieve current market values of the stocks.
- 15
- 20
- 25
- 30
A: 20

Q: <img width="504" height="283" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00011_res/Excel-Tutorial-11_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the Horizons Fund Portfolio shown in the accompanying figure, data is sorted by ____.
- Category only
- Category, then by Portfolio Percent.
- Portfolio Percent, then Category
- Portfolio Percent only
A: Category, then by Portfolio Percent.

Q: One of the advantages of using XML as a data source is that it allows you to attach, or ____, elements to specific cells in the workbook.
- map
- bind
- insert
- pin
A: bind

Q: One of the advantages of XML is that the XML author defines what constitutes a valid document.  Documents that fail to meet the rules can be rejected by an XML program as invalid, thus ensuring ____.
- coding
- data values
- data integrity
- external data
A: data integrity

Q: To detach an Excel table from its data source, select a cell in the table, click the Table Tools Design tab, and then, in the External Table Data group, click the ____ button.
- Unlink
- Detach
- Remove Source
- Embed
A: Unlink

Q: Databases such as those created in Access are examples of ____ databases which reduce data redundancy and increase data integrity.
- pivot
- relational
- linked
- embedded
A: relational

Q: One way to interact with a database is with a query language. The most popular query language is ____.
- ODC
- UDC
- OLE
- SQL
A: SQL

Q: When Excel imports external data into a PivotTable or PivotChart, the initial table and chart are ____.
- complete with data, but may be edited
- partially complete with data which needs to be edited
- empty
- all of the above are possible
A: empty

Q: To manually save a connection to an ODC file, use the Export ____ File button on the Definition tab of the Connection Properties dialog box to specify the name and location of your Office Data Connection file.
- Connection
- Data
- Office
- ODC
A: Connection

Q: In order to override Excel so that it always enables data sources and refreshes the connection to the source without prompting, you should define the location of the data sources as ____.
- new locations
- trusted sites
- trusted locations
- enabled locations
A: trusted locations

Q: If you are importing international data from a text file, click the ____ button in Step 3 of the Text Import Wizard to specify a different character for the decimal point and thousands separator.
- Next
- Number
- Advanced
- General
A: Advanced

Q: A ____ is a defined method of retrieving data from an external file.
- connection
- data range
- data source
- importing scheme
A: connection

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-1</b><br>Tayler is a manager in the Sales Department for BusyBody Toymakers. She needs access to up-to-date financial data and sales reports. Some of this information comes from Excel workbooks, but other information is stored in other software programs. In addition, BusyBody Toymakers maintains a database with detailed financial information and sales figures. Tayler uses Excel to analyze data from external data sources.<br><br> Tayler creates a chart displaying the company’s recent sales history. When she resizes the chart, the image is distorted. What key should she hold down while resizing the chart so that it is resized proportionately?
- Ctrl
- Alt
- Shift
- Esc
A: Shift

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-1</b><br>Tayler is a manager in the Sales Department for BusyBody Toymakers. She needs access to up-to-date financial data and sales reports. Some of this information comes from Excel workbooks, but other information is stored in other software programs. In addition, BusyBody Toymakers maintains a database with detailed financial information and sales figures. Tayler uses Excel to analyze data from external data sources.<br><br> Tayler needs to delete a connection to a data source.  She should select the connection in the list in the Workbook Connections dialog box, and then click the ____ button.
- Delete
- Remove
- Omit
- Detach
A: Remove

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-1</b><br>Tayler is a manager in the Sales Department for BusyBody Toymakers. She needs access to up-to-date financial data and sales reports. Some of this information comes from Excel workbooks, but other information is stored in other software programs. In addition, BusyBody Toymakers maintains a database with detailed financial information and sales figures. Tayler uses Excel to analyze data from external data sources.<br><br> To prevent other users from updating a data source without permission, what should Tayler do?
- Define the data source
- Remove the connection
- Require a password
- Nothing--Excel cannot prevent data from being refreshed
A: Require a password

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-1</b><br>Tayler is a manager in the Sales Department for BusyBody Toymakers. She needs access to up-to-date financial data and sales reports. Some of this information comes from Excel workbooks, but other information is stored in other software programs. In addition, BusyBody Toymakers maintains a database with detailed financial information and sales figures. Tayler uses Excel to analyze data from external data sources.<br><br> Tayler wants the workbook to always display the most current values from a text file used when importing external sales data. What is the advantage of editing the properties of the connection versus editing the properties of the external data range?
- The choices are applied to all of the external data ranges that use that connection.
- The choices are applied only to the current workbook.
- The choices are only applied the first time the workbook is opened after the properties have been changed.
- There is no advantage--it would be better to edit the properties of the external data range.
A: The choices are applied to all of the external data ranges that use that connection.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-1</b><br>Tayler is a manager in the Sales Department for BusyBody Toymakers. She needs access to up-to-date financial data and sales reports. Some of this information comes from Excel workbooks, but other information is stored in other software programs. In addition, BusyBody Toymakers maintains a database with detailed financial information and sales figures. Tayler uses Excel to analyze data from external data sources.<br><br> After opening a workbook, Tayler wants to update all of the external data ranges in the workbook.  What button should she click in the Connections group on the Data tab?
- Refresh
- Refresh All
- Update
- Update All
A: Refresh All

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-2</b><br>Sadra works for a local travel agency. She uses the agency’s Web site to promote the latest tours. She uses Access to store information concerning the tours and Excel to analyze the data. Fall tours include trips to Honolulu, Seattle, Chicago, and Denver. Spring tours include trips to Washington, D.C., New Mexico, Alaska, and Montana. Summer tours include Paris, Rome, Denmark, and Australia.<br><br> Sadra wants Excel to automatically refresh the connection between her Excel workbook and her Access database whenever the workbook is opened.  She should click the <i>Refresh data when opening the file</i> check box in the Connection Properties dialog box.  What steps should she take to open the Connection Properties dialog box?
- Click the Data tab on the Ribbon, click the Connections button in the Connections group, then click the Connection button.
- Click the Data tab on the Ribbon, click the Connections button in the Connections group, select the database, then click the Properties button.
- Click the Edit tab on the Ribbon, then click the Connections button in the Connections group.
- Click the Edit tab on the Ribbon, click the Connections button in the Connections group, select the database, then click the Properties button.
A: Click the Data tab on the Ribbon, click the Connections button in the Connections group, select the database, then click the Properties button.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-2</b><br>Sadra works for a local travel agency. She uses the agency’s Web site to promote the latest tours. She uses Access to store information concerning the tours and Excel to analyze the data. Fall tours include trips to Honolulu, Seattle, Chicago, and Denver. Spring tours include trips to Washington, D.C., New Mexico, Alaska, and Montana. Summer tours include Paris, Rome, Denmark, and Australia.<br><br> Sadra is told by her database administrator to always document her connections to external data. Why is this important?
- Storing data is not immediately required; therefore, documentation is necessary.
- Connection properties can be changed more easily if connections are documented.
- Users can quickly see what the data is used for and where it came from.
- Text files must be documented for connection purposes.
A: Users can quickly see what the data is used for and where it came from.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-2</b><br>Sadra works for a local travel agency. She uses the agency’s Web site to promote the latest tours. She uses Access to store information concerning the tours and Excel to analyze the data. Fall tours include trips to Honolulu, Seattle, Chicago, and Denver. Spring tours include trips to Washington, D.C., New Mexico, Alaska, and Montana. Summer tours include Paris, Rome, Denmark, and Australia.<br><br> Sadra wants her connection files listed in the Existing Connections dialog box. She should save the connections in the ____ folder.
- My Connections
- My Data Sources
- My Documents
- My Sources
A: My Data Sources

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-2</b><br>Sadra works for a local travel agency. She uses the agency’s Web site to promote the latest tours. She uses Access to store information concerning the tours and Excel to analyze the data. Fall tours include trips to Honolulu, Seattle, Chicago, and Denver. Spring tours include trips to Washington, D.C., New Mexico, Alaska, and Montana. Summer tours include Paris, Rome, Denmark, and Australia.<br><br> Sadra learns that an advantage of using XML elements in a worksheet is that it allows the user to attach elements to specific cells. To map an XML document directly into an Excel table, Sadra should click the From Other Sources button in the Getting External Data group on the Data tab, and then click ____.
- From XML Document
- From XML Source
- From XML Documentation
- From XML Data Import
A: From XML Data Import

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 11-2</b><br>Sadra works for a local travel agency. She uses the agency’s Web site to promote the latest tours. She uses Access to store information concerning the tours and Excel to analyze the data. Fall tours include trips to Honolulu, Seattle, Chicago, and Denver. Spring tours include trips to Washington, D.C., New Mexico, Alaska, and Montana. Summer tours include Paris, Rome, Denmark, and Australia.<br><br> The office manager at the travel agency informs Sadra that starting with Office 2007, Microsoft moved to using the Office Open XML format which stores the XML code in a(n) ____ file.
- compressed
- batch
- text
- unzipped
A: compressed

Q: A(n) ____________________ file contains only text and numbers without any formulas, special fonts, graphics, or formatted text.
A: text

Q: A(n) ____________________ separates one column of data from another.
A: delimiter

Q: To better understand the structure of an XML document, an XML ____________________ can be created that displays the layout of the elements in a schematic diagram.
A: data map

Q: In a(n) ____________________ text file, each column will start at the same location in the file.
A: fixed-width

Q: In a delimited text file, the ____________________—usually a space, a comma, or a tab—automatically determines the column break.
A: delimiter

Q: The point at which one column ends and another begins in the Text Import Wizard is called a(n) ____________________ break.
A: column

Q: Data in an XML document is contained within ____________________.
A: elements

Q: XML stands for ____________________.
A: Extensible Markup Language

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a collection of data arranged in rows and columns.
A: table

Q: Each column of a database table, called a(n) ____________________, stores information about a specific characteristic of a person, place, or thing.
A: field

Q: Each row of a database table, called a(n) ____________________, displays a collection of characteristics of a particular person, place, or thing.
A: record

Q: ____________________ fields are the fields that appear in more than one table.
A: Common

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a question you ask about the data in the database.
A: query

Q: ____________________ are the conditions that limit the number of records displayed in the results of a query.
A: Criteria

Q: A(n) ____________________ source is any file that contains the data you want to retrieve.
A: data

Q: Data ____________________ can be databases, text files, or other Excel workbooks.
A: sources

Q: In the Query Wizard, you can preview the contents of each field in the table by selecting it and then clicking the ____________________ button.
A: Preview Now

Q: URL stands for ____________________.
A: Uniform Resource Locator

Q: Database tables can be inserted directly into PivotCharts and ____________________.
A: PivotTables

Q: When using a Web site as a data source, a(n) ____________________ specifies how data should be retrieved from the Web page and indicates exactly which parts of the Web page should be included and which parts should not be included.
A: Web query

Q: Assume you have a blank workbook open in Excel. You have clicked on the Sheet1 tab and you are currently in cell A1. Describe the steps you would take to connect to a text file using the Text Import Wizard.
Feedback: In the Get External Data group on the Data tab, click the From Text button, and then select the text file containing the data. In the first step of the Text Import Wizard, choose how the data is organized, and then specify the row in which to start the import. In the second step, set the column breaks by clicking a location in the Data preview box to insert a column break, double-clicking a column break to delete it, and dragging a column break to move it to a new location. In the third step, specify the data format for each column by clicking the column and then selecting the appropriate data format option button, or skip importing a column by clicking the column in the Data preview box and then clicking the Do not import (skip) option button. Click the Finish button. Specify where to insert the imported text, and then click the OK button to import the text file into the worksheet.

Q: What are the steps to filter data in a query?
Feedback: In the first step of the Query Wizard, select the columns from the different tables to include in your query, and then click the Next button. In the second step of the wizard, filter the data by selecting the columns to filter, specifying the nature of the filter in the Only include rows where list boxes, and then click the Next button. In the third step of the wizard, specify the sort order for the data values in the query, and then click the Next button. In the last step of the wizard, specify whether to return the query data to Excel, view or edit the data in Microsoft Query, or save the written query to a permanent file for use later.

Q: Define XML and discuss its applications. Define each of the following terms: elements, root element, tag, data map, and schema.
Feedback: Extensible Markup Language (XML) is a language that structures data in text files that can be read by a wide variety of programs. In recent years, XML has been widely used in database programs, Web programming, and word processing. Data in an XML document is contained within elements. The document is structured like a tree in which elements are placed within one another, descending from a common root element. The name of each element is contained in a tag. To better understand the structure of an XML document, a data map can be created that displays the layout of the elements in a schematic diagram. A schema is a separate document that stores information about whether or not an element is required—it contains the rules required for correctly inserting data into an XML document. When you connect to an XML document, Excel creates a data map of the document’s structure and contents. If a schema is present, Excel uses it to create the data map; otherwise, it creates the map based on the contents of the XML document. After the data map is created, you can use it to place XML elements anywhere within the workbook.

Q: At the break-even point, revenue equals expenses.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="450" height="326" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure indicates the profit.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: With what-if analysis, you specify the result values you want, and Excel changes the input values to produce them.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: As in traditional what-if analysis, Goal Seek starts with the end result and determines what value you should use to reach a desired answer.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To open the Goal Seek dialog box, first click the What-If Analysis button in the Data Tools group.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You should always clearly label the row or column containing the input and result values.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If your input values are in a column, you will use the Row input cell option when you use the Data Table command.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you create a one-variable data table, you select the range that contains the data table, making sure to include the column headings.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In a two-variable data table, the values of two result cells are displayed.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Two-variable data tables are often used to explore the impact of changing two values on a single result.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Changing cells can be located anywhere in the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="504" height="417" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> If the dialog box in the accompanying figure is used to unlock the changing cells in the scenario, and the worksheet is protected, users can show the scenario but not edit it.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You cannot merge scenarios in situations involving multiple workbooks.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Solver is an add-in, a program that adds customized commands and features to Microsoft Office programs such as Excel.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: It is possible for Solver to be installed but not activated on your computer.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Using Solver, you specify the target cell, variable cells, and constraints on a problem.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: That an order must meet store demand, or that it cannot exceed the available parts, are examples of constraints.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: References, or limits, in Solver are important because they ensure a realistic solution to your problem.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The sensitivity report is most often used in science and engineering environments.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A limits report is best utilized when your problem contains integer constraints.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Fixed</u> expenses change in proportion to the company’s sales volume.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: CVP analysis is sometimes called <u>breakthrough</u> analysis.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In traditional what-if analysis, you change <u>result</u> values in worksheet cells.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>output</u> cell is the cell containing the values you want to examine.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: An array <u>argument</u> performs multiple calculations on one or more sets of values and then returns either a single value or multiple values.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="504" height="417" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The items marked 1 in the accompanying figure are the <u>result</u> cells.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can view a scenario by <u>clicking</u> its name in the Scenarios box in the Scenario Manager dialog box.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When measuring elasticity, when e<1, the price elasticity of demand is <u>perfectly</u> inelastic.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When measuring elasticity, if e=1, then the elasticity is referred to as <u>unit</u> elastic because any change in price is met by an equal and opposite change in demand.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <u>Goal Seek</u> is a program that searches for the optimal solution of a problem involving several variables.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>optimal</u> cell is a cell that Excel changes to produce the desired result in the target cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The default convergence value is 0.001, which means that if the change in the target cell between one solution and the next is less than or equal to <u>0.001</u>, Solver will consider that it has converged to the solution.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If Solver is taking too long to find a solution, you can halt the program at any time by pressing the <u>Ctrl</u> key.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Not binding</u> constraints always show a slack of 0.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>mixed</u> expense is an expense that is part variable and part fixed.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: ____ analysis is an important business decision-making tool because it predicts the effect of cutting overhead or raising prices on net income.
- CVP
- MVP
- EVP
- AVP
A: CVP

Q: ____ analysis expresses the relationship between a company’s expenses, its volume of business, and the resulting profit.
- MVP
- ABC
- CVP
- CBP
A: CVP

Q: Which of the following expense types can be used in a CVP analysis? ____
- mixed
- variable
- fixed
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: A business must pay insurance and rent; these are examples of ____ expenses.
- fixed
- variable
- mixed
- transitional
A: fixed

Q: All three expense types can be classified as ____.
- mixed, fixed, and CVP
- variable, fixed, and mixed
- asset-based, fixed, and mixed
- variable, fixed, and cost-based
A: variable, fixed, and mixed

Q: <img width="450" height="326" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item in the accompanying figure is a(n) ____ chart.
- AVP
- CVP
- EVP
- MVP
A: CVP

Q: <img width="450" height="326" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is the ____ point.
- variable
- fixed
- break-even
- absolute
A: break-even

Q: <img width="450" height="326" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 3 in the accompanying figure indicates the ____ expenses.
- fixed
- mixed
- variable
- absolute
A: variable

Q: <img width="450" height="326" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 4 in the accompanying figure indicates the ____ expenses.
- fixed
- mixed
- variable
- absolute
A: fixed

Q: Goal Seek uses a different approach from traditional ____ analysis.
- trial-and-error
- what-if
- worksheet
- hypothetical
A: what-if

Q: With Goal Seek, you specify the ____ values you want.
- result
- constraint
- exchange
- index
A: result

Q: With Goal Seek, Excel changes the ____ values to produce the result values you are looking for.
- input
- output
- index
- link
A: input

Q: <img width="218" height="145" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the dialog box in the accompanying figure, you specify the ____ in the To value box.
- changing
- variable
- input
- goal
A: goal

Q: <img width="218" height="145" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the dialog box in the accompanying figure, you select the ____ cell in the By changing cell box.
- changing
- result
- input
- advance
A: input

Q: <img width="218" height="145" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To open the dialog box in the accompanying figure, click the What-If Analysis button in the ____ group.
- Sorter
- Analysis
- Goal Seek
- Data Tools
A: Data Tools

Q: <img width="218" height="145" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Press the ____ key to move the insertion point from one box to the next in the accompanying figure.
- Tab
- Ctrl
- Alt
- Shift
A: Tab

Q: If you orient a one-variable table so that the input values are in the first row, you would use the ____ input cell option.
- Column
- Row
- Values
- Table
A: Row

Q: In two-variable tables, you must always place a reference to the result cell in the ____ corner of the table at the intersection of the row values and the column values.
- upper-right
- upper-left
- lower-right
- lower-left
A: upper-left

Q: {=SUM(B1:B10*C1:C10)} is an example of a(n) ____.
- array formula
- TABLE function
- scenario
- input value
A: array formula

Q: Once you enter an array formula, Excel will enclose the formula in a set of ____.
- parentheses
- curly braces
- brackets
- none of the above
A: curly braces

Q: All of the following are array functions that can return multiple values to multiple cells EXCEPT ____.
- ARRAY
- TREND
- MINVERSE
- MMULT
A: ARRAY

Q: To calculate multiple cells values, select the range and type the array formula, then press the ____ keys to enter the formula.
- Alt+Enter
- Ctrl+Shift+Enter
- Alt+Shift+Enter
- Ctrl+Enter
A: Ctrl+Shift+Enter

Q: ____ are a powerful feature of Excel. If used properly, they help you perform complex calculations within a single formula and extend a single formula over a range of cells.
- Functions
- Formatting
- Array formulas
- Property sheets
A: Array formulas

Q: Before using Scenario Manager, you should assign ____ to all the input and result cells you intend to use in your scenarios.
- cells
- names
- ranges
- ranks
A: names

Q: To perform a what-if analysis with more than two input cells, you ____.
- hide all references
- use only exchange values
- apply additional constraints
- create scenarios
A: create scenarios

Q: <img width="504" height="417" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The items marked 1 in the accompanying figure are ____ cells.
- result
- changing
- input
- goal
A: input

Q: To select nonadjacent changing cells, press and hold the ____ key as you click each cell.
- Alt
- Shift
- Esc
- Ctrl
A: Ctrl

Q: You can switch from one scenario to another by clicking the ____ button in the Scenario Manager dialog box.
- Display
- View
- Show
- Effect
A: Show

Q: A scenario ____ lists the value for changing cells and results cells under each scenario.
- revenue report
- summary report
- index sample
- profit report
A: summary report

Q: A scenario summary report’s ____ layout makes it simpler to compare the results of each scenario, and the automatic formatting makes it useful for reports and meetings.
- portrait
- tabular
- row-based
- columnar
A: tabular

Q: Elasticity measures how changing prices can affect the ____ a good or service.
- production of
- demand for
- longevity of
- value of
A: demand for

Q: When change in price has <i>no</i> impact on demand, the situation is referred to as ____.
- price elastic
- perfectly inelastic
- perfectly elastic
- relatively inelastic
A: perfectly inelastic

Q: You can use the Load/Save button in the Solver ____ dialog box to save the Solver model to the current worksheet.
- Properties
- Output
- Parameters
- Input
A: Parameters

Q: In measuring elasticity, if e=0.1, then increasing the price of an item by 10% decreases demand by ____.
- 1%
- 10%
- 50%
- 100%
A: 1%

Q: In measuring elasticity, if e=0, then changes in price have no impact on demand, which is referred to as a ____ situation and occurs when the item being sold is rare or essential.
- relatively elastic
- perfectly inelastic
- relatively inelastic
- perfectly elastic
A: perfectly inelastic

Q: In measuring elasticity, if e=2.0, then increasing the price of an object by ____ decreases demand by 20%.
- 1%
- 10%
- 50%
- 100%
A: 10%

Q: In measuring elasticity, as the value of e increases, the result is that any change in price causes a huge change in demand, resulting in a ____ relationship between price and demand.
- relatively elastic
- perfectly inelastic
- relatively inelastic
- perfectly elastic
A: perfectly elastic

Q: ____ is a program that searches for the optimal solution of a problem involving several variables.
- Trial and error
- Solver
- Goal Seek
- Scenario Manager
A: Solver

Q: ____ can be used to find the curve or line that best fits a set of data or to minimize production costs for a product or service.
- Goal Seek
- Trial and error
- Scenario Manager
- Solver
A: Solver

Q: The three items that you must specify when using Solver are ____.
- target cell, input value, and results
- target cell, variable cell, and parameters
- variable cell, parameters, and constraints
- variable cell, objective cell, and constraints
A: variable cell, objective cell, and constraints

Q: In Solver, changing cells are sometimes referred to as ____ cells.
- self-adjusting
- variable
- key
- constraint
A: variable

Q: When you use Solver, you must specify the ____ that apply to your problem.
- adjustments
- constraints
- keys
- indices
A: constraints

Q: Aside from Solver, other Excel ____ provide the ability to perform statistical analyses, generate business reports, and retrieve financial data from the Internet.
- parameters
- add-ins
- helper applications
- constraint applications
A: add-ins

Q: To activate Solver, click Solver Add-In in the ____.
- Add-Ins dialog box
- Solver dialog box
- Analysis group
- Data Tools group
A: Add-Ins dialog box

Q: To open the Solver Parameters dialog box, click the Solver button in the ____ group on the Data tab.
- Connections
- Analysis
- Data Tools
- External Data
A: Analysis

Q: A(n) ____ is a limit that is placed on a Solver problem's solution.
- max
- target
- constraint
- adjustment
A: constraint

Q: ____ are important because they ensure a realistic solution to your problem.
- Constraints
- Parameters
- Targets
- Optimals
A: Constraints

Q: When you click the Solve button in the Solver Parameters dialog box, in the ____, you can see Solver rapidly "trying out" solutions.
- menu bar
- status bar
- dialog box
- toolbar
A: status bar

Q: After trying out solutions for a short time, Solver displays the ____ dialog box, which displays the message that indicates Solver has found a solution that satisfies the constraints.
- Solver Answer
- Solver Solution
- Solver Results
- Solution
A: Solver Results

Q: Solver arrives at optimal solutions through a(n) ____ procedure.
- reciprocal
- iterative
- secondary
- convergent
A: iterative

Q: A(n) ____ procedure means that Solver starts with an initial solution and uses that as a basis to calculate a series of solutions.
- reciprocal
- iterative
- secondary
- convergent
A: iterative

Q: If Solver is taking too long to find a solution, you can halt the program at any time by pressing the ____ key.
- Alt
- Enter
- Esc
- Ctrl
A: Esc

Q: If you want to see the iterative process in action, click the ____ check box, and Excel will pause after each iteration and show the intermediate solutions that it finds.
- Document Iterations
- Iteration Reports
- Iteration Progress
- Show Iteration Results
A: Show Iteration Results

Q: The default length of time that Solver will spend on the iterative process is ____ seconds.
- 50
- 100
- 500
- 1000
A: 100

Q: The default convergence value in Solver is ____.
- 0.001
- 0.01
- 0.1
- 1.0
A: 0.001

Q: The default number of iterations Solver will try is ____.
- 50
- 100
- 500
- 1000
A: 100

Q: You can include an analysis of the constraints and conditions by which Solver arrived at its solution by creating a(n) ____ report.
- analysis
- answer
- condition
- constraint
A: answer

Q: Solver can create the following three different reports: ____.
- sensitivity, answer, analysis
- constraint, sensitivity, analysis
- analysis, answer, limits
- answer, limits, sensitivity
A: answer, limits, sensitivity

Q: The ____ report summarizes the results of a successful solution by displaying information about the target cell, changing cells, and constraints.
- answer
- constraint
- sensitivity
- limits
A: answer

Q: Which of the following reports is used to quantify the reliability of a solution?
- Limits
- Sensitivity
- Constraint
- both a. and b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: Which of the following reports is used when your problem contains integer constraints?
- Answer
- Sensitivity
- Limits
- both a. and b.
A: Answer

Q: The ____ report is used primarily when the user wants to investigate the mathematical aspects of the Solver solution.
- answer
- solution
- arithmetic
- limits
A: limits

Q: The answer report is divided into ____ sections.
- two
- three
- four
- five
A: four

Q: The last column on the right in an answer report shows the ____ for each constraint.
- reciprocity
- frequency
- slack
- both a. and b.
A: slack

Q: The slack is the difference between the value in the cell and the value at the limit of the ____.
- variable cell
- result cell
- constraint
- risk factor
A: constraint

Q: Binding constraints always show a slack of ____.
- -0.01
- 0
- 0.01
- 1
A: 0

Q: Cells that display the value ____ indicate that all of the values in the worksheet satisfy the Solver constraints.
- TRUE
- YES
- 1
- 0
A: TRUE

Q: If a value in the worksheet violates one of the constraints, the Solver parameter cells will display the value ____.
- FALSE
- NO
- 1
- 0
A: FALSE

Q: Scenario summary tables and scenario ____ can be used to obtain a quick snapshot of several possible outcomes.
- PivotTables
- Linear Tables
- Non Linear Tables
- Data Tables
A: PivotTables

Q: When using Goal Seek, select the ____ cell in the Set cell box, and then specify its value (goal) in the To value box.
- changing
- result
- input
- value
A: result

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions</b><br><b><br>Case 10-1<br></b>You have been having some difficulty in your economics class this semester, so you have requested support from a tutor. One topic that is giving you trouble at the moment is the price elasticity of demand.<br><br> Changes in price are having no impact on demand. This is an example of what kind of elasticity, according to your tutor?
- Relatively inelastic
- Perfectly inelastic
- Relatively elastic
- Perfectly elastic
A: Perfectly inelastic

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions</b><br><b><br>Case 10-1<br></b>You have been having some difficulty in your economics class this semester, so you have requested support from a tutor. One topic that is giving you trouble at the moment is the price elasticity of demand.<br><br> Increasing the price of an object by 10% decreases demand by 20%. This is an example of what kind of elasticity, according to your tutor?
- Relatively inelastic
- Perfectly inelastic
- Relatively elastic
- Perfectly elastic
A: Relatively elastic

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions</b><br><b><br>Case 10-1<br></b>You have been having some difficulty in your economics class this semester, so you have requested support from a tutor. One topic that is giving you trouble at the moment is the price elasticity of demand.<br><br> Consumers have to choose between two products that are exactly equal in all respects, and raising the price of one causes a huge decrease in demand. This is an example of what kind of elasticity, according to your tutor?
- Relatively inelastic
- Perfectly inelastic
- Relatively elastic
- Perfectly elastic
A: Perfectly elastic

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions</b><br><b><br>Case 10-1<br></b>You have been having some difficulty in your economics class this semester, so you have requested support from a tutor. One topic that is giving you trouble at the moment is the price elasticity of demand.<br><br> A change in price is met by an equal and opposite change in demand. This is an example of what kind of elasticity, according to your tutor?
- Unit elastic
- Perfect elastic
- Relative elastic
- Absolute elastic
A: Unit elastic

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions</b><br><b><br>Case 10-1<br></b>You have been having some difficulty in your economics class this semester, so you have requested support from a tutor. One topic that is giving you trouble at the moment is the price elasticity of demand.<br><br> Increasing the price of an item by 10% decreases demand by only 1%. This is an example of what kind of elasticity, according to your tutor?
- relatively inelastic
- perfectly inelastic
- relatively elastic
- perfectly elastic
A: relatively inelastic

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 10-2<br></b>As you begin to work with Solver, you have questions so you turn to your roommate, Barat, who you know is an expert in its usage.<br><br> Barat explains to you that if you want to use Solver to maximize a company’s net income, this cell is what kind of cell?
- goal cell
- objective cell
- changing cell
- constraint
A: objective cell

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 10-2<br></b>As you begin to work with Solver, you have questions so you turn to your roommate, Barat, who you know is an expert in its usage.<br><br> Barat explains that if you have a cell that is the sales price of a given product, the value of which will change to produce the desired Solver result in the target cell, this cell is what kind of cell?
- goal cell
- constraint
- changing cell
- absolute cell
A: changing cell

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 10-2<br></b>As you begin to work with Solver, you have questions so you turn to your roommate, Barat, who you know is an expert in its usage.<br><br> In your scenario, there is a physical limit on the number of products that the factories can produce in a given year. What does Barat tell you this limit is called, in Solver’s terms?
- changing cell
- objective cell
- goal cell
- constraint
A: constraint

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 10-2<br></b>As you begin to work with Solver, you have questions so you turn to your roommate, Barat, who you know is an expert in its usage.<br><br> Barat explains that there are six possible constraints supported by Solver. Which of the following is NOT one of those constraints?
- !=
- >=
- <=
- =
A: !=

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 10-2<br></b>As you begin to work with Solver, you have questions so you turn to your roommate, Barat, who you know is an expert in its usage.<br><br> The default convergence value is 0.001, which means that if the change in the value of the objective cell between the new solution and the previous solution is ____0.001.
- equal to
- less than or equal to
- greater than or equal to
- greater than
A: less than or equal to

Q: ____________________ expenses change in proportion to the amount of business a company does.
A: Variable

Q: A(n) ____________________ expense is an expense that must be paid regardless of sales volume.
A: fixed

Q: With ____________________, you specify the result values you want, and Excel changes the input values to produce them.
A: Goal Seek

Q: In Goal Seek, the ____________________ cell is the cell containing the values you want to examine.
A: result

Q: ____________________ cells are cells containing values you want to modify in what-if analysis cells.
A: Input

Q: To set up a(n) ____________________ table, you first insert references to the input and result cells.
A: data

Q: When creating a(n) ____________________ data table, you must identify the row input cell and the column input cell.
A: two-variable

Q: The ____________________ input cell is the cell on which you base values placed in the first row of the data table.
A: row

Q: The ____________________ input cell is the cell on which values placed in the first column of the data table are based.
A: column

Q: <img width="504" height="417" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is the scenario ____________________.
A: description

Q: <img width="504" height="417" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00010_res/Excel-Tutorial-10_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Check the item marked 3 in the accompanying figure to hide the scenario in a(n) ____________________ worksheet.
A: protected

Q: If you want to concentrate on only a few key cells, the scenario summary report has ____________________ tools so you can hide and expand different parts of the report.
A: outline

Q: Click the Scenario PivotTable ____________________ option button to create a PivotTable describing the scenarios.
A: report

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a customized program that adds commands and features to Microsoft Office programs.
A: add-in

Q: In Solver, a(n) ____________________ cell is a cell that you want to maximize, minimize, or change to a specific value.
A: objective

Q: The Scenario Manager refers to ____________________ cells as changing cells because these worksheet cells contain values that are changed under the scenario.
A: input

Q: The ____________________ is the difference between the value in a cell and the value at the limit of the constraint.
A: slack

Q: ____________________ constraints always show a slack of 0.
A: Binding

Q: The effect that price has on demand is called ____________________ of demand.
A: price elasticity

Q: When elasticity is <i>e</i>>1, the price elasticity is ____________________ elastic.
A: relatively

Q: How does Goal Seek differ from traditional what-if analysis?
Feedback: Goal Seek uses a different approach from traditional what-if analysis, when you change input values in worksheet cells, and Excel uses these values to calculate result values. With Goal Seek, you specify the result values you want, and Excel changes the input values to produce them.

Q: What are the steps to create a one-variable data table?
Feedback: Insert a formula that references the input cell in the upper-left cell of the table. Insert input values in either the first row or first column of the table. For input values in the first row, insert formulas referencing result cells in the table’s first column; for input values in the first column, insert formulas referencing result cells in the table’s first row. Select the table (excluding any row or column headings). In the Data Tools group on the Data tab, click the What-If Analysis button, and then click Data Table. If the input values are in the first row, enter the cell reference to the input cell in the Row input cell box; if the input values are in the first column, enter the cell reference to the input cell in the Column input cell box. Click the OK button.

Q: How many different types of reports can Solver create? What are the characteristics of these report types, and which is the most useful?
Feedback: Solver can create three different reports—an answer report, a sensitivity report, and a limits report. The answer report may be the most useful of the three because it summarizes the results of a successful solution by displaying information about the target cell, changing cells, and constraints. This report includes the original and final values for the target and changing cells, as well as the constraint formulas. The sensitivity and limits reports are often used in science and engineering environments when the user wants to investigate the mathematical aspects of the Solver solution. These reports allow you to quantify the reliability of the solution; however, you cannot use these reports when your problem contains integer constraints.

Q: The <i>fv</i> argument is required in the PMT function.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Cash flow has nothing to do with who owns the money.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You should reference worksheet cells in which the values are entered so the values are easily visible.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Cash flow is not concerned with the direction of the money as it moves in and out of the company.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The NPER function returns the number of payment periods, not necessarily the number of years.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If the NPER function returns #NUM!, the loan cannot be repaid in any length of time.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you are making periodic monthly payments, and the interest is compounded monthly, then the number of periods is in years.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The functions used to work with loans are the same ones you used to work with investments; the only difference is the direction of the cash flow.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="404" height="293" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, earlier payment periods apply more of the payment toward the principal.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In an amortization schedule, use relative references to refer to the original loan conditions and use absolute references to refer to information about specific payment periods.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can calculate cumulative payments on interest and principal using the CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC functions.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To properly use financial functions, always place argument values directly into a financial formula.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Assets such as raw materials a company uses to manufacture cars are considered tangible assets.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To calculate a declining balance depreciation, use the DVB function.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The major advantage of the payback period is that it takes into account the time value of money.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The financial definition of net present value is the difference between the present value of future cash flows and the current cost of the initial investment.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Both the NPV and the IRR functions assume the cash flows occur at evenly spaced intervals.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The list of values in the IRR function must include at least one positive cash flow and one negative cash flow.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Error values will propagate throughout a workbook.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: An error indicator (a red triangle in the upper-left corner of a cell) flags cells with an error or a potential error.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The FV function calculates the <u>full</u> value of an investment or loan.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you don’t include an <i>fv</i> value, Excel assumes a future value of <u>1</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A <u>regular</u> cash flow occurs when cash is going away from the investor.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you plan to invest money for 18 months, the value of the <i>nper</i> argument in the PMT function is <u>1.5</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The financial functions automatically format calculated values as currency with negative cash flow appearing in a <u>green</u> font.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: With the FV function, if the amount invested each month is -30,000, this represents a <u>positive</u> cash flow.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If the NPER function returns the error value <u>#REF</u> a loan cannot be paid back in any length of time.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To calculate an annual rate, multiply the value returned by the <u>RATE</u> function by the number of payments per year.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: As you repay a loan, each payment represents a <u>positive</u> cash flow as you are sending money to the lending institution.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Amortization schedules often format all entries as positive values, and then label the <u>columns</u> to indicate the values represent negative values.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When using the PMT function to calculate monthly loan payments, the interest rate and the number of payments should be based on the interest rate per <u>year</u> and the total months to pay off the loan.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can extrapolate a series of values from the <u>Series</u> dialog box.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The function DDB is used to calculate a <u>declining</u> balance depreciation.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The possibility that the entire transaction will fail, resulting in a loss of the initial investment is called the <u>chance</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: At higher rates of return, the net present value of the investment goes <u>up</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The ____ function calculates the amount paid into an investment or loan during each payment period.
- NPER
- RATE
- PMT
- INT
A: PMT

Q: The ____ function calculates the future value of an investment or loan.
- RATE
- PV
- NPER
- FV
A: FV

Q: The ____ function calculates the present value of an investment or loan.
- PRES
- PV
- NPER
- FV
A: PV

Q: The ____ function calculates the interest rate charged or received during each payment period.
- RATE
- PV
- NPER
- FV
A: RATE

Q: The ____ function calculates the number of payment periods in an investment or loan.
- RATE
- PV
- NPER
- FV
A: NPER

Q: To calculate the number of quarterly payments required to pay off a loan, use the ____ function.
- PMT
- PV
- FV
- NPER
A: NPER

Q: Financial functions format calculated values as currency, with ____.
- positive cash flow appearing in red font
- positive cash flow enclosed in parentheses
- negative cash flow appearing in green font
- negative cash flow appearing in red font
A: negative cash flow appearing in red font

Q: Cash flow is the movement of cash assets ____ an account.
- into
- out of
- into or out of
- none of the above
A: into or out of

Q: To calculate the number of ____ payments required to pay off a loan or meet an investment goal, use the NPER function.
- monthly
- daily
- quarterly
- either a. or c.
A: either a. or c.

Q: The PMT value is also known as the ____ payment.
- periodic
- placement
- inflow
- indexed
A: periodic

Q: With the PMT function, the <i>type</i> argument is ____ when the payments are made at the end of each period.
- 0
- 1
- a
- -1
A: 0

Q: With the PMT function, the <i>type</i> argument is ____ when the payments are made at the beginning of each period.
- 0
- 1
- a
- -1
A: 1

Q: FV is used to calculate the ____ of a fund.
- future value
- fixed value
- forecast value
- first value
A: future value

Q: Which of the following shows the syntax of the NPER function?
- =NPER(<i>pmt, pv, [fv=0], [type=0]</i>)
- =NPER(<i>rate, pmt, [fv=0], [type=0]</i>)
- =NPER(<i>rate, pmt, pv [, fv=0] [, type=0]</i>)
- =NPER(<i>pmt, rate, pv, [fv=0], [type=0]</i>)
A: =NPER(<i>rate, pmt, pv [, fv=0] [, type=0]</i>)

Q: If the NPER function returns the error value ____, the loan cannot be paid back in any length of time.
- #REF!
- #NUM!
- #TIME!
- #PER!
A: #NUM!

Q: To calculate the annual rate, you must ____ the value returned by the RATE function by the number of payments per year.
- add
- subtract
- multiply
- divide
A: multiply

Q: When you borrow money, the money you receive represents a ____ cash flow.
- positive
- negative
- fixed
- neutral
A: positive

Q: <img width="404" height="293" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, later payment periods apply more of the payment toward the ____.
- index
- interest rate
- interest
- principal
A: principal

Q: The ____ function returns the amount of a particular payment that is used to pay the interest on the loan.
- PMT
- IPMT
- INPMT
- NPMT
A: IPMT

Q: In the function =CUMIPMT(<i>rate, nper, pv, start, end, type</i>), it is <i>____ </i>that defines whether the payments are made at the beginning or end of each period.
- rate
- nper
- end
- type
A: type

Q: Most Excel financial functions require a particular ____ to the cash flow to return the correct value.
- index
- valence
- orientation
- direction
A: direction

Q: When using the PMT function to calculate monthly loan payments, the interest rate and the number of payments should be based on the interest rate per month and the total ____ to pay off the loan.
- weeks
- months
- years
- any of the above
A: months

Q: Income statements are often created ____.
- monthly
- semiannually
- annually
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: A(n) ____ shows how much money a business makes or loses over a specified period of time.
- income projection
- expense report
- profit analysis
- income statement
A: income statement

Q: <img width="325" height="246" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure represents the ____ trend.
- periodic
- growth
- orthogonal
- linear
A: linear

Q: <img width="325" height="246" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure represents the ____ trend.
- periodic
- growth
- orthogonal
- linear
A: growth

Q: <img width="325" height="246" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, a(n) ____ trend appears as a straight line.
- periodic
- growth
- orthogonal
- linear
A: linear

Q: <img width="325" height="246" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, in a(n) ____ trend, the values do not change by a constant amount.
- periodic
- growth
- orthogonal
- linear
A: growth

Q: <img width="325" height="246" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, when plotted, a(n) ____ trend displays the greatest increases near the end of the series.
- periodic
- growth
- orthogonal
- linear
A: growth

Q: In a(n) ____ trend, the values change by a constant amount.
- linear
- growth
- periodic
- orthogonal
A: linear

Q: In a(n) ____ trend, values change by a constant percentage and usually appear as a curve.
- linear
- growth
- periodic
- orthogonal
A: growth

Q: To ____ a series, the cells between the first and last cells in the series must be blank.
- extrapolate
- concatenate
- integrate
- interpolate
A: interpolate

Q: The difference between a company’s sales revenue and the cost of goods sold is the company’s ____.
- cost of operation
- gross profit
- growth trend
- total revenue
A: gross profit

Q: To calculate a series of values from a starting point without a defined ending point, you have to ____ the values.
- interpolate
- extrapolate
- asses
- plot
A: extrapolate

Q: All of the following are examples of tangible assets except ____.
- equipment
- land
- delivery trucks
- production parts
A: production parts

Q: When you extrapolate a series, the ____ value represents the amount that each value is increased or multiplied as the series is extended.
- Increase
- Step
- Extension
- Advance
A: Step

Q: To project a trend that decreases rather than increases, use a step value of less than ____ for a linear trend.
- -1
- 0
- 1
- 2
A: 0

Q: To project a trend that decreases rather than increases, use a step value between ____ for a growth trend.
- -1 and 0
- -1 and 1
- 0 and 1
- 1 and 2
A: 0 and 1

Q: The process of allocating the original cost of an investment over the years of use is known as ____.
- interest
- balance
- depreciation
- amortization
A: depreciation

Q: To calculate the depreciation of an asset, you need to know all of the following EXCEPT the ____.
- asset’s original cost
- asset’s useful life
- asset’s type
- rate of depreciation
A: asset’s type

Q: To calculate a variable deprecation, use the ____ function.
- VBD
- DDB
- VDD
- DB
A: VBD

Q: With ____ depreciation, the asset depreciates by equal amounts each year of its lifetime until it reaches the salvage value.
- straight-line
- double-declining
- declining
- sum of years’ digit
A: straight-line

Q: The ____ function takes these arguments: cost, salvage, and life.
- SLN
- SYD
- DB
- VDB
A: SLN

Q: <img width="325" height="241" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure is the ____ value.
- sum
- declining balance
- initial asset
- salvage
A: initial asset

Q: <img width="325" height="241" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is the ____ value.
- sum
- declining balance
- initial asset
- salvage
A: salvage

Q: The DB function used to calculate the declining balance depreciation has the following syntax: ____.
- =DB(<i>salvage, life, period [month]</i>)
- =DB(<i>cost, salvage, period [month]</i>)
- =DB(<i>salvage, cost, life, period [month]</i>)
- =DB(<i>cost, salvage, life, period [month]</i>)
A: =DB(<i>cost, salvage, life, period [month]</i>)

Q: ____ depreciation depreciates an asset by a constant percentage each year rather than a constant amount.
- Declining balance
- Double declining
- Interest reduced
- Straight-line
A: Declining balance

Q: Excel supports ____ function(s) to calculate depreciation under different assumptions.
- one
- two
- five
- seven
A: five

Q: The ____ function returns the sum-of-years’ digit depreciation that results in a more accelerated depreciation than straight-line depreciation but less than declining balance depreciation.
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- VDB
A: SYD

Q: The ____ function returns a variable declining depreciation for any specified period using any specified depreciation method.
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- VDB
A: VDB

Q: The company’s income after all expenses and taxes have been paid is called the ____.
- total income
- net income
- gross revenue
- bottom line
A: net income

Q: The ____ period is a quick method of projecting the value of an investment.
- investment
- payback
- cumulative
- time-value
A: payback

Q: You can use the ____ function to estimate how much a dollar amount today is worth in future dollars.
- PV
- IRR
- FV
- DCT
A: FV

Q: A higher discount rate means that future dollars are ____ in comparison to current dollars.
- discounted less
- discounted more
- amortized more
- amortized less
A: discounted more

Q: The future values of an investment can be ____.
- positive
- negative
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: positive

Q: To calculate the internal rate of return, use the ____ function with the cost of the initial investment as the first cash flow value in a series.
- IRR
- XNPV
- NPV
- XIRR
A: IRR

Q: The NPV function is used in calculating the net present value of a transaction, which is the ____ value of all the cash inflows and outflows in the investment adjusted by the time value of money.
- current
- projected
- future
- total
A: current

Q: The point at which the net present value of an investment equals ____ is the internal rate of return.
- -1
- 0
- 0.1
- 1
A: 0

Q: At rates beyond the internal rate of return, the net present value is ____, meaning that the expansion is no longer a good investment compared with the desired rate of return.
- positive
- integrated
- negative
- exponential
A: negative

Q: When an investment requires the investor to make multiple future payments, rather than a single initial payment, ____.
- it will show no change in rate of return
- in will have a constant internal rate of return
- it may have several different possible internal rates of return
- none of the above
A: it may have several different possible internal rates of return

Q: In comparing two investments, a commonly used guideline is to accept the investment with the ____.
- higher NPV
- higher IRR
- lower NPV
- either a. or b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: To choose between two or more investments, it’s a good idea to graph the ____ for each investment against different possible rates of return.
- NPV
- IRR
- XNPV
- XIRR
A: NPV

Q: Use the XNPV and XIRR functions for cash flows that appear ____.
- with a regular pattern
- at unevenly spaced intervals
- at evenly spaced intervals
- none of the above
A: at unevenly spaced intervals

Q: A(n) ____ worksheet projects the company’s expected assets, liabilities, and equity.
- Asset Report
- Income Statement
- Balance Sheet
- Transactions
A: Balance Sheet

Q: Excel uses ____ to denote error indicators.
- req squares
- yellow circles
- green triangles
- blue shading
A: green triangles

Q: If active cell D12 contains the formula =D10+D11, cells D10 and D11 are ____ cells for D12.
- feeder
- dependent
- precedent
- formula
A: precedent

Q: After you select a cell with an error indicator, you can click the Error Alert ____ to display additional information about the possible error and determine if further action is needed.
- button
- icon
- ScreenTip
- menu
A: button

Q: A(n) ____ arrow provides a visual clue to the relationship between two cells by pointing from the precedent cell to the dependent cell.
- tracer
- outline
- index
- key
A: tracer

Q: Tracer arrows disappear when you ____.
- correct the error source
- insert or delete columns and rows
- delete or move cells
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: To evaluate a formula, you select the cell and then click the ____ button from the Formula Auditing group on the Formulas tab.
- Define Formula
- Select Formula
- Check Function
- Evaluate Formula
A: Evaluate Formula

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-1<br></b>Christian is having a lot of problems with errors in a very complicated spreadsheet that he inherited from a colleague, and he turns to another co-worker, Sebastian, for tips in how to trace errors in the sheet.<br><br> Sebastian tells Christian that all error values begin with the same symbol, so they can be easily identified as errors. What is the symbol?
- #
- &
- ^
- %
A: #

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-1<br></b>Christian is having a lot of problems with errors in a very complicated spreadsheet that he inherited from a colleague, and he turns to another co-worker, Sebastian, for tips in how to trace errors in the sheet.<br><br> If Christian sees which of the following, Sebastian explains, there is a mistyped function name in the sheet.
- #FNCT?
- #FORM?
- #NAME?
- Any of the above
A: #NAME?

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-1<br></b>Christian is having a lot of problems with errors in a very complicated spreadsheet that he inherited from a colleague, and he turns to another co-worker, Sebastian, for tips in how to trace errors in the sheet.<br><br> If Christian sees red tracer arrows that means there is an error in the value being received from the precedent cell or passed to the ____ cell.
- child
- precedent
- dependent
- contingent
A: dependent

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-1<br></b>Christian is having a lot of problems with errors in a very complicated spreadsheet that he inherited from a colleague, and he turns to another co-worker, Sebastian, for tips in how to trace errors in the sheet.<br><br> If in Christian’s sheet, cell A4 is a precedent cell for cell B7, what kind of a cell is B7?
- contingent cell
- dependent cell
- antecedent cell
- indicated cell
A: dependent cell

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-1<br></b>Christian is having a lot of problems with errors in a very complicated spreadsheet that he inherited from a colleague, and he turns to another co-worker, Sebastian, for tips in how to trace errors in the sheet.<br><br> Sebastian tells Christian to search all of the error values until he reaches one that lacks something, and that is the source of the error values in the dependent cells. What does that error value lack?
- contingencies
- dependencies
- antecedents
- precedents
A: precedents

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-2<br></b>Mackenzie is studying for her midterm exam in her accounting class. Her study partner Libby is her go-to person for help with calculating depreciation.<br><br> Which of the following functions does Libby say is used to calculate a straight-line depreciation?
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- DDB
A: SLN

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-2<br></b>Mackenzie is studying for her midterm exam in her accounting class. Her study partner Libby is her go-to person for help with calculating depreciation.<br><br> Which of the following functions does Libby say is used to calculate a declining balance depreciation?
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- DDB
A: DB

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-2<br></b>Mackenzie is studying for her midterm exam in her accounting class. Her study partner Libby is her go-to person for help with calculating depreciation.<br><br> Which of the following functions does Libby say is used to calculate a sum-of-years’ digit depreciation?
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- DDB
A: SYD

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-2<br></b>Mackenzie is studying for her midterm exam in her accounting class. Her study partner Libby is her go-to person for help with calculating depreciation.<br><br> Which of the following functions does Libby say is used to calculate a double-declining balance depreciation?
- DDB
- SLN
- SYD
- VBD
A: DDB

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 9-2<br></b>Mackenzie is studying for her midterm exam in her accounting class. Her study partner Libby is her go-to person for help with calculating depreciation.<br><br> Which of the following functions does Libby say is used to calculate a depreciation if it is variable?
- DB
- SLN
- SYD
- VDB
A: VDB

Q: The ____________________ function calculates the number of payment periods in an investment or loan.
A: NPER

Q: The ____________________ argument specifies whether payments are made at the end of each period or at the beginning.
A: type

Q: A positive cash flow, or ____________________, occurs whenever money is flowing into the account.
A: cash inflow

Q: A(n) ____________________ cash flow occurs whenever money is flowing out of the account.
A: negative

Q: The PMT value is also known as the ____________________ payment.
A: periodic

Q: The difference between a loan and an investment is based on the direction of the ____________________.
A: cash flow

Q: The ____________________ is the amount of the loan that is still unpaid.
A: principal

Q: To determine the interest rate needed to reach your savings goal, you can use the ____________________ function.
A: RATE

Q: <img width="540" height="185" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying figure is the annual interest rate.
A: 2

Q: <img width="540" height="185" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying figure is the quarterly cash outflow.
A: 5

Q: <img width="540" height="185" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying figure is the interest rate per quarter.
A: 3

Q: <img width="540" height="185" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying figure is the number of quarterly payments.
A: 4

Q: <img width="540" height="185" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00009_res/Excel-Tutorial-09_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying figure is the initial cash inflow.
A: 1

Q: The ____________________ function calculates the amount of a loan payment used to pay off the principal of the loan.
A: PPMT

Q: A(n) ____________________ provides details about each loan payment, specifying how much of the payment is devoted toward interest and how much toward repaying the principal.
A: amortization schedule

Q: A(n) ____________________ is also known as a profit and loss statement.
A: income statement

Q: If you know the beginning and ending values in a series and the series trend, you can fill in the missing values through ____________________.
A: interpolation

Q: When you extrapolate a series, you do not have to specify a(n) ____________________ value.
A: stopping / ending / final

Q: The financial definition of ____________________ is the difference between the present value of future cash flows and the current cost of the initial investment.
A: net present value

Q: You can use the ____________________ Window to view the impact of a changing value in one worksheet on the cell values in the other cells.
A: Watch

Q: Describe the steps to interpolate a series of values between starting and ending values.
Feedback: Select the range with the first cell containing the starting value, blank cells for middle values, and the last cell containing the ending value. In the Editing group on the Home tab, click the Fill button, and then click Series. Specify whether the series is organized in rows or columns and the type of series to interpolate. Check the Trend check box. Click the OK button to insert the interpolated series into the middle cells.

Q: How do you determine which method of depreciation is most appropriate?
Feedback: The answer depends on the type of asset being depreciated. Tax laws allow different depreciation methods for different kinds of assets and different situations. In general, you want to choose the depreciation method that most accurately describes the financial status of the company. In tax statements, depreciation appears as an expense that is subtracted from the company’s earnings. So, if you accelerate the depreciation of an asset in the early years of use, you might be underestimating the company’s profits, making it appear that the company is less profitable than it actually is. On the other hand, depreciating an asset slowly could make it appears that the company is more profitable than it really is. For this reason, the choice of a depreciation method is best left to a tax accountant, fully aware of the financial issues and the tax laws involved in depreciating an asset.

Q: Does the NPV function in Excel correspond to the financial definition of net present value? Explain your answer.
Feedback: The financial definition of net present value is the difference between the present value of future cash flows and the current cost of the initial investment. One source of confusion for Excel users is that despite its name, the NPV function does not return the net present value of an investment. Instead it returns the investment’s present value. To calculate the net present value in Excel, the cost of the initial investment must be subtracted from the value returned by the NPV function using the formula NPV value – initial investment where NPV value is the value returned by the NPV function, and initial investment is the initial cost of the investment. This formula assumes that the initial investment is made immediately, and not in the future using discounted dollars.

Q: For cell and range names, names of 25 to 50 characters are considered practical, although names can be up to 255 characters.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Clicking the Edit button in the accompanying figure opens the New Name dialog box in which you can modify the selected defined name.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You can use the Name Manager dialog box, shown above, to create a defined name.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Defined names are automatically substituted for the cell addresses in a formula.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Each cell can have at most three validation rules.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The frequency of error alert determines what choices the user is presented with when an invalid entry is attempted.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You cannot prevent users from changing all of the formulas in a worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can keep users from deleting worksheets or inserting new ones.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Even when the worksheet is unprotected, the locked property determines whether or not changes can be made to a given cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Once you protect a worksheet, the locked property is enabled and controls whether or not a cell can be edited.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Data validation can verify data that was entered into a worksheet before the validation criteria were applied.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can allow users to insert new rows or columns into a sheet, even if the sheet is protected.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Even if a sheet is protected, you can limit the user to selecting only unlocked cells, or allow the user to select any cell in the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="317" height="270" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The red triangle  (that has an arrow pointing to it) in the accompanying figure indicates that a given cell does not have a comment.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="317" height="270" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You drag the comment’s border to resize a comment box like the one shown in the accompanying figure.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="317" height="270" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To move the box, you would drag the selection handle of the comment in the accompanying figure.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Each macro must have a unique name.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: By default, a macro will select the same cells regardless of which cell is first selected because the macro records a selection using relative cell references.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you open a file with macros, the response you see is based on the security level set on the computer.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When the Ribbon is minimized, only the Quick Access Toolbar and the tab names are displayed.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A range name is more descriptive than a(n) <u>cell reference</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Any <u>blanks</u> or parentheses in row or column labels are changed to underscore characters in defined names.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The <u>Name </u>dialog box lists all of the names currently defined in the workbook, including Excel table names.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you select the Custom option in the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the validation rule will be based on an Excel <u>logistical</u> formula.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To open the Data Validation dialog box, click the Data tab on the Ribbon, and then click <u>Authentication</u> in the Data Tools group.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You use the <u>Rules</u> tab in the Data Validation dialog box to enter the validation rules for an active cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you <u>lock</u> a workbook, you control the ability users have to make changes to the file.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Every cell in a workbook has a(n) <u>sealed</u> property that determines whether or not changes can be made to that cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: By default, the locked property is turned <u>off</u> for each cell when you protect a workbook.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The default is to protect only the <u>appearance</u> of a workbook.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A digital <u>certificate</u> confirms that the macro created by the signer has not been altered since the digital certificate was created.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>Visual Basic Editor</u> is a separate application that works with Excel and all of the Office products to edit and manage VBA code.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can delete or edit a macro by opening the <u>Edit</u> dialog box, selecting the macro from the list, and then clicking the appropriate button.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: One way to run a macro is to assign it to a(n) <u>button</u> that is placed directly on the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When Excel creates a macro button, the <u>Assign Macro</u> dialog box opens with the button’s default name showing.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Applications typically include an interface to assist the user in using the system, ranging from special buttons that assist in existing specific tasks to changing the entire Excel interface with customized ____.
- commands
- menus
- toolbars
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: The following is a valid function name: ____.
- FY2010
- Print_Area
- Net-Income
- none of the above
A: none of the above

Q: Range names must begin with ____.
- a letter
- the underscore character
- a number
- either a. or b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: After the first character in a range name, the following is acceptable: ____.
- hyphen
- space
- periods
- either a. or b.
A: periods

Q: Range names can be up to ____ characters.
- 15
- 27
- 56
- 255
A: 255

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The most direct way to create defined names like the kind shown in the accompanying figure is to use the ____ box on the formula bar.
- Definition
- Name
- Term
- Label
A: Name

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, clicking the New button, opens the New Name dialog box.
- Name
- Macro
- Label
- Range
A: Name

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the column labeled “Refers to” is the name’s ____.
- link location
- location in the worksheet
- target location in the worksheet
- none of the above
A: location in the worksheet

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Using defined names like the kind shown in the accompanying figure makes creating and understanding a(n) ____ easier.
- index
- log
- formula
- all of the above
A: formula

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the City_State_Zip field name shown in the accompanying figure, the underscores replace ____ in the label name.
- spaces
- periods
- commas
- numbers
A: spaces

Q: <img width="490" height="379" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The current data in the ParkingFee cell, according to the accompanying figure, is ____.
- 25
- 8
- 2
- 15
A: 15

Q: The ____ box displays all of the names in the workbook.
- Name
- Ranges
- Definition
- Terms
A: Name

Q: If your data is organized in a tabular format, you can quickly create range names for each column or row in the list by using the ____ dialog box.
- Make from Table
- Name
- Create from Selection
- Assign
A: Create from Selection

Q: Any blanks or parentheses in a row or column label will be changed to ____ in defined names.
- ampersands
- underscore characters
- hyphens
- dashes
A: underscore characters

Q: The Excel data ____ feature restricts data entry to follow a defined set of rules.
- error-checking
- rule-based
- validation
- contingent
A: validation

Q: An input message appears when the cell becomes active, and can be used to specify the ____ of data the user should enter in that cell.
- aspect
- type
- format
- cast
A: type

Q: Using the Excel data validation feature, you can specify a(n) ____ of acceptable values.
- roster
- series
- array
- range
A: range

Q: One way to ensure that correct data is entered into a cell or range is to use the Excel data ____ feature.
- validation
- concatenation
- security
- index
A: validation

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept only integers.
- Integer
- Decimal
- Numerical
- Whole Number
A: Whole Number

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept any type of numeric value.
- Whole Number
- Any Number
- Decimal
- Integer
A: Decimal

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept only values from a list.
- List
- Index
- Roster
- Catalog
A: List

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept only text of a specified number of characters.
- Custom
- Text Length
- Any Value
- Specified Text
A: Text Length

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the validation rule will be based on an Excel logical formula.
- Rule
- Logical
- Custom
- Validation
A: Custom

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept only times.
- Chronology
- Clock
- Time
- Calendar
A: Time

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____ option means that the cell will accept only dates.
- Calendar
- Schedule
- Date
- Timeline
A: Date

Q: Sometimes when you build a worksheet for other users, you may decide to add a(n) ____ message to a cell even if you don't validate the data in that cell.
- value
- input
- key
- user
A: input

Q: To open the ____ dialog box, click the Data tab on the Ribbon, and then click Data Validation in the Data Tools group.
- Data Validation
- Data Entry
- Data
- Validation
A: Data Validation

Q: Which of the following is a tab in the Data Validation dialog box?
- Settings
- Input Message
- Error Alert
- All of the above
A: All of the above

Q: You use the ____ tab in the Data Validation dialog box to enter the validation rules for the active cell.
- Active Cell
- Rules
- Settings
- Input Message
A: Settings

Q: One way of reducing the chance of data-entry error is to display a(n) ____ message when a user clicks on the cell.
- value
- input
- key
- user
A: input

Q: A(n) ____ message provides additional information about the type of data allowed for the cell.
- user
- key
- input
- value
A: input

Q: ____ messages appear as ScreenTips next to the active cell.
- Value
- Input
- Key
- User
A: Input

Q: The following are Excel-supported error alert types: ____.
- Stop, Warning, and Alert
- Alert, Warning, and Information
- Security, Warning, and Alert
- Stop, Warning, and Information
A: Stop, Warning, and Information

Q: Excel supports ____ types of error alerts.
- two
- three
- six
- eleven
A: three

Q: The most serious error alert is the ____ alert.
- Warning
- Information
- Security
- Stop
A: Stop

Q: After the Stop alert, the next alert in severity is the ____ alert.
- Information
- Security
- Validation
- Warning
A: Warning

Q: The least severe error alert is the ____ alert.
- Stop
- Security
- Information
- Warning
A: Information

Q: The ____ alert accepts the invalid data but still allows you to cancel the data entry.
- Information
- Stop
- Security
- Warning
A: Information

Q: When you ____ a workbook, you control the ability users have to make changes to the file.
- ensure
- protect
- secure
- seal
A: protect

Q: Every cell in a workbook has a(n) ____ property that determines whether or not changes can be made to that cell.
- ensured
- locked
- security
- changeable
A: locked

Q: Usually, you will want to protect a worksheet but leave some cells ____.
- open
- empty
- clear
- unlocked
A: unlocked

Q: When you protect a sheet, unless you are concerned the users will turn off protection and make changes to formulas, it is probably best not to specify a ____.
- lock
- password
- username
- any of the above
A: password

Q: When you set up worksheet protection, you can allow users to ____.
- insert new rows or columns
- delete rows and columns
- select any cell in the worksheet.
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: Protecting the ____ prohibits users from renaming, deleting, hiding, or inserting worksheets.
- skeleton
- structure
- format
- location
A: structure

Q: Protecting the ____ prohibits users from moving, resizing, closing, or hiding parts of the Excel window.
- structure
- windows
- content
- all of the above
A: windows

Q: When a workbook is protected such that options to modify the worksheet are no longer available, what do the corresponding commands on the shortcut menu look like?
- They are hidden.
- They are in red.
- They are in italics.
- They are grayed out.
A: They are grayed out.

Q: To remove workbook protection, click the Unprotect Workbook button in the ____ group on the Review tab.
- Format
- Changes
- Sheet
- Options
A: Changes

Q: <img width="317" height="270" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Comments like those in the accompanying figure are often used to ____.
- explain the contents of a particular cell
- provide instructions to users
- share ideas and notes from several users collaborating on a project
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: <img width="317" height="270" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00008_res/Excel-Tutorial-08_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To keep a comment like the one in the accompanying figure on the screen, in the Comments group on the ____ tab, click the Show/Hide Comment button.
- Review
- Format
- Options
- Home
A: Review

Q: Most ____ are not harmful and do not affect data in any way.
- viruses
- macro viruses
- Trojan horses
- all of the above
A: macro viruses

Q: The ____ Center is a central location for all the security settings in Office 2007.
- Secure
- Security
- Trust
- Protection
A: Trust

Q: If content is blocked, the ____ located under the Ribbon appears, notifying you that some content was disabled.
- Mini toolbar
- Quick Launch toolbar
- Message Bar
- status bar
A: Message Bar

Q: In Office 2010, you can define a set of locations (file paths) where you can place files you consider trustworthy. This feature is known as ____ Locations.
- Safe
- Secure
- Trusted
- Quarantined
A: Trusted

Q: A(n) ____ certificate is another name for a digital ID.
- analog
- signature
- digital
- secure
A: digital

Q: A digital ____ is like a seal of approval.
- affidavit
- clause
- signature
- salutation
A: signature

Q: For simple macros, it is easier to create a macro using the macro ____.
- recorder
- manager
- explorer
- programmer
A: recorder

Q: To create a macro, you can write one by entering a series of commands in the ____ programming language.
- HTML
- Java
- VBA
- Perl
A: VBA

Q: A macro can be stored in ____.
- the current workbook
- the Personal Macro workbook
- a new workbook
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: The ____ Macro workbook is a hidden workbook opened whenever you start Excel, making its macros available anytime you use Excel.
- Universal
- Personal
- Microsoft
- XP
A: Personal

Q: You can turn off the macro recorder by clicking the Stop Recording button in the Code group on the ____ tab.
- Insert
- Developer
- Layout
- Macro
A: Developer

Q: If a ____ error appears when you run a macro that has worked in the past, some part of the macro code no longer makes sense to Excel.
- syntax
- run-time
- logic
- baseline
A: run-time

Q: The ____ Reference button controls how Excel records the act of selecting a range in the worksheet.
- Absolute
- Relative
- Relational
- Macro
A: Relative

Q: To view the code of a macro, you need to open the Visual Basic ____.
- Manager
- Code Window
- Reader
- Editor
A: Editor

Q: When you find an error in a macro, all of the following are options EXCEPT ____.
- rerecord the macro using the same macro name
- delete the recorded macro, and then record the macro again
- recopy the macro from the macro library
- run the macro one step at a time to locate the problem and then correct it
A: recopy the macro from the macro library

Q: In VBA, macros are called ____ procedures.
- body
- sub
- commented
- modular
A: sub

Q: Each sub procedure in VBA begins with the keyword "Sub" followed by the name of the sub procedure and a set of ____.
- brackets
- braces
- parentheses
- asterisks
A: parentheses

Q: In VBA procedures, the ____ are used if you want to include any arguments in the procedure.
- underscores
- brackets
- braces
- parentheses
A: parentheses

Q: After the comments in VBA code is the ____ of the macro.
- module
- body
- procedure
- command
A: body

Q: Sub procedures are organized into ____.
- modules
- comments
- macros
- logs
A: modules

Q: Excel 2010 enables you to change the Ribbon to fit your work style. Among many other customization features, you can do all of the following EXCEPT ____.
- eliminate the Ribbon
- minimize the Ribbon
- hide tabs or commands
- rename tabs or commands
A: eliminate the Ribbon

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-1<br></b>Joe knows that macros can be helpful to him in his work with Excel spreadsheets, but he also knows they have their hazards, so he comes to you for guidance about what kind of security settings he should put in place, and at what times.<br><br> While he just getting his feet wet with Excel, you suggest to Joe that he might want to begin without having his installation of Excel have any macros run at all. Which of the following options would he select in the Trust Center?
- Disable all macros without notification
- Cancel all macros
- Disable a macro with notification
- Disable all macros except digitally signed macros
A: Disable all macros without notification

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-1<br></b>Joe knows that macros can be helpful to him in his work with Excel spreadsheets, but he also knows they have their hazards, so he comes to you for guidance about what kind of security settings he should put in place, and at what times.<br><br> As Joe gets more comfortable with Excel, he thinks that he might be able to decide whether or not to run a macro on a case-by-case basis. What should his option be in the Trust Center?
- Disable all macros without notification
- Cancel all macros
- Disable a macro with notification
- Disable all macros except digitally signed macros
A: Disable a macro with notification

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-1<br></b>Joe knows that macros can be helpful to him in his work with Excel spreadsheets, but he also knows they have their hazards, so he comes to you for guidance about what kind of security settings he should put in place, and at what times.<br><br> As Joe does more even work in Excel, Joe has begun to develop a collection of publishers whom he trusts to deliver macros that are problem-free. What should his option be in the Trust Center?
- Enable all trusted macros
- Enable all macros
- Disable all macros except digitally signed macros
- Disable a macro with notification
A: Disable all macros except digitally signed macros

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-1<br></b>Joe knows that macros can be helpful to him in his work with Excel spreadsheets, but he also knows they have their hazards, so he comes to you for guidance about what kind of security settings he should put in place, and at what times.<br><br> Now it’s a year later and Joe is taking coursework to become a VBA programmer. He is working on developing an application that contains macros. Which should his option be in the Trust Center?
- Enable all trusted macros
- Enable all macros
- Disable all macros except digitally signed macros
- Disable a macro with notification
A: Enable all macros

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-2<br></b>Renee has just completed some coursework in Excel application writing and wants to begin developing her own macros to share more widely. She knows that she has to learn more about digital signatures in order to make her plan a reality.<br><br> What is the best phrase to describe a digital signature?
- a merit badge
- an indication of value
- an invitation to collaborate
- a seal of approval
A: a seal of approval

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-2<br></b>Renee has just completed some coursework in Excel application writing and wants to begin developing her own macros to share more widely. She knows that she has to learn more about digital signatures in order to make her plan a reality.<br><br> Which of the following is a true statement about digital signatures?
- Adding a digital signature is the first step before you distribute a file.
- A digital signature is often used to identify the author of a workbook that contains macros.
- Before you can add a digital ID to a workbook, you need to obtain a digital signature.
- Digital certificates are usually issued by Microsoft.
A: A digital signature is often used to identify the author of a workbook that contains macros.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-2<br></b>Renee has just completed some coursework in Excel application writing and wants to begin developing her own macros to share more widely. She knows that she has to learn more about digital signatures in order to make her plan a reality.<br><br> By digitally signing a workbook that contains a macro that she intends to publicly distribute, Renee assures her audience ____.
- of the identity of the creator of the macro
- that the macro has not been altered since the digital signature was created
- that the macro will perform as expected
- both a. and b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-2<br></b>Renee has just completed some coursework in Excel application writing and wants to begin developing her own macros to share more widely. She knows that she has to learn more about digital signatures in order to make her plan a reality.<br><br> Which of the following can Renee NOT tell when she opens a digitally signed file?
- who the author is
- whether the information in the file is authentic
- whether the macros in the workbook are safe to run
- whether the macro will perform as expected
A: whether the macro will perform as expected

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-3<br></b>Javier tells you that your work in Excel will go a lot faster if you start using defined names instead of cell and range addresses. You believe him but you have been frustrated by defined names in the past because you did not know the rules for naming them and you have run into errors as a result. Javier offers to help you.<br><br> Which of the following is true statement Javier can make about defined names as he is explaining the rules to you?
- The name can include letters, numbers, periods, and underscores
- To distinguish multiword names, use a hyphen between the words
- Defined names are case sensitive
- All of the above
A: The name can include letters, numbers, periods, and underscores

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 8-3<br></b>Javier tells you that your work in Excel will go a lot faster if you start using defined names instead of cell and range addresses. You believe him but you have been frustrated by defined names in the past because you did not know the rules for naming them and you have run into errors as a result. Javier offers to help you.<br><br> Which of the following is a valid defined name Javier can provide to you?
- .FY2010
- F-Y2010
- FY2010
- FiscalYear2010
A: FiscalYear2010

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a spreadsheet written or tailored to meet the user’s specific needs.
A: Excel application

Q: In addition to referring to cells by their cell references, it is easier to remember where different data is stored by assigning a descriptive ____________________, to each cell or range.
A: name

Q: One way to ensure that correct data is entered into a cell or range is to use the Excel data ____________________ feature.
A: validation

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____________________ option means that the cell will accept any value entered into the cell.
A: Any value

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____________________ option means that the cell will accept only dates.
A: Date

Q: In the Allow list box in the Data Validation dialog box, the ____________________ option means that the cell will accept only times.
A: Time

Q: Input messages appear as ____________________ next to the active cell.
A: ScreenTips

Q: The ____________________ alert by default rejects the invalid data, but allows you to override the rejection.
A: Warning

Q: The ____________________ alert prevents you from storing the data in the cell.
A: Stop

Q: When you ____________________ a workbook, you control the ability users have to make changes to the file.
A: protect

Q: A protected sheet can always be unprotected, but you can also require users to enter a(n) ____________________ before the protection is removed.
A: password

Q: To open the Protect Sheet dialog box, click the Review tab on the Ribbon, and then click the Protect Sheet button in the ____________________ group.
A: Changes

Q: Protecting the ____________________ of a workbook prohibits users from moving, resizing, closing, or hiding parts of the Excel window.
A: windows

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a text box that is attached to a specific cell in a worksheet.
A: comment

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a series of stored commands that can be run whenever you need to perform a task.
A: macro

Q: A macro ____________________ uses a program’s own macro programming language for distribution.
A: virus

Q: You control how Excel handles suspect macros by setting Excel's ____________________.
A: security level

Q: A digital ____________________ is often used to identify the author of a workbook that contains macros.
A: signature

Q: A digital ____________________ is typically issued by a certificate authority.
A: certificate

Q: You can create a(n) ____________________ key that will run a macro directly from the keyboard.
A: shortcut

Q: List three advantages to using defined names instead of cell references.
Feedback: A name is more descriptive than a cell reference, making it easier for you to remember a cell or range’s content. Names can be used in formulas, making it easier for users to understand the calculations being performed. Also, if you move a named cell or range within a worksheet, its name moves with it. Any formulas that contain the name automatically refer to the new location. In a formula, a named cell or range is the same as using the cell or range’s absolute reference, so if you move a formula that includes a defined name, the reference remains pointed to the correct cell or range.

Q: What are the steps for creating a validation rule?
Feedback: In the Data Tools group on the Data tab, click the Data Validation button. Click the Settings tab. Click the Allow arrow, click the type of data allowed in the cell, and then enter the validation criteria for that data. Click the Input Message tab, and then enter a title and text for the input message. Click the Error Alert tab, and then, if necessary, click the Show error alert after invalid data is entered check box to insert a check mark. Select an alert style, and then enter the title and text for the error alert message. Click the OK button.

Q: Describe the four macro security settings.
Feedback: Disable all macros without notification: All macros in all workbooks are disabled and no security alerts about macros are displayed. Use this setting if you do not want macros to run. Disable all macro with notification: All macros in all workbooks are disabled, but security alerts appear when the workbook contains a macro. Use this default setting to choose on a case-by-case basis whether to run a macro. Disable all macros except digitally signed macros: The same as the Disable a macro with notification setting, except any macro signed by a trusted publisher runs if you have already trusted the publisher. Otherwise, security alerts appear when a workbook contains a macro. Enable all macros: All macros in all workbooks run. Use this setting temporarily in such cases as when developing an application that contains macros. This setting is not recommended for regular use

Q: All the logical conditions listed in an AND function must be true for the AND function to return a TRUE value.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If a formula is in a calculated table column, you need to make a change in only one cell and the change will automatically be copied to all the cells in the column.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Whenever you enter a formula into an empty table row, Excel automatically fills the rest of that table row with the formula.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Calculated columns work only in ranges of data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you need to modify the formula in a calculated column, you edit the formula in one cell of the column and then you modify the formulas in that table column.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you need to track information such as the specific age, a best practice is to use calculations to determine this value based on values in the Birth Date field.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A formula that includes a structured reference can be fully qualified or unqualified.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The compare values, the categories for a lookup table, are located in the table’s last column or row.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When the lookup value matches a compare value, the corresponding value from the lookup table is returned to the cell with the lookup formula.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The ORERROR function can determine if a cell contains an error value and then display the message you choose.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Nesting IF functions will allow for three or more outcomes.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Two common categories of formula errors in Excel are syntax errors and logic errors.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="494" height="286" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> According to the dialog box in the accompanying figure, the lookup_value is found in row 2 of the table.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="494" height="286" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> According to the dialog box in the accompanying figure, the HealthPlanRates table contains the data you want to look up.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="494" height="286" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> According to the dialog box in the accompanying figure, the user is not looking for an exact match.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="494" height="286" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Given the dialog box in the accompanying figure, if a value in column L does not match a value in the first column of the HealthPlanRates table, #NULL appears in the cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="494" height="286" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> According to the dialog box in the accompanying figure, the column in the HealthPlanRates lookup table that stores the value to be returned is the first column.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When a lookup table is used with a range of values, the compare values must be sorted in alphabetical order if they are text.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Even if the compare values are not arranged in order, Excel can still retrieve the correct results from a lookup table used with a range of values.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The COUNTAS function counts the number of cells within a range that meet multiple criteria.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The IF function results in <u>two values</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In a fully qualified structured reference, the table name <u>follows</u> the column qualifier.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In an <u>unqualified</u> structured reference, only the column qualifier appears in the reference.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you use a structured reference outside a table or in another worksheet to reference an Excel table or portion of the table, you need to use a fully <u>unqualified</u> reference.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In the DATEDIF function, the first date argument is the <u>latest</u> date.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You <u>cannot</u> nest more than one IF function.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If any logical condition listed in the function is true, the <u>AND</u> function returns a TRUE value.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Duplicate</u> value highlighting helps to verify that columns of data have unique entries.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In most cases, when manually creating a conditional formatting formula, the formula should use <u>absolute</u> references and point to the first row of data in a table.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When manually creating a conditional formatting formula, if the formula references a cell or range outside the table, <u>relative</u> references should be used.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>#VALUE!</u> error value can occur when a cell used by the function was deleted from the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>#REF!</u> error value can occur when you supply a range of values to a function that requires a single value.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: An error value begins with a <u>number sign</u> followed by an error name, which indicates the type of error.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can calculate the number of cells in a range that match criteria you specify using the <u>SUMIF</u> function.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You use the <u>MEANIF</u> function to calculate the average of values in a range that meet criteria you specify.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When Excel automatically fills the rest of a table column with a formula entered into an empty table column, this is referred to as a(n) ____ column.
- concatenated
- calculated
- autofilled
- custom
A: calculated

Q: The ____ function is a logical function that returns a TRUE value if any of the logical conditions are true and a FALSE value if all the logical conditions are FALSE.
- IF
- AND
- OR
- THIS
A: OR

Q: To get the effect of a calculated column in a range of data, you must copy and paste the formula or use the ____ feature.
- Concatenation
- Merged
- AutoFill
- Indexed
A: AutoFill

Q: If you edit a cell in a calculated column so it is no longer consistent with the other formulas in the column, a ____ appears in the upper-left corner of the cell.
- red circle
- blue square
- red square
- green triangle
A: green triangle

Q: After a calculated column contains an inconsistency, any other edits you make to that column are no longer automatically applied to the rest of the cells in that column because Excel does not overwrite ____ values.
- indexed
- marginal
- custom
- filled
A: custom

Q: In many situations, the value you store in a cell depends on certain ____.
- conditions
- indices
- functions
- formulas
A: conditions

Q: To evaluate a condition in Excel, you use the ____ function.
- HAVE
- THIS
- IF
- BUT
A: IF

Q: The ____ function is a logical function that evaluates a condition and then returns one value if the condition is true and another value if the condition is false.
- THIS
- IF
- WHEN
- NOT
A: IF

Q: ____ just above a cell in the header row of an Excel table to select the column data but not the header.
- Click
- Double-click
- Triple-click
- Right-click
A: Click

Q: ____ just above a cell in the header row of an Excel table to select the entire column including the column header.
- Click
- Double-click
- Triple-click
- Right-click
A: Double-click

Q: You could test two or more conditions and determine whether all conditions are true using the ____ function.
- OR
- IF
- AND
- THIS
A: AND

Q: If all of the logical conditions are true, the AND function returns the logical value ____.
- FALSE
- ON
- TRUE
- OFF
A: TRUE

Q: You can include up to ____ logical conditions in the AND function.
- 25
- 50
- 225
- 255
A: 255

Q: The ____ function calculates the difference between two dates and shows the result in months, days, or years.
- nested IF
- CALIF
- DATEDIF
- DATE
A: DATEDIF

Q: With the DATEDIF function, the ____ interval code means months.
- m
- mo
- mon
- mth
A: m

Q: Column ____ provide a description of the data entered in each column.
- keys
- headers
- indices
- seals
A: headers

Q: ____ references make it easier to create formulas that use portions or all of an Excel table because the names or headers are usually simpler to identify than cell addresses.
- Indexed
- Structured
- Key
- Logical
A: Structured

Q: When you want to reference an entire column of data in a table, you create a column ____.
- label
- name
- variable
- qualifier
A: qualifier

Q: If you are not sure of a table’s name, click in the table, click the ____ tab on the Ribbon, and then click the Table Name box in the Properties group.
- Layout
- Format
- Table Tools Design
- Structured References
A: Table Tools Design

Q: When you create a calculated column, you can use ____ references to create the formula.
- indexed
- structured
- key
- logical
A: structured

Q: If you are creating a calculated column or formula within an Excel table, you can use the ____ structured reference in the formula.
- basic
- advanced
- unqualified
- restricted
A: unqualified

Q: Using the VLOOKUP function, when the lookup value matches a(n) ____ value, the corresponding value from the lookup table is returned to the cell with the lookup formula.
- key
- index
- compare
- rating
A: compare

Q: You can ____ IF functions to allow for three or more outcomes.
- loop
- cycle
- nest
- link
A: nest

Q: <img width="437" height="258" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Given the flowchart in the accompanying figure, the Pay Grade of ____ yields a Bonus value of 2500.
- 1
- 2
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: 1

Q: <img width="437" height="258" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Given the flowchart in the accompanying figure, the Pay Grade of ____ yields a Bonus value of 5000.
- 1
- 2
- 3
- 4
A: 2

Q: <img width="437" height="258" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Given the flowchart in the accompanying figure, the Pay Grade of ____ yields a Bonus value of 7500.
- 1
- 2
- 3
- none of the above
A: 3

Q: <img width="437" height="258" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00007_res/Excel-Tutorial-07_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The complete formula that corresponds to the flowchart in the accompanying figure is ____.
- =IF([Pay Grade]=2,2500,IF([Pay Grade]=1,5000,7500))
- =AND([Pay Grade]=2,2500,AND([Pay Grade]=1,5000,7500))
- =IF([Pay Grade]=1,2500,IF([Pay Grade]=2,5000,7500))
- =AND([Pay Grade]=1,2500,AND([Pay Grade]=2,5000,7500))
A: =IF([Pay Grade]=1,2500,IF([Pay Grade]=2,5000,7500))

Q: An alternative to using several nested IF functions is to use a ____ table.
- lookup
- value
- comparison
- rating
A: lookup

Q: When you retrieve a particular value from a lookup table, the ____ value is the value you are trying to find.
- lookup
- compare
- rating
- absolute
A: lookup

Q: Lookup ____ allow you to use tables of data to “look up” values and insert them in another worksheet location.
- functions
- formulas
- equations
- calculations
A: functions

Q: The table that stores the data you want to retrieve is called a lookup table, and it organizes the data you want to retrieve into different ____, such as by product ID.
- tabs
- categories
- cells
- properties
A: categories

Q: Placing cell references to input values rather than constants in formulas makes a worksheet ____.
- more flexible
- easier to update
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: The ____ function searches vertically down the first column of the lookup table.
- VLOOK
- VLOOKUP
- HLOOK
- HLOOKUP
A: VLOOKUP

Q: When using VLOOKUP, the ____argument is optional.
- lookup_value
- table_array
- range_lookup
- col_index
A: range_lookup

Q: Using the VLOOKUP function, an exact match lookup occurs when the value entered must match one of the values in ____ of the lookup table.
- the first column
- any column
- the first row
- any row
A: the first column

Q: Using the VLOOKUP function, an approximate match lookup occurs when the value entered falls within a range of values in ____ of the lookup table.
- the first column
- any column
- the first row
- any row
A: the first column

Q: For the col_index_num value, be sure to enter the number that corresponds to the column’s position rather than its column letter; otherwise, the VLOOKUP formula may return ____.
- #NAME?
- #VALUE!
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: If you see ____ as the result of a VLOOKUP formula, you might have entered a letter for the col_index_num instead of a number.
- #NULL
- #REF?
- #NAME?
- #DIV/0
A: #NAME?

Q: You can use a ____ function to return a value from a table that is based on an approximate match lookup.
- VLOOKUP
- VAVERAGE
- VMATCH
- VAPPROXIMATE
A: VLOOKUP

Q: When a lookup table is used with a range of values, the compare values must be sorted in ____ order if they are text and in low-to-high order if they are numbers.
- alphabetical
- date
- size
- calculated
A: alphabetical

Q: To set up an approximate match lookup table so it works in Excel, the leftmost column in the lookup table must represent the lower end of the range for each category, and the lookup table must be sorted in ____.
- ascending order based on the value in the first column
- descending order based on the value in the first column
- ascending order based on the value in the last column
- descending order based on the value in the last column
A: ascending order based on the value in the first column

Q: ____ lookup tables are commonly used to find a taxpayer’s tax rate in a tax table, find a shipping charge based on the weight of a package in a shipping charges table, or determine a student’s letter grade from a table of grading criteria.
- Range
- Approximate
- Calculated
- Exact match
A: Approximate

Q: Omitting the range_lookup entry makes VLOOKUP a(n) ____ lookup.
- range
- approximate match
- exact match
- calculated
A: range

Q: Error values indicate that some element in a ____ is preventing Excel from returning a calculated value.
- formula
- cell referenced in a formula
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: An error value begins with a(n) ____ followed by an error name that indicates the type of error.
- number sign
- asterisk
- exclamation point
- plus sign
A: number sign

Q: The major difference between HLOOKUP and VLOOKUP functions is the way the lookup tables are ____.
- named
- organized
- saved
- opened
A: organized

Q: The ____ error value means that Excel does not recognize text in the formula or function.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #NAME?

Q: The ____ error value means that, for example, a function name is misspelled.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #NAME?

Q: The ____ error value means that a value is not available to a function or formula.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #N/A

Q: The ____ error value occurs when an invalid value is specified in the LOOKUP function.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #N/A

Q: The ____ error value means that a formula or function requires two cell ranges to intersect but they do not.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #NULL!

Q: The ____ error value means that invalid numbers are used in a formula or function.
- #NAME?
- #N/A
- #NULL!
- #NUM!
A: #NUM!

Q: The Conditional Formatting button provides access to the ____.
- Duplicate Values conditional format
- Manage Rules option
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: You can edit existing conditional formatting rules from the Conditional Formatting ____ dialog box. Click the Edit Rule button and make the appropriate changes.
- Rules Editor
- Rules Manager
- Editor
- Manager
A: Rules Manager

Q: The ____ function calculates the number of cells in a range that match criteria you specify, such as counting the number of company employees located in Austin.
- NUMBERIF
- COUNTIF
- NUMBERAS
- COUNTAS
A: COUNTIF

Q: The ____ function adds the values in a range that match criteria you specify, such as adding the total salary paid to Austin employees.
- ADDIF
- ADDAS
- SUMIF
- SUMAS
A: SUMIF

Q: The ____ function calculates the average of values in a range that match criteria you specify, such as calculating the average salary paid to employees in each city.
- AVERAGEAS
- AVERAGEOR
- AVERAGEAND
- AVERAGEIF
A: AVERAGEIF

Q: ____ formatting changes a cell’s formatting when its contents match a specified condition.
- Theme
- Object
- Conditional
- Optional
A: Optional

Q: To highlight duplicate values, in the Styles group on the ____ tab, click the Conditional Formatting button, point to Highlight Cells Rules, and then click Duplicate Values.
- Home
- Page Layout
- Formulas
- Data
A: Home

Q: Press the ____ keys to move to the top of the table.
- Alt+Home
- Shift+Home
- Ctrl+Home
- Esc+Home
A: Ctrl+Home

Q: To change the duplicate values background fill color, in the ____ group on the Home tab, click the Conditional Formatting button, and then click Manage Rules.
- Format
- Options
- Styles
- Tools
A: Styles

Q: Each time you create a conditional format, you are defining a conditional formatting ____.
- theme
- object
- condition
- rule
A: rule

Q: You can edit existing conditional formatting ____ from the Conditional Formatting Rules Manager dialog box.
- themes
- objects
- tables
- rules
A: rules

Q: In the Styles group on the Home tab, click the Conditional Formatting button, and then click ____ to open the Conditional Formatting Rules Manager dialog box.
- Conditional Formatting Rules Management
- Conditions
- Manage Rules
- Formatting Rules
A: Manage Rules

Q: You can filter a table by color. Display the filter arrows, click a filter arrow, point to Filter by Color, and then click a color to display only cells with that fill or click ____ to display only cells without a fill.
- Without Fill
- No Fill
- Plain
- Solid
A: No Fill

Q: For conditional formatting, a formula must be in the form of a(n) ____ test that results in a true or false value.
- conditional
- hypothetical
- logical
- approximate
A: logical

Q: A formula must start with a(n) ____.
- plus sign
- minus sign
- equal sign
- ampersand
A: equal sign

Q: In the Edit Formatting Rule dialog box, click the ____ button to open the Format Cells dialog box.
- Format Cells
- Options
- Format
- Cell Tools
A: Format

Q: The COUNTIF function is sometimes referred to as a(n) ____ count.
- network
- criterion
- conditional
- basic
A: conditional

Q: You can use ____ to reference cells within an Excel table.
- structured references
- cell and range addresses
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-1<br></b>Evaluate the following formulas and functions.<br><br> Assuming that G2 contains the value PT and M2 contains the value 2, evaluate the formula and tell what value is returned: =AND(G2=“FT”,M2>=1).
- TRUE
- FALSE
- PT
- PT, 2
A: FALSE

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-1<br></b>Evaluate the following formulas and functions.<br><br> Assuming that G2 contains the value FT and M2 contains the value 2, evaluate the formula and tell what value is returned: =AND(G2=“FT”,M2>=1).
- TRUE
- FALSE
- PT
- PT, 2
A: TRUE

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-1<br></b>Evaluate the following formulas and functions.<br><br> The following formula is used to determine Dean’s List status.  Assuming that B1 contains 12 and B2 contains 3.25, then =AND(B1>=12,B2>3.25), then ____.
- the formula indicates that the student is on the Dean’s List
- the formula indicates that the student is NOT on the Dean’s List
- the formula returns a value of 0
- the formula returns an error message
A: the formula indicates that the student is NOT on the Dean’s List

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-1<br></b>Evaluate the following formulas and functions.<br><br> The following formula is used to determine Dean’s List status.  Assuming that B1 contains 15 and B2 contains 3.5, then =AND(B1>=12,B2>3.25), then ____.
- the formula indicates that the student is on the Dean’s List
- the formula indicates that the student is NOT on the Dean’s List
- the formula returns a value of 0
- the formula returns an error message
A: the formula indicates that the student is on the Dean’s List

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-2<br></b>Your boss in the human resources department asks you to write a function that calculates the length of time that employees have been with the firm, using the DATEDIF function. Assume that C2 contains the hire date for a given employee and that cell $AE$2 contains the cut-off date against which to compare the hire date to determine length of service.<br><br> For one service recognition program, you need to calculate the length of service in complete months. What is the correct formula?
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “m”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “month”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “mth”)
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “mon”)
A: =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “m”)

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-2<br></b>Your boss in the human resources department asks you to write a function that calculates the length of time that employees have been with the firm, using the DATEDIF function. Assume that C2 contains the hire date for a given employee and that cell $AE$2 contains the cut-off date against which to compare the hire date to determine length of service.<br><br> For a separate service recognition program, you need to calculate the length of service in complete years. What is the correct formula?
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “yr”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “year”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “yr”)
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “y”)
A: =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “y”)

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-2<br></b>Your boss in the human resources department asks you to write a function that calculates the length of time that employees have been with the firm, using the DATEDIF function. Assume that C2 contains the hire date for a given employee and that cell $AE$2 contains the cut-off date against which to compare the hire date to determine length of service.<br><br> Just on a lark, for a year-end trivia contest, your boss wants you to calculate the length of service in complete days. What is the correct formula?
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “today”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “dy”)
- =DATEDIF($AE$2, C2, “day”)
- =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “d”)
A: =DATEDIF(C2, $AE$2, “d”)

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-3<br></b>You have been using a variety of nested IF functions to calculate costs in your spreadsheet when a colleague stops by and comments on what you have been working on, suggesting that there is an easier approach to use.<br><br> Which of the following is an effective alternative for the use of extensive nested IF functions?
- compare table
- function table
- lookup table
- case table
A: lookup table

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-3<br></b>You have been using a variety of nested IF functions to calculate costs in your spreadsheet when a colleague stops by and comments on what you have been working on, suggesting that there is an easier approach to use.<br><br> You implement the VLOOKUP formula at your colleague’s suggestion, but you get the #VALUE! error as the result of the formula. Which of the following is likely true?
- You might have entered a table name for the table_array value instead of the cell reference of the lookup table.
- You might have indicated that the compare values are a range of values instead of an exact match.
- You might have entered a number for the col_index_num instead of a letter.
- You might have entered a letter for the col_index_num instead of a number.
A: You might have entered a letter for the col_index_num instead of a number.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 7-3<br></b>You have been using a variety of nested IF functions to calculate costs in your spreadsheet when a colleague stops by and comments on what you have been working on, suggesting that there is an easier approach to use.<br><br> If you omit the range_lookup value from a LOOKUP function, which of the following is true?
- The function returns the #NAME? error value.
- Your function can only search the first column of the lookup table.
- It is considered an approximate match.
- It is considered an exact match.
A: It is considered an approximate match.

Q: The ____________________ function is a logical function that returns a TRUE value if all the logical conditions are true and a FALSE value if any or all of the logical conditions are false.
A: AND

Q: When you create a formula that references all or parts of an Excel table, you can replace the specific cell or range address with a(n) ____________________ reference, the actual table name or column header.
A: structured

Q: The ____________________ function calculates the difference between two dates and shows the result in months, days, or years.
A: DATEDIF

Q: A(n) ____________________ function is when one IF function is placed inside another IF function to test an additional condition.
A: nested IF

Q: The ____________________ function is a logical function that returns a TRUE value if any of the logical conditions are true and a FALSE value if the logical conditions are false.
A: OR

Q: A(n) ____________________ table is a table that organizes data you want to retrieve into different categories.
A: lookup

Q: The categories for a lookup table, called ____________________ values, are located in the table’s first column or row.
A: compare

Q: To retrieve a particular value from a lookup table, a(n) ____________________ needs to match the compare values.
A: lookup value

Q: The ____________________ function searches vertically down a lookup table and is used when the compare values are stored in the first column of the lookup table.
A: VLOOKUP

Q: The ____________________ function searches horizontally across a lookup table and is used when the compare values are stored in the first row of the lookup table.
A: HLOOKUP

Q: ____________________ formatting changes a cell’s formatting when its contents match a specified condition.
A: Conditional

Q: A(n) ____________________ specifies the type of condition, the type of formatting when that condition occurs, and the cell or range the formatting is applied to.
A: rule / conditional formatting rule

Q: To filter records by color, click the filter arrow to open the Filter menu, and then click ____________________.
A: Filter by Color

Q: ____________________ values indicate that some element in a formula or a cell referenced in a formula is preventing Excel from returning a calculated value.
A: Error

Q: The ____________________ error value means that the formula or function contains a number divided by 0.
A: #DIV/0

Q: The ____________________ error value means that a cell reference used in a formula or function is no longer valid.
A: #REF!

Q: The ____________________ error value means that the wrong type of argument is used in a function or formula.
A: #VALUE!

Q: The ____________________ error value appears when text is entered in a function that requires a number.
A: #NUM!

Q: The ____________________ function enables you to display a more descriptive message that helps users fix a problem rather than adding confusion, as error values often do.
A: IFERROR

Q: The ____________________ function can determine if a cell contains an error value and displays the message you choose rather than the default error value.
A: IFERROR

Q: What are the guidelines to keep in mind when creating fields in an Excel table?
Feedback: - Create fields that require the least maintenance: For example, fields such as Hire Date and Birth Date require no maintenance because their values do not change, unlike fields such as Age and Years of Service, whose values change each year. If you need to track information such as the specific age or years of service, a best practice is to use calculations to determine these values based on values in the Hire Date and Birth Date fields. - Store the smallest unit of data possible in a field: For example, use three separate fields for City, State, and Zip Code rather than one field. Using separate fields for each unit of data enables you to sort or filter each field. If you want to display data from two or more fields in one column, you can use a formula to reference the City, State, and Zip Code fields. For example, you can use the concatenation operator to combine the city, state, and zip code in one cell. - Apply a text format to fields with numerical text data. For example, formatting fields such as Zip Code and Social Security Number as text ensures that leading zeroes are stored as part of the data. Otherwise, the zip code 02148 is stored as a number and displayed as 2148, which is not the intended result.

Q: Discuss strategies for checking formulas for matching parentheses.
Feedback: A common problem when creating formulas is mismatched parentheses. As you write a formula, you should verify that you enclosed the correct argument, function, or term within the parentheses of the formula you are creating. This is especially important when you develop a complex formula that includes many parentheses, such as a nested IF function. Excel color-codes the parentheses as you build a formula so you can quickly determine whether you have complete pairs of them. You can also verify that the formula includes matching pairs of parentheses by selecting the cell with the formula and then clicking in the formula bar. Press the right arrow key to move the insertion point through the formula one character at a time. When the insertion point moves across one parenthesis, its matching parenthesis is also highlighted briefly. This color coding helps you ensure that all parentheses in a formula are paired (opening and closing parentheses).

Q: Sometimes the built-in conditional formatting rules do not apply the formatting you need.  In these instances, you may be able to create a conditional formatting rule based on a formula that uses a logical expression to describe the condition you want.  Please give an example of when you would use this type of formula, and list two guidelines you must follow when creating this type of formula.
Feedback: Example (Answers may vary): You can create a formula that uses conditional formatting to compare cells in different columns or to highlight an entire row. When you create the formula, keep in mind the following guidelines(Students should include two of these in their answer): - The formula must start with an equal sign. - The formula must be in the form of a logical test that results in a True or False value. - In most cases, the formula should use relative references and point to the first row of data in the table. If the formula references a cell or range outside the table, use an absolute reference. -After you create the formula, enter test values to ensure the conditional formatting works in all situations that you intended.

Q: Using multiple worksheets makes it more difficult for you to group your data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A worksheet cluster is a collection of two or more selected worksheets.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Once you group a collection of worksheets, any changes you make to one worksheet are applied to all sheets in the group.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If a worksheet group includes all the worksheets in a workbook, you can edit only the active worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you delete a value from one cell, the content is also deleted from the same cell in all the worksheets in the group.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Using multiple worksheets with identical layouts enables you to use 3-D references to quickly summarize the data in another worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When the source and destination workbooks are stored in the same folder, you still need to include the location information in the workbook reference that links the two files.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If the destination file is closed when you make a change in the source file, you choose whether to update the link to display the current values when you open the destination file or continue to display the older values from the destination file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The workspace file contains the location and name of the file as well as the actual workbooks and worksheets.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel has some templates that are automatically installed on your hard disk.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you use a template, you can make any changes you want to the workbook without affecting the template file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you create a new workbook from a template, an unnamed copy of the template opens.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A workbook based on a specific template always displays the name of the template followed by the date.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A template can use most Excel features except macros.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To delete the data values, you can also click the Clear button in the Editing group on the Home tab, and then click Clear Contents.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: All template files have the .xlts file extension.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In Backstage view, the New from existing button opens a copy of the selected file, not the selected file.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can save your files directly from Microsoft Office 2010 onto SkyDrive from Worksheet view.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can view, but cannot edit, workbooks in the Excel Web App.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: After you have a Windows Live ID, you can access your SkyDrive and the Office Web Apps.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To select nonadjacent worksheets, you click a sheet tab of one of the worksheets, and then press and hold down the <u>Shift</u> key as you click the sheet tabs of other worksheets you want included in the group.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In order to reference data located in one workbook in another workbook, you have to create a(n) <u>dialog</u> between the two workbooks.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you use the point-and-click method to build formulas with external references, Excel enters all of the required punctuation, <u>except</u> quotation marks.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When the destination file is <u>closed</u>, and the source files are closed, the complete file path is included as part of the external reference formula that appears in the formula bar.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="655" height="260" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The Security Warning shown in the accompanying figure appears in the <u>Security Bar</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, cell A8 contains a <u>hyperlink</u>. 
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> If Excel has not attempted to update the links in a given session, the Edit Links dialog box will show the status of the links as <u>not checked</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>spreadsheet</u> is a workbook with labels, formats, and formulas already built into it with data removed.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Hyperlinks are usually represented by colored words with <u>underlines</u> or images.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To delete a hyperlink, right-click the hyperlink cell and then click Clear <u>Value</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The default template contains the default formatting you start out with in every new workbook, including labels aligned to the <u>right</u> side of a cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Some of the task-specific <u>tasks</u> available from the Office.com site include: Monthly Family Budget, Inventory List, and Time sheets.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel, by default, looks for template files in the <u>Templates</u> folder, which is where custom template files are often stored.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <u>Web</u> apps allow you to create, view, and edit Office files directly from a Web browser as well as share files and collaborate with other users online.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: SkyDrive and Office Web Apps are <u>static</u> Web pages, and might change over time,.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A worksheet ____ is a collection of two or more selected worksheets.
- index
- roster
- group
- cluster
A: group

Q: Like cell ____, a worksheet group can contain adjacent or nonadjacent sheets.
- controls
- groups
- tabs
- ranges
A: ranges

Q: To select adjacent worksheets, you use the ____ key.
- Shift
- Alt
- Ctrl
- F1
A: Shift

Q: To select nonadjacent worksheets, you use the ____ key.
- Alt
- Ctrl
- Esc
- Shift
A: Ctrl

Q: Rather than retyping the same formulas across a series of worksheets, you can enter them all at once by creating a worksheet ____.
- index
- roster
- group
- cluster
A: group

Q: If you cannot see the sheet tab of a worksheet you want to include in a group, use the sheet ____ controls to display it.
- index
- roster
- navigation
- cluster
A: navigation

Q: The ____ caption indicates a worksheet group.
- [Worksheets]
- [Selected Sheets]
- [Group]
- [Workgroup]
A: [Group]

Q: To ungroup worksheets, you can click a sheet ____ of a sheet not in the group.
- index
- panel
- tab
- pane
A: tab

Q: When a worksheet group is selected, the ____ includes text to indicate this.
- title bar
- worksheet bar
- status bar
- formula bar
A: title bar

Q: The active worksheet in a group is indicated by ____ text.
- bold
- italicized
- underlined
- red
A: bold

Q: To remove a worksheet group, you can right-click the sheet tab of a sheet in the group and then click ____ on the shortcut menu.
- Remove Group
- No Group
- Exit Group
- Ungroup Sheets
A: Ungroup Sheets

Q: To move a worksheet or worksheet group to another location in the same workbook, select the worksheets and then drag and drop them by the selected sheet ____.
- tabs
- indices
- keys
- icons
A: tabs

Q: When you reference a cell or range in a different worksheet, the ____ separates the sheet reference from the cell reference.
- ?
- !
- "
- ;
A: !

Q: When you reference cells and ranges in other worksheets, if the worksheet name contains spaces, you must enclose the sheet name in ____.
- braces
- brackets
- parentheses
- single quotation marks
A: single quotation marks

Q: Which of the following formulas is correct, given a sheet named Sales Data?
- (Sales Data)!D10
- [Sales Data]!D10
- 'Sales Data'!D10
- {Sales Data}!D10
A: 'Sales Data'!D10

Q: The general format of a 3-D cell reference is ____.
- CellRange!WorksheetRange
- WorksheetRange!CellRange
- WorkbookRange!CellRange
- CellRange!WorkbookRange
A: WorksheetRange!CellRange

Q: The worksheet range ____ references the worksheets, "Sheet1," "Sheet2," "Sheet3," and "Sheet4."
- Sheet1_Sheet4
- Sheet1-Sheet4
- Sheet1:Sheet4
- Sheet1/Sheet4
A: Sheet1:Sheet4

Q: A(n) ____ cell reference specifies not only the rows and columns of a cell range, but also the names of the worksheets on which the cells appear.
- indexed
- relational
- absolute
- 3-D
A: 3-D

Q: If a sheet range includes more than one sheet, you specify the first and last sheet in the range separated by a ____.
- colon
- semicolon
- comma
- plus sign
A: colon

Q: A link is a connection between two ____ allowing information to be transferred from one to the other.
- cells
- ranges
- columns
- files
A: files

Q: If you need to use data located in one workbook in the other workbook, you have to create a(n) ____ between the two workbooks.
- anchor
- source
- link
- index
A: link

Q: The general form of an external reference is ____, where Path is the path of the workbook file on the computer or network, Workbook Name is the filename of the workbook, and Sheet Range and Cell Range are worksheets and cells in the workbook, respectively.
- (WorkbookName)WorksheetName!CellRange
- [WorkbookName]WorksheetName!CellRange
- [WorkbookName]WorksheetName!CellRange
- /WorkbookName/WorksheetName/CellRange
A: [WorkbookName]WorksheetName!CellRange

Q: If you want to create a cell reference to the B6 on the Summary Info worksheet of the Sales.xls workbook, you would use the following external reference: ____.
- '[Sales.xlsx]Summary Info'/B6
- '(Sales.xlsx)Summary Info'!B6
- '[Sales.xlsx:Summary Info]'!B6
- '[Sales.xlsx]Summary Info'!B6
A: '[Sales.xlsx]Summary Info'!B6

Q: Which of the following is NOT an option for arranging your workbooks?
- tiled
- cascade
- horizontal
- lateral
A: lateral

Q: The ____ arrangement option layers the open workbooks on the screen.
- Cascade
- Horizontal
- Tiled
- Lateral
A: Cascade

Q: A formula can include a reference to another workbook (called an ____ reference), which creates a set of linked workbooks.
- internal
- external
- import
- export
A: external

Q: You can create a(n) ____ reference by deleting the $ from the row reference in the cell reference $B$6.
- mixed
- absolute
- relative
- indexed
A: mixed

Q: Formulas created using the point-and-click method contain ____ references.
- absolute
- mixed
- relative
- relational
A: absolute

Q: If you receive a destination workbook but the source files are not included, click the ____ Link button in the Edit Links dialog box to replace the external references with the existing values.
- Fix
- Break
- Update
- Check
A: Break

Q: If you trust the provider of source files, you can choose to ____ the content, which allows the external reference formulas to function and updates the links in the destination workbook.
- enable
- embed
- concatenate
- consolidate
A: enable

Q: When you save a workbook that contains external reference formulas Excel stores the most recent results of those formulas in the ____ file.
- source
- destination
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: destination

Q: As part of the Excel security system that attempts to protect against ____, links to other workbooks are not updated without your permission.
- user errors
- malicious software
- contaminated hardware
- import glitches
A: malicious software

Q: When two workbooks are ____, it is important that the data in the destination file accurately reflects the contents of the source file.
- linked
- embedded
- concatenated
- consolidated
A: linked

Q: If the destination file is closed when you make a change in the ____ file, you can choose whether to update the link to display the current values when you open the destination file.
- target
- origin
- source
- key
A: source

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Click the button marked ____ in the accompanying figure to fix broken links.
- Break Link
- Update Values
- Check Status
- Change Source
A: Change Source

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Click the button marked ____ in the accompanying figure to replace the link to a source file with the current values for the linked cells.
- Break Link
- Update Values
- Check Status
- Change Source
A: Break Link

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the Edit Links dialog box in the accompanying figure, ____ indicates that links are updated automatically.
- Update Values
- Automatic
- A
- UPD
A: A

Q: <img width="427" height="228" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the Edit Links dialog box in the accompanying figure, ____ indicates that a link has to be updated manually by the user.
- M
- A
- U
- UPD
A: M

Q: The ____ dialog box lists all of the links in the current workbook.
- Show Links
- Edit Links
- Link and Embed
- Paste Special
A: Edit Links

Q: If you break a link, how do you undo the action?
- Press Ctrl+Z
- Use the Undo command on the Edit menu
- Retype the external reference formulas
- Either a. or b.
A: Retype the external reference formulas

Q: In regard to open workbooks, a workspace saves all of the following EXCEPT ____.
- the workbooks themselves
- window sizes
- zoom magnifications
- formats used
A: the workbooks themselves

Q: In the Edit Links dialog box, the ____ option shows whether Excel successfully accessed the link and updated the values from the source document.
- Check
- Links
- Status
- View
A: Status

Q: If Excel successfully accessed the link and updated the values from the source document, the status in the Edit Links dialog box will be ____.
- Done
- Completed
- OK
- Good
A: OK

Q: To manually update the link and see the new data values, click the Update Values button in the Edit Links dialog box.
- Change Source
- Update Values
- Check Status
- Open Source
A: Update Values

Q: In the Edit Links dialog box, Type identifies the type of each ____ file.
- destination
- source
- import
- all of the above
A: source

Q: In the Edit Links dialog box, ____ indicates the file to which the link points.
- Destination
- Source
- Import
- Link
A: Source

Q: Choosing to ____ update values is useful when you want to see the older data values before updating to the new data.
- Automatically
- Manually
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: Manually

Q: The ____ button on the Ribbon is used to create a hyperlink.
- Link
- Hyperlink
- Template
- Create
A: Hyperlink

Q: You can insert a ____ directly in a workbook file.
- Word document
- hyperlink
- PowerPoint presentation
- all of the above
A: hyperlink

Q: ____ are usually represented by colored words with underlines or images.
- Indices
- Hyperlinks
- Templates
- Icons
A: Hyperlinks

Q: When you click a(n) ____, the computer switches to the file or portion of the file that it references.
- index
- hyperlink
- template
- icon
A: hyperlink

Q: <img width="488" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Hyperlinks like the ones created with the dialog box in the accompanying figure can be used to jump to a specific cell or range within ____.
- the active worksheet
- another worksheet
- another workbook
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: <img width="488" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Hyperlinks like the ones created with the dialog box in the accompanying figure can be used to jump to ____.
- sites on the Web
- a Word document
- a PowerPoint presentation
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: <img width="488" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> By default, hyperlinks like those created by the dialog box in the accompanying figure are in ____ font.
- italicized red
- underlined blue
- boldfaced green
- italicized blue
A: underlined blue

Q: <img width="488" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The default ____ for a hyperlink is the folder location and the name of the file to which you will link.
- title
- alt text
- description
- ScreenTip
A: ScreenTip

Q: To delete the hyperlink but keep the text, right-click the hyperlink cell, and then click ____ Hyperlink.
- Delete
- Erase
- Archive
- Remove
A: Remove

Q: The default template has column widths is set to ____ characters.
- 15.23
- 12.44
- 10.85
- 8.43
A: 8.43

Q: The default template has ____ worksheets inserted in the workbook.
- three
- four
- five
- six
A: three

Q: The default template contains the default formatting you start out with in every new workbook, including ____ 11-point font.
- Calibri
- Helvetica
- Geneva
- Times New Roman
A: Calibri

Q: Each time you start Excel, a blank ____ workbook opens.
- Book
- NewBook
- Book1
- Sheet1
A: Book1

Q: A ____ is a blank workbook that you can open with the text, formats, and formulas already built into it.
- boiler
- summary sheet
- template
- range master
A: template

Q: When you start Excel and use the blank workbook that displays, you are actually using a workbook based on a template known as the ___ template.
- default
- master
- index
- standard
A: default

Q: Which of the following is NOT a task-specific template available from the Microsoft Office Online Web site?
- Family Budget
- Inventory List
- Team Roster
- Fax Cover Sheet
A: Fax Cover Sheet

Q: The ____ template in Excel creates an online time card to track employees’ work hours.
- Payroll
- Personnel Statement
- Time Sheet
- Employment Calculator
A: Time Sheet

Q: The default template contains the default formatting you start out with in every new workbook, including the ____ number format.
- Number
- Currency
- Integer
- General
A: General

Q: The default template places the formula results aligned to the ____ of a cell.
- right side
- left side
- top
- bottom
A: right side

Q: To create a template, you simply save an Excel workbook in template format using the ____ dialog command.
- Template
- Save
- Save As
- Convert
A: Save As

Q: All template files have a(n) ____ extension.
- .xlsx
- .xltx
- .xldx
- any of the above
A: .xltx

Q: To delete the data values, you can click the Clear button in the Editing group on the ____ tab, and then click Clear Contents.
- File
- Home
- Review
- View
A: Home

Q: Office Web Apps are a part of Windows ____, which is a collection of services and Web applications that you can use to be more productive.
- Now
- Live
- Essentials
- Web
A: Live

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-1<br></b>Perry is having trouble using linked workbooks, so he consults his colleague Malia for help.<br><br> Perry tells Malia that when he attempts to open a workbook, the Edit Links dialog box appears with the message "This workbook contains one or more links that cannot be updated." Malia suggests several possible causes of this error message. Which of the following is NOT one of the possible causes?
- one of the workbook's source files was renamed
- one of the workbook's source files was moved to a different folder
- one of the workbook's source files was replaced with an updated file of the same name
- the workbook was sent to him without links
A: one of the workbook's source files was replaced with an updated file of the same name

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-1<br></b>Perry is having trouble using linked workbooks, so he consults his colleague Malia for help.<br><br> After Malia has helped Perry to resolve his original problem, Perry asks her about another linked workbook he has received. The source files for this workbook have not been included, but Perry would like to use the workbook with the most recent values from the source files. What should Malia tell him?
- He can open the workbook and click the Continue button in the Edit Links dialog box.
- He can open the workbook and click the Break button in the Edit Links dialog box.
- He can open the workbook and click the Change Source button in the Edit Links dialog box.
- He will not be able to use the workbook until he obtains copies of the source files.
A: He can open the workbook and click the Continue button in the Edit Links dialog box.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-1<br></b>Perry is having trouble using linked workbooks, so he consults his colleague Malia for help.<br><br> Finally, Perry asks Malia what steps (if any) need to be taken to keep a destination file up-to-date if he updates a value in one of the source files. Which of the following statements by Malia would NOT be correct?
- If a destination file is open when a source file is changed, the destination file will be updated automatically.
- Source files cannot be updated unless the corresponding destination file is open.
- In some circumstances, it is possible to choose whether a destination file should reflect changes made to the source files.
- All of the above statements are correct.
A: Source files cannot be updated unless the corresponding destination file is open.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-2<br></b>Telden has discovered the power of creating a workspace that allows her to access a collection of workbooks at the same time.<br><br> In creating the workspace, Telden wants to use a layout in which the workbooks overlap each other with all the title bars visible. Telden opens all of the workbooks, and then she clicks the View tab on the Ribbon and clicks the Arrange All button. What should she do next to obtain the desired layout?
- Click the Tile Horizontally option button
- Click the Tile Vertically option button
- Click the Overlap option button
- Click the Cascade option button
A: Click the Cascade option button

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-2<br></b>Telden has discovered the power of creating a workspace that allows her to access a collection of workbooks at the same time.<br><br> Telden wants to use the workspace she has created on another computer. What steps does she need to take?
- She needs to copy just the workspace file to the other computer.
- She needs to copy just the individual worksheets to the other computer.
- She needs to copy both the workspace file and the individual worksheets to the other computer.
- She cannot copy the workspace; instead, she needs to copy the individual worksheets and recreate the workspace on the other computer.
A: She needs to copy both the workspace file and the individual worksheets to the other computer.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-2<br></b>Telden has discovered the power of creating a workspace that allows her to access a collection of workbooks at the same time.<br><br> Which of the following statements about workspaces is NOT correct?
- A workspace saves the contents of the currently opened workbooks.
- A workspace saves the window sizes of the currently opened workbooks.
- A workspace saves the locations of the currently opened workbooks.
- A workspace saves the magnifications of the currently opened workbooks.
A: A workspace saves the contents of the currently opened workbooks.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-2<br></b>Telden has discovered the power of creating a workspace that allows her to access a collection of workbooks at the same time.<br><br> When Telden goes to save the workspace, what is the required file extension?
- .wxls
- .xlww
- .xlsw
- .xlw
A: .xlw

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-3<br></b>Your friend Connor asks you to help him learn more about using hyperlinks in an Excel workbook file.<br><br> Which of the following statements about hyperlinks in Excel workbooks is NOT correct?
- They are usually represented by colored words with underlines or images.
- They can be used to jump to a specific cell or range within the active worksheet, another worksheet, or another workbook.
- They can be used to jump to other types of files or sites on the Web.
- To use a hyperlink, you can click anywhere in the cell that contains the link, including white space in the cell or any text that flows into an adjacent cell.
A: To use a hyperlink, you can click anywhere in the cell that contains the link, including white space in the cell or any text that flows into an adjacent cell.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-3<br></b>Your friend Connor asks you to help him learn more about using hyperlinks in an Excel workbook file.<br><br> Connor wants to create a hyperlink to a location in his current workbook. He clicks the Hyperlink button in the Links group on the Insert tab. What option should he select from the Link to list?
- Existing File
- Place in This Document
- Create New Document
- E-mail Address
A: Place in This Document

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 6-3<br></b>Your friend Connor asks you to help him learn more about using hyperlinks in an Excel workbook file.<br><br> Connor has heard that ScreenTips can be used in conjunction with hyperlinks. Which of the following statements about ScreenTips is NOT correct?
- They appear whenever you place the pointer over a hyperlink.
- You can specify the contents of a ScreenTip when you create a hyperlink.
- The default ScreenTip for a hyperlink is the message "Active Hyperlink."
- You can change the contents of an existing ScreenTip by editing the hyperlink.
A: The default ScreenTip for a hyperlink is the message "Active Hyperlink."

Q: A(n) ____________________ group is a collection of two or more selected worksheets.
A: worksheet

Q: A 3-D cell ____________________ specifies not only the rows and columns of a cell range, but also the range of worksheet names that the cells appear on.
A: reference

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a connection between two files allowing information to be transferred from one file to the other.
A: link

Q: When two files are linked together, the workbook that contains the information is the ____________________ file.
A: source

Q: When two files are linked together, the ____________________ file receives the information.
A: destination

Q: If both the ____________________ and source files are open, Excel will update the link between them automatically whenever a value in the source file is changed.
A: destination

Q: When the destination file is ____________________, and the source files are closed, the complete file path is included as part of the external reference formula that appears in the formula bar.
A: open

Q: You can use the ____________________ dialog box to break links between workbooks.
A: Edit Links

Q: A(n) ____________________ is an Excel file that saves information about all of the currently opened workbooks.
A: workspace

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a link in a file, such as a workbook, to information within that file or another file.
A: hyperlink

Q: <img width="488" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00006_res/Excel-Tutorial-06_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To open the dialog box in the accompanying figure, click the ____________________ tab on the Ribbon, and then, in the Links group, click the Hyperlink button.
A: Insert

Q: ____________________ appear whenever you place the pointer over a hyperlink.
A: ScreenTips

Q: ____________________ provide additional information about the target of a link.
A: ScreenTips

Q: When you start Excel and see the blank workbook called Book1, you are actually using the ____________________ template.
A: default

Q: When creating and saving a custom template, you may find it helpful to replace variable data values with ____________________, which will help you recognize the cells in which to enter new data.
A: spaces

Q: To use a template that you create, the template file is typically placed in the ____________________ folder.
A: Templates

Q: After you have saved a template, you can access the template from the New tab in ________________ view.
A: Backstage

Q: ________________ refers to data, applications, and even resources that are stored on servers that you access over the Internet rather than on your own computer.
A: Cloud computing

Q: To save files to SkyDrive or use the Office Web Apps, you need a Windows ________________.
A: Live ID

Q: The interface for the Excel Web App is similar to the interface of the full-featured program on your computer; however, only a limited number of ________________ are available.
A: Templates

Q: Provide at least two different examples of when to use a linked workbook.
Feedback: Separate workbooks have the same purpose and structure. For example, you can use related workbooks for different stores, branch offices, or departments with the same products or expenditure types and reporting periods (weekly, monthly, quarterly). A large worksheet has become unwieldy to use. You can break the large worksheet into smaller workbooks for each quarter, division, or product. A summary worksheet consolidates information from different workbook files. The linked workbooks enable you to more quickly and accurately summarize the information, and you know the summary worksheet contains the most current information if the information is later updated. Source workbooks you receive from another person or group are continually updated. With linked workbooks, you can replace an outdated source workbook and the destination workbook with then reflect the latest information without your having to modify the formulas.

Q: What are the steps to inserting a hyperlink and linking to: a file or Web page, a location in the current workbook, a new document, and an e-mail address.
Feedback: Select the text, graphic, or cell in which you want to insert the hyperlink. In the Links group on the Insert tab, click the Hyperlink button. To link to a file or Web page, click Existing File or Web Page in the Link to list, and then select the file or Web page from the Look in box. To link to a location in the current workbook, click Place in This Document in the Link to list, and then select the worksheet, cell, or range in the current workbook. To link to a new document, click Create New Document in the Link to list, and then specify the filename and path of the new document. To link to an e-mail address, click E-mail Address in the Link to list, and then enter the e-mail address of the recipient and a subject line for the e-mail message. Click the OK button.

Q: What is an example of when you would use a template? Name at least 3 benefits of using a workbook template.
Feedback: Example of when you would use a template (answers will vary): A large organization may need to collect the same information from several regions. By creating and distributing a workbook template, each region knows what data to track and where to enter it. The template already includes the formulas, so the results are calculated consistently. Advantages of using templates (answers will vary): - Templates save time and ensure consistency in the design and content of workbooks because all labels, formatting, and formulas are entered once. - Templates ensure accuracy because formulas can be entered and verified once, and then be used with confidence in all workbooks. - Templates standardize the appearance and content of workbooks. - Templates prevent data from being overwritten when an existing workbook is inadvertently saved with new data rather than saved as a new workbook.

Q: The header row must be row 1.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you freeze the top row in a worksheet and press Ctrl+Home, you will return to the cell directly above the frozen row.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can create at most one Excel table in a worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you create a table, if your data does not contain column headers, Excel adds headers with default names.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The simplest and most convenient way to add a record to a table is to enter the data in the first blank row below the last record.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can use a table’s sizing handle to add columns or rows to a table.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To rearrange records in a list, you sort based on the data in one or more of the fields.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Before you complete a sort, you need to decide whether you want to put the list in ascending or descending order.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you delete a record from a table, a dialog box displays to confirm the delete operation.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: An easy way to sort data when there is only one sort field is to use the Sort A to Z or Sort Z to A buttons.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If a column consists of day or month labels, you can sort them in their correct chronological order using one of the predefined custom lists.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you filter your data, all records that do not meet your criteria are temporarily hidden from view.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You click a filter arrow to open the AutoFilter menu for a field.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="492" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Records have been filtered in the list shown in the accompanying figure.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you clear a filter, all filters in the worksheet are cleared.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel can summarize data in a range of data by inserting subtotals.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can format cells in a PivotTable the same way as you do cells in the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The PivotTable Field List enables you to change, or pivot, the view of the data in the PivotTable by dragging the field buttons to different areas in the layout section.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can change the alignment of the column headings for better placement and readability.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To show items hidden in a PivotTable, you click the Show tab and check the check box for the item you want to show.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Each column represents a <u>record</u> that describes some attribute or characteristic of a person, place, or thing.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The row of field names across the top of an Excel list is referred to as the <u>header</u> row.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Table names cannot include <u>underscores</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="536" height="177" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The <u>QuickFix</u> button shown in the accompanying figure enables you to undo table formatting if, for example, you had not intended new data to be part of an existing table.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Ascending</u> order arranges labels alphabetically from A to Z.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The fields you use to order the data in a list are <u>sort</u> fields.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The first sort field in a sort is called the <u>major</u> sort field.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To create a custom list, in the Sort & Filter group on the <u>Home</u> tab, click the Sort button. Click the Order arrow, and then click Custom List.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If a column consists of day or month labels, you can sort them in their correct <u>chronological</u> order using one of the predefined custom lists.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can display or hide filter arrows for an Excel table or a range of data by using the Filter button in the Sort & Filter group on the <u>View</u> tab.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Custom</u> filters enable you to specify various conditions in addition to those that are based on an “equals” criterion.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="374" height="233" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the phrase “is greater than” is the <u>criteria</u> for the first condition. <u> </u>
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="374" height="233" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You can calculate <u>sort</u> statistics (including sum, average, count, maximum, and minimum) on all the columns in an Excel table. 
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>Summary</u> command automatically inserts a subtotal line into the list for each group of data in the list.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When the Subtotals feature "outlines" your worksheet, by default, the <u>highest</u> level is active.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Using Excel, you can ____.
- store data
- retrieve subsets of data
- create reports
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: In Excel, a collection of similar data can be structured in a(n) ____ of rows and columns.
- index
- glossary
- list
- range
A: range

Q: A data ____ table describes the fields you plan to maintain in a table.
- structure
- definition
- map
- linked
A: definition

Q: You should ____ the field names to make it easier to Excel to distinguish between the data in the list and the field names.
- boldface
- change the font of
- use a different color for
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: Press ____ to return to cell A1 in a worksheet.
- Ctrl+Home
- Ctrl+Esc
- F1
- Alt+Esc
A: Ctrl+Home

Q: ____ rows and columns lets you keep headings on the screen as you work with the data in a large worksheet.
- Hiding
- Freezing
- Showing
- Sealing
A: Freezing

Q: A dark, horizontal line appears ____ the column headers to indicate which row is frozen.
- above
- below
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: below

Q: In Excel, a table is a range of related data that is managed independently from the data in other ____ in the worksheet.
- rows and headers
- grids and columns
- rows and columns
- footers and grids
A: rows and columns

Q: When you designate a range as a(n) ____, Excel provides the same operations as are available for a structured range of data.
- table
- catalogue
- index
- roster
A: table

Q: To create a table, click the ____ tab on the Ribbon and then, in the Tables group, click the Table button.
- Design
- Home
- Insert
- View
A: Insert

Q: Excel assigns the name ____ to the first Excel table created in a workbook.
- 1
- 1Table
- NewTable
- Table1
A: Table1

Q: Which of the following is NOT a valid table name?
- New_table
- Table2
- _Newtable
- 2Table
A: 2Table

Q: A table name can include all of the following EXCEPT ____
- numbers
- spaces
- underscores
- letters
A: spaces

Q: <img width="536" height="177" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the icon shown in cell B118 is the ____ button.
- QuickCorrect
- AutoSort
- Quick Filter
- AutoCorrect Options
A: AutoCorrect Options

Q: <img width="536" height="177" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, in row 117, in the last full column shown, there is a small triangle shown in the bottom-right corner of the cell. This triangle indicates ____.
- a frozen cell
- a sizing handle
- an AutoCorrect field
- a sort field
A: a sizing handle

Q: As you type in a cell, ____ displays any existing entry in the column that matches the characters you typed.
- QuickFix
- AutoComplete
- Column Checker
- AutoFill
A: AutoComplete

Q: After Excel displays an existing entry in the column that matches the characters you typed, press the ____ key to accept the entry.
- Shift
- Tab
- Esc
- Alt
A: Tab

Q: You can find fields whose contents match a value exactly by clicking the Options button in the Find & Replace dialog box, and checking the ____ check box.
- Exact match
- Match entire cell contents
- Complete cell
- Precise match to entire cell
A: Match entire cell contents

Q: ____ order arranges labels in reverse alphabetical order, from Z to A.
- Reverse
- Major
- Ascending
- Descending
A: Descending

Q: The fields you use to order your data are called sort ____.
- values
- fields
- tags
- tools
A: fields

Q: You can use up to ____ sort fields in a single sort.
- 12
- 24
- 32
- 64
A: 64

Q: You can access the Sort buttons in the ____ group on the Home tab by clicking the Sort & Filter button and clicking a sort option.
- Filtering
- Formatting
- Editing
- Text
A: Editing

Q: When you have more than one sort field, you should use the Sort ____ to specify the sort criteria.
- menu
- status bar
- wizard
- dialog box
A: dialog box

Q: You can sort by ____.
- cell color
- font color
- cell icon
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: To add a sort field in the Sort dialog box, click the ____ button.
- Add Level
- Add Field
- New Sort Field
- New Level
A: Add Level

Q: To delete a sort field in the Sort dialog box, click the ____ button.
- Remove Level
- Delete Level
- Descend Level
- Delete Field
A: Delete Level

Q: Excel provides ____ predefined custom sort lists.
- three
- four
- six
- seven
A: four

Q: After data is filtered, you can ____ it.
- sort
- chart
- copy
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: After you filter a column, the ____ Filter command becomes available so you can remove the filter and redisplay all the records.
- Remove
- Clear
- Delete
- Archive
A: Clear

Q: You can display or hide filter arrows for an Excel table by using the Filter button in the Sort & Filter group on the ____ tab.
- Category
- View
- Data
- Home
A: Data

Q: <i><img width="179" height="257" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"></i><br><br> In the accompanying figure, "Installation," "Sculpture," and "Textile" are all part of the list of ____ options.
- selection
- filtering
- custom
- query
A: filtering

Q: The ____ condition requires that all of the selected criteria be true for the record to be displayed.
- OR
- NAND
- AND
- IF
A: AND

Q: The ____ condition requires that only one of the selected criteria be true for a record to be displayed.
- NAND
- OR
- AND
- IF
A: OR

Q: Criteria filters allow you to specify relationships other than those that are based on a(n)  "____" the criterion.
- in
- like
- greater than
- equals
A: equals

Q: You use ____ filters to find all objects with a value greater than X or acquired after a certain date.
- custom
- criteria
- index
- pivot
A: criteria

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed to start with the specified text string.
- Origin
- Begins With
- Initial
- Start
A: Begins With

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed to have the specified text string anywhere.
- Has
- Is
- Contains
- Matches
A: Contains

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed not to have the specified text string anywhere.
- Does Not Have
- Is Not
- Does Not Match
- Does Not Contain
A: Does Not Contain

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed to be greater than or equal to and less than or equal to the specified numbers.
- Top 10
- Between
- Aggregate
- Range
A: Between

Q: The ____ filtering option displays the top or bottom 10 (or specified number) items in a list.
- Bottom 10
- Top 10
- Custom
- All
A: Top 10

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed to have the current date.
- Current Date
- This Date
- This
- Today
A: Today

Q: The ____ criteria filter requires the records displayed to be since January 1 of the current year to the current date.
- Year to Date
- Today
- Current
- none of the above
A: Year to Date

Q: With the Last Quarter criteria filter, quarters are defined as, for example, ____.
- April, May, June
- March, April, May
- May, June, July
- March, April, May, June
A: April, May, June

Q: When you click in each cell in the Total row, a(n) ____ appears that you can click to open a list of the most commonly used functions.
- menu
- arrow
- button
- status bar
A: arrow

Q: You can split the worksheet window into ____ separate panes.
- two or four
- four or six
- six or eight
- all of the above
A: two or four

Q: You select the ____ option button in the Custom AutoFilter dialog box if you want to display rows that meet both of two criteria.
- Or
- Both
- And
- Either
A: And

Q: You select the ____ option button in the Custom AutoFilter dialog box if you want to display rows that meet either of two criteria.
- Or
- Both
- And
- Either
A: Or

Q: <img width="374" height="233" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, if you only want to set one criterion for this filter, you’ll ____.
- leave the lower boxes empty
- enter “0” into the lower boxes
- enter “none” into the lower boxes
- access a pull-down menu of options
A: leave the lower boxes empty

Q: <img width="374" height="233" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the 20,000 indicates the price of a piece of artwork. Records with artwork with the following values meet the criteria: ____.
- $19,999
- $20,000
- $20,001
- all of the above
A: $20,001

Q: When you click in each cell in the ____ row, an arrow appears that you can click to open a list of the most commonly used functions.
- Total
- Group
- Function
- Header
A: Total

Q: You can click the More Functions command on the Total arrow button list to open the ____ dialog box and select any available function.
- Display Function
- Insert Function
- Add Function
- New Function
A: Insert Function

Q: The Subtotals command offers summary information such as ____.
- counts
- sums
- averages
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: To calculate subtotal for a table, the first step is to use the ____ button on the Table Tools Design tab.
- Expand for Calculation
- Convert to Range
- Summary
- Function
A: Convert to Range

Q: The three ____ buttons at the top of the outline area allow you to show or hide different levels of detail in the worksheet.
- Expansion
- Outline
- Summary
- Function
A: Outline

Q: In addition to displaying subtotals, the Subtotal feature "____" your worksheet so you can control the level of detail that is displayed.
- headers
- outlines
- shadows
- defines
A: outlines

Q: A PivotTable summarizes data in different categories using functions such as ____.
- SUM
- AVERAGE
- MIN
- Any of the above
A: MIN

Q: One advantage of PivotTables is that you can easily ____ different categories in the PivotTable to provide alternative views of the data.
- rearrange
- hide
- display
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: The PivotTable button is available in the Tables group on the ____ tab.
- Format
- Design
- Home
- Insert
A: Insert

Q: PivotTable data can be a(n) ____.
- an Access database file
- an Excel table in the current workbook
- an Excel range in the current workbook
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: You can create a PivotTable by clicking the Summarize with PivotTable button in the Tools group on the ____ tab.
- Home
- View
- Table Tools Design
- PivotTable
A: Table Tools Design

Q: <img width="494" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar008-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar008-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> On the far right, in the figure above, there is the PivotTable field list.  The items listed there, such as “Artist” and “Title” are ____ in the ArtObjects table.
- columns
- rows
- chart data labels
- field values
A: columns

Q: <img width="494" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar008-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar008-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> On the bottom-right corner of the figure above, there are four squares labeled Report Filter, Column Labels, Row Labels, and Values. These four areas represent the ____ of the PivotTable.
- files
- categories
- segments
- layout
A: layout

Q: <img width="494" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar008-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar008-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To get to the screen shown in the figure above, you would click the Insert tab on the Ribbon, and then, in the ____ group, click the PivotTable button.
- Tables
- PivotTables
- Tools
- Data
A: Tables

Q: <img width="494" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar008-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar008-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The worksheet you are viewing is “Sheet1.” To set the PivotTable in its own sheet all of the following are true EXCEPT:
- In the Create PivotTable dialog box, make sure the Select a table or range option button is selected.
- In the Create PivotTable dialog box, make sure the correct name for the range appears in the Table/Range box.
- Click the New Worksheet option button.
- In the Create PivotTable dialog box, a new worksheet, Sheet1, is inserted to the right of the current worksheet.
A: In the Create PivotTable dialog box, a new worksheet, Sheet1, is inserted to the right of the current worksheet.

Q: In laying out the PivotTable on the worksheet, you can drag the Condition field button from the Row Labels box to the Column Labels box. The PivotTable is rearranged so that the Condition field is a ____ label.
- column
- row
- range
- filter
A: column

Q: By default, the PivotTable report uses the ____ function for numbers in the Values area.
- COUNT
- AVERAGE
- MIN
- SUM
A: SUM

Q: You can point to any style in a gallery to see a ____ of the PivotTable with that style applied.
- Demo
- AutoView
- Live Preview
- Snapshot
A: Live Preview

Q: You can use the ____ tab to change the SUM function to a different summary function, in a PivotTable.
- New Function
- Change Function
- Summarize Values by
- Summary function
A: Summarize Values by

Q: The ____ report layout displays one column for each field and leaves space for column headers.
- Outline
- Design
- Tabular
- Headers
A: Tabular

Q: You cannot change data directly in the PivotTable. Instead, you must edit the Excel table, and then ____, or update, the PivotTable to reflect the updated data.
- reset
- refresh
- renew
- change
A: refresh

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 5-1<br></b>You are tutoring a fellow student who is new to the more advanced features of Excel..<br><br> Your tutee has a lot of familiarity with ranges from an earlier Excel class, but he knows that there is an alternative that will give him access to additional features that he does not have with a cell range. What is that option?
- Convert the range to a table.
- Convert the range to an index.
- Convert the range to a PivotChart.
- The tutee is wrong; the range has any many features as any Excel alternative.
A: Convert the range to a table.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 5-1<br></b>You are tutoring a fellow student who is new to the more advanced features of Excel..<br><br> Which of the following is NOT a feature that is unique to Excel tables (as opposed to structured ranges of data)?
- You can format quickly using a table style.
- You can enter a formula in one table cell that is automatically copied to all other cells in that table column.
- You can add new rows and columns that automatically expand the range.
- You can freeze the top row of the worksheet.
A: You can freeze the top row of the worksheet.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 5-2<br></b>Simon has just discovered the power of using text filters to control which records display in his worksheet, and he has begun to use them often to find precisely the records he needs. The following questions are based on a staff directory table that includes First Name, Last Name, Office Number, Department Name, and Phone Number.<br><br> If Simon wants to find all of his colleagues named Joseph, Joanne, and Josephine, what should he do?
- Create a text filter using the Begins With operator to display all records that have <i>Jo</i> at the beginning of the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that have <i>Jo</i> at the beginning of the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Begins With operator to display all records that have <i>Jos</i> at the beginning of the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that include <i>Jo</i> in the text value.
A: Create a text filter using the Begins With operator to display all records that have <i>Jo</i> at the beginning of the text value.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 5-2<br></b>Simon has just discovered the power of using text filters to control which records display in his worksheet, and he has begun to use them often to find precisely the records he needs. The following questions are based on a staff directory table that includes First Name, Last Name, Office Number, Department Name, and Phone Number.<br><br> If Simon wants to find all of his colleagues whose last names end in “berg” (such as Goldberg and Steenberg), what should he do?
- Create a text filter using the Ends With operator to display all records that have <i>dberg</i> as the last characters in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that include <i>berg</i> in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Ends With operator to display all records that have <i>berg</i> as the last characters in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that have <i>berg</i> as the last characters in the text value.
A: Create a text filter using the Ends With operator to display all records that have <i>berg</i> as the last characters in the text value.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 5-2<br></b>Simon has just discovered the power of using text filters to control which records display in his worksheet, and he has begun to use them often to find precisely the records he needs. The following questions are based on a staff directory table that includes First Name, Last Name, Office Number, Department Name, and Phone Number.<br><br> To find anyone whose department name is either Transaction Processing, Processing Operations, or Records Processing, what should he do?
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that have <i>Operations </i>anywhere in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Ends With operator to display all records that have <i>Processing</i> as the last characters in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Begins With operator to display all records that have <i>Processing </i>as the first characters in the text value.
- Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that have <i>Processing</i> anywhere in the text value.
A: Create a text filter using the Contains operator to display all records that have <i>Processing</i> anywhere in the text value.

Q: <b>Critical Thinking Case-Based Questions<br><br>Case 5-3<br></b>As she prepares her assignment for her Business Management class, Jamie goes to her friend Charlie for help with PivotTables because he has had a lot of experience with them in his job.<br><br> Which of the following is NOT a true statement Charlie can make to Jamie about PivotTables?
- To remove a field from a PivotTable, you click the field’s check box in the PivotTable Field list.
- You can rename a value label by typing the new text directly in any cell where the value label appears in the PivotTable.
- Removing a field from the PivotTable changes the underlying Excel table.
- All of the above statements are true.
A: Removing a field from the PivotTable changes the underlying Excel table.

Q: <b>Critical Thinking Case-Based Questions<br><br>Case 5-3<br></b>As she prepares her assignment for her Business Management class, Jamie goes to her friend Charlie for help with PivotTables because he has had a lot of experience with them in his job.<br><br> Jamie wants to be able to analyze date data in her PivotTable by month. What must she do with the date field in her PivotTable?
- She must aggregate the data by the date field.
- She must cluster the data by the date field.
- She must sort the data by the date field.
- She must group the data by the date field.
A: She must group the data by the date field.

Q: <b>Critical Thinking Case-Based Questions<br><br>Case 5-3<br></b>As she prepares her assignment for her Business Management class, Jamie goes to her friend Charlie for help with PivotTables because he has had a lot of experience with them in his job.<br><br> If Jamie decides that she wants to work with nonnumeric data in her PivotTable, what function must she use to produce summaries?
- SUM
- AGGREGATE
- TOTAL
- COUNT
A: COUNT

Q: <b>Critical Thinking Case-Based Questions<br><br>Case 5-3<br></b>As she prepares her assignment for her Business Management class, Jamie goes to her friend Charlie for help with PivotTables because he has had a lot of experience with them in his job.<br><br> Jamie wants to be able to use her PivotTable to combine items into groups. Which of the following is NOT true?
- Items that appear as row labels cannot be grouped.
- Items that appear as column labels can be grouped.
- If items are dates, they can be grouped automatically using the Grouping dialog box.
- If items are numbers, they can be grouped manually using the Ctrl key to select items in a group and then choosing Group from the shortcut menu.
A: Items that appear as row labels cannot be grouped.

Q: <b>Critical Thinking Case-Based Questions<br><br>Case 5-3<br></b>As she prepares her assignment for her Business Management class, Jamie goes to her friend Charlie for help with PivotTables because he has had a lot of experience with them in his job.<br><br> Jamie wants to use her PivotTable to show the total value of the cars for a series of car dealerships but she wants to filter the display to show only those dealers whose total stock of cars is greater than $1 million. How would she accomplish this?
- She would develop a PivotTable using the aggregate filter.
- She would develop a PivotTable using the report filter.
- She would develop a PivotTable using the category filter.
- She would develop a PivotTable using the value filter.
A: She would develop a PivotTable using the value filter.

Q: When related fields are grouped together in a row, they form a(n) ____________________, a collection of fields that describes a person, place, or thing.
A: record

Q: Each column in a range represents a(n) ____________________ that describes some attribute or characteristic of a person, place, or thing.
A: field

Q: The top row of a range should contain a(n) ____________________ name.
A: field

Q: Separate the data (including the header row) from other information in the worksheet by at least ________________ blank row and one blank column.
A: one

Q: To freeze a row, select the cell below the row(s) you want to freeze, click the ____________________ button in the Window group and then click Freeze Top Row.
A: Freeze Panes

Q: The second sort field in a sort is called the ____________________ field.
A: secondary sort

Q: Typically, you want to sort by the numbers, text, or dates stored in the cells, which are all ____________________.
A: values

Q: A(n) ____________________ list indicates the sequence in which you want data ordered.
A: custom

Q: The process of hiding certain records and viewing the ones you want is called ____________________ your data.
A: filtering

Q: When you want to see all the data in a filtered table, you can ____________________, or remove, the filters.
A: clear

Q: The ____________________ criteria filter requires that the records displaying begin with the specified text string.
A: Begins With

Q: <img width="374" height="233" align="bottom" alt="nar007-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar007-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The entry 20000 is the ________________ for the first condition.
A: criterion

Q: The ____________________ command automatically inserts a subtotal line into the range for each group of data.
A: Subtotals

Q: A(n) ____________________ is an interactive table that enables you to group and summarize an Excel list into a concise, tabular format for easier reporting and analysis.
A: PivotTable

Q: In PivotTable terminology, the fields that you summarize are known as ____________________ fields.
A: value

Q: In addition to data fields, a PivotTable uses ____________________ fields to groups values such as department, model, year, and vehicle type in an automobile-related sheet, for example.
A: category

Q: <img width="494" height="350" align="bottom" alt="nar008-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00005_res/Excel-Tutorial-05_nar008-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The box that is covering columns A, B, and C in the figure above is the PivotTable ________________ area.
A: report

Q: The benefit of a(n) ____________________ is that it summarizes large amounts of data into a readable format.
A: PivotTable

Q: A(n) ____________________ filter allows you to filter the PivotTable to display summarized data for one or more field items or all field items in the Report Filter area.
A: report

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a graphical representation of the data in a PivotTable.
A: PivotChart

Q: What are the guidelines for creating an effective structured range of data?
Feedback: * Enter field names in the top row of the range. A field name (column header) is a unique label that describes the contents of the data in that column. The row of field names is called the header row. Although the header row often is row 1, it can be any row. * Use short, descriptive field names. Shorter field names are easier to remember and enable more fields to appear in the workbook window at once. * Format field names to distinguish the header row from the data. For example, apply bold, color, and a different font size. * Enter the same kind of data for a field in each record. * Separate the data from other information in the worksheet by at least one blank row and one blank column. The blank row and column enable Excel to accurately determine the range of the data.

Q: What are the steps for sorting data using multiple fields?
Feedback: Click any cell in a table or range. In the Sort & Filters group on the Data tab, click the Sort button to open the Sort dialog box. If the Sort by row exists, modify the primary sort by selections; otherwise, click the Add Level button to insert the Sort by row. Click the Sort by arrow, select the column heading that you want to specify as the primary sort field, click the Sort On arrow to select the type of data, and then click the Order arrow to select the sort order. To sort by a second column, click the Add Level button to add the first Then by row. Click the Sort by arrow, select the column heading that you want to specify as the secondary sort field, click the Sort On arrow to select the type of data, and then click the Order arrow to select the sort order. To sort by additional columns, click the Add Level button and select appropriate Then by, Sort On, and Order values. Click the OK button.

Q: What is a PivotTable? Describe its use in Excel, including the definition of value fields and category fields.
Feedback: A PivotTable is an interactive table that enables you to group and summarize an Excel list into a concise, tabular format for easier reporting and analysis. A PivotTable summarizes data in different categories, using functions such as COUNT, SUM, AVERAGE, MAX, and MIN. To generate a PivotTable report, you need to specify which fields you want to summarize; in PivotTable terminology, these fields are known as data fields. In addition to value fields, a PivotTable uses category fields to group values. Category fields appear in PivotTables as row labels, column labels, and report filters, which allows you to focus on a subset of the PivotTable by displaying one, several, or all items.

Q: Every chart must have a data source.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When selecting a data source for a pie chart, select all rows and columns, including total rows and columns.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: By default, embedded charts display the chart and any text or figures on separate pages.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Charts include individual elements that can be formatted, including the chart area, the chart title, the plot area, data markers, and a legend.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A chart style is similar to a cell style or a table style in that it formats several chart elements at one time.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To change a border color on a chart, click the Color button to open the color palette.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In pie charts with legends, it’s best to make the slice colors as similar as possible.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Although 3-D charts are visually attractive, they can obscure the relationship between the values in the chart by making it difficult to see which slice is larger.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can rotate a 3-D chart along the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In Excel, charts do not remain linked or connected to their data sources if they appear in different worksheets.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: One of Edward Tufte’s most important works is <i>The Visual Display of Quantitative Information </i>in which he laid out several principles for the design of charts and graphics.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When data bars are used with negative values, the date bars originate from the center of the cell with negative bars extending to the left and positive bars extending to the right.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Excel has a built-in format to display four-digit year values, so you do not need to create one.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel allows you to overlay a legend on a chart as a space-saving option.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Sparklines differ from data bars in that the sparklines are always placed in the cells containing the value they represent and each cell represents only a single bar from the bar chart.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Line charts are best suited for representing data that follows some sequential order.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you cannot find the right chart to meet your needs, Excel allows you to create a custom chart based on the built-in chart types.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Embedded charts can be moved and resized.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The lengths of data bars are based on the value of each cell in the selected range.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Chart sheets show both charts and worksheet data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: After you select the <u>data source</u>, Excel determines the series name, series values, and category values based on the data source.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The <u>series name</u> has only one data series.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A <u>color</u> bar is a conditional format that adds a horizontal bar to the background of a cell containing a numeric value.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Pie charts are most effective with <u>ten</u> or fewer slices.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: By default, Excel inserts a chart as an <u>embedded</u> chart.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can quickly change the appearance of the entire chart by selecting a different chart style in the Chart <u>Design</u> gallery.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To <u>explode</u> a pie chart slice, select that slice and then drag it away from the pie.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you create sparklines, clicking any cell in the <u>data</u> range selects all of the sparklines in the group.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To resize the chart, drag a <u>sizing</u> handle, which is a square or dot on the selection box that is used to change the object’s width and height.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The sparkline axis is simply a <u>horizontal</u> line that separates positive values from negative values.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Because of the compactness of sparklines, you can specify only the line color and the <u>line leader</u> color.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To create a set of sparklines, you first select a data <u>range</u> containing the data you want to graph.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In a pie chart, the largest piece of pie represents the data series with the <u>smallest</u> value.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Extreme viewing angles in a 3-D chart may elongate the chart and <u>misrepresent</u> the data.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you want to represent the following data: 20%, 25%, 15%, 17%, and 23%, a <u>pie</u> chart will best highlight the differences among the close in value data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: For which of the following reasons would you choose to use a chart or graph?
- To organize information in columns and rows
- To show trends or relationships across data
- To present data using text only
- To add color to a report
A: To show trends or relationships across data

Q: The ____ is not a component of a data series.
- series name
- series value
- category name
- category value
A: category name

Q: <img width="338" height="481" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, if you were to create a  Fund Assets pie chart using the information in A1:B7, the data source for that chart would be ____.
- A2:A6
- B2:B6
- A1:B5
- A2:B6
A: A2:B6

Q: <img width="338" height="481" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, an example of a ____ name is row 9.
- data series
- series name
- data label
- series label
A: series name

Q: <img width="338" height="481" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The words Information, Services, an Manufacturing shown in Column A are the ____.
- data series
- data source
- series value
- series source
A: data series

Q: The ____ is the only one of the following charts to compare relative values from different categories to the whole.
- pie
- column
- line
- area
A: pie

Q: To work with a title or other individual element of a chart, select the ____ tab.
- Design
- Layout
- Format
- Print
A: Layout

Q: The ____ Chart Tools contextual tabs appear on the Ribbon when you select a chart.
- Insert, Layout, and Design
- Design, Layout, and Format
- Insert, Design, and Format
- Format, Print, and Layout
A: Design, Layout, and Format

Q: The ____ dialog box provides options for moving charts between worksheets and chart sheets.
- Insert New
- Tab
- Move Chart
- Change Chart
A: Move Chart

Q: Placing a chart in a ____ displays only the chart and no worksheet cells.
- new worksheet
- tabbed view
- graph display
- chart sheet
A: chart sheet

Q: Excel supports the following three types of sparklines that does NOT include ____.
- A win/loss sparkline for highlighting positive and negative values
- A column sparkline used for column charts
- A line sparkline for highlighting trends
- a true/false sparkline for helping make decisions
A: a true/false sparkline for helping make decisions

Q: To move or resize an embedded chart, ____.
- select the chart and drag the selection box
- drag the sizing handle on the selection box
- select the chart and press Tab
- both a and b
A: both a and b

Q: <img width="368" height="522" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The columns and pie slices in the charts above are ____.
- data markers
- chart areas
- major tick marks
- minor tick marks
A: data markers

Q: <img width="368" height="522" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the rectangular area to the right of the pie chart (listing Cash, U.S. Stocks, Non-U.S. Stocks, and Bonds) is the ____.
- perspective
- plot area
- legend
- data marker
A: legend

Q: <img width="368" height="522" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, in the column chart, the values along the left side (0.00%, 5.00%, etc.) are ____.
- plot markers
- plot marks
- data markers
- tick marks
A: tick marks

Q: <img width="368" height="522" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the entry 54.94%, shown next to the largest pie slice, is a ____.
- data label
- chart key
- legend
- series value
A: data label

Q: <img width="368" height="522" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the chart title for the pie chart is ____.
- Fund Assets
- Sector Percentages
- 54.94%
- Cash
A: Fund Assets

Q: Depending on the pie chart layout you choose, you can ____.
- hide or display the chart title
- display a chart legend
- add percentages to pie slices
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: To reposition the legend to the left-hand side of a chart, click the Legend button, and then click ____.
- Reposition Legend
- Show Legend at Left
- Move Legend
- Adjust Legend
A: Show Legend at Left

Q: ____ is not an available formatting category for legends.
- Border Color
- Border Styles
- Shadow
- Shading
A: Shading

Q: ____provide descriptive text for the individual data markers, such as pie slices
- Asset labels
- Legend values
- Data labels
- Leader lines
A: Data labels

Q: The Label Position option in the Format Data Labels dialog box includes ____.
- Center
- Inside End
- Outside End
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Since each slice of a pie represents a different value in the series, you ____.
- must format each slice separately
- can format the entire data series
- can format multiple slices at once
- cannot format any single slice
A: must format each slice separately

Q: To move one slice of a pie chart away from the pie creates a(n) ____.
- spontaneous pie chart
- perfect pie chart
- exploded pie chart
- exponential pie chart
A: exploded pie chart

Q: You already created a line chart, but now decide that you want to change this chart to a pie chart. To do this, you click ____ from the Type group in the Chart Tools Design tab.
- Change Chart Type
- New Chart
- Alter Existing Chart
- Modify Chart
A: Change Chart Type

Q: A 90° ____ value exaggerates the 3-D effect, making distant objects appear very small.
- angle
- perspective
- photo
- rotation
A: perspective

Q: You can use the 3-D Format options to add drop shadows, raised or beveled corners, and textured surfaces that give the illusion of ____ reflecting off the chart elements.
- light
- color
- water
- shadows
A: light

Q: If you do not want a chart to reflect new values in the data source, you should ____.
- not create a chart
- change the default settings
- paste the chart as a Picture
- create the chart in Microsoft Word
A: paste the chart as a Picture

Q: To display a large number of categories whose values are close to one another, you should create a ____ chart.
- column
- bar
- pie
- either a. or b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: <img width="517" height="367" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the data markers shown in the cells in the column labeled “Performance,” are ____.
- data lines
- sparklines
- data bars
- spark bars
A: sparklines

Q: <img width="517" height="367" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the data markers shown in the cells in the column labeled “Percentages,” are ____.
- data lines
- sparklines
- data bars
- spark bars
A: data bars

Q: <img width="517" height="367" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The ____, shown in the figure above, include data markers to indicate the high and low points.
- data bars
- sparklines
- lines
- bars
A: sparklines

Q: <img width="517" height="367" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the value axis entries on the  “Fund History” chart, are displayed with the ____ unit.
- tens
- hundreds
- thousands
- millions
A: thousands

Q: A ____ acts like a line on a ruler, making it easier to read a chart’s scale.
- major tick mark
- data marker
- category value
- legend marker
A: major tick mark

Q: One advantage of breaking up a sparkline group is that Excel can display each sparkline based on the ____ values associated with the individual sparkline’s data series.
- minimum
- maximum
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: <img width="328" height="357" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the date formats shown in the “Type:” window are ____.
- built-in formats
- custom formats
- default formats
- archived formats
A: built-in formats

Q: <img width="328" height="357" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the entry “yyyy” shown in the “Format Code:” box is setting up a(n) ____ format to display the four-digit year.
- built-in
- custom
- default
- archived
A: custom

Q: <img width="328" height="357" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The placement of tick marks and axis labels is controlled by the area indicated by Item ____ in the above figure.
- 3
- 4
- 5
- 6
A: 5

Q: In a column chart, you can ____.
- add a gradient fill to columns
- reduce gap width between columns
- modify the appearance of data markers
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Which of the following is not an option for setting units in the Axis Options portion of the Format Axis dialog box?
- Major unit
- Minor unit
- Sub unit
- Base unit
A: Sub unit

Q: In Excel, typing ____ in the Format Code: box would result in that month’s full name being displayed on a chart.
- m
- mm
- mmm
- mmmm
A: mmmm

Q: To display Mar 17, 2008 as a custom format, you would type ____ in the Format Code: box in Excel.
- mm dd, yy
- mmm dd, yy
- mmm dd, yyyy
- mm dd, yyyy
A: mmm dd, yyyy

Q: Which of the following would result in adding the value ‘k’ to the end of each number on a chart’s vertical axis?
- #,##0“k”
- k#,##
- #,##0k
- #,##0-k-
A: #,##0“k”

Q: Which of the following shows the correct order of steps for adding a data series to a chart?
- Select the chart, Click the Add button, Click the Select Data button, Select the range
- Select the chart, Click the Select Data button, Click the Add button, Select the range
- Select the range, Click the Select Data button, Click the Add button, Select the chart
- Select the range, Select the chart, Click the Select Data button, Click the Add button
A: Select the chart, Click the Select Data button, Click the Add button, Select the range

Q: To specify the name of a new data series and its range of data values, use the ____ dialog box.
- Edit Series
- Select Data
- Select Series
- Add Data
A: Edit Series

Q: =‘Trolley Schedule’!$A$2:$C$12 identifies a ____.
- Series data range
- Column chart type
- Chart series source
- Chart data range
A: Chart data range

Q: From the Format Data Series dialog box, you can ____ as a Marker Option.
- select a built-in marker type
- choose a data marker type
- select the size of the data marker
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: On a 3-D chart, the ____ represents the object’s depth.
- x-axis
- y-axis
- z-axis
- none of the above
A: z-axis

Q: If you select a chart’s series and look at the formula bar, the formula being displayed uses the ____ function.
- CHART
- DATA
- RANGE
- SERIES
A: SERIES

Q: Edward Tufte was concerned with what he termed as “chart ____,” in which a proliferation of chart elements—chosen because they look “nice”—confuse and distract the reader.
- espionage
- clutter
- confusion
- junk
A: junk

Q: Edward Tufte said that ____ ink is any part of the chart that does not convey information about the data.
- data
- non-data
- information
- non-information
A: non-data

Q: A column sparkline can be ____.
- inserted anywhere within the workbook
- can represent data from several rows
- can represent data from several columns
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: A chart sheet can contain ____, enabling you to display several charts at once within a single sheet.
- multiple graphics
- only one data set
- only a single chart
- embedded charts
A: embedded charts

Q: Rotation options for a chart allow you to rotate the ____.
- x-axis
- y-axis
- perspective
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Which of the following represents a range of data in Excel?
- A2-B2
- B7, C4
- A1.M4
- C2:F12
A: C2:F12

Q: A(n) ____ chart is similar to a line chart, but uses a fill color to shade areas under the lines.
- bar
- area
- stock
- column
A: area

Q: Which of the following represents the pointer when it is over the resizing handle?
- <img width="24" height="23" align="bottom" alt="mc057-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc057-1.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="30" height="25" align="bottom" alt="mc057-2.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc057-2.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="16" height="19" align="bottom" alt="mc057-3.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc057-3.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="30" height="22" align="bottom" alt="mc057-4.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc057-4.jpg" border="0">
A: <img width="24" height="23" align="bottom" alt="mc057-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc057-1.jpg" border="0">

Q: In Excel charts, the Legend Options dialog box allows you to change all the following except ____.
- Fill
- Border Color
- Shadow
- Font Size
A: Font Size

Q: If you have chosen Outside End, Percentage, and Show Leader Lines, you are setting options in the ____ box.
- Label Options
- Format Legend
- Format Chart Area
- Format Axis
A: Label Options

Q: Because of the visual distortion that can result with 3-D charts, you should ____.
- never use a 3-D chart
- include data labels with all 3-D charts
- use a 3-D chart only for charts with many data series
- format all sections in similar colors
A: include data labels with all 3-D charts

Q: With 3-D rotation, you can change a chart’s ____.
- rotation
- perspective
- depth
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: In the Format Axis dialog box, selecting Fixed 0.10 for the Minor Unit will result in ____.
- minor tick marks appearing at 10% intervals
- major tick marks appearing at 10% intervals
- minor tick marks automatically appearing per the data
- values appearing in reverse order
A: minor tick marks appearing at 10% intervals

Q: To fill a column with a blend of colors in a column chart, you would choose ____ from the Fill options.
- picture fill
- solid fill
- no fill
- gradient fill
A: gradient fill

Q: Which of the following is not an option in the Fill options in the Format Data Series dialog box?
- Preset colors
- Direction
- Angle
- all of the above are options
A: all of the above are options

Q: In Excel, Axis Options allow you to specify ____.
- the axis type
- where the vertical axis crosses
- the axis position
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Which of the following represents the pointer when it is over a blank spot in the chart legend?
- <img width="24" height="23" align="bottom" alt="mc066-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc066-1.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="30" height="25" align="bottom" alt="mc066-2.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc066-2.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="16" height="19" align="bottom" alt="mc066-3.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc066-3.jpg" border="0">
- <img width="30" height="22" align="bottom" alt="mc066-4.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc066-4.jpg" border="0">
A: <img width="16" height="19" align="bottom" alt="mc066-3.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00004_res/Excel-Tutorial-04_mc066-3.jpg" border="0">

Q: To format an individual sparkline, select the sparkline you want to format, and then click the Ungroup button in the Group group on the Sparkline Tools ____ tab.
- Create
- View
- Layout
- Design
A: Design

Q: The first step in creating a combination chart is to ____.
- select a data series in an existing chart that you want to appear as another chart type
- click Change Chart Type in the Chart Tools Design tab
- select the chart type you want
- open a new bland spreadsheet
A: select a data series in an existing chart that you want to appear as another chart type

Q: The ____ is a rectangular area that labels the markers or symbols used in a chart.
- x-axis
- y-axis
- chart area
- legend
A: legend

Q: To add an axis to a sparkline, click the Axis button in the ____ group on the Sparkline Tools Design tab, and then click Show Axis.
- Group
- Tools
- Design
- Chart
A: Group

Q: <b>Critical-Thinking Case Based Questions<br><br>Case 4-1<br></b>Andy has just started a job with the school district. His director has given him the last six months of test results from four local schools. Andy has organized the results as four data series and needs to display the trends in a graphic format.<br><br> Andy’s boss wants him to compare the values in this chart with several different data sets.  Andy should prepare a(n) ____ for his boss.
- Radar chart
- Line graph
- Pie chart
- XY scatter chart
A: Radar chart

Q: <b>Critical-Thinking Case Based Questions<br><br>Case 4-1<br></b>Andy has just started a job with the school district. His director has given him the last six months of test results from four local schools. Andy has organized the results as four data series and needs to display the trends in a graphic format.<br><br> It’s difficult to read the exact scale on some of Andy’s data. Adding ____ would make it easier to read.
- a legend
- major tick marks
- colors
- more numbers
A: major tick marks

Q: <b>Critical-Thinking Case Based Questions<br><br>Case 4-1<br></b>Andy has just started a job with the school district. His director has given him the last six months of test results from four local schools. Andy has organized the results as four data series and needs to display the trends in a graphic format.<br><br> Andy has finished his chart but needs to save some space. What’s the most effective way for Andy to reduce space without losing important data?
- Delete parts of the data
- Delete the legend
- Delete the title
- Overlay the legend in areas without data
A: Overlay the legend in areas without data

Q: <b>Critical-Thinking Case Based Questions<br><br>Case 4-1<br></b>Andy has just started a job with the school district. His director has given him the last six months of test results from four local schools. Andy has organized the results as four data series and needs to display the trends in a graphic format.<br><br> Andy has experimented with a few different types of charts to give his boss options for reporting the test results. In his bar chart, Andy wants to change the chart’s border. To do this, he should select the ____ tab in the Chart Tools.
- Format
- Edit
- Design
- Layout
A: Format

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Since it’s important for Anya to keep percentages of her whole reviewer base in mind, she wants to represent data as parts of a whole. What chart type would you suggest to Anya?
- bar
- column
- scatter
- pie
A: pie

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Since Anya is still reviewing her data, she wants to make sure that her chart reflects any changes she makes in her data source. She should ____.
- paste her chart in as a picture
- do nothing since charts in Excel remain linked to data sources
- manually adjust data in a chart
- create a new chart each time she modifies her data
A: do nothing since charts in Excel remain linked to data sources

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Anya has decided to make her chart a 3-D chart, but her supervisor complained that he cannot see enough of the data. Anya should try to ____.
- raise the viewpoint of the chart by rotating along the y-axis
- raise the viewpoint of the chart by rotating along the x-axis
- spin the chart clockwise
- replace the chart with a bar chart
A: raise the viewpoint of the chart by rotating along the y-axis

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Anya tells you that she is using a 3-D chart for the first time and asks if you have any advice for this chart type. You should tell Anya that it’s especially important to ____ in 3-D charts.
- include data labels
- use bright colors
- use a small font
- detail the legend and title
A: include data labels

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Anya has asked for your advice. A colleague told her to remove the legend from her pie chart, but she doesn’t understand why. What would be a good reason to remove the title?
- Her legend isn’t labeled properly.
- Her legend takes up too much space.
- When using one data series, it can be redundant to use a chart title and legend.
- There is no good reason. You should always have a title and legend.
A: When using one data series, it can be redundant to use a chart title and legend.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 4-2<br></b>Anya has just surveyed 100 reviewers to get their reaction to a new marketing ad campaign she is heading. She has one data series that she wants to represent graphically, and she needs to display her data in a way that keeps the percent of the whole data in mind when viewing.<br><br> Anya needs to call attention to one category above all others. For this purpose, she should use a(n) ____.
- line chart
- exploded pie chart
- scatter chart
- banded chart
A: exploded pie chart

Q: A chart or ____________________ is a visual representation of a set of data.
A: graph

Q: Excel supports ____________________ built-in charts.
A: 73 / seventy three / seventy-three

Q: If you add percentages to a pie chart, the percentages would appear directly on the pie slices ____________________ enough to fit the number, otherwise, percentages will appear next to the slices in the chart area.
A: large

Q: In cases where a label placed outside a pie might appear farther from its slice than is easily readable, a(n) ____________________ might be added to connect the data to its corresponding slices.
A: leader line

Q: The range of values, or ___________________, of an axis is based on the values in the data source.
A: scale

Q: You can add ___________________ to identify smaller intervals between the major tick marks.
A: minor tick marks

Q: To compare values from several categories with a sequential order, such as dates and times occurring at evenly spaced intervals, you would use a(n) ____________________ chart.
A: line

Q: A chart that combines two or more chart types into a single graph is called a(n) ____________________ chart.
A: combination

Q: In general, ____________________ charts should be used only when the number of categories is small and the relative sizes of different data can be easily determined.
A: pie

Q: To plot the results of two data categories collected every month for a year, you should use a(n) ____________________ chart.
A: line

Q: Since scientific data is often plotting two numeric values against one another, it is oftentimes best to represent this data type with a(n) ____________________ chart.
A: XY scatter / X-Y scatter / X Y scatter

Q: To create a combination chart, you select a data series in an existing chart, and then apply a new ___________________ to that series.
A: chart type

Q: You can add visual interest to charts by using 3-D (three ___________________) effects.
A: dimensional

Q: Perspective values range from 0 degrees to ___________________ degrees.
A: 90 / ninety

Q: Each data source is a collection of ____________________, which is a range of values plotted as a single unit on a chart.
A: data series

Q: A(n) ____________________ chart shows patterns or relationships between two or more sets of values, much like an XY chart, except the size of the data marker is determined by a third value.
A: Bubble

Q: To revise the title of a chart rather than replacing it, you can ____________________ the chart title to place the insertion point in the text, and then edit the text as needed.
A: double-click / double click

Q: Increasing the rotation horizontally in a 3-D chart spins the chart ___________________.
A: clockwise

Q: ___________________ identify the main units on the chart axis.
A: Major tick marks

Q: ___________________ extend the tick marks across the plot area.
A: Gridlines / Grid lines

Q: Consider the impact of a poorly designed chart. Explain why it is important to have a well-designed chart, and name at least four tips for creating a good chart.     
Feedback: Answers will vary. Students should cover some of the following major points. A well-designed chart can illuminate facts that might be hidden by viewing only numbers. However, a poorly designed chart can mislead readers, misrepresent data, and make it more difficult to interpret data. To create effective and useful charts: * Keep it simple. Do not clutter a chart with too many graphic elements. * Focus on the message. Design the chart to highlight the points you want to convey to readers. * Limit the number of data series used in the chart. Line charts and column charts should display no more than three or four data series. Pie charts should have no more than six slices. * Use gridlines in moderation. Gridlines should be used to provide only approximate values for the data markers. * Choose colors carefully. Display different data series in contrasting colors to make it easier to distinguish one series from another. * Limit your chart to a few text styles. Use a maximum of two or three different text styles in the same chart.

Q: When selecting a chart, it’s important to choose the right type of chart to represent your data.  If choosing between a pie chart and a line chart, what factors would you evaluate in choosing which chart to use? How would each chart differ in representing your data?
Feedback: Answers will vary. Students should evidence critical thinking by including some of the following points. Pie charts should generally be used only when the number of categories is small and the relative sizes of the different slices can be easily determined. Pie charts compare relative value from different categories to the whole. Values are indicated by the size of the pie slice. Line charts are best for categories that follow a sequential order. However, line charts will distort data that occurs at irregular time intervals, making data appear to have occurred regularly. Line charts also show trends over time. Values are indicated by the height of the line. Pie charts and line charts assume that numbers are plotted against categories.

Q: Explain when it would be appropriate to use a chart sheet and how you would go about creating one in Microsoft Excel.
Feedback: A chart sheet can contain embedded charts, allowing you to display several charts at once within a single sheet. To create a chart sheet, click the sheet tab containing your data and select the range of data you wish to use in the chart. Click the Insert tab on the Ribbon. In the Charts group, select a chart type. In the Location group on the Chart Tools Design tab, click Move Chart. In the Move Chart dialog box, click the New sheet open button, then type the sheet name. The chart sheet with this name that contains the specified chart is inserted in the workbook. Drag the sheet tab to the right of the Documentation sheet tab.

Q: When you enter a formula into a cell, Excel interprets cell references in the formula in relation to the cell’s location.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The Rand( ) function falls under the Statistical category.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Optional arguments are always placed last in the argument list.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: One challenge of nesting functions is to make sure that you include all of the parentheses.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Functions are organized in the Function Library group in the Function tab on the Ribbon.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A mixed reference “locks” one part of the cell reference while the other part can change.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To enter a mixed reference, type $ after either the row or column reference.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Not all functions have arguments.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Functions can be incorporated as part of larger formulas.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: COUNT is a Statistical function.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In the Function Arguments dialog box, required arguments are in bold type.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can open the Insert Function dialog box by clicking the Insert Function button on the Ribbon.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Format Painter button is on the Clipboard group.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Using the AutoFill feature is more efficient than copying and pasting.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In the list of AutoFill Options, the Fill Formatting Only option is the default setting.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: AutoFill can recognize some patterns if you plug in a minimum of at least two values, such as “Monday, Tuesday.”
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can build decision-making capability into a formula through the use of a logical function.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If a formula contains several functions, Excel starts with the outermost function and then moves inward.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Function Library is a group on the Ribbon.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: As you begin to type a function name within a formula into a cell, a list of functions that begin with the letters you typed appears.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: AutoFill, which copies content and formats from a cell or range into an <u>adjacent</u> cell or range.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To copy only the formats or only the formulas, click the <u>Copy</u> Options button and select the appropriate option.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: For more <u>complex</u> patterns, you can use the Fill Series dialog box.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The following mixed reference in the formula, $A5, has a <u>fixed</u> column reference and a relative row reference.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The <u>OR</u> function is a logical function that returns one value if the statement is true and returns a different value if the statement is false.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The statement “A1 >= B1” tests whether the value in cell A1 is <u>lesser</u> than or equal to<i> </i>the value in cell B1.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Logical button is part of the <u>Comparison</u> Library group.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You use an <u>absolute</u> reference when you don’t want a cell reference to change.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: $B$8 is a(n) <u>relative</u> reference to cell B8.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Use <u>relative</u> references when you want to repeat the same formula with different cells.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A mixed <u>formula</u> contains both relative and absolute references.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel allows you to cycle through the different reference types using the <u>F2</u> key.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When the data includes a few extremely large or extremely small values, it might be best to use the <u>median</u> value from the sample.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The <u>mode</u> is most often used with data that has only a few possible values, such as the number of bedrooms in a house.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you copy and paste a formula with <u>mixed</u> reference to a new location, the absolute portion of the cell reference remains fixed and the relative portion shifts.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The ____ category of Excel functions retrieves data from multidimensional databases involving online analytical processing.
- OLAP
- CUBE
- Logical
- Text
A: CUBE

Q: The ____ category of Excel functions retrieves and analyzes data.
- Text
- Database
- Information
- Logical
A: Database

Q: The ____ category of Excel functions returns (true-false) values
- Information
- Statistical
- Logical
- Math & Trig
A: Logical

Q: Which of the following is a Statistical function?
- INT
- RAND
- ROUND
- AVERAGE
A: AVERAGE

Q: Which of the following is a Math & Trig function? ____
- INT
- COUNT
- MIN
- AVERAGE
A: INT

Q: =INT(AVERAGE(A1:A100)) is an example of a(n) ____ function.
- complex
- logical
- absolute
- nested
A: nested

Q: Which of the following is not a function? ____
- AVERAGE
- SUM
- CUBE
- MEDIAN
A: CUBE

Q: After you describe a function in the Insert Function dialog box, click ____.
- Go
- Select
- Insert
- Next
A: Go

Q: Every function has to follow ____.
- a formula
- directions
- syntax
- a format
A: syntax

Q: The numbers, text, or cell references used by the function to return a value are called ____.
- expressions
- arguments
- data
- values
A: arguments

Q: <img width="328" height="466" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the last entry shown in Column N is 7,200.  There is a black “plus sign” on the lower right edge of the cell that is the ____.
- fill handle
- Auto Fill Options button
- formula finder
- function finder
A: fill handle

Q: <img width="328" height="466" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the last entry shown in Column N is 7,200.  There is an icon in the cell underneath the 7,200 which is the ____.
- fill handle
- Auto Fill Options button
- formula finder
- function finder
A: Auto Fill Options button

Q: <img width="340" height="485" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, in order to open the Function Arguments dialog box select a function from the ____.
- Name Manager
- Function Library
- Defined Names
- Home tab
A: Function Library

Q: <img width="340" height="485" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above,  the Insert Function button opens the ____ dialog box from which you can select a function.
- Function Gallery
- Insert Function
- Create Function
- Find Function
A: Insert Function

Q: Which of the following is not a comparison operator? ____
- =
- <=
- <<
- <>
A: <<

Q: In the following formula: =IF(A1="YES", "DONE", "RESTART"), what happens if A1= “NO”?
- The formula returns the text “RESTART”.
- The formula returns the text “DONE”.
- The formula returns the text “NO”.
- The formula returns the text “NO, RESTART”.
A: The formula returns the text “RESTART”.

Q: Which of the following is not a date function? ____
- Year
- Now
- And
- Today
A: And

Q: The PMT function is a(n) ____ function.
- date
- IF
- financial
- Statistical
A: financial

Q: With ____ interest, the borrower always pays more money to the lender the following year.
- principal
- simple
- compound
- maximum
A: compound

Q: The FV function stands for ____.
- function value
- future value
- financial value
- formulated value
A: future value

Q: The amount of money being loaned is known as the ____.
- mortgage
- principal
- loan amount
- proposed principal
A: principal

Q: <img width="395" height="46" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, nper stands for the ____.
- total number of payment periods required to pay off the loan
- total number of payment periods required to pay off the interest
- number of payments per year
- number of interest payments per year
A: total number of payment periods required to pay off the loan

Q: <img width="395" height="46" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, pv stands for the ____.
- payments verified
- principal value of the loan
- present value of the loan
- primary interest rate of the loan
A: present value of the loan

Q: <img width="395" height="46" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, fv and type are ____.
- financial functions
- required arguments
- comparison operators
- optional arguments
A: optional arguments

Q: <img width="395" height="46" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The function being shown in the figure above is the ____ function.
- Interest Payment
- Payment
- Loan
- Principal
A: Payment

Q: <img width="529" height="245" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the Home Loan Calculator uses the ____ function.
- SUM
- MAX
- LOAN
- PMT
A: PMT

Q: <img width="529" height="245" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the monthly payment is expressed as a negative value (because Excel treats it as ____).
- income
- an expense
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: an expense

Q: <img width="529" height="245" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> If you wanted to find the correct function for this worksheet, you would look in the ____ category of functions.
- Financial
- Logical
- Math & Trig
- AutoSum
A: Financial

Q: <img width="529" height="245" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> If you were to see ##### in cell B10, the ____ is too small to view the entire value.
- column width
- row height
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: column width

Q: <img width="529" height="245" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00003_res/Excel-Tutorial-03_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the total number of payments can be found as follows: ____
- =B4*B6
- =B4/B6
- =B6*B4
- =B6/B4
A: =B4*B6

Q: The ____ function returns the maximum value in the range.
- TOP
- FIRST
- MAX
- MOST
A: MAX

Q: One of the great advantages of ____ references is that you can quickly generate row and column totals without having to worry about revising the formulas as you copy them to new locations.
- cell
- relative
- absolute
- formula
A: relative

Q: Absolute references are marked with a ____.
- <
- :
- $
- !
A: $

Q: When you copy a formula that contains an absolute reference to a new location, the reference ____.
- is updated automatically
- does not change
- becomes bold
- has a dotted outline in its cell
A: does not change

Q: Use ____ references when you want different formulas to refer to the same cell.
- mixed
- relative
- absolute
- fixed
A: absolute

Q: One of the most common statistical approaches is to ____ the sample data.
- record
- average
- count
- organize
A: average

Q: Another name for the middle value is the ____ value.
- mode
- center
- median
- relative
A: median

Q: The ____ is most often used with data that has only a few possible values.
- mode
- median
- middle
- sum
A: mode

Q: ____ arguments may provide more control over the returned value.
- Relative
- Required
- Optional
- Absolute
A: Optional

Q: <i>FUNCTION</i>(<i>argument1</i>, <i>argument2</i>, ...) is ____.
- the syntax of writing optional arguments
- an example of a formula
- the general syntax of all functions
- the general syntax of all formulas
A: the general syntax of all functions

Q: Arguments can be ____.
- cell references
- numbers
- text
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: If an optional argument is not included, Excel assumes a(n) ____ value for it.
- default
- generic
- static
- absolute
A: default

Q: Excel functions are organized into ____ categories.
- 8
- 10
- 11
- 13
A: 11

Q: Which of the following is not an Excel function category? ____
- Math & Trig
- Algebra
- Statistical
- Text
A: Algebra

Q: Lookup & Reference is ____.
- Excel 2007’s online Help system
- a group on the Ribbon used to access Excel 2007’s Help system
- an Excel function category
- a reference panel found on the Office Button
A: an Excel function category

Q: The ____ function category retrieves data from multidimensional databases involving online analytical processing or OLAP.
- Database
- Cube
- Text
- Financial
A: Cube

Q: Which function counts how many cells in a range contain numbers, where <i>value1</i>, <i>value2</i>, and so forth are text, numbers, or cell references?
- SUM
- COUNT
- COUNTA
- AUTOSUM
A: COUNT

Q: In “SUM(<i>number1 </i>[, <i>number2</i>, <i>number3</i>, ...])”, number 1, number 2, and number 3 may be numbers or ____.
- letters
- cell references
- symbols
- operators
A: cell references

Q: Which category of Excel functions returns information about the format, location, or contents of worksheet cells? ____
- Location
- Information
- Reference
- Description
A: Information

Q: Functions can be ____.
- incorporated as part of larger formulas
- placed inside another function
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: either a. or b.

Q: In the formula =INT(AVERAGE(A1:A100)), which would occur first? ____
- The average of the values in the range A1:A100 is added to the integer.
- The average of the integer value is calculated.
- The average of the values in the range A1:A100 is calculated.
- The integer portion of the value is extracted.
A: The average of the values in the range A1:A100 is calculated.

Q: When you nest functions, you should have ____.
- the equal sign
- the same number of left and right parentheses
- at least two functions
- the correct number of brackets
A: the same number of left and right parentheses

Q: The Insert Function button is in the ____ group.
- Calculation
- Function Library
- Sort & Filter
- Home
A: Function Library

Q: Optional arguments are in ____ type.
- Bold
- Italic
- Normal
- Red
A: Normal

Q: The Insert Function dialog box has a(n) ____ option.
- search
- formatting
- find and replace
- expand/collapse
A: search

Q: Which function is used to change 3,162.50 to 3,163? ____
- RAND
- ROUND
- DROP
- ROUNDUP
A: ROUND

Q: Most Recently Used is a ____.
- group on the Formula tab on the Ribbon
- category in the Insert Function dialog box
- category in the Function Arguments dialog box
- command on the Office Button menu
A: category in the Insert Function dialog box

Q: The fill handle copies ____.
- content only
- formats only
- content and formats
- formats and cell references
A: content and formats

Q: Using AutoFill is ____ than copying and pasting.
- slower
- faster
- safer
- riskier
A: faster

Q: Blue, Accent1, Light 60% is an example of cell ____.
- size
- formatting
- border color
- height
A: formatting

Q: Another way to copy a formula is to use the Fill button on the ____ group.
- AutoFill
- Editing
- Cells
- Styles
A: Editing

Q: Using the AutoFill Options button, the Fill Without Formatting option copies the ____ but not the formatting.
- functions
- content
- cell references
- left-aligns
A: content

Q: Using AutoFill, what would be the extended series of the initial entry Jan? ___
- uary
- Feb, Mar, Apr
- Kan, Lan, Man, Nan
- Jan1, Jan2, Jan3,
A: Feb, Mar, Apr

Q: For most loan and investment calculations, you need to enter the annual interest rate ____ the number of times the interest is compounded during the year.
- added to
- subtracted from
- multiplied by
- divided by
A: divided by

Q: As you drag the fill handle, you will see ____.
- the AutoFill Options button flashing
- ScreenTips
- the AutoFill Wizard
- accents
A: ScreenTips

Q: A logical function is a function that works with values that are either ____.
- right or wrong
- absolute or relative
- positive or negative
- true or false
A: true or false

Q: >= is a(n) ____ operator.
- absolute
- comparison
- mathematical
- statistical
A: comparison

Q: In the formula =IF(A1=B1, C1, C2), the result will be C2 if ____.
- A is equal to B
- A does not equal B
- A1+B1 is equal to C1
- none of the above
A: A does not equal B

Q: Part of effective formula writing is knowing when to use relative, absolute, and ____ references.
- complex
- simple
- mixed
- matched
A: mixed

Q: ____ references are seldom used other than when creating tables of calculated values such as a multiplication table in which the values of the formula or function can be found in the initial rows and columns of the table.
- Absolute
- Relative
- Mixed
- Matched
A: Mixed

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-1<br></b>Charles is a recent college graduate. He is paying rent for the first time, as well as utility bills, such as cable, electric, and telephone. He also has some hefty school loan payments. Charles has a good paying job and knows that even though he has lots of expenses, it is critical for him to save money each month, too. He decides to create a budget for himself in Excel 2010.<br><br> Charles opens Excel 2010 and enters his monthly income for one year beginning with January. To create a series of months, he types: ____.
- Jan - Dec
- January
- January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December, then presses Enter
- =DATE (Jan-Dec)
A: January

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-1<br></b>Charles is a recent college graduate. He is paying rent for the first time, as well as utility bills, such as cable, electric, and telephone. He also has some hefty school loan payments. Charles has a good paying job and knows that even though he has lots of expenses, it is critical for him to save money each month, too. He decides to create a budget for himself in Excel 2010.<br><br> Charles has entered all of his monthly expenses. He needs to create a formula that will deduct his monthly expenses from his monthly income. Since his monthly income is the same amount each month, he uses a(n)____ to identify the cell containing the income value.
- relative reference
- absolute reference
- mixed reference
- fixed reference
A: absolute reference

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-1<br></b>Charles is a recent college graduate. He is paying rent for the first time, as well as utility bills, such as cable, electric, and telephone. He also has some hefty school loan payments. Charles has a good paying job and knows that even though he has lots of expenses, it is critical for him to save money each month, too. He decides to create a budget for himself in Excel 2010.<br><br> Charles’s cable bill varies from month to month due to special sporting events he purchases. He wants to calculate the total cable expenses for one year. He wants to see all of the arguments associated with the SUM function so he clicks the ____.
- Math & Trig button in the Formula  group, then clicks SUM to open the Function Arguments dialog box
- Math & Trig button in the Function Library group, then clicks SUM to open the Function Arguments dialog box
- AutoSum button in the Function Library group, then clicks SUM to open the Function Arguments dialog box
- Financial button in the Function Library group, then clicks SUM to open the Function Arguments dialog box
A: Math & Trig button in the Function Library group, then clicks SUM to open the Function Arguments dialog box

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-1<br></b>Charles is a recent college graduate. He is paying rent for the first time, as well as utility bills, such as cable, electric, and telephone. He also has some hefty school loan payments. Charles has a good paying job and knows that even though he has lots of expenses, it is critical for him to save money each month, too. He decides to create a budget for himself in Excel 2010.<br><br> Charles wants to find out what his average cable bill is. As he types the letter “A” in order to type the function AVERAGE ____.
- the Insert Function dialog box appears
- a list of functions that begin with the letter A appear
- the Format Painter appears
- a list of operators that begin with the letter A appear
A: a list of functions that begin with the letter A appear

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-1<br></b>Charles is a recent college graduate. He is paying rent for the first time, as well as utility bills, such as cable, electric, and telephone. He also has some hefty school loan payments. Charles has a good paying job and knows that even though he has lots of expenses, it is critical for him to save money each month, too. He decides to create a budget for himself in Excel 2010.<br><br> Charles wants to add color only to those cells with a negative balance. He would accomplish this by using ___ formatting.
- compact
- conditional
- simple
- complex
A: conditional

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-2<br></b>Pamela is getting ready to purchase her first condominium. To get ready for the mortgage process, she gathers her Excel spreadsheets that contain all of her financial information.<br><br> Pamela needs to borrow $30,000 as a down payment for her condominium. This amount will be the ____.
- Maximum
- Principal
- PMT
- Compound principal
A: Principal

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-2<br></b>Pamela is getting ready to purchase her first condominium. To get ready for the mortgage process, she gathers her Excel spreadsheets that contain all of her financial information.<br><br> Pamela has been told by one bank that if approved, she will have to pay a compound interest. This means that ____.
- interest paid is equal to a percentage of principal for each period that the money has been lent
- interest paid is calculated on the principal and any previous interest payments that have been added to that principal
- interest paid is equal to a .05 percent of principal for each period that the money has been lent
- interest paid is calculated on the principal and any late fees that have been added to that principal
A: interest paid is calculated on the principal and any previous interest payments that have been added to that principal

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-2<br></b>Pamela is getting ready to purchase her first condominium. To get ready for the mortgage process, she gathers her Excel spreadsheets that contain all of her financial information.<br><br> Pamela is ready to figure out what her monthly loan payment will be. She uses the PMT function in the ____ category.
- Banking
- Financial
- Math & Trig
- Interest
A: Financial

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-2<br></b>Pamela is getting ready to purchase her first condominium. To get ready for the mortgage process, she gathers her Excel spreadsheets that contain all of her financial information.<br><br> In the Function Arguments dialog box, Pamela enters the number of payments for the ____ argument.
- pv
- nper
- nv
- np
A: nper

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 3-2<br></b>Pamela is getting ready to purchase her first condominium. To get ready for the mortgage process, she gathers her Excel spreadsheets that contain all of her financial information.<br><br> Assuming Pamela is faithful to her monthly payments and her interest rate does not change, she should be able to calculate the ____ of the loan.
- nv
- nper
- fv
- principal
A: fv

Q: Some cell references are called ____________________ references because they are always interpreted in relation to the location of the cell containing the formula.
A: relative

Q: ____________________ is a set of rules which specifies how a function should be written.
A: Syntax

Q: In ___________________ interest, the interest is equal to a percentage of principal for each period that the money has been lent.
A: simple

Q: The ____________________<b> </b>organizes all of the functions by category and allows you to search for functions that perform particular calculations.
A: Insert Function dialog box

Q: A(n) ____________________<b> </b>function<b> </b>is a function that works with values that are either true or false.
A: logical

Q: The ____________________ is the middle value from a sample.
A: median

Q: TODAY is an example of a(n) ____________________ function.
A: date

Q: Another approach is to calculate the most common value in the data, otherwise known as the ____________________.
A: mode

Q: A(n) ____________________ reference contains both relative and absolute references.
A: mixed

Q: Not all functions have arguments, and some functions have ____________________ arguments, which are not required for the function to return a value, but can be included to provide more control over the returned value.
A: optional

Q: ____________________ is an Excel function category that returns information about the format, location, or contents of worksheet cells.
A: Information

Q: Functions can also be ____________________ or placed inside another function.
A: nested

Q: The small black plus sign in the lower-right corner of a selected cell or range is called the ____________________.
A: fill handle

Q: A(n) ____________________ operator<b> </b>is a symbol that indicates the relationship between two values.
A: comparison

Q: ____________________ can also be used to create a series of numbers, dates, or text based on a pattern.
A: AutoFill

Q: The ____________________ function is a logical function that returns one value if the statement is true and returns a different value if the statement is false.
A: IF

Q: For more complex patterns, you can use the ____________________ dialog box instead of the AutoFill feature.
A: Series

Q: ____________________<b> </b>copies content and formats from a cell or range into an adjacent cell or range.
A: AutoFill

Q: The ____________________ dialog box organizes all of the functions by category and allows you to search for functions that perform particular calculations.
A: Insert Function

Q: To insert a function, click the ____________________ tab on the Ribbon.
A: Formulas

Q: Explain what a logical function is and give an example of when you would use one in Excel 2007.
Feedback: A logical function is a function that works with values that are either true or false. In Excel you can use logical functions to compare the contents of two cells or comparison operators to determine if the value in a cell is greater, equal to, or lesser than another value. The IF function is a logical function. The IF function returns one value if the statement is true and returns a different value if the statement is false. One use of a logical function in Excel would be if you wanted to figure out if your employees should receive a yearly bonus. In an Excel spreadsheet you would have columns for each employees monthly sales figures and a cell containing their total sales figure for the year. You could create an IF function that determined if their annual sales exceeded a specific value or not. If “yes”, the employee receives a bonus, if “no”, the employee does not receive a bonus.

Q: Why is it that the TODAY and NOW date functions do not have any arguments?
Feedback: The TODAY and NOW date functions do not have arguments because they both represent the current date and current time. There can be no other values to replace them. The values returned by the TODAY and NOW functions are updated automatically whenever you reopen the workbook or enter a new calculation. If you don’t want the date and time to change, you must enter the date and time value directly in the cell.

Q: What is the relationship between the Function Arguments dialog box and the Insert Function dialog box?
Feedback: The relationship between the Function Arguments dialog box and the Insert Function dialog box is in how and why the two dialog boxes are used. The Insert Function dialog box is used when you wish to look through categories of functions to choose one for your formula and when you are unsure of which one to use at all. Select the cell in which you wish to enter a formula, then click the Insert Function button in the Function Library group. In this dialog box, you can search for a particular function by typing in some related keywords, then clicking Go, or choose from a category list. Once you select a function, you are then brought to the Function Arguments dialog box. This dialog box lists all of the arguments associated with a specific function. You can also access the Function Arguments dialog box by selecting a specific function from any category in the Function Library group on the Formulas tab. Typically, you will bypass the Insert Function dialog box when you already know which function you want to use in your formula.

Q: Formatting changes only the appearance of data - it does not affect the data itself.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: By default, text is black and cells have no background fill color.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can use a picture or image as the background for all the cells in a worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Background images do not print in Excel.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: After you merge a range into a single cell, you cannot realign its content.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can rotate cell contents in Excel so that they appear at any angle or orientation.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When a worksheet is printed, the gridlines that surround the cells are printed by default.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Modifying the number format affects the value stored in the workbook.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If you revise a style in Excel, the appearance of any cell formatted with that style must be updated manually.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Red-green color blindness is the most common, so avoid using red text on a green background or green text on a red background.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you use colors that are not part of a theme, changing the theme will not change those colors.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A table style treats the table as a single object rather than a collection of cells.     
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you insert a new row at the top of the table, the new row becomes the header row and is formatted with the table style.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you add a table style, be sure that all formatting is as you want it because table styles in Excel cannot be formatted once applied.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Conditional formats are dynamic, so a cell’s appearance will change to reflect its current value.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A conditional format can make negative numbers red and positive numbers black.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Excel has only two conditional formats—data bars and highlighting.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Top/Bottom Rules is a form of Conditional Formatting that allows you options to select the bottom 10% of data.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you use conditional formatting to highlight cells in a worksheet, you do not need to include a legend.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: It is not good practice to include descriptive information, such as the company name, logo, and worksheet title on each page of a printout in case a page gets into the wrong hands.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel uses <u>themes</u> to maintain a consistent look within a workbook.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The appearance of text is determined by its <u>type character</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A <u>frame</u> is a line you add along an edge of a cell to improve readability of the data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Font sizes are measured in <u>points</u>, where one is approximately 1/72 of an inch.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A <u>sans serif font</u>, such as Arial, does not include decorative strokes on each character.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In Microsoft Excel, you can open an extended color palette of <u>134 standard colors</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <u>Calculated</u> values too large to fit into the cell are displayed in scientific notation.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Although dates and times in Excel appear as <u>text</u>, they are actually numbers.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To filter data in an Excel table, use <u>filter blocks</u> in the header row.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Table styles have <u>six</u> elements that can be turned on or off.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A <u>conditional format</u> applies formatting only when a cell’s value meets a specified condition.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Applying a table <u>theme</u> also marks the range as an Excel table.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>Banded</u> Columns element formats alternating columns in different colors.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If contents do not fit across the Excel page, change the orientation to <u>Portrait</u> orientation.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A <u>print area</u> can cover an adjacent or nonadjacent range.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: One of the benefits of Live Preview is that ____.
- it lets you see and evaluate different formats as you develop your workbook
- it shows you what a document will look like when printed
- it applies thematic styles to your document
- it allows you to track changes in your document
A: it lets you see and evaluate different formats as you develop your workbook

Q: Typeface is the specific design used for characters and includes ____.
- lettering
- numbering
- punctuation marks and symbols
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: A ____ is not a type of font.
- serif
- sans serif
- theme
- true type
A: true type

Q: When you don’t want to associate a font with a particular design, you use a ____ font.
- theme
- serif
- sans serif
- non-theme
A: non-theme

Q: Italic, bold, bold italic, and underline are examples of ____.
- font themes
- font styles
- graphics
- character settings
A: font styles

Q: <img width="574" height="334" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, an example of a theme font is ____.
- Algerian
- Calibri
- Arial
- Batang
A: Calibri

Q: <img width="574" height="334" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, an example of a non-theme font is ____.
- Algerian
- Calibri
- Arial
- all of the above
A: Algerian

Q: <img width="574" height="334" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the ____ indicates the font is 11pt.
- Font arrow
- Font size arrow
- Font color
- Font graphic
A: Font size arrow

Q: <img width="574" height="334" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, it shows that ____ is the theme font used for headings.
- Algerian
- Batang
- Cambria
- Calibri
A: Cambria

Q: To change the font size one point at a time, in the Font group on the Home tab, click the ____ button.
- Increase Font Size
- Decrease Font Size
- Change Font Size
- either a or b
A: either a or b

Q: ____ theme colors are designated for text and background, ____ colors are used for accents and highlights, and ____ colors are used for hyperlinks.
- Four, two, six
- Two, four, six
- Four, six, two
- Six, four, two
A: Four, six, two

Q: You can create a ____ color by specifying a mixture of red, blue, and green color values.
- standard
- custom
- theme
- automatic
A: custom

Q: To add a ____ to a sheet tab, click the Format button, point to Tab color, and then click a color.
- fill color
- tab setting
- format color
- formatting style
A: fill color

Q: Selecting the Font Color button arrow will display ____.
- 10 theme colors
- a standard color bar
- a ScreenTip displaying the color name
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: The background image does not affect any cell’s ____.
- format
- content
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: both a. and b.

Q: When creating an Excel document, you should avoid using ____ text and background together, since this is the most common form of color blindness.
- red and green
- yellow and blue
- black and white
- red and yellow
A: red and green

Q: By default, numbers appear in the ____ and generally display values exactly as you type them.
- Home tab
- General number format
- General number toolbar
- currency format
A: General number format

Q: Which of the following can you format using the Number group in Excel’s home tab?
- currency formats
- numbers to percentages
- commas as a thousands separator
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Because Excel stores dates and times as ____, you can apply different formats without affecting the date and time value.
- numbers
- text
- both a. and b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: numbers

Q: Dates and times in Excel measure intervals between the specified date and time and ____.
- January 1, 2000 at 12:00pm
- January 1, 2000 at 12:00am
- January 1, 1900 at 12:00am
- January 1, 1900 at 12:00pm
A: January 1, 1900 at 12:00am

Q: In Excel, dates are ____-aligned in the cell by default, regardless of date format.
- right
- left
- center
- not
A: right

Q: As a general rule, you should ____.
- center column titles, left-align text, and right-align numbers
- center column titles, right-align text, and left-align numbers
- right-align column titles, left-align text, and right-align numbers
- left-align column titles, left-align text, and right-align numbers
A: center column titles, left-align text, and right-align numbers

Q: ____ merges each of the rows in the selected range across the columns in the range.
- Merge build
- Merge and Center
- Merge Across
- Merge Cells
A: Merge Across

Q: In Excel, to merge cells A1, B1, C1, D1, and E1, ____ is the correct reference for the merged cell.
- A1!E1!
- A1$E1$
- A1:E1
- A1-E1
A: A1:E1

Q: Options to rotate cells in Excel are available using the ____ button in the Alignment group on the Home tab.
- Format
- Orientation
- Sorter
- Alignment
A: Orientation

Q: You can add a border in Excel ____.
- to enhance readability
- to the top, right, or bottom of a cell
- and specify the thickness
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: All of the following options are available on the Format Cells dialog box except ____.
- number
- font
- border
- size
A: size

Q: In the Format Cells dialog box, the ____ tab allows you to format currency by choosing decimal places, comma separators, and regular number displays.
- Number
- Font
- Alignment
- Protection
A: Number

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the preset button labeled ____ adds lines within the range.
- None
- Outline
- Inside
- none of the above
A: Inside

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the preset button labeled ____ adds a border around the entire cell or range.
- None
- Outline
- Inside
- none of the above
A: Outline

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the preset button labeled ____ removes all borders.
- None
- Outline
- Inside
- none of the above
A: None

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The information shown in the box under the heading “Style:” are ____.
- cell line styles
- data line styles
- heading line styles
- border line styles
A: border line styles

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above the border line color is ____.
- green
- dashed
- outlined
- you cannot tell from the figure
A: green

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, you can view a preview of the border style by looking under the heading “____.”
- Line
- Presets
- Color
- Border
A: Border

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To access the dialog box shown above, you would navigate to the ____ group on the Home tab.
- Styles
- Font
- Edit
- Appearance
A: Font

Q: <img width="420" height="378" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, to implement the changes you made, you would click ____.
- the Cancel button
- the OK button
- either a. or b.
- neither a. nor b.
A: the OK button

Q: The Format Cells dialog box has six tabs that does NOT include: ____.
- Fill
- Protection
- Alignment
- Color
A: Color

Q: When using the Format Painter, double-click the Format Painter button to paste the same format multiple times and click the Format Painter again to ____.
- turn it on
- turn it off
- copy formatting
- paste formatting
A: turn it off

Q: Put the following five steps in the order in which you would perform them to use the Paste Special function: ____.<br>1. Select and copy a range.<br>2. Click the Paste button arrow in the Clipboard group.<br>3. Specify exactly what you want to paste. <br>4. Click Paste Special to open the dialog box.<br>5. Select the range where you want to paste the Clipboard contents.
- 1, 2, 4, 3, 5
- 1, 2, 4, 5, 3
- 1, 5, 2, 4, 3
- 1, 5, 2, 3, 4
A: 1, 5, 2, 4, 3

Q: In the Paste Special dialog box, you can ____
- select to rotate selected range 90 degrees
- paste only formulas
- paste values and formats
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: You can open the Format Cells dialog box by right-clicking a cell or selected range, and then clicking ____ on the shortcut menu.
- Format
- Cells
- Format Cells
- Cells Style
A: Format Cells

Q: ____ use the same file format for their theme files.
- Microsoft Word, Access, and Excel
- Microsoft Word and Excel
- Microsoft Excel and PowerPoint
- Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
A: Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint

Q: You can treat a range of data as a distinct object in a worksheet known as a(n) ____.
- Excel table
- spreadsheet
- data range
- data set
A: Excel table

Q: A(n) ____ specifies formats for elements in an Excel table, such as font color, fill color, and so forth.
- sheet format
- Excel table
- table style
- style guide
A: table style

Q: The most efficient way to format an entire table is to ____.
- select all and format each element
- use a table style
- use the format painter
- format each cell individually
A: use a table style

Q: A table ____ applies alternating row colors to the entire Excel table and adjusts the banded rows effect as needed if you add or delete rows.
- theme
- style
- structure
- band
A: style

Q: Applying a table style marks the range as a table, making available tools designed for analyzing tabular data, including ____.
- the ability to sort data
- transferring data to and from an external file
- filtering data to show only rows that match specified criteria
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: In Excel, the table style ____ inserts a new row at the bottom of the table that adds the column values.
- Header Row
- Total Row
- First Row
- Banded Row
A: Total Row

Q: In Excel, the ____ table style formats alternating columns in different colors.
- Banded Rows
- Banded Columns
- Last Column
- First Column
A: Banded Columns

Q: <img width="555" height="344" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, a filter arrow is ____ of the column title “Month.”
- to the right of
- to the left of
- on top of
- underneath of
A: to the right of

Q: <img width="555" height="344" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The header row in the above figure contains ____.
- Month, RO1, RO2, RO3, etc.
- The Intelligent Path to Fitness
- X310 Monthly Sales Analysis
- ExerComp
A: Month, RO1, RO2, RO3, etc.

Q: <img width="555" height="344" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The data shown in the table above appears in ____.
- banded rows
- banded columns
- alternating rows
- special formatting
A: banded rows

Q: <img width="539" height="384" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, table styles are shown above the following group label: ____.
- Tools
- Table Styles
- Table Style Options
- External Table Data
A: Table Styles

Q: <img width="539" height="384" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00002_res/Excel-Tutorial-02_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, you can see that the following table elements were selected: Header Row and ____.
- Total Row
- Banded Columns
- First Column
- Last Column
A: Last Column

Q: To remove banded rows from an Excel table, first you need to select the ____ tab on the Ribbon.
- Insert
- Home
- Design
- Page
A: Design

Q: All of the following are conditional formats in Excel except ____.
- data bars
- highlighting
- font sets
- icon sets
A: font sets

Q: In Page Layout view, the worksheet is displayed as it will appear on the ____.
- printed page
- screen
- Web page
- all of the above
A: printed page

Q: A ____ is the space between the page content and the edges of the page
- margin
- border
- frame
- ruler
A: margin

Q: One way to ensure that you are using consistent formats is to copy and paste your formats using the Format ____.
- Master
- Gallery
- Palette
- Painter
A: Painter

Q: In conditional formatting, to highlight only cells that contain a specific date, select the rule____.
- A Date Occurring
- Duplicate Values
- Text That Contains
- Between
A: A Date Occurring

Q: Fonts, colors, and cell styles are organized in ____ categories.
- theme and non-theme
- numbers and text
- color and black & white
- form and function
A: theme and non-theme

Q: To view certain columns on a large database, a good option is to ____.
- hide columns without information you need
- delete columns you aren’t viewing
- highlight columns you want to view
- use data bars to find content
A: hide columns without information you need

Q: When preparing to print, you have the option to select ____.
- the position of the report on the page
- the orientation of the page
- to include headers or footers
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Setting the ____ to A1:L10 will print only data in those cells.
- Page Format
- Print Area
- Page Break
- Print Preview
A: Print Area

Q: To avoid splitting a worksheet in awkward places, you can insert a(n) ____ to specify a specific breaking point.
- page break
- manual page break
- print area
- selection
A: manual page break

Q: To set a page break in Excel, ____.
- select the first cell below the row where you want to insert a page break
- select the first cell above the row where you want to insert a page break
- select the row above where you want to insert a page break
- select the row below where you want to insert a page break
A: select the first cell below the row where you want to insert a page break

Q: A ____ indicates a manual page break.
- dashed blue line
- solid blue line
- dashed red line
- solid red line
A: solid blue line

Q: Information that prints on each page, like a company name or logo, may be set as a(n) ____.
- print setup
- copied text
- text header
- print title
A: print title

Q: The code ____ will display the filename of the current workbook.
- &name
- &[File]
- +name
- +[File]
A: &[File]

Q: The header and footer sections include ____.
- a left and right section
- a center section only
- a top and bottom section
- a left, right, and center section
A: a left, right, and center section

Q: <b>Case Based Critical-Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-1<br></b>Karl has been working on a field survey project where he has gathered data from across five cities in the last six months.  Karl has a lot of data to report and needs help organizing his data sheet for an effective presentation.<br><br> Karl has chosen green as the background color for his workbook.  Karl should not use ____ for any of the font or highlight colors.
- red
- white
- black
- any color is fine
A: red

Q: <b>Case Based Critical-Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-1<br></b>Karl has been working on a field survey project where he has gathered data from across five cities in the last six months.  Karl has a lot of data to report and needs help organizing his data sheet for an effective presentation.<br><br> In column C, there are too many numbers after the decimal place.  Karl does not need this level of detail as it is distracting from the data, and you really don’t need more than two numbers after the decimal.  How could Karl make the data appear cleaner?
- reenter all numbers
- decrease column width
- decrease font size
- use Number group to decrease number of digits displayed
A: use Number group to decrease number of digits displayed

Q: <b>Case Based Critical-Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-1<br></b>Karl has been working on a field survey project where he has gathered data from across five cities in the last six months.  Karl has a lot of data to report and needs help organizing his data sheet for an effective presentation.<br><br> Karl cannot increase the width of his worksheet or he will not be able to print it on one sheet.  However, his columns are truncating his content.  What solution could Karl use for making his text visible without losing data?
- abbreviate all text
- reduce the font size to 8 pt
- click Wrap text
- delete one column
A: click Wrap text

Q: <b>Case Based Critical-Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-1<br></b>Karl has been working on a field survey project where he has gathered data from across five cities in the last six months.  Karl has a lot of data to report and needs help organizing his data sheet for an effective presentation.<br><br> Karl would like to center a title across the top of his data.  His data runs across five columns, from column A to column E.  One way he could accomplish this is to ____.
- type the data in A1 and Merge cells A1:A5
- type the data in A1 and Merge cells A1:E1
- type the data in C1
- choose Center from the Format menu
A: type the data in A1 and Merge cells A1:E1

Q: <b>Case Based Critical-Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-1<br></b>Karl has been working on a field survey project where he has gathered data from across five cities in the last six months.  Karl has a lot of data to report and needs help organizing his data sheet for an effective presentation.<br><br> Karl needs to format several cells with 11pt Calibri font with 2 decimals, right-align the text, and format font color to blue.  The most efficient way to accomplish this would be to ____.
- use Format Painter
- format each element using the Toolbar
- select all and use the Formatting dialog box
- apply a table style
A: apply a table style

Q: <b>Case Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-2</b><br>Ajeesh is part of a team creating a number of files with Microsoft Office.  Ajeesh is working with four other team members to create individual files for a joint presentation.  Ajeesh is in charge of the Excel workbook for his team.<br><br> Ajeesh wants his team’s documents to have a common style and appear as a cohesive unit for a large end-of-year presentation.  The easiest way to make all documents appear as a cohesive unit is to ____.
- save the styles and themes as permanent files for other members of his workgroup
- copy and paste styles when each team member opens a new document
- store all the team’s files on a network drive
- use the Save As function when creating new files
A: save the styles and themes as permanent files for other members of his workgroup

Q: <b>Case Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-2</b><br>Ajeesh is part of a team creating a number of files with Microsoft Office.  Ajeesh is working with four other team members to create individual files for a joint presentation.  Ajeesh is in charge of the Excel workbook for his team.<br><br> One of Ajeesh’s colleagues thought it would be best to use a database program for this project. Ajeesh explained that Excel can ____.
- sort data
- transfer data to and from an external file
- filter the data
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: <b>Case Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-2</b><br>Ajeesh is part of a team creating a number of files with Microsoft Office.  Ajeesh is working with four other team members to create individual files for a joint presentation.  Ajeesh is in charge of the Excel workbook for his team.<br><br> Ajeesh wants to format his Excel table so that every other line is light yellow.  He’s seen this done on other reports and believes it will make his data easier to follow across rows.  Ajeesh begins to apply highlighting to every other line by using the Ctrl key to select the odd rows, but worries that adding and deleting rows will ruin the consistency of his format.  What is an alternate solution for Ajeesh?
- Ajeesh should continue with his current formatting
- use banded rows
- Ajeesh should not apply this formatting
- use Format Painter
A: use banded rows

Q: <b>Case Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-2</b><br>Ajeesh is part of a team creating a number of files with Microsoft Office.  Ajeesh is working with four other team members to create individual files for a joint presentation.  Ajeesh is in charge of the Excel workbook for his team.<br><br> Ajeesh wants to print two separate parts of his second spreadsheet - one for the cell range B6:F15 and the other for the full sheet.  Ajeesh’s best option is to ____.
- copy and paste B6:F15 to a separate worksheet
- cut B6:F15 and print in a separate document
- adjust the margins to print the selected range
- set Print Areas for the two selections
A: set Print Areas for the two selections

Q: <b>Case Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 2-2</b><br>Ajeesh is part of a team creating a number of files with Microsoft Office.  Ajeesh is working with four other team members to create individual files for a joint presentation.  Ajeesh is in charge of the Excel workbook for his team.<br><br> Ajeesh has copied his data set to a new spreadsheet where he wants to draw attention to data that received above a 75% approval rating.  To highlight these numbers, Ajeesh could apply ____.
- the Greater Than rule with Conditional Formatting
- the Format Painter
- a bold format to all text
- manual highlighting to each percentage
A: the Greater Than rule with Conditional Formatting

Q: ____________________ is the process of changing a workbook’s appearance by defining the fonts, styles, colors, and decorative features.
A: Formatting

Q: A ____________________ is a collection of formatting that specifies the fonts, colors, and graphical effects used throughout the workbook.     
A: theme

Q: Ten ___________________ colors—dark red, red, orange, yellow, light green, green, light blue, blue, dark blue, and purple—are always available regardless of the workbook’s theme.
A: standard

Q: Times New Roman, a ____________________ font, has extra decorative strokes at the end of each character.
A: serif

Q: ____________________ are the 12 colors that belong to the workbook’s theme.
A: Theme colors

Q: You increase the indentation by roughly one character each time you click the ____________________ button in the Alignment group on the Home tab.     
A: Increase Indent

Q: One way to align text over several columns or rows is to ____________________, or combine, several cells into one cell.
A: merge

Q: The ____________________ tab in the Format Cells dialog box in Excel provides options for locking or hiding cells to prevent other users from modifying their contents.
A: Protection

Q: The ____________________ tab in the Format Cells dialog box in Excel provides options for creating and applying background colors and patterns to cells.
A: Fill

Q: The ____ copies the formatting from one cell or range to another cell or range without duplicating any of the data.
A: Format Painter

Q: A ____________________ is a selection of formatting options using a specific font and color from the current theme.
A: style

Q: To display alternate rows with different fill colors in Excel, use the effect known as ____________________.
A: banded rows

Q: A ____________________ formats the entire table as a single unit.
A: table style

Q: One of the benefits of conditional ____________________ is that it helps you analyze data by highlighting significant trends in data.
A: formatting

Q: To remove conditional formatting in Excel, click ____________________ from the Conditional Formatting button.
A: Clear Rules

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a key that shows each color used in the worksheet and what it means.
A: legend

Q: If a worksheet says 60%, you have used the ____ feature.     
A: Zoom

Q: The region that is sent to the printer from the active sheet is known as the ___________________.
A: print area

Q: A ____________________ is text printed in the bottom margin of each page.
A: footer

Q: A ____________________ is text printed in the top margin of each page.
A: header

Q: Explain why it is important to use proper formatting, citing at least three benefits of a well-formatted workbook.
Feedback: Proper formatting is a balance between too little and too much formatting, both of which can make data hard to understand. A well-formatted workbook helps accentuate important trends and relationships in data. A well-formatted workbook can be (1) be easier to read, (2) establish a sense of professionalism, (3) help draw attention to the points you want to make, and (4) provide continuity between worksheets.

Q: Color allows you to effectively enhance a workbook, but could you ever use too much or “bad” color?  Explain how or when color might detract from a workbook. Give at least four tips for effective color use.
Feedback: Too much color can be just as bad as not enough color. Overuse of color can cause readers’ eyes to wander around the workbook without focusing on a central point. Students should note at least four of the following tips: * Use colors from the same theme. * Use colors to differentiate content types and direct users where to enter data. * Avoid garish color combinations that can annoy the reader or be difficult to read. * Print on color and black-and-white printers to ensure output is readable in both formats. * Understand printer limitations; colors may look good on the monitor but not print well. * Be sensitive to your audience, as 8% of men and .5% of women experience some type of color blindness.

Q: What is conditional formatting and why would you apply it?  Give two examples of conditional formats, and explain a method for applying conditional formatting.
Feedback: Conditional formatting applies formatting only when a cell’s value meets a specified condition. A conditional format could make negative numbers red and positive numbers black. Excel has four conditional formats - data bars, highlighting, color scales, and icon sets. Students should explain one of the following two methods for applying conditional formatting. * Select the range or ranges to which you want to add data bars. * In the Styles group on the Home tab, click the Conditional Formatting button, point to Data Bars, and then click a data bar color. or * Select the range in which you want to highlight cells that match a specified rule. * In the Styles group, click the Conditional Formatting button, point to Highlight Cells Rules or Top/Bottom Rules, and then click the appropriate rule. * Select the appropriate options in the dialog box, and then click the OK button.

Q: Microsoft Excel 2010 stores spreadsheets in files called workbooks.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A spreadsheet is a collection of numbers, not text.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The name of the active workbook appears in the status bar of the Excel window.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Excel workbooks can contain two kinds of sheets.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The formula bar displays the value or formula of the active cell.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can use the Go To dialog box to navigate to a specific worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Scrolling through sheet tabs does not change the active sheet in the workbook window.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The AutoComplete feature automatically completes an entry based on previous entries in a column.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the row headings are the letters along the top of the worksheet window that identify the different rows in the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The figure above shows part of a worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the cell that is shown with the thick border, is called the primary cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, column heading K is orange because the entire row is selected.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the intersection of each row and column is called a cell.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="283" height="401" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Referring to the figure above, the Zoom control is set at 100%.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Charts can be embedded into worksheets.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: If you click the Print Active sheet(s) option button in the Print tab, the entire workbook will be printed.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Text is truncated when the cell that it resides in is not wide enough to display all of it.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Text is right-aligned in cells, like number data.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To create a line break within a cell, press Alt + Enter.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A documentation sheet is a valuable element if you intend to share the workbook with others.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Column width is expressed in terms of the number of characters a column can contain or the size of the column in <u>points</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Autofitting</u> eliminates space by matching the column to the width of its longest cell entry.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you insert a new column, the existing columns are shifted to the <u>left</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A newly inserted row has the same height as the row <u>above</u> it.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <u>Clearing</u> data from a worksheet removes the data and the cells.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A group of cells is called a <u>group reference</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To move a cell, select it, then place the mouse over the <u>bottom</u> border of the cell before dragging it to a new location.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The range reference for nonadjacent ranges separates each adjacent range reference by a <u>colon</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Expressions</u> are used in a formula to combine different values, returning a single value that is then displayed in the cell.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In the formula, =2+6*2, addition would be calculated <u>after</u> multiplication.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <u>Page Layout view</u><b> </b>displays the location of the different page breaks within the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A newly inserted sheet is inserted to the <u>left</u> of the active sheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A(n) <u>nonadjacent</u> range is comprised of two or more distinct adjacent ranges.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In <u>landscape</u> orientation, the page is wider than it is tall.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you work in <u>Edit</u> mode, some keyboard shortcuts will only apply to the text in the selected cell.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Excel is an electronic version of a(n) ____.
- database
- spreadsheet
- expression
- formula
A: spreadsheet

Q: Excel stores its documents as files called ____.
- worksheets
- sheet tabs
- workbooks
- books
A: workbooks

Q: The contents of an active cell are displayed in the ____.
- toolbar
- menu bar
- name box
- formula bar
A: formula bar

Q: A chart can be displayed ____.
- in a worksheet
- in a chart sheet
- in a cell range
- both a and b are correct
A: both a and b are correct

Q: The name given to an Excel workbook before you rename it is ____.
- Document1
- Book1
- Workbook1
- Untitled1
A: Book1

Q: By default, an Excel workbook is made up of ____ worksheets.
- two
- three
- four
- five
A: three

Q: By default, Excel starts with a ____ maximized to fill the Excel window.
- sample workbook with calculations
- sample workbook with formulas
- sample workbook with text, formulas, can calculations
- blank workbook
A: blank workbook

Q: “AD” is an example of a ____.
- column heading
- row heading
- cell reference
- Name box
A: column heading

Q: Row headings identify each row using a different ____.
- operator
- number
- letter
- number and letter combination
A: number

Q: The intersection of a row and column is known as a ____.
- cell
- range
- reference
- border
A: cell

Q: To go to column A of the current row, click ____.
- Ctrl + Home
- Home
- Shift + Tab
- Tab + Enter
A: Home

Q: An Excel worksheet can have a maximum of ____ columns in a worksheet.
- 156
- 256
- 16,385
- 17 million
A: 16,385

Q: To make A1 the active cell, you should press which of the following keys?
- Page Up
- Page Down
- Home
- Ctrl+Home
A: Ctrl+Home

Q: The active cell has a ____ border.
- dotted
- red
- thick
- dashed
A: thick

Q: You can also move to the previous or next sheet by pressing the ____ keys.
- Alt+Page Up or Alt+Page Down
- Ctrl+Page Up or Ctrl+Page Down
- Tab+Page Up or Tab+Page Down
- F4+Page Up or F4+Page Down
A: Ctrl+Page Up or Ctrl+Page Down

Q: Text data is any combination of ____.
- letters and numbers
- letters, numbers, and dates
- only letters
- letters, numbers, and symbols
A: letters, numbers, and symbols

Q: To complete a cell entry, press the ____ key.
- Enter
- Home
- Backspace
- Delete
A: Enter

Q: Text is ____-aligned in cells.
- right
- left
- center
- justify
A: left

Q: The characters +, -, *, and / are examples of ____.
- formulas
- values
- arithmetic operators
- calculations
A: arithmetic operators

Q: The expression used to calculate values displayed in a worksheet is called a(n) ____.
- formula
- equation
- operator
- relation
A: formula

Q: An Excel formula always begins with a(n) ____.
- parentheses
- equals sign
- plus sign
- colon
A: equals sign

Q: The formula used to multiply cell A1 by cell C1 is ____.
- =A1*C1
- C1*A1
- =A1/C1
- A1*C1
A: =A1*C1

Q: To divide the value of a cell by some number, use the ____ operator.
- +
- =
- /
- *
A: /

Q: A(n) ____ is a group of cells.
- cluster
- adjunct
- selection
- range
A: range

Q: <img width="277" height="395" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the formula shown SUM(H6:H9) appears in the ____.
- address box
- address bar
- formula box
- formula bar
A: formula bar

Q: <img width="277" height="395" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the row headings are the ____ of the worksheet window that identify the different rows in the worksheet. You click a row heading to select the entire worksheet row.
- letters along the top
- numbers along the left side
- tabs at the bottom
- none of the above
A: numbers along the left side

Q: <img width="277" height="395" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, “Documentation” and “Customer Orders” are names of ____.
- worksheets
- files
- workbooks
- folders
A: worksheets

Q: <img width="277" height="395" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Which describes the nonadjacent range shown in the figure above?
- A6:A9;C6:C9
- A6:A9-C6:C9
- A6:C9
- A6;C9
A: A6:A9;C6:C9

Q: <img width="277" height="395" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> None of the data shown in the figure above is ____.
- aligned
- truncated
- formatted
- formulated
A: truncated

Q: Removing the contents of a cell is known as ____ a cell.
- clearing
- emptying
- editing
- deleting
A: clearing

Q: To view formulas, rather than the resulting values in a worksheet, switch to ____.
- formula view
- normal view
- editing mode
- AutoSum view
A: formula view

Q: To select a nonadjacent range, select an adjacent range, press and hold ____ and then select other adjacent ranges.
- Home
- Shift
- Ctrl
- ` (grave key)
A: Ctrl

Q: Excel provides the ability to create new worksheets and new ____ sheets
- documentation
- chart
- workbook
- reference
A: chart

Q: To select a large range of cells, click the first cell in the range, press and hold ____, and then click the last cell in the range.
- Esc
- Ctrl
- Shift
- F3
A: Shift

Q: Copying a range of cells is similar to moving a range, except that you must press the ____ key while you drag the selection to its new location.
- Shift
- F3
- Esc
- Ctrl
A: Ctrl

Q: ____ headings are identified by a number.
- Sheet
- Workbook
- Row
- Column
A: Row

Q: To insert a new column, select a column, then click the Insert button in the ____ group on the Home tab.
- Insert
- Cells
- Number
- Editing
A: Cells

Q: What is the result of the expression =50/(10*5)?
- 1/5
- 1
- 25
- 50
A: 1

Q: To change the order of operations, enclose part of the formula in ____.
- brackets
- italics
- parentheses
- quotation marks
A: parentheses

Q: Excel makes reading formulas simpler by ____ each cell reference in the formula and its corresponding cell in the worksheet.
- color coding
- bolding
- highlighting
- italicizing
A: color coding

Q: Press the ____ key to switch to editing mode.
- ` (grave key)
- Num Lock
- F2
- F9
A: F2

Q: The default column width is 8.43 standard-sized ____.
- letters
- pixels
- characters
- numbers
A: characters

Q: The Undo and Redo buttons are found on the ____.
- formula bar
- Quick Access Toolbar
- Clipboard group
- Office Button
A: Quick Access Toolbar

Q: To change a column width, you can click ____ on the Column submenu to make the column(s) as wide as the longest entry of the cells in the column.
- QuickFit
- AutoFit
- FullColumn
- Longest
A: AutoFit

Q: A ____ sheet is a worksheet that provides information about the content and purpose of the workbook.
- planning analysis
- documentation
- glossary
- precedence
A: documentation

Q: ____ makes it easier to enter repetitive text in cells.
- Editing mode
- AutoFit
- AutoComplete
- AutoFill
A: AutoComplete

Q: It is recommended to set your column widths based on the maximum number of characters you wish to display, rather than ____.
- pixels
- picas
- points
- decimal spaces
A: pixels

Q: Which of the following takes precedence over multiplication?
- division
- exponentiation
- addition
- subtraction
A: exponentiation

Q: A ____ is a single point on a computer monitor.
- pica
- point
- bitmap
- pixel
A: pixel

Q: The ____ command gives you precise control in setting column widths and row heights.
- Format
- AutoFit
- Insert
- Cells
A: Format

Q: <b>____ </b>a printout reduces the width and the height of the printout to fit the number of pages you specify by shrinking the text size as needed.
- Autofitting
- Scaling
- Shrinking
- Resizing
A: Scaling

Q: In ____ orientation, a page is taller than it is wide.
- natural
- landscape
- portrait
- basic
A: portrait

Q: From formula view, press ____ to switch the worksheet back to Normal view.
- Ctrl + >
- Ctrl + <
- Ctrl + ?
- Ctrl + `
A: Ctrl + `

Q: Put the following steps for entering multiple lines of text within a cell in the proper order:<br><br>1. Press and hold the Alt key, then press the Enter key to move the insertion point to a <br>new line within the cell, then enter the next line of text.<br>2. Press the Alt + Enter keys for each new line of text you need to enter within the cell.<br>3. Click the cell in which you want to enter the text.<br>4. Enter the line of text.<br>
- 2, 1, 3, 4
- 1, 2, 3, 4
- 3, 4, 1, 2
- 3, 4, 2, 1
A: 3, 4, 1, 2

Q: According to the order of precedence in Excel:<br>
- Excel performs exponentiation, then multiplication and division, then addition and subtraction.
- Excel performs multiplication, then exponentiation, then division, then addition, then subtraction.
- Excel performs exponentiation, then multiplication, then division, then subtraction, then addition.
- Excel performs multiplication, then division, then exponentiation, then addition, then subtraction.
A: Excel performs exponentiation, then multiplication and division, then addition and subtraction.

Q: Put the following steps for selecting a nonadjacent range of cells in the proper order:<br><br>1. Select an adjacent range of cells.<br>2. With the Ctrl key still pressed, continue to select other cell ranges until all of the ranges are selected.<br>3. Release the mouse button and the Ctrl key.<br>4. Press and hold the Ctrl key, and then select another adjacent cell range.<br>
- 1, 4, 2, 3
- 1, 4, 3, 2
- 2, 1, 3, 4
- 2, 1, 4, 3
A: 1, 4, 2, 3

Q: What type of operation does the formula “C9/B10” use?<br>
- division
- multiplication
- fraction
- exponentiation
A: division

Q: By default, a printout of your worksheet will include ____.
- the data in the worksheet
- gridlines around the worksheet cells
- row and column headings
- all of the above
A: the data in the worksheet

Q: To move the active cell up one row, press ____.
- Shift + Enter
- Ctrl + Tab
- Shift + Tab
- Ctrl + Enter
A: Shift + Enter

Q: Which of the following will not change the location of the active cell?
- drag and drop
- scrolling
- clicking another cell
- clicking a column heading
A: scrolling

Q: When you copy a selection of cells using drag and drop, which appears before you release the mouse button?
- an outline of the new location of the selected range
- a ScreenTip
- a cell reference of the new location
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: What is the syntax for a SUM formula adding the values of cell F6 to F9?<br>
- /SUM(F9:F6)
- =SUM(F6/F9)
- =END(F6:F9)
- =SUM(F6:F9)
A: =SUM(F6:F9)

Q: Ctrl + G is used to access the ____.
- Go to Next worksheet command
- G column
- Go To dialog box
- formula view
A: Go To dialog box

Q: mm/dd/yyyy is known as ____.
- a text string
- text data
- a date format
- number data
A: a date format

Q: Which of the following number formats are converted by Excel once they are entered?
- percentages and integers
- currency and integers
- decimals and percentages
- percentages and currency
A: percentages and currency

Q: Cutting a selection sends it to the ____ until you paste it.
- Sheet1
- Clipboard
- Formula bar
- active cell
A: Clipboard

Q: <img width="459" height="249" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the search string is ____.
- Ave.
- Avenue
- Sheet
- By Rows
A: Ave.

Q: <img width="459" height="249" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the above figure, the replacement string is ____.
- Ave.
- Avenue
- Sheet
- By Rows
A: Avenue

Q: <img width="459" height="249" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the ____ replaces the current occurrence of the search string.
- Replace button
- Replace All button
- Find All button
- Find Next button
A: Replace button

Q: <img width="459" height="249" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00001_res/Excel-Tutorial-01_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the ____ highlights all occurrences of the search string.
- Replace button
- Replace All button
- Find All
- Find Next button
A: Find All

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-1<br></b>Roger has created a spreadsheet to keep track of his customers for his dog-walking business. In the spreadsheet, he includes the dog owners’ names, addresses, phone numbers, dog name, dog breed, dog age, and days of the week his services are needed.<br><br> Column B in Roger’s spreadsheet contains the addresses of his clients. Some of the addresses are truncated so Roger ____.
- uses the AutoComplete command to allow for complete entries
- uses the AutoFit command to remove unwanted space
- resizes the column width until all addresses are visible
- switches to Edit mode
A: resizes the column width until all addresses are visible

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-1<br></b>Roger has created a spreadsheet to keep track of his customers for his dog-walking business. In the spreadsheet, he includes the dog owners’ names, addresses, phone numbers, dog name, dog breed, dog age, and days of the week his services are needed.<br><br> One of the entries Roger enters into the spreadsheet automatically right-aligns in the cell. Which entry does this?<br>
- customer phone number
- dog breed
- dog age
- customer address
A: dog age

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-1<br></b>Roger has created a spreadsheet to keep track of his customers for his dog-walking business. In the spreadsheet, he includes the dog owners’ names, addresses, phone numbers, dog name, dog breed, dog age, and days of the week his services are needed.<br><br> Roger wants to include the year that each client has been with him. He wishes to insert a new column called “Year” between Column D (Dog Owner Name) and Column E (Address). ____
- Roger selects Column D, then clicks the Insert button in the Cells group
- Roger selects Columns D & E, then clicks the Insert button in the Cells group
- Roger selects Column E, then clicks the Insert button in the Cells group
- Roger selects Columns D & E, then clicks the Insert Column Between button in the Cells group
A: Roger selects Column E, then clicks the Insert button in the Cells group

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-1<br></b>Roger has created a spreadsheet to keep track of his customers for his dog-walking business. In the spreadsheet, he includes the dog owners’ names, addresses, phone numbers, dog name, dog breed, dog age, and days of the week his services are needed.<br><br> The newly inserted column has the same width as ____.
- the original column D
- the original column E
- the default width which is applied to all new columns
- the average width of all columns in the worksheet
A: the original column D

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-1<br></b>Roger has created a spreadsheet to keep track of his customers for his dog-walking business. In the spreadsheet, he includes the dog owners’ names, addresses, phone numbers, dog name, dog breed, dog age, and days of the week his services are needed.<br><br> Roger notices that the Dog Name column is too wide and he could use that extra space for other columns so he ____.
- autofits the column by double-clicking the cell with the longest entry
- autofits the column by double-clicking its border
- autofits the column by selecting it, then clicking the AutoFit button in the Cells group
- places the mouse pointer on the column border and drags to the right
A: autofits the column by double-clicking its border

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-2<br></b>Sam is a distributor of ceramics. He uses Excel 2010 to record his inventory and order forms. Sam’s worksheet for his company’s monthly orders needs to display summary information including total number of items ordered, and the amount of revenue generated from those orders.<br><br> First Sam will add the number of orders. He chooses to use the ____ function from the AutoSum feature.
- MAX
- ADD
- SUM
- TOTAL
A: SUM

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-2<br></b>Sam is a distributor of ceramics. He uses Excel 2010 to record his inventory and order forms. Sam’s worksheet for his company’s monthly orders needs to display summary information including total number of items ordered, and the amount of revenue generated from those orders.<br><br> To activate the AutoSum feature, Sam clicks ____.
- in the cell below the group of cells he wants to add
- in the cell to the right of the last cell in the group of cells he wants to add
- in the formula bar
- in the active cell
A: in the cell below the group of cells he wants to add

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-2<br></b>Sam is a distributor of ceramics. He uses Excel 2010 to record his inventory and order forms. Sam’s worksheet for his company’s monthly orders needs to display summary information including total number of items ordered, and the amount of revenue generated from those orders.<br><br> Sam decides to rename his worksheet “Sam’s Ceramic Business Worksheet” but he is unable to complete the word Worksheet because ____.
- Excel only allows for 3 words in a sheet name
- Excel only allows for 31 characters in a sheet name
- Excel only allows one word in a sheet name
- Excel does not allow for symbols such as the apostrophe in Sam’s in sheet names
A: Excel only allows for 31 characters in a sheet name

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-2<br></b>Sam is a distributor of ceramics. He uses Excel 2010 to record his inventory and order forms. Sam’s worksheet for his company’s monthly orders needs to display summary information including total number of items ordered, and the amount of revenue generated from those orders.<br><br> Sam now wants to find out how much money he will make on his largest order, which is currently in row E. Cell E4 contains the number of items ordered and cell E5 contains the price per item. An appropriate formula would be ____.
- =E4+E5
- =E5/E4
- =E4*E5
- =E4^E5
A: =E4*E5

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 1-2<br></b>Sam is a distributor of ceramics. He uses Excel 2010 to record his inventory and order forms. Sam’s worksheet for his company’s monthly orders needs to display summary information including total number of items ordered, and the amount of revenue generated from those orders.<br><br> Sam is happy with the results of the formula. All of a sudden he realizes that the cell that once displayed the result is now displaying the formula and all of the columns are wider. He must have ____.
- switched to editing mode by double-clicking the results cell
- switched to formula view by pressing Ctrl + Alt
- switched to editing mode by pressing Ctrl + Alt
- switched to formula view by pressing Ctrl + `
A: switched to formula view by pressing Ctrl + `

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a collection of text and numbers laid out in a rectangular grid.
A: spreadsheet

Q: A worksheet displays the contents of the spreadsheet laid out in a grid of rows and ____________________.
A: columns

Q: The cell reference for the active cell appears in the ____________________<b> </b>located in the upper-left corner of the worksheet.
A: Name Box

Q: The ____________________ bar displays the contents of an active cell.
A: Formula

Q: A text string contains a string of text ____________________.
A: characters

Q: The ____________________ is a set of predefined rules used to determine the sequence in which operators are applied in a calculation.
A: order of precedence

Q: Each worksheet has a(n) ____________________ that identifies the name of the worksheet.
A: sheet tab

Q: Each cell is identified by a cell ____________________, which is its column and row location.
A: reference

Q: The ____________________ sheet has a white sheet tab.
A: active

Q: A(n) ____________________ sheet reminds you why you created a workbook and what it contains.
A: documentation sheet

Q: A(n) ____________________ includes a series of questions that help you think about the purpose of the workbook and how to achieve your desired results.
A: planning analysis sheet

Q: A ____________________ provides a visual representation of spreadsheet data.
A: chart

Q: ____________________ data include any number of letters, symbols, numbers, and spaces in a cell.
A: Text

Q: ____________________<b> </b>eliminates any empty space by matching the column to the width of its longest cell entry or the row to the height of its tallest cell entry.
A: Autofitting

Q: $87.25 is a(n) ____________________ value.     
A: currency

Q: A group of cells is called a cell ____________________.
A: range

Q: In Excel, the arithmetic operator ^ indicates the arithmetic operation called ____________________.
A: exponentiation

Q: SUM, MAX, and MIN are ____________________.
A: functions

Q: The AutoSum button is in the ____________________ group on the Home tab.
A: Editing

Q: When you are in ____________________ mode, some keyboard shortcuts will work differently.
A: Edit

Q: Explain the following Excel 2010 terms: cell, worksheet, active cell, and column headings.
Feedback: Each intersection of a row and column is a cell. Worksheet data is placed within separate cells. The cell currently selected in the active worksheet is the active cell. The active cell is outlined with a thick border and the corresponding row and column headings are highlighted. A worksheet displays the contents of the spreadsheet laid out in a grid of rows and columns. The column headings are the letters along the top of the worksheet window that identify the different columns in the worksheet.

Q: The order of precedence for arithmetic operators is exponentiation, multiplication, division, addition, subtraction. In your opinion, what is the best order of precedence for the following Excel tasks and why: 1) work in editing mode, 2) switch to formula view, 3) rename sheet tabs, 4) resize columns and rows, 5) create a planning analysis sheet, and 6) enter data?
Feedback: Instructors: There is some flexibility in this answer - the main thing to look for is that students understand that the planning analysis sheet should be the first task performed. Entering data should be next. Renaming sheet tabs, resizing columns and rows, working in editing mode and switching to formula view can be ordered as the student wishes, as long as they can support their answer with good reasons. Here is an example answer: I think the best order of precedence for the following Excel tasks (1) work in editing mode, 2) switch to formula view, 3) rename sheet tabs, 4) resize columns and rows, 5) create a planning analysis sheet, and 6) enter data) should be: 1. Create a planning analysis sheet 2. Enter data 3. Resize columns and rows 4. Rename sheet tabs 5. Work in editing mode 6. Switch to formula view Planning should be the first step in any project. Creating a planning analysis sheet before creating an Excel workbook allows the user to figure out what the purpose of the workbook should be and how to achieve the desired results. Entering data should be next so that the workbook can be created and relationships between numbers can be established. Once the data is entered, it might be necessary to resize columns and rows in order to see all of the data. Also, once the data is entered, it makes sense to label sheet tabs if the data is placed on more than one sheet. This step is important for organization, especially considering the last two steps of working in editing mode and switching to formula view. The order of the last two steps depends on the nature of the worksheet. If there are many text entries or number entries that need to be edited, having the worksheet as organized as possible will make working in editing mode that much easier. If the worksheet is full of formulas, the same is true.

Q: You have three teenage children to whom you have given cellular phones. You wish to record the monthly statements for each child’s phone usage in Excel because the children have been given an incentive to keep their yearly bill under $1000.00. Do you decide to create three Excel workbooks or one Excel workbook with three worksheets and why?
Feedback: Instructors: There is no right or wrong answer to this question, however the answer should show some critical thinking to support the students’ decisions. Here is an example: I would create three separate workbooks for my three children because in addition to their cellular phone usage, I could use the workbooks for other purposes. For example, I might create a worksheet for tracking college applications, for summer job income, grades, and medical records, such as dates of all immunizations. As the children get older, I could pass on each child his/her workbook for his/her own records. If I had only created one workbook for all three children, I’d have to cut and paste information into two new workbooks to distribute their personal information to them. I think it would be much more efficient for each child to have his or her own customized workbook made up of as many individual worksheets as needed.

Q: The Excel macro recorder is the fastest way to create macros.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To open the Visual Basic Editor you must first click the Macros button in the Code group on the Developer tab.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Since Visual Basic for Applications is an application-specific language, Excel and Access use different variations of VBA.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: One important use of the Visual Basic Editor is to manage your projects.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In VBA, a project consists of a single macro in one worksheet.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Unlike Windows Explorer, Project Explorer does not allow you to view your project components hierarchically.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: All objects have properties.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="364" height="264" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The window in the accompanying figure displays each property’s name in the right column and its value in the left column.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="364" height="264" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the window in the accompanying figure, to view the list of properties in alphabetical order and by category, you can click the tabs at the top of the window.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A project cannot contain more than one module.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The macro recorder writes the most efficient code and records only those commands and actions you want in the finished project.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The VBA code "SUM(A1:A4)".Formula = Range("A5") changes the formula of cell A5 to sum up the values in the range A1:A4.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The VBA method ActiveWorkbook.SaveAs saves the current workbook.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The VBA code Set WBook = Workbooks("Smith") stores the WBook variable in the Smith workbook.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The And operator requires only one of two combined logical expressions to be true.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The MsgBox function is similar to the InputBox function except that the MsgBox function does not contain a text box for the user to enter values.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can quickly switch to the Visual Basic Editor by pressing the Shift+Alt keys.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: VBA allows you to create custom dialog boxes.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Macro buttons on the Quick Access Toolbar can be customized to display unique icons.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you hide screen elements that are part of the worksheet, they will be hidden in that worksheet only.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Hold down the Ctrl Key and press the Home key to go to cell <u>A1</u> in the worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When the Visual Basic Editor opens, it usually displays three windows: the Project Explorer window, the <u>Project</u> window, and the Code window.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Project Explorer window is <u>dockable</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Attributes such as name, size, or color are known as <u>properties</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A project might contain several different <u>modules</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: All procedures are considered public unless specified as <u>Private</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="518" height="299" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As you enter a command in the <u>Project</u> window shown in the accompanying figure, its effects are immediately applied to that workbook.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In Excel, <u>ChartObject</u> refers to a chart embedded within a worksheet.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: VBA is a(n) <u>object-linked</u> programming language.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>Display</u> property of the Worksheet object determines if a worksheet is hidden.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Property values containing <u>text strings</u> and numeric values do not need to be placed within quotation marks.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The VBA code Worksheets("Raw Data").<u>Change</u> = "Sample Data" changes the name of the "Raw Data" worksheet to "Sample Data".
- True
- False
A: False

Q: In the function user = InputBox(“Enter your username” , “Log In”), “user” is the <u>prompt</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To determine whether an expression used in a condition is true or false, the expression needs to contain a(n) <u>condition</u> operator.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Logical operators are used to combine expressions within a(n) <u>condition</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To go to cell A1 in a worksheet, hold down the ____ key and press the Home key.
- Alt
- Enter
- Ctrl
- Esc
A: Ctrl

Q: Excel macros are written in the programming language ____.
- Perl
- JavaScript
- HTML
- VBA
A: VBA

Q: To edit a VBA macro, you need to use the Visual Basic ____.
- Manager
- Explorer
- Writer
- Editor
A: Editor

Q: To quickly switch to the Visual Basic Editor, press ____ on your keyboard.
- Esc + F1
- Ctrl + F7
- Alt + F11
- Enter + F12
A: Alt + F11

Q: <img width="518" height="237" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The application shown in the accompanying figure is the Visual Basic ____.
- Manager
- Explorer
- Writer
- Editor
A: Editor

Q: <img width="518" height="237" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure is the ____.
- Project Explorer
- Code window
- Properties window
- VBA Manager
A: Project Explorer

Q: <img width="518" height="237" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 3 in the accompanying figure is the ____ code.
- Perl
- VBA
- Java
- JavaScript
A: VBA

Q: <img width="518" height="237" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 4 in the accompanying figure is the ____.
- Project Explorer
- Code window
- Properties window
- VBA Manager
A: Code window

Q: When the Visual Basic Editor opens it usually displays ____ windows.
- three
- six
- seven
- eight
A: three

Q: The ____ is a Visual Basic Editor window.
- Code Explorer
- Properties window
- Project window
- Code Preview
A: Properties window

Q: A(n) ____ is a collection of macros, worksheets, data entry forms, and other items that make up a customized application.
- window
- project
- object
- applet
A: project

Q: The Project ____ is a window in the Visual Basic Editor that displays a hierarchical list of all currently opened projects and their contents.
- Manager
- Browser
- Explorer
- Editor
A: Explorer

Q: The default project name given to new projects is ____.
- VBObject
- NewProject
- Project
- VBAProject
A: VBAProject

Q: Within each project are various items called ____.
- keys
- variants
- sources
- objects
A: objects

Q: A(n) ____ is any element within the Excel working environment, such as a worksheet, macro, or workbook.
- source
- component
- object
- window
A: object

Q: When you enter the name and description of a project, you are actually modifying two of its ____.
- keys
- properties
- links
- objects
A: properties

Q: All of the following are attributes of an object except ____.
- name
- size
- location on the screen
- name of creator
A: name of creator

Q: <img width="364" height="264" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To open the window in the accompanying figure, first click ____ on the menu bar.
- Display
- VBA
- View
- Code
A: View

Q: A(n) ____ is a collection of VBA macros.
- aggregate
- module
- object
- component
A: module

Q: When you want to view the VBA macro code associated with any item in Project Explorer, you use the ____ window.
- Macro
- Module
- Code
- Project
A: Code

Q: Visual Basic supports ____ kinds of procedures.
- two
- three
- six
- eleven
A: three

Q: The following is a type of procedure supported by Visual Basic: ____.
- function procedure
- attribute procedure
- formula procedure
- settings procedure
A: function procedure

Q: Formatting a cell or displaying a chart are examples of ____ procedures in Visual Basic.
- sub
- function
- property
- attribute
A: sub

Q: A ____ procedure returns a value.
- sub
- function
- property
- calculation
A: function

Q: To create sub procedures without using the macro recorder, you need to know some rules of VBA ____.
- formulas
- statistics
- metrics
- syntax
A: syntax

Q: To open the Code window to the contents of a specific module, select the module in the Project Explorer window and then press the ____ key.
- Esc
- F7
- F8
- Shift
A: F7

Q: The ____ command is always the last line in a sub procedure and tells Excel to stop running the macro.
- End
- Quit Sub
- End Sub
- Stop Sub
A: End Sub

Q: Comments must begin with a(n) ____.
- apostrophe
- comma
- period
- double quotation mark
A: apostrophe

Q: Comments are usually displayed by the editor in ____ font.
- italicized
- green
- red
- bold
A: green

Q: Procedure names can be up to ____ characters in length.
- 125
- 126
- 255
- 256
A: 255

Q: Procedure names cannot contain ____.
- spaces
- numbers
- letters
- any of the above
A: spaces

Q: To step through a sub procedure one line at a time, click in the sub procedure code and then repeatedly press the ____ key.
- F7
- F8
- Alt
- Shift
A: F8

Q: To run an entire sub procedure, press the ____ key.
- Alt
- F5
- F6
- Shift
A: F5

Q: The Excel object you will use to create VBA programs and refer to a range in a worksheet is ____.
- Cell
- Range
- Chart
- Name
A: Range

Q: The Excel object you will use to create VBA programs and refer to a defined name in a workbook is ____.
- Name
- Range
- Chart
- Workname
A: Name

Q: The Excel object you will use to create VBA programs and refer to a chart embedded within a worksheet is ____.
- EmbedChart
- ChartEmbed
- ChartObject
- Application
A: ChartObject

Q: The VBA code ____ refers to the collection of cells in the cell range, A1:B10.
- Objects(A1:B10)
- Names(A1:B10)
- (A1:B10)
- Range("A1:B10")
A: Range("A1:B10")

Q: The object name ____ refers to the worksheet currently being displayed in the workbook.
- "DisplaySheet"
- "ActiveSheet"
- "ThisSheet"
- "SheetDisplayed"
A: "ActiveSheet"

Q: The object name ____ refers to the cell from which a custom function is being run.
- ThisWorkbook
- ThisCell
- ActiveCell
- FunctionCell
A: ThisCell

Q: The object name ____ refers to the workbook containing the macro code that is currently running.
- ThisCell
- ThisWorkbook
- ActiveWindow
- ActiveWorkbook
A: ThisWorkbook

Q: <img width="518" height="299" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Click ____ on the menu bar and then click Immediate Window to open the window in the accompanying figure.
- View
- Code
- Display
- Options
A: View

Q: <img width="518" height="299" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You can open the Immediate window in the accompanying figure by pressing the ____ keys in the Visual Basic Editor.
- Ctrl+A
- Ctrl+G
- Shift+A
- Alt+I
A: Ctrl+G

Q: <img width="518" height="299" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> To dock and undock the window in the accompanying figure, right-click the window and then click the ____ on the shortcut menu.
- Location
- Stationary
- Dockable
- Movement
A: Dockable

Q: The cell reference of a range is located in the ____ property of the Range object.
- Where
- CellRef
- Reference
- Address
A: Address

Q: All of the following are properties of the Range object EXCEPT ____.
- Address
- Formula
- Comment
- Name
A: Name

Q: The ____ property of the Workbook object contains the folder and drive in which the workbook is stored.
- Folder
- Path
- Drive
- Location
A: Path

Q: Closing a workbook or printing a worksheet's contents are examples of ____.
- modules
- properties
- selections
- methods
A: methods

Q: To save time when running similar commands in the Immediate Window, press the Up Arrow key to go to the previous command, edit it, and then press the ____ key to run the revised command.
- Shift
- Run
- Enter
- F12
A: Enter

Q: The VBA code Range("A1").____ Text:=“Total Assets” adds the comment "Total Assets" to cell A1.
- Select
- AddComment
- Text
- Properties
A: AddComment

Q: The VBA code ActiveWorkbook.____:="broadband" protects the current workbook, using the password "broadband".
- Protect Username
- Lock Workbook
- Protect Password
- Secure Workbook
A: Protect Password

Q: A(n) ____ is a named element in a program that can be used to store and retrieve information.
- object
- component
- key
- variable
A: variable

Q: Every variable is identified by a unique variable ____.
- referent
- key
- name
- index
A: name

Q: You can define exactly what type of data can be stored in a variable with the ____ command.
- Stor
- Type
- Dim
- Name
A: Dim

Q: You can display the value of a variable by typing the variable name preceded by a(n) ____ in the Immediate window and pressing the Enter key.
- caret
- apostrophe
- question mark
- ampersand
A: question mark

Q: The ____ symbol is used to combine two text strings into a single text string.
- &
- ^
- %
- $
A: &

Q: ____ errors occur when the program is executing.
- Syntax
- Run-time
- Logical
- Type-based
A: Run-time

Q: ____ errors can be the most difficult to resolve.
- Syntax
- Run-time
- Logical
- Type-based
A: Logical

Q: To break a line to make your code easier to read, type a space followed by the ____ character at the end of the line.
- underscore
- ampersand
- apostrophe
- asterisk
A: underscore

Q: In the function user = InputBox(“Enter your username” , “Log In”), the words “Enter your username” comprise the ____.
- title
- prompt
- box name
- variable
A: prompt

Q: In the function user = InputBox(“Enter your username” , “Log In”), the words “Log in” comprise the ____.
- title
- prompt
- box name
- variable
A: title

Q: A(n) ____ structure is a series of commands that evaluates conditions in your program and then directs the program to perform certain actions based on the status of those conditions.
- evaluation
- control
- append
- conditional
A: control

Q: To test several conditions in a macro, using the VBA ____ statement is recommended.
- For-Next
- Do-While
- If-Then-ElseIf
- Select Case
A: Select Case

Q: If a control structure has more than two possible outcomes, you will have to use a(n) ____ control structure.
- If-Then
- If-Then-Else
- If-Then-ElseIf
- If-Then-If
A: If-Then-ElseIf

Q: The ____ comparison operator compares whether one object is the same as another.
- =
- +
- <>
- is
A: is

Q: The ____ control structure allows you to repeat a series of commands a set number of times.
- If-Then-ElseIf
- For-Next
- Case Select
- Do-For
A: For-Next

Q: The ____ control structure repeats a series of commands as long as a particular condition is true.
- If-Then-ElseIf
- For-Next
- Case Select
- Do-While
A: Do-While

Q: ____ operators are used to combine expressions within a condition.
- Conditional
- Logical
- Key
- Concatenation
A: Logical

Q: The most commonly used ____ operators are the And and Or operators.
- conditional
- logical
- key
- concatenation
A: logical

Q: The ____ operator requires that only one of two (or more) expressions be true.
- And
- Not
- One
- Or
A: Or

Q: The ____ function returns the value FALSE if the logical expression is true.
- OPP
- CON
- NOT
- THIS
A: NOT

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-1<br></b>Chantal is building a kiosk-based Excel application. She wants to make some modifications to the screen elements in order to keep users from being distracted by parts of the application that are irrelevant to her application. She turns to Jason for guidance as she knows he built a similar solution earlier this year.<br><br> Jason explains to Chantal that Excel screen elements fall into general categories. Which of the following is NOT one of the categories into which the screen elements fall?
- taskbar
- window
- workbook
- worksheet
A: taskbar

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-1<br></b>Chantal is building a kiosk-based Excel application. She wants to make some modifications to the screen elements in order to keep users from being distracted by parts of the application that are irrelevant to her application. She turns to Jason for guidance as she knows he built a similar solution earlier this year.<br><br> If Chantal hides a screen element that is part of the worksheet, where is that screen element hidden?
- In that worksheet
- In any worksheets
- In any workbooks
- all of the above
A: In that worksheet

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-1<br></b>Chantal is building a kiosk-based Excel application. She wants to make some modifications to the screen elements in order to keep users from being distracted by parts of the application that are irrelevant to her application. She turns to Jason for guidance as she knows he built a similar solution earlier this year.<br><br> Chantal has decided to hide the worksheet gridlines and the vertical scroll bar. What does Jason tell her to use to do this?
- Customization dialog box
- Screen Elements dialog box
- Excel Options dialog box
- Display Options dialog box
A: Excel Options dialog box

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-1<br></b>Chantal is building a kiosk-based Excel application. She wants to make some modifications to the screen elements in order to keep users from being distracted by parts of the application that are irrelevant to her application. She turns to Jason for guidance as she knows he built a similar solution earlier this year.<br><br> Where in the Excel Options dialog box would Chantal find the setting to change the default location for Excel workbook files?
- Advanced options, Display section
- Advanced options, Editing options section
- Save options
- Formulas options
A: Save options

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-1<br></b>Chantal is building a kiosk-based Excel application. She wants to make some modifications to the screen elements in order to keep users from being distracted by parts of the application that are irrelevant to her application. She turns to Jason for guidance as she knows he built a similar solution earlier this year.<br><br> Where in the Excel Options dialog box would Chantal find the setting to turn off AutoComplete for cell values?
- Advanced options, Display section
- Advanced options, Editing options section
- Save options
- Formulas options
A: Advanced options, Editing options section

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-2<br></b>Your cousin Rebecca knows that you are an experienced VBA programmer so she turns to you for some general guidance when she wants to get started as a programmer herself.<br><br> What do you tell Rebecca is the best way to learn VBA?
- By using the VBA Editor online help
- By using it
- By examining what other programmers are doing
- By reading programming manuals
A: By using it

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-2<br></b>Your cousin Rebecca knows that you are an experienced VBA programmer so she turns to you for some general guidance when she wants to get started as a programmer herself.<br><br> Which of the following is NOT a true statement you would make to Rebecca?
- Using the macro recorder is guaranteed to create code free of syntax errors.
- The macro recorder is guaranteed to record only commands and actions you need in a finished project.
- Experienced programmers use the macro recorder as a starting point.
- Experienced programmers edit code generated by the macro recorder to remove extraneous material.
A: The macro recorder is guaranteed to record only commands and actions you need in a finished project.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-2<br></b>Your cousin Rebecca knows that you are an experienced VBA programmer so she turns to you for some general guidance when she wants to get started as a programmer herself.<br><br> After Rebecca has done some research into VBA, she discovers that one of the following statements is NOT true. Which statement is false?
- The interactive tools in the VBA Editor online Help guides you to use the correct syntax by identifying syntax errors as you type them.
- In many cases, program code is password-protected.
- You can use code from another programmer without permission, if you have downloaded it from the Web.
- The Web is a great source of VBA code samples.
A: You can use code from another programmer without permission, if you have downloaded it from the Web.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-2<br></b>Your cousin Rebecca knows that you are an experienced VBA programmer so she turns to you for some general guidance when she wants to get started as a programmer herself.<br><br> Rebecca would like to make a reference to the second open Excel workbook window. What do you tell her is the syntax for this?
- Workbook(2)
- Open(2)
- Range(2)
- Windows(2)
A: Windows(2)

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case 12-2<br></b>Your cousin Rebecca knows that you are an experienced VBA programmer so she turns to you for some general guidance when she wants to get started as a programmer herself.<br><br> What would you tell Rebecca to use if she wants to refer to a workbook that is named “Hilton Hotels”?
- Workbooks(“Hilton Hotels”)
- Excel(“Hilton Hotels”)
- Book(“Hilton Hotels”)
- Worksheets(“Hilton Hotels”)
A: Workbooks(“Hilton Hotels”)

Q: The ____________________ Explorer is a window in the Visual Basic Editor that displays a hierarchical list of all currently opened projects and their contents.
A: Project

Q: If a window is ____________________, you can drag it to the edge of the screen, and the window will always remain on top, above other windows.
A: dockable

Q: <img width="364" height="264" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 1 in the accompanying figure is the property ____________________.
A: name

Q: <img width="364" height="264" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked 2 in the accompanying figure is the property ____________________.
A: value

Q: A module is a collection of VBA ____________________.
A: macros

Q: The ____________________ window displays the VBA macro code associated with any item in the Project Explorer.
A: Code

Q: A(n) ____________________ procedure is used when you want to create customized properties for the objects in your project.
A: property

Q: Use ____________________ lines to explain the purpose of the macro and how it works without affecting the code.
A: comment

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a statement that describes the behavior or purpose of a procedure.
A: comment

Q: <img width="518" height="299" align="bottom" alt="nar002-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar002-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> As shown in the accompanying figure, you can run single command lines in the Visual Basic Editor ____________________ window.
A: Immediate

Q: To refer to a specific object in a(n) ____________________, use this syntax: object_collection(id).
A: collection

Q: In the Excel ____________________, VBA organizes objects and object collections in a hierarchy with the Excel application at the top and the individual cells of a workbook at the bottom.
A: Object Model

Q: It is a good coding practice to write code in ____________________ text.
A: lowercase

Q: A control ____________________ is a series of commands that evaluates conditions in your program and then directs the program to perform certain actions based on the status of those conditions.
A: structure

Q: In a(n) ____________________ control structure, one set of commands is run if the condition is true and a different set of commands is run if the condition is false.
A: If-Then-Else / If-Then-ElseIf

Q: A(n) ____________________ operator is a symbol used to compare one value with another.
A: comparison

Q: If a control structure has several conditions, you need to use a(n) ____________________ control structure to run commands in response to each condition.
A: If-Then-ElseIf / Select Case

Q: To hide a macro’s actions as it runs, insert the command Application.ScreenUpdating = ____________________ at the beginning of the sub procedure.
A: false

Q: ____________________ is a file format developed by Adobe Systems that supports all of the elements of a printed document but in an electronic format that is easily shared.
A: Portable Document Format (PDF) / PDF (Portable Document Format) / Portable Document Format / PDF

Q: <img width="518" height="237" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00012_res/Excel-Tutorial-12_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item marked ____________________ in the accompanying window is the Properties window.
A: 2 / two

Q: What are the seven comparison operators in VBA?
Feedback: The seven comparison operators in VBA are: > (greater than), < (less than), >= (greater than or equal to), <= (less than or equal to), = (equal to), <> (not equal to), and is (compares whether one object is the same as another).

Q: Explain which of the following screen elements are part of the Excel window, the workbook window, and the worksheet: formula bar, ScreenTips, chart element names on hover, horizontal and vertical scroll bars, row and column headers, sheet tabs, and gridlines.
Feedback: Formula bar (Excel window), ScreenTips (Excel window), chart element names on hover (Excel window), horizontal and vertical scroll bars (workbook), row and column headers (worksheet), sheet tabs (workbook), and gridlines (worksheet).

Q: Is it necessary to specify a data type or declare a variable in Visual Basic? If you do not, what happens? What is good programming practice in regard to specifying a data type and declaring a variable?
Feedback: It is not strictly required to specify a data type or declare a variable in Visual Basic. If you don’t specify a data type, Excel determines the data type by what is stored in the variable. Likewise, if you don’t declare a variable, Excel creates the variable when you first attempt to store data in it. However, good programming practice is to declare variables and their data types as a way of catching errors that might creep into the code.

Q: A refrigerator is a common metaphor for computer file organization.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You need to insert a hard disk each time you use a computer.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Folders cannot contain other folders.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The best place to store your documents is in the root directory of the hard disk.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Storing your work in the top level of the hard disk could interfere with Windows or a program.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You should not reorganize or change any folder that contains installed software, because Windows expects to find the files for specific programs within certain folders.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You should not make changes to the folders that contain the Windows operating system.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The type of disk you use to store files determines how you organize those files.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The larger the medium, the fewer levels of folders you should use.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="566" height="346" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You would click the item marked C in the accompanying figure to close the folder.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <img width="566" height="346" align="bottom" alt="nar003-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar003-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> You would click the item marked D in the accompanying figure to collapse the folder.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To display or hide the Folders list in a folder window, click the Display button in the Navigation pane.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You cannot use spaces in your filenames.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The files named Sales.xlsx and Sales.docx are identical files.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: All computers are set to display file extensions automatically.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Be sure to give your files and folders meaningful names that will help you remember their purpose and contents.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: When you delete a folder, you delete all the files it contains.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Once you empty the Recycle Bin, you can recover the files that were in it using Windows Help and Support.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you delete a file from a removable media, it goes into the Recycle Bin.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you compress the folders in a folder, the original folders are stored in the new compressed folder.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>CD</u> is a collection of data that has a name and is stored in a computer.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To make it easy to retrieve files, you arrange them logically into <u>folders</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: <img width="413" height="292" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The accompanying figure displays the Windows file <u>catalog</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you click the expand icon next to a folder in Windows Explorer, a(n) <u>conceal</u> icon appears next to the folder icon.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Windows Explorer window is divided into two sections, called <u>groups</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: By default, when you first open <u>Windows Explorer</u>, it shows all the drives available on your computer.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: By default, when you first open <u>the Computer window</u>, it shows all the files, folders, and drives on your computer.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To retrieve a deleted file from the hard disk, you use the <u>Recycle Bin</u> to recover it and return it to its original location.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The main part of a filename can have up to <u>255</u> characters.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The default folder view is <u>Large Icons</u> view.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The file path F:\FM\Tutorial\Holiday.bmp has <u>five</u> parts.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you right-click and drag a file you want to move to the destination folder, you then click <u>Transfer Here</u> on the resulting shortcut menu to move the file.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>caret</u> is used to separate the main part of a filename from the file extension.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: As you work with files, pay attention to <u>extensions</u>; they provide important information about the file, including its contents and purpose.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you create a(n) <u>extracted</u> folder, Windows displays a zipper on the folder icon.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: ____ is formalized education that typically takes place using a computer and the Internet.
- Distance learning
- Telecommuting
- Multitasking
- Network education
A: Distance learning

Q: A(n) ____ is a collection of data that has a name and is stored on a computer.
- file
- archive
- drive
- object
A: file

Q: A file is often referred to as a(n) ____.
- wizard
- document
- pane
- device
A: document

Q: You organize files by storing them in ____.
- archives
- folders
- indexes
- lists
A: folders

Q: ____ disks are permanently stored on a computer.
- Compact
- Zip
- Floppy
- Hard
A: Hard

Q: Each ____ in a computer contains folders that hold documents.
- pane
- group
- disk
- cluster
A: disk

Q: Which of the following is NOT a removable medium?
- CD
- USB drive
- DVD
- hard disk
A: hard disk

Q: The term “folder window” refers to any window that displays the contents of a folder, including the ____ windows.
- Computer
- Windows Explorer
- Recycle Bin
- All of the above
A: All of the above

Q: ____ disks are the most popular type of computer storage.
- Hard
- Compact
- Floppy
- Zip
A: Hard

Q: The top level of the file system is known as the ____.
- directory
- operating system
- root directory
- hierarchy
A: root directory

Q: ____ are considered removable media.
- USB flash drives
- CDs
- DVDs
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Your computer has a hard drive, a CD drive, and a USB drive. If you install a second USB drive, it will most likely be assigned the letter ____.
- A
- C
- D
- F
A: F

Q: Which of the following is likely to be the drive letter for a USB drive?
- A
- B
- C
- D
A: D

Q: A computer distinguishes one drive from another by assigning each a drive ____.
- score
- number
- rank
- letter
A: letter

Q: The hard disk is usually assigned to drive ____.
- A
- B
- C
- D
A: C

Q: Windows organizes files and folders in a ____ system.
- management
- folder
- document
- file
A: file

Q: One popular metaphor for visualizing a file system is an upside-down ____.
- tree
- cabinet
- desk
- index
A: tree

Q: The root directory is usually drive ____.
- A
- B
- C
- F
A: C

Q: An effectively organized computer contains a few folders in the ____ directory, and those folders contain other folders.
- base
- root
- home
- origin
A: root

Q: The ____ directory of the hard disk is for system files and folders only.
- document
- system
- top-level
- base
A: top-level

Q: If you are working on your own computer, you should store your files within the ____ folder.
- Computer
- Storage
- Files
- Documents
A: Documents

Q: ____ makes it easy to navigate from one location to another within the file hierarchy.
- Microsoft Internet Explorer
- Windows Explorer
- The Computer window
- Folders Manager
A: Windows Explorer

Q: ____ shows the drives on your computer, making it easy to perform system tasks, such as viewing system information.
- Microsoft Internet Explorer
- Windows Explorer
- The Computer window
- Folders Manager
A: The Computer window

Q: Windows Explorer and the Computer window, by default, each present a different ____ of your computer.
- backup
- exploration
- hierarchy
- view
A: view

Q: The Windows Explorer window is divided into two sections, called ____.
- panes
- groups
- sorts
- indexes
A: panes

Q: The left pane in the Windows Explorer window is sometimes called the ____.
- Computer index
- Navigation pane
- Folders group
- View index
A: Navigation pane

Q: A notation that indicates a file’s location on your computer is called a(n) ____.
- address
- drive
- file path
- root
A: file path

Q: The ____ pane in the Windows Explorer window lists the contents of the folders and other locations selected in the opposite section.
- right
- left
- top
- bottom
A: right

Q: The left pane in the Computer window is called the ____ pane.
- Computer
- Details
- View
- Navigation
A: Navigation

Q: If a folder contains subfolders, a(n) ____ icon appears to the left of the folder icon.
- collapse
- expand
- view
- display
A: expand

Q: Use the ____ button to return to the original folder, after you change folders.
- Return
- Restore
- Back
- Up
A: Back

Q: The ____ bar displays your current folder as a series of locations separated by arrows.
- Location
- View
- Display
- Address
A: Address

Q: The ____ box helps you find a file or folder stored in the current folder or its subfolders.
- Search
- Quick Launch
- Quick Links
- Locate
A: Search

Q: A(n) ____ displays similar types of files together, no matter where they are stored.
- folder
- library
- menu
- hierarchy
A: library

Q: When you start Windows Explorer, it displays the contents of the default ____.
- search expression
- drive
- libraries
- favorites
A: libraries

Q: The file ____ leads you through the Windows file system to your file.
- navigation
- path
- trail
- link
A: path

Q: Each part of a file path is separated by a ____.
- /
- |
- \
- _
A: \

Q: <img width="389" height="74" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the file path shown in the accompanying figure, ____ is the drive name.
- FM
- G:
- Tutorial
- png
A: G:

Q: <img width="389" height="74" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the file path shown in the accompanying figure, the top-level folder is ____.
- A:
- Tutorial
- FM
- Map
A: FM

Q: <img width="389" height="74" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the file path shown in the accompanying figure, png is the ____.
- extension
- filename
- root
- subfolder
A: extension

Q: <img width="389" height="74" align="bottom" alt="nar005-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar005-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the file path shown in the accompanying figure, Tutorial is a(n) ____.
- root folder
- extension
- filename
- subfolder
A: subfolder

Q: <img width="425" height="290" align="bottom" alt="nar006-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar006-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The accompanying figure shows files in the Tutorial folder in ____ view.
- Small Icons
- Large Icons
- Thumbnails
- Preview
A: Large Icons

Q: A folder name can have up to ____ characters.
- 56
- 124
- 255
- 256
A: 255

Q: Which of the following can be used in a folder name?
- :
- |
- ?
- %
A: %

Q: Which of the following cannot be used in a folder name?
- *
- &
- ^
- $
A: *

Q: To use keyboard shortcuts to move files, click the file you want to move, press ____ to cut the file, navigate to a new location, and then press Ctrl+V to paste the file.
- Ctrl+T
- Ctrl+X
- Ctrl+C
- Ctrl+P
A: Ctrl+X

Q: One way to copy a file is to use the file’s ____ menu.
- view
- navigation
- shortcut
- copy
A: shortcut

Q: To select files that are listed together in a window, click the first file in the list, hold down the ____ key, and then click the last file in the list.
- Ctrl
- Esc
- Alt
- Shift
A: Shift

Q: To select files that are not listed together, click one file, hold down the ____ key, and then click the other files.
- Ctrl
- Shift
- Esc
- Alt
A: Ctrl

Q: File extensions are usually ____ characters.
- 1 or 2
- 3 or more
- 5
- at least 6
A: 3 or more

Q: Which character separates the main part of a filename from the extension?
- comma
- ampersand
- period
- underscore
A: period

Q: The main part of a filename can have up to ____ characters.
- 56
- 124
- 255
- 256
A: 255

Q: Which of the following can be used in a filename?
- &
- <
- “
- *
A: &

Q: The extension ____ identifies a file as one created by Microsoft Office Word.
- docx
- wrd
- word
- wdx
A: docx

Q: The extension ____ identifies a file that could have been created in a program such as Paint.
- xlsx
- jpg
- docx
- none of the above
A: jpg

Q: You usually do not need to add ____ to your filenames because the program you used to create the file adds them automatically.
- parameters
- type codes
- extensions
- objects
A: extensions

Q: Although Windows 7 keeps track of ____, not all computers are set to display them.
- parameters
- type codes
- objects
- extensions
A: extensions

Q: You can change the name of a file using the ____ command on the file’s shortcut menu.
- Rename
- Change Name
- New Name
- Assign Name
A: Rename

Q: Hard disks can contain many ____ of data and are economical.
- terabytes
- gigabytes
- microbytes
- exabytes
A: gigabytes

Q: If you copy the most recent version of a file to a folder on a removable storage medium, you effectively have a(n) ____ of a file that you need.
- backup
- link
- pane
- index
A: backup

Q: <img width="413" height="292" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00013_res/File-Management_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> The item circled in the accompanying figure is the ____ directory.
- bottom-level
- base
- root
- origin
A: root

Q: If you store your files on ____, you can use a simpler organization than when you store your files on a hard disk.
- removable media
- a USB drive
- a rewritable CD
- any of the above
A: any of the above

Q: If you are working on your own computer, store your files within the ____ folder.
- root
- My Documents
- Private
- Personal
A: My Documents

Q: How many tools does Windows 7 provide for exploring the files and folders on your computer?
- 1
- 2
- 3
- 4
A: 2

Q: Using the ____ pane in Windows Explorer gives you access to a list of the folders you use often.
- Folders
- Location
- Orientation
- Navigation
A: Navigation

Q: Using the ____ button allows you to navigate to a location you have visited recently.
- Navigation
- Frequently Visited
- Recent Pages
- Location
A: Recent Pages

Q: To preview a file’s contents, you can select the file in a folder window, and then click the Show the preview pane button on the toolbar to open the _____ pane.
- Demo
- Document View
- Organize
- Preview
A: Preview

Q: When you ____ a file in a folder window, Windows starts the appropriate program and opens the file.
- hover over
- right-click
- click
- double-click
A: double-click

Q: When you ____ a file, you create an uncompressed copy of the file in a folder you specify
- batch
- extract
- expand
- zip
A: extract

Q: Another term for compressed folder is ____ folder.
- zipped
- zapped
- knotted
- extracted
A: zipped

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br></b><br><b>Case MYF 1</b><br>John has just been hired as a personal assistant to the owner of a national baseball team, Max Miller. Currently Max has one computer in which he keeps both his work and personal files. He’d like John to purchase a new computer and allocate one computer for work and the other for home and personal use.<br><br> Since John will be transferring personal files from the existing computer to a new one, he should make sure the new computer includes a ____.
- root directory
- drive for a removable media device
- hard disk
- file system
A: drive for a removable media device

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br></b><br><b>Case MYF 1</b><br>John has just been hired as a personal assistant to the owner of a national baseball team, Max Miller. Currently Max has one computer in which he keeps both his work and personal files. He’d like John to purchase a new computer and allocate one computer for work and the other for home and personal use.<br><br> John will be updating some of Max’s personal documents, such as his address labels, on his own laptop. John prefers to use his flash drive for transferring files. Therefore it would be helpful if Max’s home computer included a(n) ____.
- hard drive
- USB port
- CD-ROM
- DVD player
A: USB port

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br></b><br><b>Case MYF 1</b><br>John has just been hired as a personal assistant to the owner of a national baseball team, Max Miller. Currently Max has one computer in which he keeps both his work and personal files. He’d like John to purchase a new computer and allocate one computer for work and the other for home and personal use.<br><br> Max wants the following information on his “home and personal” computer: medical records, vacations, and tax information. Max wants to keep the tax information for his five family members separate. John creates ____.
- three folders, with five subfolders in just the tax information folder
- three folders, with five subfolders in each
- one folder with eight subfolders
- three folders for each family member
A: three folders, with five subfolders in just the tax information folder

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br></b><br><b>Case MYF 1</b><br>John has just been hired as a personal assistant to the owner of a national baseball team, Max Miller. Currently Max has one computer in which he keeps both his work and personal files. He’d like John to purchase a new computer and allocate one computer for work and the other for home and personal use.<br><br> John has finished transferring the personal files off of the original computer. He will now remove the personal files from the “work computer.” To efficiently remove the Vacations folder and all of its contents, John ____.
- opens the Vacations folder and deletes each file one at a time by right-clicking it, then clicking Delete
- opens the Vacations folder and deletes each file one at a time by right-clicking it, clicking Delete, and then clicking Yes
- right-clicks the Vacations folder, and then clicks Delete
- right-clicks the Vacations folder, clicks Delete, and then clicks Yes
A: right-clicks the Vacations folder, clicks Delete, and then clicks Yes

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br></b><br><b>Case MYF 1</b><br>John has just been hired as a personal assistant to the owner of a national baseball team, Max Miller. Currently Max has one computer in which he keeps both his work and personal files. He’d like John to purchase a new computer and allocate one computer for work and the other for home and personal use.<br><br> The Vacations folder is in the Recycle Bin. How can John retrieve a file that was originally in the Vacations folder from the work computer?
- He cannot retrieve files that have been moved to the Recycle Bin.
- Open the Recycle Bin and restore the Vacations folder.
- Right-click the Recycle Bin, then click Restore recently deleted files.
- Copy it back onto the hard drive from his flash drive.
A: Open the Recycle Bin and restore the Vacations folder.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case MYF 2<br></b>Polly is volunteering for a local theater company. She has signed up for help with marketing materials, including ticket design, posters, and letterhead. Her first assignment is to create a poster for the group’s performance of <i>The Nutcracker</i>. One requirement is that the poster must include a photograph of the New York City skyline, since the performance will take place in New York City.<br><br> Polly wants to work on the poster at home using her laptop but the skyline photo is very big--12 megabytes. In order to transfer the skyline photo to her home computer, she must first ____.
- extract it
- copy it to a flash drive, then compress it
- compress it
- partition it into two sections
A: compress it

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case MYF 2<br></b>Polly is volunteering for a local theater company. She has signed up for help with marketing materials, including ticket design, posters, and letterhead. Her first assignment is to create a poster for the group’s performance of <i>The Nutcracker</i>. One requirement is that the poster must include a photograph of the New York City skyline, since the performance will take place in New York City.<br><br> Polly forgets what she named the skyline photo now that she is at home on her laptop. She looks through her folders for one containing a(n) ____.
- .comp extension
- zipper icon
- vice icon
- padlock icon
A: zipper icon

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case MYF 2<br></b>Polly is volunteering for a local theater company. She has signed up for help with marketing materials, including ticket design, posters, and letterhead. Her first assignment is to create a poster for the group’s performance of <i>The Nutcracker</i>. One requirement is that the poster must include a photograph of the New York City skyline, since the performance will take place in New York City.<br><br> Polly transferred the theater company’s logo, named T-Group.eps, to her flash drive but deleted it by mistake. How can she retrieve this file from her flash drive?
- She can insert her flash drive back into the computer from which she copied the file, then restore it from the Recycle Bin.
- She can open the trash can icon on the flash drive and drag it back to her folder.
- She cannot retrieve the file once it has been deleted from the flash drive.
- She can optimize the flash drive, then click Restore from the File menu.
A: She cannot retrieve the file once it has been deleted from the flash drive.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case MYF 2<br></b>Polly is volunteering for a local theater company. She has signed up for help with marketing materials, including ticket design, posters, and letterhead. Her first assignment is to create a poster for the group’s performance of <i>The Nutcracker</i>. One requirement is that the poster must include a photograph of the New York City skyline, since the performance will take place in New York City.<br><br> Polly has located the compressed folder on her home computer. After she extracts the folder, she must select a(n) ____ for the folder contents.
- destination
- new name
- password
- extension
A: destination

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case MYF 2<br></b>Polly is volunteering for a local theater company. She has signed up for help with marketing materials, including ticket design, posters, and letterhead. Her first assignment is to create a poster for the group’s performance of <i>The Nutcracker</i>. One requirement is that the poster must include a photograph of the New York City skyline, since the performance will take place in New York City.<br><br> Polly is ready to get to work on the poster. But first she wants to create a folder hierarchy for her project; she expects she will have to do a lot of moving from one location to another within the file hierarchy. The best place to do this is in ____.
- Internet Explorer
- the Documents folder
- Windows Explorer
- the Address Bar
A: Windows Explorer

Q: A file is often referred to as a(n) ____________________.
A: document

Q: Folders contained within other folders are called ____________________.
A: subfolders

Q: A duplicate copy of important files you need is called a(n) ____________________.
A: backup

Q: Like Windows Explorer, the ____________________ window lets you view, organize, and access the drives, folders, and files on your computer.
A: Computer

Q: The ____________________ is a temporary storage area for files and information that you have copied or moved from one place and plan to use somewhere else.
A: Clipboard

Q: The file ____________________ is a notation that indicates a file’s location on your computer.
A: path

Q: The Computer window can display the full file ____________________ in its Address bar so you can keep track of your current location as you navigate.
A: path

Q: To create a folder in Windows Explorer, right-click a blank area in the folder window, point to ____________________ on the shortcut menu, and then click Folder.
A: New

Q: ____________________ a file removes it from its current location and places it in a new location you specify.
A: Moving

Q: ____________________ a file places it in two locations.
A: Copying

Q: Although it requires more steps, some users find moving files using the ____________________ and the Cut and Paste commands easier than dragging with the right mouse button.
A: Clipboard

Q: ____________________ provide important information about files, including their contents and purposes.
A: Filenames

Q: In a folder window, you delete a file by deleting its ____________________.
A: icon

Q: The ____________________ is an area on your hard disk that holds deleted files until you remove them permanently.
A: Recycle Bin

Q: A filename might display a(n) ____________________ that identifies the file’s type and indicates the program in which the file was created.
A: extension

Q: Storing files in a(n) ____________________ folder makes them take up less disk space.
A: compressed / zipped

Q: When you ____________________ a file from a compressed folder, you create an uncompressed copy of the file in a folder you specify.
A: extract

Q: If the ____________________ folder command does not appear on the Send to submenu of the shortcut menu, this means that a different compression program is probably installed on your computer.
A: Compressed (zipped)

Q: USB drives, DVDs, and CDs are examples of ____________________ media.
A: removable

Q: To extract files, right-click a compressed folder, then click ____________________ on the shortcut menu.
A: Extract All

Q: Discuss the sections into which folder windows are divided.
Feedback: Folder windows are divided into two sections, called panes. The left pane is the Navigation pane, which contains icons and links to locations you use often. The right pane lists the contents of your folders and other locations. If you select a folder in the Navigation pane, the contents of that folder appear in the right pane. To display the hierarchy of the folders and other locations on your computer, you select the Computer icon in the Navigation pane, and then select the icon for a drive, such as Local Disk (C:) or Removable Disk (G:). You can then open and explore folders on that drive.

Q: List and explain three guidelines for creating folders.
Feedback: * Keep folder names short and familiar: Long filenames can be cut off in a folder window, so use names that are short but clear. Choose names that will be meaningful later, such as project names or course numbers. * Develop standards for naming folders: Use a consistent naming scheme that is clear to you, such as one that uses a project name as the name of the main folder, and includes step numbers in each subfolder name, such as 01Plan, 02Approvals, 03Prelim, and so on. * Create subfolders to organize files: If a file listing in a window is so long that you must scroll the window, consider organizing those files into subfolders.

Q: List and explain three guidelines for naming files.
Feedback: * Use common names: Avoid cryptic names that might make sense now but could cause confusion later, such as nonstandard abbreviations or imprecise names. * Don’t change the file extension: When renaming a file, don’t change the file extension. If you do, Windows might not be able to find a program that can open it. * Find a comfortable balance between too short and too long: Use filenames that are long enough to be meaningful, but short enough to read easily on the screen.

Q: Microsoft Word is a computer program you use to create files known as documents.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Microsoft OneNote is a computer program you use to send, receive, and organize email.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Migration is the ability to share information between programs.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you start PowerPoint, a new, blank workbook opens.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: When you have two or more programs running, you can click the program buttons on the taskbar to switch from one program to another.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: There are three different sizing buttons that appear on the right side of a program window’s title bar.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In Word, you can zoom in up to 500 percent.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The Ribbon in each Office program has two tabs in common: Office and Home.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: If a button is a toggle, then one click will turn the button’s feature on and a second click will turn it back off.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To access options on the Ribbon using the keyboard, press the Ctrl or Tab key.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A task pane is a window that helps you navigate through a complex task or feature.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A branching tab is a Ribbon tab that contains commands related to the selected object so you can manipulate, edit, and format that object.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Right-clicking the mouse opens the Mini toolbar.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To prevent losing work, you should save your file(s) at least every 10 minutes.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The default file extension for a PowerPoint 2010 file is .ppt.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Opening a file transfers a copy of the file from the storage location to the computer’s memory and displays it on your screen.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: In Private View, you can see file contents, but you cannot edit, save, or print them until you enable editing.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: To use SkyDrive, you need a Windows Live ID.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can get Help in ScreenTips and from the Help window.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You use the Shutdown command to exit a program and close an open file in one step.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Access is often referred to as a(n) <u>relational database</u> program.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The <u>Return to Default sizing</u> button returns a program window to a predefined size.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: Each program has a variety of views, which you can easily change by using the view buttons on the <u>status bar</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To change which area of a workspace is visible in a program window, you can use the <u>zoom bars</u>.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The <u>Home tab</u> on the Ribbon contains the commands for the most frequently performed activities.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: To learn what a button on the Ribbon does, <u>right-click</u> it to read a ScreenTip.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>gallery</u> is a menu or grid that shows a visual representation of the options available for a button.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: A(n) <u>task pane</u> is a window from which you enter or choose settings for how you want to perform a task.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: A(n) <u>object</u> is anything that appears on your screen that can be selected and manipulated.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: You can right-click text to open up a(n) <u>shortcut menu</u> with a Mini toolbar.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Filenames can include a maximum of <u>128</u> characters.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: You can close a file by clicking Close in <u>Backstage view</u>.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: Your SkyDrive workspace comes with a Public and a(n) <u>Protected</u> folder.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: <u>Help.com</u> is a Web site maintained by Microsoft that provides access to the latest Office 2010 information and additional Help resources.
- True
- False
A: False

Q: The Help system has a(n) <u>Table of Contents</u> pane organized by subjects and topics.
- True
- False
A: True

Q: The files you create in Word are called ____.
- documents
- workbooks
- databases
- presentations
A: documents

Q: The files you create in Access are called ____.
- documents
- workbooks
- databases
- presentations
A: databases

Q: The files you create in ____ are called presentations.
- OneNote
- SkyDrive
- PowerPoint
- Publisher
A: PowerPoint

Q: Outlook is a computer program you use to ____.
- compose brochures
- generate a pie chart or bar chart
- create a collection of slides
- plan your schedule
A: plan your schedule

Q: One of the main advantages of Office is integration, the ability to ____.
- share information between programs
- upgrade and downgrade software for other users
- view Office files on SkyDrive or another Web site
- all of the above
A: share information between programs

Q: You can start any Office program from the Start menu on ____.
- any other Office program’s toolbar
- the taskbar
- the Web
- the Computer window
A: the taskbar

Q: When you point to a program button on the taskbar, a ____ is displayed.
- thumbnail of open files
- so-called “postage stamp” view
- disk usage monitor
- Start menu
A: thumbnail of open files

Q: When you have two or more programs running, you can click ____ on the taskbar to switch from one program to another.
- the Swap button
- the notification area
- the program buttons
- the Start menu
A: the program buttons

Q: ____ buttons appear on the right side of a program window’s title bar.
- Ribbon
- Zooming
- Sizing
- Orientation
A: Sizing

Q: The ____ button hides a window so that only its program button is visible on the taskbar.
- Restore down
- Minimize
- Close
- Exit
A: Minimize

Q: When clicked, the Maximize button ____.
- becomes the Restore down button
- hides the window
- returns the window to a predefined size
- increases the screen resolution to its maximum
A: becomes the Restore down button

Q: Excel has ____ set(s) of sizing buttons.
- one
- two
- three
- a variable number
A: two

Q: The content of a file ____ when you switch between different views.
- is compressed or expanded
- is also switched
- is unchanged
- is altered according to defined specifications
A: is unchanged

Q: Word has all of the following views EXCEPT ____.
- Standard
- Full Screen Reading
- Print Layout
- Draft
A: Standard

Q: In PowerPoint, the zoom percentage can range from ____ to ____.
- 10, 400
- 10, 500
- 2, 200
- 4, 400
A: 10, 400

Q: Depending on the program and zoom level, you might see ____.
- a vertical scroll bar
- a horizontal scroll bar
- a Web scroll bar
- both a and b
A: both a and b

Q: <img width="514" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, you would zoom in by clicking the button marked ____
- B
- C
- E
- none of the above
A: E

Q: <img width="514" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, box A represents ____.
- the zoom options
- the programs currently open
- the view buttons
- the location and formatting of the file’s contents
A: the view buttons

Q: <img width="514" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the item that can be dragged is marked by box ____.
- A
- B
- D
- all of the above
A: D

Q: <img width="514" height="253" align="bottom" alt="nar001-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar001-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, the number marked by box B represents ____.
- the zoom increment currently available
- the current disk space usage
- the amount of the file that is currently active or highlighted
- none of the above
A: none of the above

Q: The ____ tab on the Ribbon opens Backstage view.
- File
- Office
- Home
- Options
A: File

Q: The Insert, Review, and View tabs appears on the Ribbon in all Office programs EXCEPT ____.
- Outlook
- Access
- PowerPoint
- Excel
A: Access

Q: The Ribbon features the Datasheet Tools tab in ____.
- OneNote
- Outlook
- Access
- Excel
A: Access

Q: You find the Clipboard group on the ____ tab of the Ribbon.
- File
- Home
- Review
- Edit
A: Home

Q: If clicking a button once turns a feature on, and clicking a second time turns it back off, the button is said to be a(n) ____.
- switch
- list or list box
- toggle
- “if-else” button
A: toggle

Q: The buttons and groups on the Ribbon change based on ____.
- your monitor size
- your screen resolution
- the size of the program window
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: Pointing to a button on the Ribbon ____.
- is the same as clicking it
- is the same as right-clicking it
- displays a ScreenTip
- none of the above
A: displays a ScreenTip

Q: When the Show/Hide button is activated, the screen shows ____.
- nonprinting characters
- HTML code
- margins
- tables and grids
A: nonprinting characters

Q: A(n) ____ is a key or combination of keys you press to access a feature or perform a command.
- keyboard pairing
- alt key
- keyboard shortcut
- HotKey
A: keyboard shortcut

Q: A(n) ____ is a label that appears over each tab on the Ribbon when you press the ____ key.
- hotkey, Alt
- Key Tip, Alt
- ScreenTip, Ctrl
- shortcut, Ctrl
A: Key Tip, Alt

Q: You can use shortcuts to access options residing at all of the following locations EXCEPT ____.
- the Ribbon
- the Quick Access toolbar
- other Office programs
- Backstage view
A: other Office programs

Q: A ____ is a menu or grid that shows a visual representation of the options available for a button.
- gallery
- Live Preview
- ScreenTip
- matrix
A: gallery

Q: Live Preview shows you ____.
- a visual representation of the options available for a button
- the results that would occur in your file if you clicked a gallery option
- how your file will look when printed or published to the Web
- the Windows Live features currently available for download to your open program(s)
A: the results that would occur in your file if you clicked a gallery option

Q: You press the ____ key to close a gallery without making a selection.
- Alt
- F1
- Esc
- Spacebar
A: Esc

Q: A(n) ____ is a window that helps you navigate through a complex task or feature.
- wizard
- dialog box
- Ribbon tab
- task pane
A: task pane

Q: The Page Setup ____ in Word contains options to change how a document looks.
- Wizard
- dialog box
- Ribbon tab
- task pane
A: dialog box

Q: You can find the Dialog Box Launcher ____.
- on the right side of the title bar
- on the left or right side of the Ribbon
- if you right-click the Ribbon
- to the right of some group names
A: to the right of some group names

Q: <img width="381" height="272" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, Box ____ shows an example of an option button.
- B
- C
- F
- G
A: B

Q: <img width="381" height="272" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> In the figure above, you clicking the item marked by Box ____ would reveal a list of options that can be selected.
- F
- C
- E
- H
A: F

Q: <img width="381" height="272" align="bottom" alt="nar004-1.jpg" src="ppg/examview/9780538742917_BB9/00014_res/Getting-Started-Office2010_nar004-1.jpg" border="0"><br><br> Clicking the item marked by Box ____ in the figure above will open a new dialog box or window.
- A
- H
- G
- none of the above
A: G

Q: A(n) ____ is anything that appears on your screen that can be selected and manipulated.
- context
- object
- tool
- button
A: object

Q: All of the following are objects EXCEPT ____.
- a table
- an equation
- a shape
- all of the above are objects
A: all of the above are objects

Q: Contextual tabs ____ when you deselect an object.
- stay on the Ribbon
- remain attached to the object
- disappear
- move to the Clipboard
A: disappear

Q: All of the following are true of the Mini toolbar EXCEPT ____.
- It contains commands not found on the Ribbon
- It can be turned off in Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
- A transparent version appears immediately after you select text
- Its buttons differ in each program
A: It contains commands not found on the Ribbon

Q: A shortcut menu appears when you ____.
- triple-click the mouse
- click the right mouse button
- hover the mouse over an object
- raise the mouse off of its work surface
A: click the right mouse button

Q: When you perform the necessary action to open a shortcut menu, ____ also appears.
- the Start menu
- the Mini toolbar
- the desktop
- Backstage view
A: the Mini toolbar

Q: All of the four most common tasks you perform in any Office program can be done from ____.
- the Home tab
- the Mini toolbar
- Backstage view
- a shortcut menu
A: Backstage view

Q: When you start ____, the New tab in Backstage view opens.
- PowerPoint
- Word
- Excel
- Access
A: Access

Q: The text recommends you save your work at least ____.
- hourly
- every minute
- every 10 minutes
- none of the above; manual saving is not necessary
A: every 10 minutes

Q: To name the file you are saving and specify a location to save it, use the ____ command.
- Save As
- Revert
- Save
- Manual Save
A: Save As

Q: All of the following are illegal to use in filenames EXCEPT _______.
- :
- -
- ?
- >
A: -

Q: A ____ is added by Office to identify the program in which a file was created.
- filename
- title
- file extension
- filestamp
A: file extension

Q: The default storage location for Office files is the ____.
- Documents folder
- root drive
- Flash bin
- RAM or SDRAM
A: Documents folder

Q: A filename ending in “.docx” signifies a(n) ____ file.
- Access
- Word
- PowerPoint
- Excel
A: Word

Q: When you have saved a file, its name appears in the ____ as long as that file remains open.
- Ribbon
- title bar
- workspace
- none of the above
A: title bar

Q: In Backstage view, you will find the ____ along the left side of the screen.
- Ribbon
- Properties
- navigation bar
- file’s author and other related people
A: navigation bar

Q: All of the following are true about saving EXCEPT ____.
- After a file has been named and saved, you don’t need to keep using the Save As dialog box to save it
- You should save files before closing them
- If you close Office while a file is unsaved, a dialog box will open asking whether you want to save the file
- When using the Save As dialog box, you must always choose a file format in the Save as type box below the file name
A: When using the Save As dialog box, you must always choose a file format in the Save as type box below the file name

Q: You can keep ____ file(s) open at one time.
- only one
- one or two
- up to three
- more than three
A: more than three

Q: If you only have one file open, clicking the Close button in the upper-right corner of the title bar will ____.
- close the file and the program
- close the file but leave the program open
- have no effect
- close the program but leave the file in memory so it can be opened again quickly
A: close the file and the program

Q: To open a blank document or presentation, you ____.
- use the Launch command
- first open a template
- create a new file
- first copy another file, then delete its contents
A: create a new file

Q: Protected View prevents you from ____ a file’s contents.
- printing
- editing
- saving
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: If you have opened a file in Protected View, you can find the Enable Editing button on the ____.
- Information Bar
- Navigation Bar
- Ribbon
- title bar
A: Information Bar

Q: Windows Live ____ is an online workspace provided by Microsoft.
- Bing Docs
- SkyDrive
- Hotmail
- Outlook Online
A: SkyDrive

Q: ____ is an online workspace set up by an organization, such as a school, business, or nonprofit group.
- SkyDrive
- Open Access
- SharePoint
- Outlook Online
A: SharePoint

Q: Files saved to an online workspace are accessed and edited using ____.
- Office 2010 software on the user’s computer
- a Web browser
- OpenOffice software
- SMS text messaging
A: a Web browser

Q: A(n) ____ is a box with descriptive text about an object or button.
- Help file
- cheatsheet
- Infobubble
- ScreenTip
A: ScreenTip

Q: You can find Help topics by using ____.
- the search function
- a topic list
- Ask.com
- both a and b
A: both a and b

Q: ____ is a Web site maintained by Microsoft that provides access to the latest information and Help resources for Office 2010.
- Bing.com
- Ask.com
- Office.com
- Help.com
A: Office.com

Q: The Print tab in Backstage view lets you ____.
- adjust the number of copies to print
- preview how the page will appear
- verify the print and page layout settings before printing
- all of the above
A: all of the above

Q: You use the ____ command to exit a program and close an open file in one step.
- Exit
- Close
- Close All
- Minimize
A: Exit

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 1</b><br>Paul has taken over his father’s business of running a gas station. Paul’s father used spiral notebooks to record all customer-related information. Paul decides he cannot work using this method and purchases a new computer system for the gas station. He also purchases a copy of Microsoft Office Professional 2010 for all of his software needs.<br><br> Paul’s first goal is to record the names, addresses, phone numbers, and e-mail addresses of each customer. He wants this information in a program where he can take all of a customer’s information and create an invoice form. Paul chooses ____ for this job.
- Outlook
- Access
- Excel
- Word
A: Access

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 1</b><br>Paul has taken over his father’s business of running a gas station. Paul’s father used spiral notebooks to record all customer-related information. Paul decides he cannot work using this method and purchases a new computer system for the gas station. He also purchases a copy of Microsoft Office Professional 2010 for all of his software needs.<br><br> Another task that Paul wants to accomplish is to download images from the Registry of Vehicles Web site and incorporate them into posters about yearly automobile inspections. He uses ____ to create the posters because of its ability to insert images.
- Word
- PowerPoint
- Outlook
- either a or b would be correct
A: either a or b would be correct

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 1</b><br>Paul has taken over his father’s business of running a gas station. Paul’s father used spiral notebooks to record all customer-related information. Paul decides he cannot work using this method and purchases a new computer system for the gas station. He also purchases a copy of Microsoft Office Professional 2010 for all of his software needs.<br><br> After his posters are complete, Paul saves a copy for his cousin who also has a gas station in a neighboring state. Since his cousin is using an older version of Office, Paul ____.
- prints out the posters and mails them
- saves the posters as Word 97-2003 document
- posts them to a Web site so that his cousin can view them
- recreates them on another computer system using an older version of Office
A: saves the posters as Word 97-2003 document

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 1</b><br>Paul has taken over his father’s business of running a gas station. Paul’s father used spiral notebooks to record all customer-related information. Paul decides he cannot work using this method and purchases a new computer system for the gas station. He also purchases a copy of Microsoft Office Professional 2010 for all of his software needs.<br><br> Paul is drafting a letter to his customers offering new car-washing services. Each time he highlights “car wash” to change the font color, he is distracted by the ____.
- shortcut menu that appears and disappears
- Key Tips
- Mini toolbar that appears and disappears
- Font gallery
A: Mini toolbar that appears and disappears

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 1</b><br>Paul has taken over his father’s business of running a gas station. Paul’s father used spiral notebooks to record all customer-related information. Paul decides he cannot work using this method and purchases a new computer system for the gas station. He also purchases a copy of Microsoft Office Professional 2010 for all of his software needs.<br><br> Paul would like to keep exchanging files with his cousin from time to time. He wants to do this using SkyDrive, but when he tries, his cousin says that he can’t get to Paul’s files. What is the most likely reason?
- His cousin still doesn’t have Office 2010 on his computer.
- His cousin hasn’t signed up for a Windows Live ID.
- Paul has locked his Public folder by mistake.
- His cousin is using a wireless network connection.
A: His cousin hasn’t signed up for a Windows Live ID.

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 2<br></b>Mary works for a fast-food chain in the Human Resources department. Each month she creates an employee-of-the-month poster in Word and distributes it to each management team in her region. The manager of human resources recently decided that all posters, including the employee-of-the-month posters, must be created in PowerPoint because more offices in the region use PowerPoint than Word.<br><br> Mary is nervous about creating her next poster in PowerPoint. When she starts PowerPoint for the first time, she recognizes the ____ from Word.
- Design tab on the Ribbon
- Animations tab on the Ribbon
- Home tab on the Ribbon
- Datasheet tab on the Ribbon
A: Home tab on the Ribbon

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 2<br></b>Mary works for a fast-food chain in the Human Resources department. Each month she creates an employee-of-the-month poster in Word and distributes it to each management team in her region. The manager of human resources recently decided that all posters, including the employee-of-the-month posters, must be created in PowerPoint because more offices in the region use PowerPoint than Word.<br><br> Mary inserts a photograph of Bob Weber. Her boss, Charlie, tells her that he’s typed a short description of Bob’s accomplishments. He tells her he’ll print it out, and that she can tape it to her poster underneath Bob’s picture. Mary explains to Charlie that she can just transfer his text from Word into PowerPoint thanks to ____ technology.
- Internet
- integration
- USB flash drive
- e-mail
A: integration

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 2<br></b>Mary works for a fast-food chain in the Human Resources department. Each month she creates an employee-of-the-month poster in Word and distributes it to each management team in her region. The manager of human resources recently decided that all posters, including the employee-of-the-month posters, must be created in PowerPoint because more offices in the region use PowerPoint than Word.<br><br> Mary is becoming more comfortable in PowerPoint. She is experimenting with adding bullets to a list she is creating in PowerPoint, but she is wondering why bullets appear and disappear in her workspace before she selects one in the Bullet Library. Her friend Polly explains to her that the feature she is experiencing is ____.
- Live Preview
- Live Gallery
- Print Preview
- Bullet Preview
A: Live Preview

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 2<br></b>Mary works for a fast-food chain in the Human Resources department. Each month she creates an employee-of-the-month poster in Word and distributes it to each management team in her region. The manager of human resources recently decided that all posters, including the employee-of-the-month posters, must be created in PowerPoint because more offices in the region use PowerPoint than Word.<br><br> Mary frequently saves her work so that she doesn’t lose it. She wishes she had faster access to the Save command. Polly shows her how to use ____.
- Command Tips
- keyboard shortcuts
- Mini toolbar addon
- the Frequent Action shortcut
A: keyboard shortcuts

Q: <b>Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions<br><br>Case OFF 2<br></b>Mary works for a fast-food chain in the Human Resources department. Each month she creates an employee-of-the-month poster in Word and distributes it to each management team in her region. The manager of human resources recently decided that all posters, including the employee-of-the-month posters, must be created in PowerPoint because more offices in the region use PowerPoint than Word.<br><br> Mary saves a poster and names it Bob Weber. She takes it home to show her husband. On her home computer, her filename changes to Bob Weber.pptx. This completely confuses Mary, so at work the next day she changes the filename to Bob Weber.pptx using the Save As dialog box and deletes the original Bob Weber document. Out of curiosity, she takes the Bob Weber.pptx file home again and now the filename on her home computer is displayed as ____.
- Bob Weber.pptx
- Bob Weber.pptx-2
- Bob Weber.pptx.pptx
- Bob Weber
A: Bob Weber.pptx.pptx

Q: Microsoft Excel is often called a(n) ____________________ program.
A: spreadsheet

Q: A(n) ____________________ is a small picture of an open file, viewable when you point to a program button.
A: thumbnail

Q: Most often, you’ll want to ____________________ the program window and workspace to take advantage of the full screen size you have available.
A: maximize

Q: You can quickly switch between views using the ____________________ tab on the Ribbon.
A: View

Q: ____________________ view, opened from the Ribbon, provides access to file-level features, such as creating new files, opening existing files, saving files, printing files, and closing files.
A: Backstage

Q: Some buttons have two parts: a button that accesses a command, and a(n) ____________________ that opens a menu of all the commands or options available for that task.
A: arrow

Q: To access options on the Ribbon using the keyboard, press the ____________________ key.
A: Alt

Q: The ____________________, a button to the right of some group names on the Ribbon, opens a task pane or dialog box related to that group of tasks.
A: Dialog Box Launcher

Q: You select settings in a dialog box using option buttons, check boxes, ____________________, and lists to specify how you want to perform a task.
A: text boxes / textboxes

Q: ____________________ tabs appear to the right of the standard Ribbon tabs just below a title label.
A: Contextual

Q: All commands on the ____________________ toolbar are also available on the Ribbon.
A: Mini

Q: ____________________ enable you to quickly access commands that you’re most likely to need in the context of the task you’re performing without using the tabs on the Ribbon.
A: Shortcut menus

Q: When you start Word, Excel, or PowerPoint, the program opens along with ____________________ -- ready for you to begin working on a new document, workbook, or presentation.
A: a blank file

Q: A(n) ____________________ includes a title you specify and a file extension assigned by Office to indicate the file type.
A: filename

Q: You can find the Save button on the ____________________ toolbar.
A: Quick Access

Q: You find the Save As command in the ____________________ bar of Backstage view.
A: navigation

Q: Opening a file places the file in your computer’s ____________________ as well as on the drive where it is stored.
A: memory

Q: The ____________________ option on the Save & Send tab in Backstage view gives you access to Windows Live SkyDrive.
A: Save to Web

Q: In some cases, pressing the ____________________ key while a ScreenTip is displayed opens the Help window with the relevant topic displayed.
A: F1

Q: The ____________________ pane in the Help window displays the Help system organized by subjects and topics.
A: Table of Contents

Q: Describe in detail the concepts of zooming and scrolling.
Feedback: You can zoom in to get a closer look at the content of an open document, worksheet, slide, or database report. Likewise, you can zoom out to see more of the content at a smaller size. You can select a specific percentage or size based on your file. The zoom percentage can range from 10 percent to 400 percent (Excel and PowerPoint) or 500 percent (Word). Zooming can shift part of the workspace out of view. To change which area of the workspace is visible in the program window, you can use the scroll bars. A scroll bar has arrow buttons that you can click to shift the workspace a small amount in the specified direction and a scroll box that you can drag to shift the workspace a larger amount in the direction you drag. Depending on the program and zoom level, you might see a vertical scroll bar, a horizontal scroll bar, or both.

Q: In your career you will likely work on many different computers with different configurations. Describe how the screenshots for this chapter were set up, how buttons and groups appear on the Ribbon, and how and why they may change.
Feedback: The buttons and groups on the Ribbon change based on your monitor size, your screen resolution, and the size of the program window. With smaller monitors, lower screen resolutions, and reduced program windows, buttons can appear as icons without labels and a group can be condensed into a button that you click to display the group options. The figures in these tutorials were created using a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 and, unless otherwise specified, the program and workspace windows are maximized. If you are using a different screen resolution or window size, the buttons on the Ribbon might show more or fewer button names, and some groups might be reduced to a button.

Q: If you attempt to close a file before saving it, Office has an added safeguard. Please describe it here, including the three options it gives you.
Feedback: If you attempt to close a file without saving your changes, a dialog box opens, asking whether you want to save the file. Click the Save button to save the changes to the file before closing the file and program. Click the Don’t Save button to close the file and program without saving changes. Click the Cancel button to return to the program window without saving changes or closing the file and program. This feature helps to ensure that you always save the most current version of any file.